JP6782523B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine.

Conventionally, a game machine that outputs an audio signal amplified to a level corresponding to a volume set by a volume to a speaker has been proposed (for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2011-30651

By the way, since the game machine sends a notification sound from the speaker to notify the clerk of the hall of the occurrence of an abnormal state, when the volume is turned down and the volume is reduced, the notification sound is added to the volume of the production sound. There was a problem that the volume became low and it was difficult for the clerk in the hall to notice the occurrence of the abnormal state.

The present invention has been made in view of such circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to make it difficult for a hall clerk or the like to notice the occurrence of an abnormal state due to the notification sound even if the volume of the production sound is reduced. The purpose is to provide a game machine that can prevent this.

Effective solutions to achieve the above objectives are shown below. The action and the like will be explained as necessary. Further, for the sake of easy understanding, the corresponding configurations and the like in the embodiments of the invention are appropriately shown, but the present invention is not limited thereto.

(Solution 1)
The main control means that controls the progress of the game,
A sound output means for outputting a notification sound for notifying an abnormal state of the game machine and a production sound according to the progress of the game.
A sound control means that controls the sound output from the sound output means based on a command received from the main control means.
A first volume adjusting means capable of adjusting the volume output from the sound output means, and
A second volume adjusting means different from the first volume adjusting means, which can adjust the volume output from the sound output means,
In a game machine equipped with
Of the first volume adjusting means and the second volume adjusting means, the first volume adjusting means is an adjusting means that cannot be operated by the player.
The sound control means has a plurality of sound setting units, and has a plurality of sound setting units.
In the plurality of sound setting units, effect sound data whose volume can be changed according to the operation of the second volume adjusting means and notification sound data whose volume cannot be changed according to the operation of the second volume adjusting means. And are set individually,
A predetermined first volume value corresponding to the operation of the first volume adjusting means is set in the sound setting unit in which the effect sound data is set among the plurality of sound setting units.
A synthesis means for synthesizing sound data set in the plurality of sound setting units and a synthesis volume value setting means for setting a second volume value after being synthesized by the synthesis means are provided.
The first volume value in the sound setting unit can be updated according to the operation of the second volume adjusting means.
When the predetermined initialization condition is satisfied, the updated volume value of the sound setting unit is set as the first volume value corresponding to the operation of the first volume adjusting means.
Output from the sound output means based on the volume set by the synthetic volume value setting means
A game machine characterized by that.

In the game machine of the present invention, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk and the like from becoming less likely to notice the occurrence of the abnormal state due to the notification sound.

It is a perspective view which shows the state which opened the main body frame with respect to the outer frame of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on embodiment, and opened the door frame with respect to the main body frame. It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a top view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the rear of the outer frame, the main body frame, the game board, and the door frame which make up a pachinko game machine. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame, the main body frame, the game board, and the door frame which make up a pachinko game machine. It is a front perspective view of the outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame. It is a front view of the outer frame. It is a rear perspective view of the outer frame. It is a right side view of the outer frame. It is a perspective view for demonstrating the attachment / detachment structure of the upper shaft support metal fitting of the main body frame, and the upper support metal fitting of an outer frame. (A) is an exploded perspective view showing an attached state of a lock member provided on the back surface of the upper support metal fitting of the outer frame, and (B) is a perspective view of the figure of (A) viewed from below. It is a back view of the upper support metal fitting part for demonstrating the relationship between a shaft support pin and a lock member. It is a back view of the upper support metal fitting part for demonstrating the operation of the lock member. It is a front view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is a perspective view seen from the right rear of the door frame. It is an exploded perspective view of a door frame seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. (A) is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit and looked at from the back. (A) is a front perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame. It is an exploded perspective view of the right side decoration unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the right side decoration unit disassembled and viewed later. (A) is a front perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame. It is an exploded perspective view of the left side decoration unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the left side decoration unit disassembled and viewed later. It is a front perspective view of the upper decorative unit in a door frame. It is a rear perspective view of the upper decorative unit in a door frame. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the upper decoration unit and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which looked at after disassembling the upper decoration unit. It is a front perspective view of the dish unit in a door frame. It is a rear perspective view of the dish unit in a door frame. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the dish unit and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the dish unit and looked at afterwards. It is a front perspective view of the operation unit in a door frame. It is a rear perspective view of the operation unit in a door frame. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the operation unit and looked at from the upper right front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the operation unit and looked at from the lower right front. It is sectional drawing of the operation unit. It is sectional drawing which shows the pressing operation part in the operation unit in a pressed state. It is an exploded perspective view after disassembling the handle device in the door frame. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the foul cover unit in the door frame and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the foul cover unit in the door frame and looked at afterwards. It is a front view which shows with the front cover of a foul cover unit removed. (A) is a front perspective view of the ball feed unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the ball feed unit in the door frame. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feed unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and (B) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feed unit removed from the rear case and viewed from the rear. It is a front view which shows the arrangement of LED for light-emitting decoration in a door frame. It is a front view which shows the system of LED for light emitting decoration in a door frame. It is a front view of the main body frame. It is a rear view of the main body frame. It is a front perspective view of the main body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the main body frame. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the main body frame and looked at from the front. It is a perspective view which disassembled the main body frame and looked at afterwards. It is a front perspective view of the main body frame base in the main body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the main body frame base in the main body frame. It is a front perspective view of the hitting ball launching device in the main body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the hitting ball launching device in the main body frame. It is a front perspective view of the prize ball unit in the main body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the prize ball unit in the main body frame. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the prize ball unit and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the prize ball unit and looked at later. It is an exploded perspective view which shows from the rear by disassembling the relationship between a prize ball tank and a tank rail unit in a prize ball unit. It is an exploded perspective view which looked at after disassembling the prize ball device in a prize ball unit. It is a rear view which shows the relationship between the payout passage, the payout motor, and the payout rotating body in a prize ball device. It is sectional drawing which shows the circulation passage of a ball in a prize ball unit. It is a front perspective view of the ball outlet opening / closing unit in the main body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the ball outlet opening / closing unit in the main body frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the ball outlet opening / closing unit in a main body frame, and the foul cover unit in a door frame. It is a front perspective view of the substrate unit in the main body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the substrate unit in the main body frame. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the substrate unit and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the substrate unit and looked at afterwards. (A) is a front view of the firing power supply board box, and (B) is a cross-sectional view of the line AA shown in (A). (A) is a front perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame. (A) is a left side view of the lock device in the main body frame, and (B) is a perspective view of the lock device in the main body frame as viewed from the front. (A) is a rear perspective view of the lock device, and (B) is a rear perspective view showing a sliding rod for a glass door and a sliding rod for a main body frame slidably provided inside the U-shaped base of the lock device. It is a figure, (C) is a front perspective view of (B). It is an exploded perspective view after disassembling the lock device. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation of the sliding rod for a glass door and the sliding rod for a main body frame in a locking device. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation of the fraud prevention member in a lock device. It is a front view which shows the game board attached to the main body frame with the door frame of a pachinko game machine removed. It is a front view of a game board. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the game board and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the game board and looked at later. It is a front view which shows the function display unit in the game board enlarged in the state which attached to the pachinko game machine. FIG. 5 is an exploded perspective view of a game board using a game panel of an embodiment different from the example of FIG. 89, which is viewed from the front by disassembling. FIG. 92 is an exploded perspective view of the game board as viewed from the rear. It is sectional drawing which cut the game panel in the game board of FIG. 92 in the vertical direction. It is a detailed front view of the game board. It is an exploded perspective view of the game board of FIG. 95 disassembled and viewed from the front. It is a block diagram of a main control board, a payout control board, and a peripheral control board. It is a block diagram which shows the continuation of FIG. 97. It is a schematic diagram of various detection signals input / output to a game ball rental device connection terminal board which relays an electrical connection between a payout control board which constitutes a main board, a CR unit, and a frequency display board. It is a block diagram which shows the continuation of FIG. 97. It is a block diagram which shows the outline of the peripheral control MPU. It is a block diagram which shows the power-source system of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the continuation of FIG. 102. It is a circuit diagram which shows the circuit of a main control board. It is a circuit diagram which shows the communication interface circuit between the main control board and the peripheral control board. It is a circuit diagram which shows the power failure monitoring circuit. It is a circuit diagram which shows the circuit of the payout control unit and the like. It is a circuit diagram which shows the payout control input circuit. It is a circuit diagram which shows the CR unit input / output circuit. It is a circuit diagram which shows the launch control input circuit. It is an input / output diagram which shows various input / output signals with a main control board, and various output signals to an external terminal board. It is a block diagram which shows the drive circuit of a firing solenoid. It is a circuit diagram which shows the shunt regulator circuit, the amplifier circuit, and the operational amplifier circuit group. It is a figure which shows the characteristic of a DC / DC converter. It is a timing chart of a predetermined point in the drive circuit of the firing solenoid of FIG. 112. It is a schematic circuit diagram which shows the circuit of the frame decoration drive amplifier board. This is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board. This is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board. It is a table which shows the continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board of FIG. 118 to the peripheral control board. It is a table which shows an example of various commands from a payout control board received by a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-on of the main control side. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the process at the time of power-on of the main control side of FIG. 121. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interrupt processing on the main control side. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-on of a payout control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the process at the time of power-on of the payout control unit of FIG. 124. It is the flowchart which shows the continuation of the process at the time of power-on of the payout control unit following FIG. 125. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the payout control part timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the ball removal switch operation determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the rotation angle switch history creation processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the sprocket fixed position determination skip process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the ball squeeze determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the prize ball stock number addition processing for prize balls. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the prize ball stock number addition processing for a ball rental. It is a flowchart which shows an example of stock monitoring processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the payout ball removal determination setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of payout setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the ball removal setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the sphere movement setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a retry operation monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the inconsistency counter reset determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the error release switch operation determination processing. It is a timing chart which shows the signal processing (a) at the time of payout operation by ball lending, and the input signal confirmation processing (b) from a CR unit. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-on of a peripheral control unit. It is a flowchart which shows an example of peripheral control part V blank interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the peripheral control part 1ms timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the peripheral control part command reception interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the peripheral control part power failure advance notice signal interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the rotation detection switch history creation processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the positional relationship between the rotation detection piece of the driven gear and a pair of rotation detection switches accompanying the clockwise rotation of a dial operation part in a rotation operation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the positional relationship between the rotation detection piece of the driven gear and a pair of rotation detection switches accompanying the counterclockwise rotation of a dial operation part in a rotation operation unit. (A) is a list showing ON / OFF of a pair of rotation detection switches accompanying the clockwise rotation of the dial operation unit in the rotation operation unit, and (B) is a list showing the ON / OFF of the pair of rotation detection switches accompanying the rotation of the dial operation unit in the counterclockwise direction. It is a list diagram which shows ON / OFF of a pair of rotation detection switches. It is explanatory drawing (the range closer to the maximum value side) which shows the operation of the initial value update type counter. It is explanatory drawing (the range closer to the minimum value side) which shows the operation of the initial value update type counter. It is a figure which shows an example when the big hit game state occurs. It is a figure which shows an example of the continuation when the big hit game state of FIG. 154 occurs.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the entire pachinko gaming machine according to the embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 7. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing a state in which the main body frame is opened with respect to the outer frame of the pachinko gaming machine according to the embodiment and the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine, and FIG. 3 is a right side view of the pachinko gaming machine. Further, FIG. 4 is a plan view of the pachinko gaming machine, and FIG. 5 is a rear view of the pachinko gaming machine. Further, FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame, the main body frame, the game board, and the door frame constituting the pachinko gaming machine, and FIG. 7 is an outer frame, the main body frame, and the pachinko gaming machine. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of a game board and a door frame.

In FIGS. 1 to 7, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is pivotally supported by an outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall and an outer frame 2 so that the front side is opened. A game board 4 having a box-shaped main body frame 3 and a game area 1100 mounted and fixed to the main body frame 3 from the front side and into which a game ball as a game medium is driven, and a game board 3 and the front surface of the game board 4 It is provided with a door frame 5 that is pivotally supported with respect to the main body frame 3 so as to be closed from the person side. In the door frame 5 of the pachinko game machine 1, a game window 101 formed so that the game area 1100 of the game board 4 can be seen from the player side, and a game ball arranged below the game window 101 are stored. It is provided with a dish-shaped upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302, and a handle device 500 operated by a player to drive a game ball stored in the upper plate 301 into the game area 1100 of the game board 4.

As shown in the figure, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has an outer frame 2, a main body frame 3, and a door frame 5 formed in a vertically long rectangular shape extending in the vertical direction, respectively, and has a horizontal width in each of the left and right directions. Are substantially the same dimensions, and the vertical width dimension in the vertical direction is formed so that the dimensions of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are slightly shorter than those of the outer frame 2. A decorative cover 23 is attached to the front surface of the outer frame 2 at a position below the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5, and the front surface of the outer frame 2 is completely closed by the door frame 5 and the decorative cover 23. It has become so. Further, the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3, and the door frame 5 are arranged so that the upper ends are substantially aligned with each other, and the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 can be rotated at a position on the front side of the left end of the outer frame 2. It is supported, and the right end of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 moves to the front side with respect to the outer frame 2 to open the door frame 2.

In the front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, a gaming area 1100 in which a gaming ball is driven through a substantially circular gaming window 101 is desired, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 projects forward to the lower side of the gaming window 101. Two upper plates 301 and lower plates 302 are arranged one above the other. Further, a handle device 500 for the player to operate is arranged in the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 5, and the player operates the handle device 500 in a state where the game balls are stored in the upper plate 301. When the rotation operation is performed, the game ball in the upper plate 301 is driven into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 with the hitting strength corresponding to the rotation angle, and the game can be played.

Although the details will be described later, the game window 101 of the door frame 5 is closed by the transparent glass unit 590, and the player can visually recognize the inside of the game area 1100, but the player can see the inside of the game area 1100. It is not possible to touch the game ball, the obstacle nail, various winning openings, the accessory, etc. in the game area 1100 by inserting a hand or the like into the game area. Further, on the rear side of the main body frame 3, various control boards are provided, and a bar body 1250 is provided or closed so as to cover the rear side of the game board 4.

[2. Outer frame]
The outer frame 2 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 8 to 16. FIG. 8 is a front perspective view of the outer frame, FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame, and FIG. 10 is a front view of the outer frame. 11 is a rear perspective view of the outer frame, and FIG. 12 is a right side view of the outer frame. Further, FIG. 13 is a perspective view for explaining a detachable structure of the upper shaft support metal fitting of the main body frame and the upper support metal fitting of the outer frame. 14 (A) is an exploded perspective view showing an attached state of a lock member provided on the back surface of the upper support metal fitting of the outer frame, and (B) is a perspective view of the figure of (A) viewed from below. .. FIG. 15 is a back view of the upper support metal fitting portion for explaining the relationship between the shaft support pin and the lock member. Further, FIG. 16 is a back view of the upper support metal fitting portion for explaining the operation of the lock member.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the outer frame 2 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes upper and lower upper frame plates 10 and lower frame plates 11 extending in the horizontal direction, and left and right extending in the vertical (vertical) direction. The side frame plates 12 and 13 and four connecting members 14 for connecting the ends of the respective frame plates 10, 11, 12 and 13 are provided, and the connecting members 14 include the frame plates 10, 11 and 12, respectively. By connecting 13 to each other, they are assembled into a vertically long rectangular shape (square shape). The upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 in the outer frame 2 are formed of a solid material having a predetermined thickness (for example, wood, plywood, etc.), and penetrate vertically at substantially the center of both left and right ends in the front-rear direction. An engaging notch 15 recessed toward the center in the left-right direction is provided. A mounting step portion 10a recessed from other general surfaces is formed on the upper surface and the front surface of the left end portion of the upper frame plate 10, and the upper support metal fitting 20 described later is attached to the mounting step portion 10a. It has become like.

On the other hand, the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of a lightweight metal mold material (for example, an aluminum alloy) having a constant cross-sectional shape, the outer side surface is a substantially flat surface, and the inner side surface projects inward to the rear end portion. A protruding portion 16 having a cavity penetrating in the vertical direction (extrusion direction) is provided, and the strength and rigidity are enhanced. A plurality of grooves extending in the vertical direction are formed on the outer side surface and the inner side surface of the side frame plates 12 and 13, and work is performed when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed in the pachinko island facility of the gaming hall. The pachinko gaming machine 1 can be easily held by a person's finger, and the design of the appearance can be enhanced. For convenience, there is also a drawing in which a plurality of grooves formed on the side surfaces of the side frame plates 12 and 13 are omitted.

The connecting member 14 in the outer frame 2 is formed by bending and plastically deforming a metal plate having a predetermined thickness by press molding or the like, and is fixed to the upper frame plate 10 or the lower frame plate 11 and extends in the left-right direction. A plate-shaped horizontal piece 17, a plate-shaped vertical piece 18 extending vertically from the outer end of the horizontal piece 17 to one side in the vertical direction and fixed to the side frame plates 12 and 13, and extending in the direction opposite to the vertical piece 18. It has a plate-shaped engaging piece 19 that can be inserted and engaged in the engaging notch 15 of the upper frame plate 10 or the lower frame plate 11. In the present embodiment, the connecting member 14 that connects the upper frame plate 10 and the left side frame plate 12 and the connecting member 14 that connects the upper frame plate 10 and the right side frame plate 13 are left and right, respectively. It is formed in an asymmetrical shape, and the vertical piece 18 is formed separately in the front and rear. On the other hand, the connecting member 14 that connects the lower frame plate 11 and the left side frame plate 12 and the connecting member 14 that connects the lower frame plate 11 and the right side frame plate 13 are formed in symmetrical shapes. Has been done.

In the connecting member 14, the upper surface and the lower surface of the horizontal piece 17 are in contact with the lower surface and the upper surface of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, and the engaging piece 19 is an engaging notch of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11. The upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame are screwed into the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 by penetrating the horizontal piece 17 and the engaging piece 19 and screwing a predetermined screw into the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 in a state of being inserted and engaged in the portion 15. It is fixed to the plate 11. Further, the connecting member 14 fixed to the upper frame plate 10 penetrates the side frame plates 12 and 13 with a predetermined screw in a state where the vertical piece 18 is in contact with the upper end inner side surface of the side frame plates 12 and 13. Is screwed into the vertical piece 18, so that the upper frame plate 10 and the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be connected to each other. The vertical piece 18 on the rear side of the connecting member 14 fixed to the upper frame plate 10 is fixed to the side frame plates 12 and 13 in a state of being inserted into the protruding portions 16 of the side frame plates 12 and 13. It has become like. Further, the connecting member 14 fixed to the lower frame plate 11 penetrates the side frame plates 12 and 13 with a predetermined screw in a state where the vertical piece 18 is in contact with the lower end inner side surface of the side frame plates 12 and 13. Is screwed into the vertical piece 18, so that the lower frame plate 11 and the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be connected, and the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are connected by the four connecting members 14. , And the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be assembled in a frame shape.

The outer frame 2 is arranged so as to face the upper support metal fitting 20 fixed to the upper surface of the left end of the upper frame plate 10 and the upper support metal fitting 20, and is fixed to a predetermined position inside the lower part of the left side frame plate 12. A support metal fitting 21, a reinforcing metal fitting 22 arranged to support the lower surface of the lower support metal fitting 21 and fixed so as to connect the left and right side frame plates 12, 13 and a decorative cover fixed to the front surface of the reinforcing metal fitting 22. 23 and. The upper support metal fitting 20 and the lower support metal fitting 21 are for pivotally supporting the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 so as to be openable and closable.

First, the upper support metal fitting 20 includes a plate-shaped fixing piece 20a fixed to the upper frame plate 10, a support projecting piece 20b protruding forward from the front end of the fixing piece 20a to the front end of the upper frame plate 10, and a support protrusion. A support hook hole 20c formed by being cut out so as to bend from the right end near the front end of the piece 20b toward the center of the tip, and a side frame on the left side that hangs downward from the left end of the fixing piece 20a and the support projecting piece 20b. A plate-shaped hanging fixing piece 20d (see FIG. 14A) that abuts on the outer side surface of the plate 12, and a hanging wall 20e that hangs along the outer edge of the supporting protruding piece 20b that is continuous with the hanging fixing piece 20d (FIG. 14 (A)). 14) and a stop hanging portion 20f (see FIG. 15) that is continuous with the hanging wall 20e and is inclined inward at the inlet end of the support hook hole 20c. The shaft support pin 633 (see FIG. 57) of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 in the main body frame 3 described later is detachably engaged with the support hook hole 20c in the upper support metal fitting 20. Further, the upper support metal fitting 20 is configured to be able to connect the upper frame plate 10 and the left side frame plate 12 by the fixing piece 20a and the hanging fixing piece 20d.

In the upper support metal fitting 20, the strength of the support protrusion 20b is increased by the hanging wall 20e hanging from the outer edge of the support protrusion 20b, and the details will be described later, but when viewed from the front, the support protrusion 20b The lock member 27 arranged on the back surface of the above can be concealed so that it cannot be seen from the player side, and the appearance of the lock member 27 can be improved. Further, the support hook hole 20c formed in the support projecting piece 20b is bent in a dogleg shape so as to be inclined from the side on the opposite side (right side) where the hanging wall 20e is not formed toward the center of the tip. In addition, the width dimension of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the shaft support pin 633.

On the other hand, the lower support metal fitting 21 is a horizontal fixing piece 21a that is placed and fixed on the reinforcing metal fitting 22, and a vertical fixing piece that rises upward from the left end of the horizontal fixing piece 21a and is fixed to the inner side surface of the left side frame plate 12. 21b, a plate-shaped support projecting piece 21c projecting forward from the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 from the front end of the horizontal fixing piece 21a, and a pin-shaped projecting upward from the vicinity of the front end of the support projecting piece 21c. The support projection 21d of the above is provided. The main body frame shaft support formed on the main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 (see FIG. 59 and the like) of the main body frame 3 described later is inserted into the support protrusion 21d of the lower support metal fitting 21. After inserting the support protrusion 21d of the support metal fitting 21 into the support hole of the main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 in the main body frame 3, the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 of the main body frame 3 is locked in the support hook hole 20c. As a result, the main body frame 3 can be easily opened and closed.

Further, as shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 has two closing plates 24 and 25 mounted and fixed inside the right side frame plate 13 so as to be separated from each other by a predetermined distance in the vertical direction. These closing plates 24 and 25 are formed in a substantially L shape in a plan view, and the closing plate 25 arranged on the lower side has a rectangular opening 25a penetrating in the front-rear direction (FIG. 9). The closing plates 24, 25 and the hook portions 1054, 1065 (see FIG. 82) of the lock device 1000, which are attached along the open side of the main body frame 3 when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. The hook portion 1054, 1065 and the closing plates 24, 25 are disengaged by inserting the key into the cylinder lock 1010 of the locking device 1000 and rotating it in one direction, which will be described in detail later. The main body frame 3 can be opened with respect to the outer frame 2.

Further, the outer frame 2 further includes a guide plate 26 fixed to the upper surface of the right end of the reinforcing metal fitting 22. The guide plate 26 is for smoothly guiding the main body frame 3 when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, and is replaceably mounted and fixed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 14 and the like, the outer frame 2 further includes a lock member 27 supported on the back surface of the support projecting piece 20b in the upper support metal fitting 20, and is rotated with respect to the support projecting piece 20b by the rivet 28. It is movably supported. The lock member 27 is made of synthetic resin and is shorter than the stopper portion 27a that protrudes forward from the position pivotally supported by the rivet 28 and the stopper portion 27a to the right from the position that is pivotally supported by the rivet 28. The operating portion 27b that protrudes, the elastic piece 27c that protrudes from the side opposite to the position pivotally supported by the rivet 28 with respect to the operating portion 27b, and the tip of the stopper portion 27a are formed so as to bulge forward. It is provided with an arc-shaped tip surface 27d. As shown in the figure, the lock member 27 is formed in a substantially L shape by the stopper portion 27a and the operation portion 27b. Further, the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 is formed to have a width narrower than that of the stopper portion 27a and the operation portion 27b, and is formed so as to extend forward as the distance from the stopper portion 27a increases to the left.

As shown in FIGS. 14B and 15, when the lock member 27 is supported by the support protruding piece 20b of the upper support metal fitting 20 (normal state), the tip contact portion of the elastic piece 27c is a hanging wall. It is in contact with the inner surface of the 20e, and the stopper portion 27a closes the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c, and the tip portion of the stopper portion 27a is the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c. The head space portion of the above is not closed, and a space is formed in the head space portion of the support hook hole 20c into which the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 of the main body frame 3 can be inserted. ..

In the support mechanism of the shaft support pin 633 using the upper support metal fitting 20 and the lock member 27, the shaft support pin 633 is inserted into the tip space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c, and the stopper portion 27a is lateral to the tip end. Is facing the stop hanging portion 20f at the entrance end (in this state, there is a slight gap between the tip side of the stopper portion 27a and the stop hanging portion 20f and the contact is not made). In a certain normal shaft support state, the centers of the shaft support pin 633 located in the tip space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c formed by bending and the tip surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a are oblique. It is in a state of facing each other with a deviation in the direction. Then, in this normal shaft support state, the shaft support pin 633 that supports the heavy main body frame 3 is in contact with the tip end portion of the support hook hole 20c, so that the shaft support pin 633 is in contact with the tip portion. Since the load on the tip surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a is hardly applied, the load is not applied to the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27. Since the tip of the stopper portion 27a is provided with an arcuate tip surface 27d, the lock member 27 rotates smoothly when the operation portion 27b is rotated to rotate the lock member 27. It has become. Further, in the figure, the arc center of the tip surface 27d is the center of the rivet 28 (the center of rotation of the lock member 27).

Therefore, when the acting force F is applied in the direction in which the shaft support pin 633 comes out along the inclination of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c and comes into contact with the arcuate tip surface 27d, the acting force F is applied to the shaft support. The component force F1 (in the normal direction of the arc of the tip surface 27d) acting on the contact portion between the pin 633 and the arc-shaped tip surface 27d, and one side of the inclined hole portion of the shaft support pin 633 and the support hook hole 20c. When the component force F2 acting on the contact portion with the inner surface is divided, the direction of the component force F1 faces the center of the rivet 28 (the center of rotation of the lock member 27), so that the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 The moment for rotating the tip portion in the direction away from the support protrusion piece 20b (clockwise in the figure) does not work, and the shaft support pin 633 is attached to the tip portion of the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 and the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c. Holds the state of being sandwiched between the inner surface on one side. Therefore, even in the normal shaft support state or in the state where the acting force of the shaft support pin 633 is applied to the lock member 27, the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 is not constantly loaded, and the elasticity is integrally formed of the synthetic resin. It is possible to prevent plastic deformation due to creep of the piece 27c, and prevent the shaft support pin 633 from falling out of the support hook hole 20c for a long period of time. Even if an unreasonable force is applied to rotate the tip of the stopper 27a of the lock member 27 in a direction away from the support protrusion 20b (clockwise in the figure), one side of the tip of the stopper 27a Does not rotate in the direction of contacting the stop hanging portion 20f and further disengaging, so that the lock member 27 does not protrude to the outside of the support projecting piece 20b.

Even if the shape of the tip surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a is not arcuate, the tip portion of the lock member 27 faces the outside of the support protrusion piece 20b at a position where a rotational moment is not generated by the action of the component force F1 described above. By locating the rotation center of the lock member 27 (the shaft fixed by the rivet 28) at a position where a rotational moment is generated, no load is always applied to the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27, and the lock member 27 is locked. The applicant applies that the lock member 27 does not protrude to the outside of the support projecting piece 20b because the one side of the tip of the stopper portion 27a only abuts on the stop hanging portion 20f even if the member 27 rotates. I'm checking.

The operation of the lock member 27 will be specifically described with reference to FIG. As a premise that the main body frame 3 is pivotally supported on the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, a lower support bracket is provided in a main body frame shaft support hole (not shown) formed in the main body frame shaft support bracket 644 (see FIG. 57) of the main body frame 3. It is necessary that the support protrusion 21d of 21 is inserted. Under such a premise, as shown in FIG. 16A, the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support bracket 630 of the main body frame 3 is brought into contact with the side surface of the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 and pushed into the drawing. As shown in 16 (B), since the lock member 27 rotates the elastic piece 27c counterclockwise while deforming it, the shaft support pin 633 can be inserted into the support hook hole 20c. Then, when the shaft support pin 633 reaches the leading space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c, as shown in FIG. 16C, the shaft support pin 633 and the tip side surface of the stopper portion 27a do not come into contact with each other. Therefore, the lock member 27 is urged by the elastic force of the elastic piece 27c to rotate clockwise, and the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 returns to the normal state again to close the inlet portion of the support hook hole 20c at the same time. The tip portion of the stopper portion 27a faces the shaft support pin 633 so that the shaft support pin 633 does not fall out of the support hook hole 20c.

Then, as shown in FIG. 16D, this state is maintained even when the main body frame 3 is completely closed or during the normal opening / closing operation of the main body frame 3. Next, in order to remove the shaft support pin 633 from the support hook hole 20c, as shown in FIG. 16E, a finger is inserted into the back surface of the support protrusion piece 20b, and the operation portion 27b of the lock member 27 is turned counterclockwise. By rotating, the lock member 27 rotates against the elastic force of the elastic piece 27c, and the tip portion of the stopper portion 27a is in a state of being retracted from the support hook hole 20c. Therefore, the shaft support pin 633 is supported by the support hook. It can be taken out from the hole 20c. After that, the main body frame 3 is lifted to disengage the main body frame shaft support hole formed in the main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 from the support protrusion 21d of the lower support metal fitting 21, so that the main body frame 3 is attached to the outer frame 2 It can be removed from.

As described above, in the outer frame 2, the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 constituting the outer shell of the outer frame 2 are made of wood as in the conventional case, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of lightweight metal (for example, aluminum). Since it is an extruded material of (alloy), when installing the pachinko game machine 1 in the pachinko island equipment lined up in the game hall, it is necessary to perform the work of fixing it at a predetermined angle to the vertical surface of the island. However, since such work is performed by driving nails to the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 and the island, it is possible to easily drive the nails, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be installed on the existing pachinko island equipment without any problem. It can be installed. Further, since the side frame plates 12 and 13 are extruded materials of lightweight metal (for example, aluminum alloy), it is possible to form a thin wall thickness while maintaining the strength as compared with the conventional wooden outer frame. The left and right width when viewed from the front of the peripheral wall portion 605 (see FIG. 57 and the like) of the main body frame 3 adjacent to the inside of the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be widened, and the game board 4 having a large size in the left and right direction. Can be mounted on the main body frame 3, and at the same time, the game area 1100 of the game board 4 can be formed large.

Further, the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 constituting the outer shell of the outer frame 2 are connected by the connecting member 14, and the connecting member 14 is the side frame plate 12 and 13. Since it is fixed in close contact with the inner surface and is fixed in a state where the connecting member 14, the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are engaged with each other, the assembling strength of the outer frame 2 can be increased and it is sturdy. It can be used as a rectangular framework. Further, when the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 are connected by the connecting member 14, and then the upper support metal fitting 20 is attached to a predetermined position, as shown in FIG. Since there is no member protruding outward from the outer surface (outer peripheral surface) of the frame plates 10, 11, 12, and 13, when the pachinko game machine 1 is installed in the pachinko island facility of a game hall (not shown), an adjacent device ( For example, it can be attached in close contact with an adjacent ball rental machine or CR unit).

[3. Overall configuration of door frame]
Next, the door frame 5 provided on the front surface side of the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 23. 17 is a front view of the door frame, FIG. 18 is a rear view of the door frame, and FIG. 19 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the front right. Further, FIG. 20 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the left front, and FIG. 21 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the right rear. Further, FIG. 22 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 23 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame viewed from the back.

As shown in the figure, the door frame 5 of the pachinko game machine 1 of the present embodiment is a door having a game window 101 having an outer shape formed into a vertically long rectangular shape and an inner peripheral shape having a slightly vertically long circular shape (elliptical shape). The frame base unit 100, the right side decoration unit 200 attached to the right outer periphery of the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, and the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 facing the right side decoration unit 200. The left side decoration unit 240 attached to the left outer circumference, the upper decoration unit 280 attached to the upper outer circumference of the game window 101 in front of the door frame base unit 100, and the lower end lower side of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240. It is provided with a pair of side speaker covers 290, which are arranged in the door frame base unit 100 and attached to the front surface of the door frame base unit 100.

Further, the door frame 5 penetrates the plate unit 300 attached to the lower part of the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, the operation unit 400 attached to the upper center of the plate unit 300, and the plate unit 300. A handle device 500 attached to the lower right corner of the frame base unit 100 for driving a game ball, and a rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 arranged behind the dish unit 300 with the door frame base unit 100 in between. The foul cover unit 540 attached to the door frame, the ball feeding unit 580 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the foul cover unit 540, and the game window 101 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to close. The glass unit 590 and the door are provided.

[3-1. Door frame base unit]
Subsequently, the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 24 to 26. FIG. 24A is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame, and FIG. 24B is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame. Further, FIG. 25 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 26 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled and viewed from the rear.

As shown in the figure, the door frame base unit 100 has a door frame base main body having a game window 101 having an outer shape formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and a game window 101 penetrating in the front-rear direction and having an inner circumference formed in a vertically long substantially elliptical shape. 110, an upper bracket 120 attached to the center of the upper part of the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base body 110 to fix the upper decorative unit, and on both the lower left and right sides of the lower end of the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base body 110. It includes a pair of side speakers 130 to be attached, and a handle bracket 140 attached to the lower right corner of the front view on the front surface of the door frame base main body 110 to support the handle device 500.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 is such that the metal frame-shaped reinforcing unit 150 fixed to the rear side of the door frame base main body 110 and the rear surface of the door frame base main body 110 cover the lower part of the game window 101. The security cover 180 to be attached, the glass unit locking member 190 rotatably attached to a predetermined position on the outer periphery of the game window 101 on the rear surface of the door frame base body 110, and the left side (open side) from the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the rear. ), And the launch cover 191 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base body 110 along the lower end of the game window 101, and the potentiometer 512 of the handle device 500 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base body 110 under the launch cover 191. The handle relay terminal plate 192 that relays the connection between the door and the main control board 4100, the handle relay terminal plate cover 193 that covers the rear side of the handle relay terminal plate 192, and the launch cover 191 and the handle relay that sandwich the center in the left-right direction. Frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 and frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, which are arranged on the opposite side of the terminal board 192 etc. (on the right side (shaft support side) from the center in the left-right direction in the rear view) and attached to the rear surface of the door frame base body. A frame decorative drive amplifier board cover 195 that covers the rear side is provided.

The overall rigidity of the door frame base unit 100 is enhanced by fixing a reinforcing unit 150 obtained by assembling a metal sheet metal with rivets or the like to the rear side of a rectangular door frame base body 110 made of synthetic resin. At the same time, it has enough strength to sufficiently support each of the decorative units 200, 240, 280, the dish unit 300, and the like.

The frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 in the door frame base unit 100 is connected to the side speakers 130 and the upper speakers 222 and 262 of the left and right side decoration units 200 and 240, and peripheral control provided in the game board 4 described later. It is connected to the board 4140 and includes an amplifier circuit that amplifies the acoustic signal sent from the peripheral control board 4140 and outputs it to each speaker 130. Although specific illustration is omitted, in the present embodiment, the decorative substrates 430, 432 and the operation unit 400 provided in the decoration units 200, 240, 280, the dish unit 300, and the operation unit 400 are provided. The wiring that connects the dial drive motor 414, the switches 432a, 432b, 432c, the color LED 432d, the handle relay terminal plate 192, the ball rental unit 360 of the dish unit 300, and the payout control board 4110, the peripheral control board 4140, etc. Frame decoration Drive amplifier board 194 is gathered at the position on the right side (shaft support side) when viewed from the rear, and then extended backward to the main door relay terminal board 880 and peripheral door relay terminal board 882 of the main body frame 3. It is designed to be connected.

As shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the door frame base body 110 of the door frame base unit 100 is formed of a vertically long frame shape by synthetic resin, penetrates in the front-rear direction, and has a vertically long and substantially elliptical inner shape. The game window 101 of the above is formed so as to be offset upward as a whole. As shown in the figure, the game window 101 has the left and right side and the upper inner peripheral edge formed in a continuous smooth curved shape, while the lower inner peripheral edge is formed in a straight line extending to the left and right. ing. Further, on the inner peripheral edge of the door frame base body 110 on the lower side of the game window 101, a square notch 101a through which the first ball outlet 544a of the foul cover unit 540 can be inserted on the shaft support side (left side in front view). Is formed. The width of the upper side and the left and right side sides of the door frame base body 110 formed by the game window 101 is the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151, the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152, and the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 of the reinforcing unit 150 described later. The width is substantially the same as the width of the game window 101, and the game window 101 is formed as large as possible with respect to the size of the door frame base body in the front view. Therefore, a wider range of the game board 4 arranged on the rear side of the door frame 5 can be visually recognized from the player side, and a game area 1100 wider than that of the conventional pachinko game machine can be easily formed. You can do it.

In addition to the game window 101, the door frame base main body 110 is arranged on both the left and right outer sides of the lower side of the game window 101, and mounts and fixes a speaker mounting portion 111 for mounting and fixing the side speaker 130 and a ball feed unit 580. The ball feeding unit mounting recess 112 (see FIG. 26) and the game ball that penetrates in the front-rear direction at a predetermined position of the ball feeding unit mounting recess 112 and is stored in the upper plate 301 of the dish unit 300 to the ball feeding unit 580. A ball feed opening 113 for supplying and a handle attachment for attaching the handle bracket 140, which is arranged in the lower right corner when viewed from the front and is inclined diagonally so that the right (open side) end of the front surface that bulges forward is retracted. The portion 114, the wiring passage port 115 that penetrates in the front-rear direction at a predetermined position of the handle mounting portion 114 and allows the wiring from the handle device 500 to pass through, and a tubular shape that extends shortly forward on the upper side of the handle mounting portion 114. It is provided with a lock hole 116 which is formed and into which a cylinder lock 1010 described later can be inserted.

Further, as shown in FIG. 26, the door frame base main body 110 includes a relay board mounting portion 117 for mounting the handle relay terminal plate 192 on the lower side in the ball feed unit mounting recess 112, and the door frame base main body 110 when viewed from the rear. The board mounting portion 118 for mounting the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, which is arranged on the lower right side (shaft support side) of the window 101, and the rear left side (open side) of the lower end of the game window 101, which is closer to the center than the speaker mounting portion 111. The security cover mounting portion 119 for mounting the security cover 180 and the door frame base body 110 for mounting the security cover 180 protruding rearward from the arrangement and the door frame base body 110 are recessed glass on the rear side substantially along the inner circumference of the game window 101. A glass unit support step 110a to which the outer peripheral edge of the front surface of the unit 590 can come into contact, and four locks for rotatably supporting the glass unit locking member 190 projecting rearward from a predetermined position on the outer periphery of the game window 101. It further includes a member mounting portion 110b.

Further, the rear side of the door frame base main body 110 is provided with a door frame projecting piece 110c that protrudes rearward by a predetermined amount from the lower side thereof, and the door frame projecting piece 110c is provided with an engaging groove 603 of the main body frame 3 described later. It is designed to be inserted inside. As a result, the door frame 5 can be positioned and locked with respect to the main body frame 3, and an illegal tool such as a piano wire is inserted into the pachinko gaming machine 1 through the gap between the door frame 5 and the lower side of the main body frame 3. Even if it is attempted, the door frame projecting piece 110c engaged with the engaging groove 603 can prevent the tool from entering, and the security function of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is enhanced. Further, on the rear side of the door frame base main body 110, a positioning protrusion 110d that protrudes rearward from a position slightly lower right than the lock hole 116 when viewed from the rear and fits with the fitting groove 612 of the main body frame 3 is provided. By fitting the positioning protrusion 110d with the fitting groove 612, the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 are positioned at the correct positions.

Further, as shown in FIG. 25, the door frame base main body 110 is provided with a plurality of mounting bosses 110e projecting forward for fixing the decorative units 200, 240, 280, the dish unit 300, and the like on the front surface thereof. In addition, a large number of mounting holes for mounting the upper bracket 120, the side speaker 130, the handle bracket 140, and the like are formed at appropriate positions.

Further, in the door frame base main body 110, between the ball feed unit mounting recess 112 and the board mounting portion 118, the lower plate ball supply port 310 g and the foul cover unit 540 in the plate unit base 310 of the plate unit 300, which will be described later, A rectangular ball passage port 110f penetrating in the front-rear direction is provided at a position corresponding to the two-ball outlet 544b.

Next, the upper bracket 120 in the door frame base unit 100 is fixed to the center of the upper front surface of the door frame base main body 110, and although detailed illustration is omitted, the left and right upper brackets attached to the door frame base unit 100 are left and right. The upper gap formed between the side decoration units 200 and 240 is concealed, and the left and right ends are supported by the side decoration units 200 and 240, respectively. Further, a part of the tip of the upper bracket 120 is inserted into the upper decorative unit 280, and the upper decorative unit 280 can be supported from above when the door frame 5 is assembled. It has become like.

Further, although detailed illustration of the pair of side speakers 130 in the door frame base unit 100 is omitted, the intersection of the central axes thereof is a predetermined distance (for example, 0.2 m to 1) from the center of the game area 1100 to the front in front view. It is fixed diagonally so as to be at a position of .5 m), so that the sound reaches the player who is seated in front of the pachinko game machine 1 most efficiently. Further, the side speaker 130 is designed to mainly output sound in the mid-high range, and is arranged at a position as far as possible in the left-right direction with respect to the pachinko gaming machine 1. By outputting related different sounds from the side speaker 130 of the above, it is possible to output a sound having a high stereo feeling.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the handle bracket 140 in the door frame base unit 100 has a cylindrical tubular portion 141 extending in the front-rear direction and a shaft of the tubular portion 141 from the rear end of the tubular portion 141. On the other hand, an annular flange portion 142 extending outward in the perpendicular direction and a plurality of flange portions 142 (three in the present embodiment) protruding into the cylinder portion 141 and arranged at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction of the cylinder portion 141. It is provided with a ridge 143, and a plurality of reinforcing ribs 144 that connect the outer peripheral surface of the tubular portion 141 and the front surface of the flange portion 142 and are arranged in a plurality of directions in the circumferential direction of the tubular portion 141. The handle bracket 140 is attached to the handle mounting portion 114 with a predetermined screw in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 142 is in contact with the front surface of the handle mounting portion 114 in the door frame base main body 110. Although not shown, the shaft of the tubular portion 141 substantially coincides with the wiring passage port 115 in the state of being attached to the handle mounting portion 114.

The handle bracket 140 is provided with one ridge 143 on the upper side and two ridges 143 on the lower side in the tubular portion 141, and these ridges 143 are formed on the outer periphery of the cylindrical portion of the handle base 502 in the handle device 500. It is arranged and formed at a position corresponding to the three groove portions 502a. Then, the cylindrical portion of the handle device 500 can be inserted into the tubular portion 141 only when the three ridges 143 of the handle bracket 140 and the three groove portions 502a of the handle device 500 match. There is. Therefore, the handle base 502 of the handle device 500 inserted and supported by the handle bracket 140 is supported in a state in which it cannot rotate relative to the handle bracket 140.

By attaching the handle bracket 140 to the diagonally inclined handle mounting portion 114, the shaft of the tubular portion 141 is mounted so as to extend toward the right side (open side) as it faces forward in front view. The shaft of the handle device 500 supported by the handle bracket 140 in this state is also tilted diagonally.

Subsequently, the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame base unit 100 includes an upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 attached along the back surface of the upper side of the door frame base main body 110 and a door frame base main body, mainly as shown in FIGS. 25 and 26. The shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 attached along the back surface of the shaft support side side portion 110, the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 attached along the back surface of the open side side portion of the door frame base main body 110, and the door frame base main body 110. A lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 attached along the lower back surface of the game window 101 is provided, and they are fastened to each other with screws, rivets, or the like to form a square shape.

As shown in FIG. 25, the reinforcing unit 150 has an upper shaft support portion 156 having a shaft pin 155 slidably provided on the upper surface of the upper and lower ends of the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 in the vertical direction, and a lower surface thereof. It is integrally provided with a lower shaft branch 158 having a shaft pin 157 (see FIG. 18). Then, the upper and lower shaft pins 155 and 157 are pivotally supported by the upper shaft support metal fittings 630 and the lower shaft support metal fittings 640 formed above and below the shaft support side of the main body frame 3, so that the door frame 5 is pivotally supported with respect to the main body frame 3. It is designed to be pivotally supported so that it can be opened and closed.

Further, the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 of the reinforcing unit 150 has a predetermined width and is formed to have substantially the same length as the width dimension of the door frame base main body 110, and is formed on the lower long side edge of the long side edge thereof. A lower bent projectile 159 bent forward and an upper bent projectile 160 bent forward toward the right side (open side) of the upper long side edge in front view. A vertically bent projecting piece 161 that is bent rearward and extended in the vertical direction is provided at the central portion of the upper long side edge. The strength of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is increased by the lower bent projectile piece 159, the upper bent projecting piece 160, and the like. Further, the vertically bent projecting piece 161 of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is formed so as to engage and lock with the locking piece 592b formed at the lower end of the unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590, which will be described later. When the unit 590 is fixed to the back surface side of the door frame 5, the vertically bent projecting piece 161 locks the locking piece 592b of the unit frame 592 in the glass unit 590, so that the lower end of the glass unit 590 moves in the left-right direction. It is possible to regulate the movement to the rear. The lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is formed with a notch 162 that substantially corresponds to the notch 101a of the door frame base main body 110.

Further, the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 of the reinforcing unit 150 includes an open side outer bent projecting piece 163 bent rearward on both sides of a long side between the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 and the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154. It is provided with an open side inwardly bent projectile 164, and as shown in the figure, the open side inwardly bent projectile 164 is formed so as to extend backward longer than the open side outer bent projectile 163. ing. Further, a hook cover 165 that comes into contact with the door frame hook portion 1041 of the lock device 1000, which will be described later, is provided in the lower rear portion of the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153. Further, the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is provided with a U-shaped shaft support side U-shaped protrusion 166 that extends rearward to the outer end of the long side thereof and is open to the outside of the shaft support side. Further, the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 is provided with bent projecting pieces 167 bent rearward on both sides of its long side.

Since the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 of the reinforcing unit 150 is mounted and supported only at two points above and below the upper shaft support portion 156 and the lower shaft support portion 158 with respect to the main body frame 3, the shaft support side If an illegal tool such as a screwdriver or a bar is inserted between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is deformed and the gap between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 becomes large and illegal. Although there is a risk that the action can be easily performed, since the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is provided with the shaft support side U-shaped projecting piece 166, the strength of the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is further increased, and the shaft support The side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is difficult to bend. Further, in the shaft support side U-shaped protrusion 166 of the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152, the front end piece 952b of the side security plate 950 in the main body frame 3 described later is inserted into the U shape, and the tool It is possible to prevent the insertion of the pachinko machine 1 and to prevent only the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 from bending, so that the crime prevention function of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be enhanced.

Next, the security cover 180 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 25 and 26. The security cover 180 is provided with a security function that covers the lower back surface of the glass unit 590 to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the game board 4, and as shown in the figure, the left and right sides are made of transparent synthetic resin. It is formed in a flat plate shape so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 590 arranged between the reinforcing sheets 152 and 153 of the above, and the upper side portion thereof is formed in an arc shape substantially along the lower arc surface of the inner rail 1112 of the game board 4. It includes a formed contact recess 181 and a crime prevention rear projection piece 182 that projects rearward along the upper end of the contact recess 181. Further, both the left and right ends of the security cover 180 are provided with security rear end projecting pieces 183 that project rearward along the end shape thereof. It should be noted that the crime prevention rear end projecting piece 183 on the right side (shaft support side) in the rear view is in a form of extending backward longer than the crime prevention rear end projecting piece 183 on the opposite side (open side). On the other hand, on the front surface of the security cover 180, a security front projecting piece 184 projecting along the downward shape of the unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590 with the security cover 180 attached, and left and right outside the security front projecting piece 184. A U-shaped mounting elastic piece 185 that projects forward is provided at the lower end of the.

In this security cover 180, the mounting elastic piece 185 on the right side (open side) is mounted on the security cover mounting portion 119 of the door frame base unit 100 when viewed from the front, and the mounting elastic piece 185 on the opposite side (shaft support side) is mounted on the plate. By attaching it to the security cover attachment portion 364 of the unit 300, it can be detachably attached to the back surface side of the door frame 5. In the state where the security cover 180 is attached to the door frame 5, detailed illustration is omitted, but the security front projection piece 184 is fitted to the lower outer periphery of the unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590, and is also fitted. The rear surface of the lower end of the unit frame 592 comes into contact with the vertically bent projecting piece 161. Further, when the door frame 5 is closed, the security rear projection piece 182 projecting rearward is inserted into the lower side surface of the inner rail 1112 whose shaft support side half is fixed to the game board 4, and the open side half is front. It is in a state of being inserted into the rail security groove 1118 of the inner rail 1112 of the component member 1110. As a result, even if an illegal tool is to be intruded into the game area 1100 of the game board 4, the intrusion can be prevented by the crime prevention rear projection piece 182 inserted under the inner rail 1112. ..

Since the security cover 180 can cover the lower front portion of the ball striking guide passage formed by the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 with the door frame 5 closed by the back surface thereof. , It is possible to prevent the hit ball that flies or reverses the guide passage portion from colliding with the glass plate 594.

Subsequently, the four glass unit locking members 190 in the door frame base unit 100 are rotatably fitted to the locking member mounting portion 110b protruding rearward from the door frame base main body 110 with the fitting portion 190a. A locking piece 190b for locking the locking projecting piece 451f of the glass unit 590 extending in a direction perpendicular to the axial direction of the fitting portion 190a is provided. In the glass unit locking member 190, a retaining screw is fixed to the tip of the locking member mounting portion 110b in a state where the locking member mounting portion 110b of the door frame base main body 110 penetrates the fitting portion 190a. By doing so, it is rotatably supported by the locking member mounting portion 110b.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the locking piece 190b of the glass unit locking member 190 has a ridge protruding rearward, and the ridge rotates when the glass unit 590 is attached or detached. It is a finger hook when operating. Of the four glass unit locking members 190, the locking piece 190b of the glass unit locking member 190 attached to the lower right when viewed from the rear does not have a ridge, and the rear surface is a flat surface. ing. Further, the glass unit locking member 190 attached to the lower right in the rear view includes an operating piece 190c that extends in a direction perpendicular to the axial direction of the fitting portion 190a and in a direction different from that of the locking piece 190b. There is. As shown in FIG. 18, the rear side of the operation piece 190c is covered with the security cover 180, so that the operation piece 190c cannot be operated with the security cover 180 attached. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the glass unit 590 from being easily removed by rotating the glass unit locking member 190.

Further, the launch cover 191 of the door frame base unit 100 is fixed to the rear side of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 of the reinforcing unit 150. Further, the handle relay terminal plate cover 193 and the frame decoration drive amplifier board cover 195 are fixed at predetermined positions on the rear side of the door frame base main body 110, respectively. When the launch cover 191 and the handle relay terminal plate cover 193 and the ball feed unit 580 are attached to the door frame base unit 100, their rear surfaces are substantially identical to each other. It is possible to cover the front surface of the hitting ball launching device 650 attached to the main body frame 3.

[3-2. Right side decoration unit]
Subsequently, the right side decoration unit 200 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 27 to 29. 27 (A) is a front perspective view of the right side decorative unit in the door frame, and FIG. 27 (B) is a rear perspective view of the right side decorative unit in the door frame. Further, FIG. 28 is an exploded perspective view of the right side decorative unit disassembled and viewed from the front. Further, FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the right side decorative unit disassembled and viewed later.

As shown in the figure, the right side decoration unit 200 of the door frame 5 in the present embodiment decorates the right half of the front outer circumference of the game window 101 excluding the lower part in the front view, and the inside is the game window 101. It is formed in an arc shape along the outside, and the outside is formed in a straight line along the outer circumference of the door frame base unit 100. The right side decorative unit 200 relates to a side decorative frame 202 forming the skeleton of the right side decorative unit 200, a side upper decorative member 204 arranged along the upper side of the side decorative frame 202, and a side upper decorative member 204. The side upper decorative lens 206, which is fitted from the rear side, and the upper side of the side decorative frame 202 and the side upper decorative member 204 are covered, and the side upper decorative member 204 is attached to the front side so as to sandwich the side upper decorative lens 206. The side upper cover 208, the side lens 210 that supports the lower part of the side upper cover 208 and is fitted and fixed to the side decorative frame 202 from the rear side, and the side inner lens 212 that is fitted to the back side of the side lens 210. And have.

Further, the right side decoration unit 200 is arranged on the rear side of the side inner lens 212 from substantially the center to the upper side in the vertical direction, and a plurality of LEDs 214a (full color LED) and 214b (white LED) are mounted on the surface of the right side decoration unit 200. A substrate 214 and a decorative substrate 216 on the lower right side, which is arranged on the lower side from substantially the center of the side inner lens 212 in the vertical direction and has a plurality of LEDs 216a (full-color LED) and 216b (white LED) mounted on the surface. The right side upper decorative board cover 218, which covers the rear side of the right side upper decorative board 214 and is attached to the side inner lens 212 so as to sandwich the right side upper decorative board 214, and the right side, which covers the rear side of the right side lower decorative board 216. It includes a side lens 210 and a right side lower decorative board cover 220 attached to the side decorative frame 202 so as to sandwich the lower decorative board 216.

Further, the right side decoration unit 200 supports the upper right speaker 222 arranged in the upper left portion in the front view of the side decoration frame 202 and the upper right side speaker 222, and is fitted to the rear upper portion of the side decoration frame 202. It is provided with a speaker bracket 224, an upper speaker cover 226 sandwiched between the upper speaker bracket 224 and the side decorative frame 202, and a side sublens 228 attached from the inside to a predetermined position on the side surface of the side upper cover 208. There is. On the rear side of the side sub-lens 228, the LED 214c of the decorative substrate 214 on the right side is arranged, and the LED 214c emits and decorates the LED 214c.

In the right side decorative unit 200, the side decorative frame 202, the side upper decorative member 204, the right side upper decorative substrate cover 218, and the right side lower decorative substrate cover 220 are formed of a translucent member, and the side decoration A plating layer of a predetermined color is formed on the surfaces of the frame 202 and the side upper decorative member 204. Further, the side upper decorative lens 206, the side upper cover 208, the side lens 210, the side inner lens 212, the upper speaker cover 226, the upper speaker bracket 224, and the side sub lens 228 of the right side decorative unit 200 are transparent members. The side upper cover 208 is substantially milky white, and the side upper decorative lens 206, side lens 210, side inner lens 212, upper speaker bracket 224, upper speaker cover 226, and side sub lens 228 are substantially transparent. It is said that.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the back side of the side lens 210 and the upper speaker cover 226, which are formed substantially transparent, and the front side of the side inner lens 212 and the upper speaker bracket 224 are formed in a polyhedral shape. , Light can be diffusely refracted. Therefore, the LEDs 214a, 214b, 216a, 216b and the like mounted on the surface (front surface) of the right side upper decorative substrate 214 and the right side lower decorative substrate 216 arranged behind the side lens 210 and the side inner lens 212 are used for the game. It is not clearly visible from the person's side. Further, the front surface of the right side upper decorative substrate 214 and the right side lower decorative substrate 216 is white, and the right side decorative unit 200 is efficiently emitted and decorated by the mounted LEDs 214a, 214b, 216a, 216b and the like. In addition to being able to do this, the decorative substrates 214 and 216 are inconspicuous when the LEDs 214a, 214b, 216a and 216b are not lit. The upper right side decorative board 214 and the lower right side decorative board 216 are connected to the peripheral control board 4140, respectively, and the LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, and 216a are driven by a drive signal (light emission drive signal) from the peripheral control board 4140. , 216b can be appropriately made to emit light, and the right side decoration unit 200 can be made to emit light.

As shown in the figure, the side decoration frame 202 in the right side decoration unit 200 is formed in an arc shape substantially along the game window 101. Specifically, the side decoration frame 202 has an arc shape along the outer circumference of the game window 101. The inner frame 202a and the inner frame 202a are arranged at positions separated from each other outward, and are formed in a straight line from the lower end to the upper part along the outer periphery of the side surface of the door frame 5 (door frame base unit 100), and the following upper part is the inner frame. An outer frame 202b formed in an arc shape so as to be curved toward the upper end edge of 202a, an upper end frame 202c connecting the upper end edges of the outer frame 202b and the inner frame 202a, and the lower end of the outer frame 202b and the inner frame 202a. The lower end frame 202d that connects the edges and the inner frame 202a and the outer frame 202b are arranged at a plurality of locations (4 locations in the present embodiment) along the circumferential direction, and the inner frame 202a and the outer frame 202b are connected and predetermined. A partition frame 202f having a width slit 202e is provided.

The inner frame 202a of the side decoration frame 202 extends at substantially the same position in the front-rear direction and in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 with substantially the same width. On the other hand, in the outer frame 202b, the rear end of the linear portion extending along the side surface of the door frame 5 is formed linearly at substantially the same position as the rear end of the inner frame 202a, whereas the front end is vertically formed. It is formed in an arc shape so that both ends of the door protrude forward. Further, the curved arcuate portion above the linearly extending vertically extending portion of the outer frame 202b is formed in an arcuate shape curved in the front-rear direction so that the upper end edge side projects forward. Further, the partition wall frame 202f of the side decorative frame 202 has a shape curved in the front-rear direction so that the portion between the inner frame 202a and the outer frame 202b protrudes most forward. The partition frame 202f is arranged on the radiation extending radially from the vicinity of the lower center of the game window 101 in a state where the door frame 5 is assembled (see FIG. 17 and the like).

As shown in the figure, the side decorative frame 202 has a form in which the space between the inner frame 202a and the outer frame 202b is divided into a plurality of parts in the circumferential direction (longitudinal direction) by a plurality of partition wall frames 202f. The opening is a light emitting decorative opening 202 g, and the peripheral lens portion 210 a of the side lens 210, which will be described later, is fitted from the rear side. Further, the radiation lens portion 210b of the side lens 210 is fitted into the slit 202e of the partition frame 202f from the rear side. Further, the partition wall 202f can partition the slit 202e and the light emitting decorative opening 202g, so that the light emitting modes can be different from each other.

As shown in the figure, the side upper decorative member 204 of the right side decorative unit 200 extends in the left-right direction at a constant height along the arc-shaped upper portion of the outer frame 202b of the side decorative frame 202, and has a rear surface. Is formed in a recessed state, and a plurality of openings 204a penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed on the front surface. The side upper decorative member 204 is provided with a Jomon-shaped relief on the upper side along the arranged openings 204a.

On the other hand, the side upper decorative lens 206 has a shape that can be fitted in the recessed rear surface of the side upper decorative member 204, and from the rear side of the side upper decorative member 204 to the vicinity of the front end thereof through the opening 204a. A plurality of light guide portions 206a capable of projecting are provided. The tip of the light guide portion 206a is formed in a polyhedral shape, and by inserting and fitting the light guide portion 206a into the opening 204a of the side upper decorative member 204, it is possible to make the opening 204a look as if a jewel is fitted. You can do it. Further, the light from the right side upper decorative substrate 214 arranged on the rear side by the light guide portion 206a of the side upper decorative lens 206 can be radiated from the opening 204a of the side upper decorative member 204 to the front (player side). At the same time, the tip of the light guide portion 206a can be made to shine as a jewel.

The upper side surface and the right side surface (in front view) of the side upper cover 208 of the right side decorative unit 200 have a shape substantially along the outer circumference of the door frame 5 (door frame base unit 100), and the lower surface (lower end). Has a shape substantially in line with the side upper decorative member 204. The side upper cover 208 is formed with a mounting step portion 208a that is open downward and recessed rearward so that the side upper decorative member 204 can be accommodated in the lower part of the front surface, and is rear of the mounting step portion 208a. A mounting boss, mounting holes, and the like for mounting the side upper decorative member 204 and the like are formed on the end surface. Further, on the right side surface of the side upper cover 208, two notches 208b arranged vertically are formed, and the side sublens 228 attached internally via the notches 208b is desired toward the surface side. It has become. By fitting the side sub-lens 228 into the notch 208b of the side upper cover 208, it is possible to emit light in a different manner only in this portion.

The side lens 210 of the right side decoration unit 200 has a shape substantially in line with the side decoration frame 202 and a shape in which the rear surface is recessed, and is inserted later into the light emitting decoration opening 202 g of the side decoration frame 202. It includes a peripheral lens portion 210a and a radiation lens portion 210b that is later inserted into the slit 202e of the side decorative frame 202. As shown in the figure, this side lens 210 does not have a peripheral lens portion 210a corresponding to a light emitting decorative opening 202g in contact with the upper end frame 202c of the side decorative frame 202, and the corresponding portions are opened forward and downward. It is said that the storage stage portion 210c is provided. The upper right speaker 222, the upper speaker bracket 224, and the like, which will be described later, are accommodated in the accommodating stage 210c. Further, the side lens 210 includes a mounting portion 210d that forms the upper surface of the accommodating step portion 210c and is fixed to the rear side of the mounting step portion 208a in the side upper cover 208.

The side lens 210 has a curved surface shape in which the front surfaces of the peripheral lens portion 210a and the radial lens portion 210b bulge forward so as to substantially follow the front end of the partition wall frame 202f of the side decorative frame 202. Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the back surface (inner surface) side of the peripheral lens portion 210a is formed in a polyhedral shape by a plurality of surfaces facing different directions, and the plate thickness of the peripheral lens portion 210a is non-uniform. As a result, the light transmitted through the peripheral lens portion 210a is diffusely refracted. Further, the inner surface formed in the shape of a polyhedron makes it possible for the peripheral lens portion 210a to exhibit a brilliant and characteristic appearance.

The side inner lens 212 is inserted and fitted into the side lens 210 from the rear side, and corresponds to a portion of the side lens 210 in which the peripheral lens portion 210a and the radiation lens portion 210b are formed, as shown in the figure. The main body portion 212a having a recessed rear surface and the main body portion 212a continuously project from the rear end of the main body portion 212a and project forward from the main body portion 212a and correspond to the radiation lens portion 210b (slit 202e of the side decorative frame 202). It is provided with a plate-shaped light guide portion 212b, which is arranged at such a position. The main body 212a of the side inner lens 212 is formed so that the front surface thereof is reserved by a predetermined distance from the inner surface of the side lens 210. Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, one surface of the main body portion 212a of the side inner lens 212 is formed into a polyhedron shape by a plurality of surfaces facing different directions, similarly to the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210. It is formed so that the thickness of the main body 212a becomes non-uniform, so that the light transmitted through the main body 212a is diffusely refracted.

By combining this side inner lens 212 with the side lens 210, the light transmitted through the peripheral lens portion 210a and the main body portion 212a can be doubly refracted, and the shape of an object arranged on the opposite side can be changed. It is almost unrecognizable. Further, due to diffused refraction and diffused reflection due to the polyhedral shape, the appearance of the side lens 210 (peripheral lens portion 210a) can be made to shine and the perspective can be made to look unclear and mysterious.

The right side upper decorative substrate 214 and the right side lower decorative substrate 216 of the right side decorative unit 200 are equipped with a plurality of high-brightness color LEDs on their surfaces, and the light emitting decorative opening 202 g of the side decorative frame 202 (around the side lens 210). The LEDs 214a and 216a arranged at positions corresponding to the lens portion 210a) have a relatively wide irradiation angle (for example, 60 ° to 180 °), and the slit 202e of the side decorative frame 202 (the side lens 210) is used. As the LEDs 214b and 216b arranged at positions corresponding to the radiation lens portion 210b), those having a relatively narrow irradiation angle (for example, 15 ° to 60 °) are used. In the present embodiment, the LED 214c of the right side upper decorative substrate 214 that emits and decorates the side sub-lens 228 is a red LED.

The upper right speaker 222 of the right side decoration unit 200 outputs sound in the mid-high range like the side speaker 130, and can be attached to a predetermined position in a predetermined direction by the upper speaker bracket 224. There is. The upper speaker bracket 224 that supports the upper right speaker 222 includes a cylindrical horn portion 224a that projects diagonally forward and downward at the center of the left and right sides of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when viewed from the front. The upper right speaker 222 is fixed to the back side of the upper end of the horn portion 224a in the upper speaker bracket 224 so that the upper right speaker 222 cannot be seen from the player side by the horn portion 224a in the front view. It has become.

The upper right speaker 222 is emitted from the upper part of the pachinko gaming machine 1 toward the lower player by the horn portion 224a of the upper speaker bracket 224, and is noisy to other pachinko gaming machines. It's getting harder. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the upper speaker bracket 224 also has a plurality of front surfaces facing different directions like the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210 and the main body portion 212a of the side inner lens 212. The surface is formed in a polyhedron shape, and the plate thickness becomes non-uniform, so that the light transmitted through the upper speaker bracket 224 is diffusely refracted.

Further, the upper speaker cover 226 covering the front side of the upper speaker bracket 224 is fitted from the rear side of the side decoration frame 202 so as to close the light emitting decoration opening 202g in contact with the upper end frame 202c of the side decoration frame 202. The surface is formed in a curved surface shape that is continuous with the surface of the side lens 210. Further, a plurality of through holes 226a are formed on the surface of the upper speaker cover 226 so that the sound from the upper right speaker 222 can be sufficiently transmitted to the player side.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the upper speaker cover 226 also has a plurality of inner surface surfaces facing different directions like the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210 and the main body portion 212a of the side inner lens 212. The surface of the speaker is formed into a polyhedron, and the thickness of the polyhedron is non-uniform, so that the light transmitted through the upper speaker cover 226 is diffusely refracted. Therefore, in the upper speaker cover 226 and the upper speaker bracket 224, the diffused refraction of light makes it difficult for the player to see the through hole 226a formed in the upper right speaker 222 and the upper speaker cover 226. , The appearance can be similar to that of the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210.

[3-3. Left side decoration unit]
Subsequently, the left side decorative unit 240 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 30 to 32. FIG. 30A is a front perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame, and FIG. 30B is a rear perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame. Further, FIG. 31 is an exploded perspective view of the left side decorative unit disassembled and viewed from the front. Further, FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the left side decorative unit as viewed after being disassembled.

As shown in the figure, the left side decoration unit 240 of the door frame 5 in the present embodiment decorates the left half of the front outer circumference of the game window 101 excluding the lower part in the front view, and the inside is the game window 101. It is formed in an arc shape along the outside, and is formed in a straight line along the outer circumference of the door frame base unit 100, and is formed substantially symmetrically with the right side decoration unit 200. The left side decoration unit 240 refers to the side decoration frame 242 forming the frame of the left side decoration unit 240, the side upper decoration member 244 arranged along the upper side of the side decoration frame 242, and the side upper decoration member 244. The side upper decorative lens 246 that is fitted from the rear side, the side decorative frame 242, and the upper side of the side upper decorative member 244 are covered, and the side upper decorative member 244 is attached to the front side so as to sandwich the side upper decorative lens 246. A side lens 250 that supports the lower part of the side upper cover 248 and the side upper cover 248 and is fitted and fixed to the side frame decoration 242 from the rear side, and a side inner lens 252 that is fitted to the back side of the side lens 250. And have.

Further, the left side decoration unit 240 is arranged on the rear side of the side inner lens 252 from substantially the center in the vertical direction to the upper side, and a plurality of LEDs 254a (full color LED) and 254b (white LED) are mounted on the surface of the left side decoration unit 240. A substrate 254 and a decorative substrate 256 on the lower left side, which is arranged on the lower side from substantially the center of the side inner lens 252 in the vertical direction and has a plurality of LEDs 256a (full-color LED) and 256b (white LED) mounted on the surface. The left side upper decorative board cover 258, which covers the rear side of the left side upper decorative board 254 and is attached to the side inner lens 252 so as to sandwich the left side upper decorative board 254, and the left side, which covers the rear side of the left side lower decorative board 256. The side lens 250 and the left side lower decorative board cover 260 attached to the side decorative frame 242 so as to sandwich the lower decorative board 256 are provided.

Further, the left side decoration unit 240 supports the upper left speaker 262 arranged in the upper right part in the front view of the side decoration frame 242 and the upper left side speaker 262 and is fitted to the rear upper part of the side decoration frame 242. The speaker bracket 264 and the upper speaker cover 266 sandwiched between the upper speaker bracket 264 and the side decorative frame 242 are provided.

In the left side decorative unit 240, the side decorative frame 242, the side upper decorative member 244, the left side upper decorative substrate cover 258, and the left side lower decorative substrate cover 260 are formed of a translucent member, and the side decoration A plating layer of a predetermined color is formed on the surfaces of the frame 242 and the side upper decorative member 244. Further, the side upper decorative lens 246, the side upper cover 248, the side lens 250, the side inner lens 252, the upper speaker cover 266, and the upper speaker bracket 264 of the left side decorative unit 240 are formed of a translucent member. The side upper cover 248 is substantially milky white, and the side upper decorative lens 246, the side lens 250, the side inner lens 252, the upper speaker bracket 264, and the upper speaker cover 266 are substantially transparent.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the back side of the side lens 250 and the upper speaker cover 266, which are formed substantially transparent, and the front side of the side inner lens 252 and the upper speaker bracket 264 are formed in a polyhedral shape. , Light can be diffusely refracted. Therefore, the LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b and the like mounted on the surface (front surface) of the left side upper decorative substrate 254 and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 arranged behind the side lens 250 and the side inner lens 252 are used for the game. It is not clearly visible from the person's side. Further, the front surface of the left side upper decorative substrate 254 and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 is white, and the left side decorative unit 240 is efficiently emitted and decorated by the mounted LEDs such as 254a, 254b, 256a, and 256b. In addition to being able to do so, the decorative substrates 254 and 256 are inconspicuous when the LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a and 256b are not lit. The upper left side decorative board 254 and the lower left side decorative board 256 are connected to the peripheral control board 4140, respectively, and the LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, and 256b are driven by the drive signal (light emission drive signal) from the peripheral control board 4140. Can be appropriately emitted to emit light to decorate the left side decoration unit 240.

As shown in the figure, the side decoration frame 242 in the left side decoration unit 240 is formed in an arc shape substantially along the game window 101, and specifically, the side decoration frame 242 is formed in an arc shape along the outer circumference of the game window 101. The inner frame 242a and the inner frame 242a are arranged at positions separated from each other to the outside, and are formed in a straight line from the lower end to the upper part along the outer periphery of the side surface of the door frame 5 (door frame base unit 100), and the following upper part is the inner frame. An outer frame 242b formed in an arc shape so as to curve toward the upper end edge of the 242a, an upper end frame 242c connecting the outer frame 242b and the upper end edges of the inner frame 242a, and the lower end of the outer frame 242b and the inner frame 242a. The lower end frame 242d that connects the edges and the inner frame 242a and the outer frame 242b are arranged at a plurality of locations (4 locations in the present embodiment) along the circumferential direction to connect the inner frame 242a and the outer frame 242b and are predetermined. It is provided with a partition frame 242f having a width slit 242e.

The inner frame 242a of the side decorative frame 242 extends at substantially the same position with respect to the front-rear direction and has substantially the same width in the circumferential direction of the game window 101. On the other hand, in the outer frame 242b, the rear end of the linear portion extending along the side surface of the door frame 5 is formed linearly at substantially the same position as the rear end of the inner frame 242a, whereas the front end is vertically formed. It is formed in an arc shape so that both ends of the door protrude forward. Further, the curved arcuate portion above the linearly extending vertical portion of the outer frame 242b is formed in an arcuate shape curved in the front-rear direction so that the upper end edge side protrudes forward. Further, the partition frame 242f of the side decorative frame 242 has a shape curved in the front-rear direction so that the portion between the inner frame 242a and the outer frame 242b protrudes most forward. The partition wall frame 242f is arranged on radiation extending radially from the vicinity of the lower center of the game window 101 in a state where the door frame 5 is assembled (see FIG. 17 and the like).

As shown in the figure, the side decorative frame 242 has a form in which the space between the inner frame 242a and the outer frame 242b is divided into a plurality of parts in the circumferential direction (longitudinal direction) by a plurality of partition wall frames 242f. The opening is a light emitting decorative opening 242 g, and the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250, which will be described later, is fitted from the rear side. Further, the radiation lens portion 250b of the side lens 250 is fitted into the slit 242e of the partition frame 242f from the rear side. Further, the partition wall frame 242f can partition the slit 242e and the light emitting decorative opening 242g, so that the light emitting modes can be different from each other.

As shown in the figure, the side upper decorative member 244 of the left side decorative unit 240 extends laterally at a constant height along the arc-shaped upper portion of the outer frame 242b of the side decorative frame 242, and also has a rear surface. Is formed in a recessed state, and a plurality of openings 244a penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed on the front surface. The side upper decorative member 244 is provided with a Jomon-shaped relief on the upper side along the arranged openings 244a.

On the other hand, the side upper decorative lens 246 has a shape that can be fitted in the recessed rear surface of the side upper decorative member 244, and extends from the rear side of the side upper decorative member 244 to the vicinity of the front end thereof through the opening 244a. A plurality of light guide portions 246a capable of projecting are provided. The tip of the light guide portion 246a is formed in a polyhedral shape, and by inserting and fitting it into the opening 244a of the side upper decorative member 244, it is possible to make it appear as if a jewel is fitted in the opening 244a. You can do it. Further, the light from the left side upper decorative substrate 254 arranged on the rear side by the light guide portion 246a of the side upper decorative lens 244 can be radiated forward (player side) from the opening 244a of the side upper decorative member 244. At the same time, the tip of the light guide portion 246a can be made to shine as a jewel.

The upper side surface and the left side surface (in front view) of the side upper cover 248 of the left side decorative unit 240 have a shape substantially along the outer circumference of the door frame 5 (door frame base unit 100), and the lower surface (lower end). Is shaped to substantially follow the side upper decorative member 244. The side upper cover 248 has a mounting step portion 248a that is open downward and recessed rearward so that the side upper decorative member 244 can be accommodated in the lower part of the front surface, and is formed after the mounting step portion 248a. Mounting bosses, mounting holes, etc. for mounting the side upper decorative member 244 and the like are formed on the end surface. Further, the side upper cover 248 is provided with a covering portion 248b on its outer side surface (left side surface in front view) that covers the upper shaft support portion 156 of the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame base unit 100 from the front side.

The side lens 250 of the left side decoration unit 240 has a shape substantially in line with the side decoration frame 242 and a shape in which the rear surface is recessed, and is inserted later into the light emitting decoration opening 242 g of the side decoration frame 242. It includes a peripheral lens portion 250a and a radiation lens portion 250b that is later inserted into the slit 242e of the side decorative frame 242. As shown in the figure, the side lens 250 does not have a peripheral lens portion 250a corresponding to a light emitting decorative opening 242g in contact with the upper end frame 242c of the side decorative frame 242, and the corresponding portions are opened forward and downward. It is said that the storage stage portion is 250c. The upper left speaker 262, the upper speaker bracket 264, and the like, which will be described later, are accommodated in the accommodating stage 250c. Further, the side lens 250 includes a mounting portion 250d that forms the upper surface of the accommodating step portion 250c and is fixed to the rear side of the mounting step portion 248a in the side upper cover 248.

The side lens 250 has a curved surface shape in which the front surfaces of the peripheral lens portion 250a and the radial lens portion 250b bulge forward so as to substantially follow the front end of the partition wall frame 242f of the side decorative frame 242. Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the back surface (inner surface) side of the peripheral lens portion 250a is formed in a polyhedral shape by a plurality of surfaces facing different directions, and the plate thickness of the peripheral lens portion 250a is non-uniform. As a result, the light transmitted through the peripheral lens portion 250a is diffusely refracted. Further, the inner surface formed in the shape of a polyhedron makes it possible for the peripheral lens portion 250a to exhibit a brilliant and characteristic appearance.

The side inner lens 252 is inserted and fitted into the side lens 250 from the rear side, and corresponds to a portion of the side lens 250 in which the peripheral lens portion 250a and the radiation lens portion 250b are formed, as shown in the figure. Corresponding to the main body portion 252a having a recessed rear surface and the radial lens portion 250b (slit 242e of the side decorative frame 242) that is continuous from the rear end of the main body portion 252a and protrudes forward from the main body portion 252a. It is provided with a plate-shaped light guide portion 252b, which is arranged at such a position. The main body portion 252a of the side inner lens 252 is formed so that the front surface thereof is reserved by a predetermined distance from the inner surface of the side lens 250. Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, one surface of the main body portion 252a of the side inner lens 252 is formed into a polyhedron shape by a plurality of surfaces facing different directions, similarly to the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250. It is formed, and the plate thickness of the main body portion 252a becomes non-uniform, so that the light transmitted through the main body portion 252a is diffusely refracted.

By combining this side inner lens 252 with the side lens 250, the light transmitted through the peripheral lens portion 250a and the main body portion 252a can be doubly refracted, and the shape of an object arranged on the opposite side can be changed. It is almost unrecognizable. In addition, due to diffused refraction and diffused reflection due to the polyhedral shape, the appearance of the side lens 250 (peripheral lens portion 250a) can be made to shine and the perspective can be made to look unclear and mysterious.

The left side upper decorative substrate 254 and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 of the left side decorative unit 240 are equipped with a plurality of high-brightness color LEDs on the surface, and the light emitting decorative opening 242 g of the side decorative frame 242 (the circumference of the side lens 250). The LEDs 254a and 256a arranged at positions corresponding to the lens portion 250a) have a relatively wide irradiation angle (for example, 60 ° to 180 °), and the slit 242e of the side decorative frame 242 (of the side lens 250). As the LEDs 254b and 256b arranged at positions corresponding to the radiation lens portion 250b), those having a relatively narrow irradiation angle (for example, 15 ° to 60 °) are used.

The upper left speaker 262 of the left side decoration unit 240 outputs sound in the mid-high range like the side speaker 130, and can be attached to a predetermined position in a predetermined direction by the upper speaker bracket 264. There is. The upper speaker bracket 264 that supports the upper left speaker 262 includes a cylindrical horn portion 264a that projects diagonally forward and downward at the center of the left and right sides of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when viewed from the front. The upper left speaker 262 is fixed to the back side of the upper end of the horn portion 264a in the upper speaker bracket 264 so that the upper left speaker 262 cannot be seen from the player side by the horn portion 264a in the front view. It has become.

The upper left speaker 262 is emitted from the upper part of the pachinko gaming machine 1 toward the lower player by the horn portion 264a of the upper speaker bracket 264, and is noisy to other pachinko gaming machines. It's getting harder. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the upper speaker bracket 264 also has a plurality of front surfaces facing different directions like the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 and the main body portion 252a of the side inner lens 252. The surface is formed in a polyhedron shape, and the plate thickness becomes non-uniform, so that the light transmitted through the upper speaker bracket 264 is diffusely refracted.

Further, the upper speaker cover 266 covering the front side of the upper speaker bracket 264 is fitted from the rear side of the side decoration frame 242 so as to close the light emitting decoration opening 242g in contact with the upper end frame 242c of the side decoration frame 242. The surface is formed in a curved surface shape that is continuous with the surface of the side lens 250. Further, a plurality of through holes 266a are formed on the surface of the upper speaker cover 266 so that the sound from the upper left speaker 262 can be sufficiently transmitted to the player side.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the upper speaker cover 266 also has a plurality of inner surfaces facing different directions like the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 and the main body portion 252a of the side inner lens 252. The surface of the speaker is formed into a polyhedron, and the thickness of the polyhedron is non-uniform, so that the light transmitted through the upper speaker cover 266 is diffusely refracted. Therefore, in the upper speaker cover 266 and the upper speaker bracket 264, the diffused refraction of light makes it difficult for the player to see the through hole 266a formed in the upper left speaker 262 and the upper speaker cover 266. , The appearance can be similar to that of the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250.

[3-4. Top decoration unit]
Subsequently, the upper decorative unit 280 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 33 to 36. FIG. 33 is a front perspective view of the upper decorative unit in the door frame, and FIG. 34 is a rear perspective view of the upper decorative unit in the door frame. Further, FIG. 35 is an exploded perspective view of the upper decorative unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 36 is an exploded perspective view of the upper decorative unit disassembled and viewed from the rear.

As shown in FIG. 17, the upper decorative unit 280 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment is located at the upper center of the front surface of the door frame 5, and is located between the upper end edges of the right side decorative unit 200 and the left side decorative unit 240 on the central side. It is attached between them and decorates between them. As shown in the figure, the upper decorative unit 280 has a substantially inverted isosceles right triangle shape as a whole when viewed from the front, and penetrates both the left and right sides of the central opening 281a which largely penetrates the center and the central opening 281a. A front decorative member 281 having a pair of side openings 281b into which the tip of the upper bracket 120 of the door frame base unit 100 is inserted above the central opening 281a, and a rear side inside the central opening 281a of the front decorative member 281. The central lens 282 fitted from the rear, the inner lens 283 arranged at the rear end of the central lens 282, the pair of side lenses 284 fitted from the rear side into the side opening 281b of the front decorative member 281 and the outer shape of the front view. A main body member 285 having a shape similar to the front decorative member 281 and attached to the rear side of the front decorative member 281 so as to sandwich the central lens 282, the inner lens 283, and the pair of side lenses 284 with the front decorative member 281. The upper decorative substrate 286, which is arranged on the rear side of the main body member 285 and has a plurality of color LEDs 286a and 286b mounted on the front surface, and the upper decorative substrate 286 having a front view having substantially the same shape as the main body portion and covering the upper decorative substrate 286 from the rear side. A board cover 287 attached to the rear surface of the main body member 285 is provided.

Further, the upper decorative unit 280 extends rearward while being bent so as to be continuous from the lower end of the front decorative member 281. The upper part of the front end is supported by the front decorative member 281 and the rear end is attached to the door frame base unit 100 and is lowered. A lower surface decorative member 288 having a pair of lower opening 288a penetrating toward the lower surface, and a lower lens 289 fitted to the lower opening 288a of the lower surface decorative member 288 from above and fixed to the lower surface decorative member 288 and the substrate cover 287. , Is equipped. In the present embodiment, a plating layer having a metallic luster is formed on the surfaces of the front decorative member 281 and the lower surface decorative member 288. The LED 286a of the upper decorative substrate 286 is arranged at a position corresponding to the central lens 282, and the LED 286b is arranged at a position corresponding to the side lens 284 and the lower lens 289. The lens 284 and the lower lens 289 can be individually luminescent and decorated. Further, in the present embodiment, the LED 286a is a full-color LED and the LED 286b is a high-brightness white LED.

In the front decorative member 281 of the upper decorative unit 280, the inner peripheral shape of the central opening 281a is such that the central upper end is a side extending to the left and right and the central lower end is an apex, and each side extends in a loose arc shape. It is formed in a variable pentagonal shape, and has three protrusions extending from substantially the center of the upper side on both sides of the upper side and the apex of the lower end into the central opening 281a. Further, the front decorative member 281 is formed with a plurality of streaks extending diagonally outward and upward on the outside of the upper side of the central opening 281a, and the front decorative member 281 is formed from the central opening 281a by this streak. The blades are formed in a shape as if they are extended, and the side opening 281b is formed along the streak carving.

The central lens 282 fitted in the central opening 281a of the front decorative member 281 has an outer shape substantially the same as that of the central opening 281a, and has a shape that bulges forward and the front surface thereof. Is formed in a polyhedral shape by a plurality of faces facing different directions. The central lens 282 is formed of a transparent (colorless and transparent, colored transparent) resin. By fitting the central lens 282 into the central opening 281a of the front decorative member 281, the central lens 282 looks like a tokat jewel, and the front decorative member 281 looks like a jewel pedestal. ..

Further, the inner lens 283 arranged on the rear side of the central lens 282 is formed of a transparent resin so as to close the opening on the rear side of the central lens 282, and has a fine lens (or prism) on the surface. A plurality of light is formed so that the light from the upper decorative substrate 286 can be widely diffused toward the central lens 282. On the other hand, the side lens 284 fitted in the side opening 281b of the front decorative member 281 is formed of a transparent resin so that the front surface thereof is substantially continuous with the front surface of the front decorative member 281 in a state of being fitted in the side opening 281b. Has been done. Similar to the inner lens 283, a plurality of fine lenses (or prisms) are formed on the back surface side of the side lens 284, and the entire side lens 284 is substantially uniform due to the light emitted from the upper decorative substrate 286. It is designed to be able to emit light.

The inner lens 283 and the side lens 284 have a feeling of cloudiness due to a plurality of fine lenses formed on the surface, so that the rear side cannot be clearly seen through the inner lens 283 and the side lens 284. It has become.

The main body member 285 of the upper decorative unit 280 extends in a tubular shape in the front-rear direction in an outer shape substantially following the shape of the central opening 281a of the front decorative member 281, and the front end opening is inclined diagonally downward and the rear end is closed. The central portion 285a, which is inclined diagonally upward, and the rear end, which is arranged and closed on both sides of the central portion 285a, are located at substantially the same position as the rear end of the central portion 285a, and the front end extends shorter than the central portion 285a. A concave side portion 285b and a plurality of openings 285c formed at positions corresponding to the LEDs 286a and 286b mounted on the upper decorative substrate 286 through the rear end surfaces of the central portion 285a and the side portion 285b are provided. ing. When the upper decorative substrate 286 is arranged on the rear side of the main body member 285, the LED 286a of the upper decorative substrate 286 is inserted and arranged in the opening 285c so that the light from the LED 286a does not leak to the rear side. It has become. Further, the central portion 285a and the side portion 285b of the main body member 285 are recessed from the front side to the rear side so that the light from the corresponding LEDs 285a and 286b does not affect the sides.

Further, the lower surface decorative member 288 of the upper decorative unit 280 is formed so as to become thinner toward the rear, and the left and right side surface shapes thereof are the upper speaker covers 226 and 226 in the right side decorative unit 200 and the left side decorative unit 240. The shape is substantially the same as the shape of the ends of the upper end frames 202c and 242c of the upper end frames 202c and 242c, and the ends of the upper end frames 202c and 242c of the upper speaker covers 226 and 266 are placed and fixed. ing. The lower lens 289 is sandwiched between the lower surface decorative member 288 and the upper speaker covers 226 and 266. Further, light from the right side upper decorative substrate 214 and the left side upper decorative substrate 254 is supplied to the lower lens 289 via the upper speaker brackets 224 and 264 of the right side decorative unit 200 and the left side decorative unit 240. It is designed to emit light.

[3-5. Side speaker cover]
Next, the pair of side speaker covers 290 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 and 23. The side speaker cover 290 covers and decorates the front surface of the side speaker 130 attached to the door frame base unit 100, and includes the lower ends of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240, and the dish unit 300. It is placed between. The side speaker cover 290 supports the cover body 291 having a plurality of disc-shaped holes curved so as to cover the front surface of the side speaker 130 attached to the door frame base unit 100, and the outer periphery of the cover body 291 from the front side. A main body member 292 having an annular opening and being formed to be continuous with the lower ends of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240, and a lower plate of the plate unit 300 arranged under the main body member 292. It includes a lower member 293 formed so as to be continuous with the left and right rear ends of the cover 328.

In the side speaker cover 290, a plating layer having a metallic luster is formed on the surface of the main body member 292. Further, the lower member 293 is formed of a milky white translucent member similar to the lower dish cover 328 in the dish unit 300 described later. The side speaker cover 290 is attached to the front surface of the door frame base unit 100.

[3-6. Dish unit]
Subsequently, the dish unit 300 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 37 to 40. FIG. 37 is a front perspective view of the dish unit in the door frame, and FIG. 38 is a rear perspective view of the dish unit in the door frame. Further, FIG. 39 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 40 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit disassembled and viewed from the rear.

The plate unit 300 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment includes an upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302 for storing the game balls paid out from the prize ball device 740 described later, and the game stored in the upper plate 301. The ball can be supplied to the hitting ball launching device 650, which will be described later, via the ball feeding unit 580. As shown in FIGS. 39 and 40, the plate unit 300 includes a substantially plate-shaped plate-shaped plate unit base 310 fixed to the lower front surface of the door frame base unit 100 and extending in the left-right direction, and substantially the center of the front surface of the plate unit base 310. When the upper and rear sides of the dish-shaped upper plate body 312, which is fixed to the front and the left side (shaft support side) of the front view bulges forward, and the upper outer circumference of the upper plate body 312 are covered, the front ends are left and right in front view. The upper plate upper panel 314 formed in a curved shape so that the center of the direction protrudes forward, and the upper plate front portion having a plurality of openings 316a attached to the upper front edge of the upper plate upper panel 314 and penetrating in the vertical direction. A pair of left and right having a plurality of light guide portions 318a arranged between the decorative member 316 and the upper plate front decorative member 316 and the upper plate upper panel 314 and fitted in the opening 316a of the upper plate front decorative member 316. The upper plate upper lens 318 and the upper plate upper lens 318 are arranged on opposite sides of the upper plate upper panel 314, and are attached to the lower surface of the upper plate upper panel 314, and a plurality of color LEDs 320a and 322a are mounted on the upper surface. Light from the upper plate right decorative substrate 320 and the upper plate left decorative substrate 322, arranged between the upper plate upper lens 318 and the upper plate upper panel 314, and the upper plate right decorative substrate 320 and the upper plate left decorative substrate 322. The upper plate upper inner lens 319 and having a plurality of fine prisms for diffusing the upper plate upper lens 318 side are provided.

Further, the plate unit 300 is fixed to the front surface of the plate unit base 310 on the lower side of the upper plate body 312, and the upper side and the rear side are opened, and the center in the left-right direction bulges forward in the front view, and the front end is in the center in the left-right direction. A dish-shaped lower plate main body 324 formed so as to become lower toward the direction, and a dish-shaped lower plate main body 324 fixed to the upper part of the lower plate main body 324 A lower plate having a plate-shaped lower plate top plate 326 curved so as to become higher toward the center, an opening 328a along the front end of the lower plate top plate 326 and the lower plate main body 324, and a lower plate covering the outer periphery of the opening 328a. The cover 328, the dish side middle cover 330 arranged on both the left and right sides of the lower dish cover 328 and having an opening 330a penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the dish side middle cover fitted into the opening 330a of the dish side middle cover 330 from the rear side. It includes a lens 332 and a plate side outer cover 334 that is arranged on both the left and right outer sides of the plate side inner cover 330 and extends in the left-right direction to a position corresponding to the left and right ends of the door frame base unit 100. The countersunk side middle cover 330 arranged on the right side when viewed from the front has a lock hole 330b formed at the right end thereof so that the cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 described later faces. Further, a handle insertion hole 334a into which the handle device 500 is inserted is formed in the dish side outer cover 334 on the right side when viewed from the front.

Further, the plate unit 300 includes an upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 for pulling out the game balls attached to the plate unit base 310 and the upper plate main body 312 and stored in the upper plate 301 to the lower plate 302, and a lower plate main body 324. A lower plate ball pulling mechanism 350 attached to the lower surface for pulling out the game ball stored in the lower plate 302 downward, and a lower plate ball removing mechanism 350 attached to the upper left side of the plate unit base 310 and installed adjacent to the pachinko game machine 1. A ball rental unit 360 for operating a CR unit (not shown) is provided.

The plate unit 300 constitutes an upper plate 301 capable of storing game balls by a part of the plate unit base 310, an upper plate main body 312, an upper plate upper panel 314, and the like. Further, the plate unit 300 constitutes a lower plate 302 capable of storing game balls by a part of the plate unit base 310, a lower plate main body 324, a lower plate top plate 326, a lower plate cover 328, and the like.

As shown in FIG. 39, the dish unit base 310 in the dish unit 300 is formed in a substantially plate shape extending in the left-right direction, and a decorative portion 310a having a predetermined shape is formed on the upper end edge extending to the left and right. It is provided. A ball-renting unit mounting portion 310b for mounting the ball-renting unit 360 is formed at the left end of the decorative portion 310a so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction. The plate unit base 310 is arranged below the ball rental unit mounting portion 310b (near the upper left corner in front view), and has a horizontally long rectangular upper plate ball supply port 310c that penetrates in the front-rear direction and an upper plate ball supply port 310c. An upper plate ball discharge port 310d that penetrates in the front-rear direction and extends in the vertical direction to the lower side near the right end of the decorative portion 310a on the lower side of the mouth 310c (approximately the middle in the height direction of the plate unit base 310), and the upper plate. It is provided with a pair of lower plate support portions 310e which are arranged directly below the ball discharge port 310d and the upper plate ball supply port 310c and project forward and have the same upper surface. The upper plate ball discharge port 310d is continuously formed up to an intermediate position in the front-rear direction on the upper surface of the lower plate support portion 310e arranged directly below.

Further, the plate unit 300 is arranged between a pair of lower plate support portions 310e and is fitted with the rear ends of the lower plate main body 324 and the lower plate top plate 326 to form a horizontally long rectangular ring-shaped lower plate support in a front view. It is provided with a groove 310f and a rectangular lower plate ball supply port 310g arranged in the lower part on the right side of the center of the portion surrounded by the lower plate support groove 310f and penetrating in the front-rear direction. Further, as shown in FIG. 40, the dish unit base 310 has a lower dish ball supply gutter 310h extending rearward in a tubular shape so as to be continuous with the lower dish ball supply port 310g, and an open side of the lower dish ball supply gutter 310h. It is provided with a notch 310i formed on the side surface and having a size through which a game ball can pass.

The upper plate ball supply port 310c of the plate unit base 310 is a foul cover attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit via the notches 101a and 162 of the door frame base main body 110 and the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame base unit 100. It communicates with the first ball outlet 544a of the unit 540. The front end of the upper plate ball supply port 310c is provided with an induction recess 310j that extends long to the right in the front view and is recessed rearward. The guide recess 310j is inclined so that the right end side in the front view is slightly lower in the left-right direction, and is inclined so that the front end side is lower in the front-rear direction. As a result, the height difference between the front end of the guide recess 310j and the bottom surface of the upper plate body 312 becomes higher toward the right end of the guide recess 310j, and the right end of the guide recess 310j is equal to the bottom surface of the upper plate body 312. The height difference of is slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the front side of the upper plate ball supply port 310c is closed by the game ball stored in the upper plate 301, the game ball paid out from the prize ball device 740 via the foul cover unit 540 is released. Since the upper plate ball supply port 310c cannot be linearly exited into the upper plate 301 in front of the plate ball supply port 310c, the dispensed game ball abuts on the game ball with the front side of the upper plate ball supply port 310c closed and rolls. The direction of movement changes, and the player is guided to roll in the guide recess 310j to the right in front view, and is discharged from the vicinity of the right end of the guide recess 310j to the upper side of the game ball stored in the upper plate 301. It becomes. As a result, the game balls can be automatically stored in the upper and lower two stages in the upper plate 301, so that the player does not pull the game balls by hand when the game balls block the front of the upper plate ball supply port 310c. However, it is possible to continue to supply (release) the paid-out game balls into the upper plate 301, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling annoyed by the storage of the game balls in the upper plate 301. It is possible to prevent the player from deteriorating the interest in the game by devoting himself to the operation of driving the game ball and the game by the driven game ball, and to increase the storage amount of the game ball in the upper plate 301. Can be done.

The upper plate ball discharge port 310d of the plate unit base 310 has an opening 344a of the upper plate ball removal base 344 in the upper plate ball removal mechanism 340 and a ball feed opening 113 of the door frame base main body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. It communicates with the entrance 581a of the ball feeding unit 580 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 via the door frame base unit 100. Further, in the lower plate ball supply port 310 g, the lower plate ball supply trough 310h extending rearward from the rear side penetrates the ball passage port 110f of the door frame base main body 110 in the door frame base unit 100 and extends rearward. Above, the notch 310i of the lower plate ball supply trough 310h is connected to the second ball outlet 544b of the foul cover unit 540 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100, and the notch 310i of the lower plate ball supply trough 310h is in the upper plate ball removal mechanism 340. It is connected to the ball removal flow path 344c of the upper plate ball removal base 344.

In the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, the front end of the lower plate ball supply port 310 g is provided with an opening portion 310k that expands to the left in front view, and the lower plate ball supply port 310k is used to supply the lower plate ball. The front end of the mouth 310 g is in a state of spreading in the left-right direction. As a result, it is possible to prevent early ball clogging at the lower plate ball supply port 310 g due to the game balls in the lower plate 302 accumulated on the front side of the lower plate ball supply port 310 g, and more games can be played. The ball can be supplied into the lower plate 302.

The upper plate body 312 of the plate unit 300 is formed so that the left side (shaft support side) of the plate unit 300 bulges forward from the center and the bottom surface is generally lower on the left end side (open side) and the rear end side. There is. The bottom surface of the upper plate body 312 has a rear end on the shaft support side near the bottom of the upper plate ball supply port 310c in the plate unit base 310, and a rear end on the open side of the upper plate ball discharge port 310d in the plate unit base 310. The game balls are formed so as to be located near the intermediate positions in the vertical direction, and the game balls supplied from the upper plate ball supply port 310c to the upper plate main body 312 (upper plate 301) are guided to the upper plate ball discharge port 310d. It has become so.

A metal upper plate rail 312a that can come into contact with the game ball is attached to the upper plate main body 312 from the center in the left-right direction to the open side at the rear end of the bottom surface. Although not shown, the precision rail 312a is electrically grounded so that the static electricity charged on the game ball can be removed.

The upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300 extends in a curved shape from the upper end of the upper plate main body 312 so that the center in the left-right direction of the door frame 5 projects forward, and is outside the open side of the upper plate main body 312. A mounting hole 314a is formed which penetrates in the vertical direction and into which the upper plate ball removing button 341 of the upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 described later is attached. The upper plate upper panel 314 is formed in a stepped shape at the front end one step lower than the upper front end of the upper plate main body 312, and is upper at the center in the left-right direction with the decorative mounting portion 314b for attaching the upper plate front decorative member 316. It is provided with an operation unit mounting portion 314c, which is formed in a stepped shape lower than the decorative mounting portion 314b at a position on the front side of the dish body 312 and for mounting the operation unit 400 described later.

Although detailed description is omitted, the decorative mounting step portion 314b of the upper plate upper panel 314 is moved up and down at positions corresponding to the LEDs 320a and 322a of the upper plate right decorative board 320 and the upper plate left decorative board 322 mounted on the lower surface. An opening and a notch penetrating in the direction are formed, and the operation unit mounting portion 314c is formed with an opening through which a wiring cable connecting the operation unit 400 and the peripheral control board 4140 can pass. ..

The upper plate front decorative member 316 has a shape extending in a curved shape in the left-right direction along the front end of the upper plate upper panel 314, and the light guide portion of the upper plate upper lens 318 is formed through the plurality of openings 316a from the lower side. The 318a is fitted, and the upper plate upper lens 318 can be sandwiched between the upper plate upper panel 314 by attaching to the decorative mounting portion 314b of the upper plate upper panel 314. Further, below the upper plate upper lens 318, an upper plate upper inner lens 319 having a plurality of fine lenses (prisms) on the surface is arranged, and the upper plate right decorative substrate 320 and the upper plate left decorative substrate 322 are arranged. It is possible to sufficiently diffuse the light from the plate to make the entire upper plate upper lens 318 emit light and decorate substantially uniformly. As shown in the figure, the inner peripheral shape of the opening 316a in the upper plate front decorative member 316 is formed in a pear shape, and the same applies to the light guide portion 318a of the upper plate upper lens 318 fitted in the opening 316a. The shape is formed, and by fitting the light guide portion 318a, the opening 316a of the upper plate front decorative member 316 has an appearance as if a pear-shaped cut jewel is fitted. ..

The lower plate main body 324 of the plate unit 300 has a bottom plate 324a formed so as to fan out forward in a plan view, the rear end is formed linearly in the left-right direction, and the substantially center of the upper surface is the lowest, and the center of the bottom plate 324a. It is provided with a lower plate ball punching hole 324b formed so as to penetrate in the vertical direction, and a side plate 324c rising upward from the front end and the side end excluding the rear end of the bottom plate 324a. The side plate 324c of the lower plate main body 324 is formed in a curved shape so that the upper end rising upward from the side end of the bottom plate 324a is the lowest on the front side and becomes higher toward the rear side, and the side of the bottom plate 324a. The upper end that rises upward from the end is formed in a straight line, and the left and right ends of the lower plate top plate 326 are placed and connected to the straight portion of the upper end.

In the lower plate main body 324, the rear ends of the bottom plate 324a and the side plate 324c are inserted and supported in the lower plate support groove 310f formed on the front surface of the plate unit base 310. Further, the lower plate ball removing hole 324b of the lower plate main body 324 is closed by the opening / closing shutter 352 of the lower plate ball removing mechanism 350 arranged on the back surface side of the bottom plate 324a.

The lower plate cover 328 has an outer shape that bulges downward when viewed from the front, and each side is formed in an inverted triangular shape with an arc, and has an opening 328a that penetrates in the front-rear direction at the center. The inner shape of the opening 328a is a shape that matches the shape formed by the front end of the lower plate main body 324 and the lower plate top plate 326, and forms the opening of the lower plate 302. Further, the lower plate cover 328 is formed of a milky white resin having translucency, and although not shown, color LEDs are arranged on the back side at predetermined intervals, and the entire lower plate cover 328 emits light. It can be decorated.

The plate side middle cover 330 is arranged on both the left and right outer sides of the lower plate cover 328 in front view, and is predetermined along the lower side side of the lower plate cover 328 from substantially the center in the left-right direction to the side surface of the door frame 5 in front view. The upper rear end extending to the side surface of the door frame 5 extends in width so as to be attached to the front surface of the door frame base main body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. The dish side middle cover 330 is provided with an opening 330a penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the dish side middle cover lens 332 is fitted into the opening 330a from the rear side. Further, in the front view, the right side (open side) plate side middle cover 330 has a lock hole 330b penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 near the outer end portion (right end portion). Is formed, and when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the lock hole of the cylinder lock 1010 faces from the lock hole 330b.

The plate side middle cover 330 further includes a bottom plate portion 330c extending rearward from the lower part of the front end thereof, and the rear end of the bottom plate portion 330c is attached to the front surface of the door frame base main body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. It has become like. Further, a part of the lower side of the lower plate main body 324 is covered by the bottom plate portion 330c of the plate side middle cover 330.

The dish side outer cover 334 is arranged on both the left and right outer sides of the dish side middle cover 330 in front view, and has a substantially triangular shape along the side and bottom sides of the door frame 5 in front view, and is open rearward and upward. It is formed in the shape of a box. In the present embodiment, the dish side outer cover 334 on the right side (open side) is formed with a handle insertion hole 334a penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the handle bracket 140 in the door frame base unit 100. The dish side outer cover 334 is attached to the front surface of the door frame base main body 110 of the door frame base unit 100, and a part of the dish side outer cover 334 is attached to the dish unit base 310. Further, the lower side of the lower plate main body 324 except the central portion is covered by the plate side outer cover 334 and the plate side inner cover 330.

The upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 in the plate unit 300 is designed for the operation of the upper plate ball removing button 341 and the upper plate ball removing button 341 that are vertically attached to the mounting hole 314a of the upper plate upper panel 314. The operating piece 342, which moves up and down more than the vertical movement of the upper plate ball removal button 341 and is supported on the front side of the plate unit base 310, and the ball feeding unit 580, which slides up and down by the vertical movement of the operating piece 342, will be described later. The upper plate ball removal slider 343 and the upper plate ball removal slider 343, which are provided with a contact piece 343a that comes into contact with the operating rod 583c of the ball removal member 583 and are arranged on the rear side of the plate unit base 310, can be slid vertically. It is provided with an upper plate ball removing base 344, which is supported and attached to the rear side of the plate unit base 310.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 has an operating piece 342 that moves up and down together with the upper plate ball removing button 341 so that the upper plate ball removing button 341 is located at the upper moving end. It is urged upward by a coil spring. Further, the upper plate ball removal slider 343 is in a state of being urged upward by a coil spring provided between the upper plate ball removal slider 343 and the upper plate ball removal base 344.

The upper plate ball removal base 344 of the upper plate ball removal mechanism 340 closes the upper plate ball discharge port 310d of the plate unit base 310 and at the same time communicates with the upper plate ball discharge port 310d and opens forward 344a (FIG. 39) and the ball guidance flow path 344b (FIGS. 38 and FIG. 38) that guides the game ball that has passed through the opening 344a and the opening 344a on the back surface side of the upper plate ball removal base 344 downward and then guides it backward. 40), and after extending downward from the lower side of the ball guide flow path 344b, it extends substantially along the lower side of the upper plate ball removal base 344 toward the right end (shaft support side) in rear view. It is provided with a ball removal flow path 344c, which enables the game ball to be distributed.

In the upper plate ball removal base 344, the opening 344a communicates with the upper plate ball discharge port 310d, and the lower end of the ball guidance flow path 344b communicating with the opening 344a is the ball of the door frame base main body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. The game ball stored in the upper plate 301 is communicated with the entrance 581a of the ball feeding unit 580 attached to the rear side of the door frame base main body 110 through the feeding opening 113, and the ball feeding unit 580 is used. It is possible to supply to.

Further, in the ball removing flow path 344c of the upper plate ball removing base 344, the upper end adjacent to the ball guiding flow path 344b communicates with the ball removing port 581b of the ball feeding unit 580 via the ball feeding opening 113 of the door frame base main body 110. At the same time, the lower end extending toward the shaft support side communicates with the notch 310i of the lower plate ball supply gutter 310h in the plate unit base 310, and the game ball discharged from the ball outlet 581b of the ball feeding unit 580 is inserted. It can be guided to the lower plate 302. The lower part of the rear end of the ball removal flow path 344c is closed by the upper plate ball removal flow path cover 345.

When the upper plate ball removal mechanism 340 presses the upper plate ball removal button 341 downward against the urging force of the coil spring, the upper plate ball removal slider 343 slides downward and the contact piece 343a protruding rearward also Move down. Then, in the operating rod 583c of the ball pulling member 583 in the ball feeding unit 580 that comes into contact with the upper surface of the contact piece 343a, the partition portion 583a of the ball pulling member 583 rotates in a predetermined direction as the contact piece 343a moves downward. It moves, and the partition between the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b partitioned by the partition 583a is released, and the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b are in communication with each other. As a result, the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 are sent from the upper plate ball discharge port 310d to the entrance 581a of the ball feed unit 580 via the opening 344a of the upper plate ball removal base 344 and the ball guidance flow path 344b. After entering, it is discharged from the ball extraction port 581b to the ball extraction flow path 344c of the upper plate ball extraction base 344, and is discharged from the lower plate ball supply port 310g to the lower plate 302 via the lower plate ball supply trough 310h of the plate unit base 310. It can be discharged to.

Since the ball pulling member 583 of the ball feeding unit 580 is in contact with the upper surface of the contact piece 343a in the upper plate ball pulling slider 343 whose operating rod 583c is urged upward by the coil spring, the ball pulling member 583 Even if the game ball is vigorously supplied onto the partition portion 583a, the impact can be absorbed by the coil spring that urges the upper plate ball pulling slider 343 via the operating paddle 583c, and the ball pulling member 583 or the like can absorb the impact. It is possible to prevent the game ball from being damaged and to prevent the game ball from bouncing off at the partition portion 583a.

The lower plate ball removing mechanism 350 in the plate unit 300 is a lower plate ball removing base 351 arranged between the bottom plate portions 330c of the plate side middle cover 330 arranged on the left and right sides of the lower plate main body 324 in front view. , A plate-shaped opening / closing shutter 352 that is rotatably supported on the upper surface of the lower plate ball removing base 351 and can open / close the lower plate ball removing hole 324b of the lower plate main body 324, and the lower plate while rotating the opening / closing shutter 352. A lower plate ball removing slider 353 that is slidably supported in the front-rear direction on the upper surface of the ball removing base 351 and a lower plate ball removing button 354 attached to the front end of the lower plate ball removing slider 353 are provided.

The lower plate ball removing base 351 is provided with a base ball removing hole 351a penetrating in the vertical direction at a position facing the lower plate ball removing hole 324b of the lower plate main body 324. Further, the opening / closing shutter 352 has a closing portion 352a capable of closing the lower plate ball removing hole 324b, and a shutter ball removing hole arranged in front of the closing portion 352a and penetrating in the vertical direction substantially coincident with the lower plate ball removing hole 324b. 352b and the lower plate ball extraction base 351 are urged by a coil spring so that the closing portion 352a is positioned to close the lower plate ball extraction hole 324b and the base ball extraction hole 351a.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the open / close shutter 352 is provided with a contact pin capable of contacting the lower plate ball removal slider 353, and the contact pin abuts on the lower plate ball removal slider 353. The lower plate ball removal slider 353 rotates the closing portion 352a and the shutter ball extraction hole 352b so as to move rearward, and the lower plate ball removal slider 353 is slid forward by the urging force of the coil spring. Can be done.

Further, as shown in the figure, the lower plate ball removal button 354 is arranged at a position sandwiched between the left and right plate side middle covers 330 on the lower center side in the left-right direction of the lower plate cover 328 in the plate unit 300. The surface shape is such that it is smoothly continuous with the surface shape of the lower plate cover 328 and the plate side middle cover 330.

Further, in the lower plate ball removing mechanism 350, the shutter ball removing hole 352b of the opening / closing shutter 352 substantially coincides with the lower plate ball removing hole 324b of the lower plate main body 324 and the base ball removing hole 351a of the lower plate ball removing base 351. A holding mechanism 355 for holding the lower plate ball removing slider 353 in a predetermined position is further provided in order to hold the lower plate ball removal slider 353 in the moving position.

The lower plate ball removing mechanism 350 is in a closed state in which the lower plate ball removing button 354 is moved to the front end in a state where the surface shape of the lower plate ball removing button 354 is continuous with the surface shape of the lower plate cover 328 or the like. The lower plate ball removal hole 324b of the lower plate main body 324 is closed by the closing portion 352a of the opening / closing shutter 352. In this state, the game ball can be stored in the lower plate main body 324 (lower plate 302). When the lower plate ball removal button 354 in the closed state is pressed backward, the lower plate ball removal button 354 and the lower plate ball removal slider 353 slide backward, and the lower plate ball removal slider 353 slides backward to open and close. The shutter 352 rotates against the urging force of the coil spring so that the closing portion 352a and the shutter ball extraction hole 352b move rearward.

Then, as the opening / closing shutter 352 rotates backward, the shutter ball extraction hole 352b overlaps with the lower plate ball extraction hole 324b and the base ball extraction hole 351a, and eventually the shutter ball extraction hole 352b and the lower plate ball extraction hole 352b. Matching with 324b, the game ball stored in the lower plate 302 can be discharged to the lower side of the plate unit 300 through the lower plate ball extraction hole 324b. When the lower plate ball extraction slider 353 moves rearward to a position where the shutter ball extraction hole 352b and the lower plate ball extraction hole 324b substantially coincide with each other, the lower plate ball extraction slider 353 is held by the holding mechanism 355. By locking (holding) the slide of the lower plate ball removal slider 353, the lower plate ball removal button 354 remains in the open state retracted rearward, and the shutter ball removal hole 352b is the lower plate ball. It is held in a state of matching with the punching hole 3324b, and the game ball stored in the lower dish 302 can be discharged downward even if the lower dish ball pulling button 354 is not held down.

On the other hand, when closing the lower plate ball removal hole 324b, when the retracted open lower plate ball removal button 354 is further pressed backward, the holding of the lower plate ball removal slider 353 by the holding mechanism 355 is released, and the lower plate is released. The ball pulling slider 353 can be slid, and the closing portion 352a is urged in the direction of closing the lower plate ball pulling hole 324b by the coil spring, and the closing portion 352a is urged by the urging force to close the lower plate. It will rotate in the direction of moving in the direction (forward) of the ball extraction hole 324b. Then, as the opening / closing shutter 352 rotates forward, the lower plate ball removing slider 353 slides forward, the lower plate ball removing hole 324b is closed by the closing portion 352a, and the lower plate ball removing button 354 is lowered. The plate cover 328 and the like are returned to the closed position substantially coincident with the front surface, and the game ball can be stored in the lower plate 302.

The holding mechanism 355 of the lower plate ball removing mechanism 350 uses a known technique having the above-mentioned function, and the detailed mechanism thereof will be omitted.

The ball lending unit 360 in the plate unit 300 includes a ball lending button 361 and a return button 362 that can be pressed backward, and also includes a lending balance display unit 363 between the ball lending button 361 and the return button 362. When the ball lending button 361 is operated, it is detected by the ball lending switch 365a, and when the return button 362 is operated, it is detected by the return switch 365b. The display content of the residual frequency display 365c can be visually recognized via the loan residual display unit 363. The ball lending switch 365a, the return switch 365b, and the remaining frequency indicator 365c are mounted on the frequency display board 365, and the frequency display board 365 is mounted inside the ball lending unit 360. The ball lending unit 360 inserts cash or a prepaid card into the ball lending machine provided adjacent to the pachinko game machine 1, and then presses the ball lending button 361 to release a predetermined number of game balls into the dish unit. You can rent (pay out) into the upper plate 301 of 300, and when you press the return button 362, the balance of cash and prepaid card that you put in after subtracting the rest of the lent amount will be returned. ing. In addition, the loan balance display unit 363 displays the remaining number of cash and prepaid cards inserted into the ball lending machine.

The ball rental unit 360 is attached from the rear side to the ball rental unit mounting portion 310b formed on the decorative portion 310a at the upper end of the dish unit base 310. Further, the ball rental unit 360 is provided with a security cover mounting portion 364 that projects rearward from the rear surface and mounts and locks the mounting elastic piece 185 on the shaft support side (left side in front view) of the security cover 180.

[3-7. Operation unit]
Next, the operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 46. FIG. 41 is a front perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame, and FIG. 42 is a rear perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame. Further, FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the operating unit disassembled and viewed from the upper right front, and FIG. 44 is an exploded perspective view of the operating unit disassembled and viewed from the lower right front. Further, FIG. 45 is a cross-sectional view of the operation unit, and FIG. 46 is a cross-sectional view showing the pressing operation unit in the operation unit in a pressed state.

The operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment is arranged in front of the upper plate 301 at substantially the center in the left-right direction of the front view, and the dial operation unit 401 that can be rotated by the player and the press that the player can press. It is equipped with an operation unit 405, which can accept the player's operation and the dial operation unit 401 to move according to the game state, and not only the player can drive the game ball. , It is intended to be able to participate in the production during the game.

The operation unit 400 is an annular driven operation unit that is connected to an annular dial operation unit 401, a cylindrical pressing operation unit 405 inserted into the ring of the dial operation unit 401, and a lower end of the dial operation unit 401. A gear 410, a disk-shaped drive gear 412 that meshes with the driven gear 410, a dial drive motor 414 in which the drive gear 412 is fixed to a rotating shaft, an annular gear rail 416a that rotatably supports the driven gear 410, and an annular gear rail 416a. The operation unit holding member 416 having a cylindrical button support cylinder 416b that slidably supports the pressing operation unit 405 in the vertical direction, and the pressing operation unit 405 arranged in the button support cylinder 416b of the operation unit holding member 416. A base member having an upward urging spring 418, a gear rail 416a of the operation unit holding member 416 and an opening 420a through which the button support cylinder 416b can pass, and the operation unit holding member 416 and the dial drive motor 414 being fixed to the lower surface. The base is attached so as to sandwich the base member 420 under the upper cover 422 and the upper cover 422 which covers the upper surface of the base member 420 and has an opening 422a through which the inner cylinder portion 401a of the dial operation portion 401 can pass. It mainly includes a member 420 and a lower cover 424 that covers the lower surface of the dial drive motor 414.

In the present embodiment, the number of teeth of the driven gear 410 is twice the number of teeth of the drive gear 412, that is, the reduction ratio is selected to be a value 2, so that the drive gear 412 fixed to the rotating shaft of the dial drive motor 414 is used. When two rotations are made, the driven gear 410 that meshes with the drive gear 412 makes one rotation. The dial drive motor 414 is a stepping motor whose output shaft rotates by 15 ° in one step and 360 ° in 24 steps. Therefore, when the output shaft of the dial drive motor 414 rotates by 15 ° in one step, the drive gear 412 fixed to the output shaft also rotates by 15 °, and this rotation is transmitted to the driven gear 410, and the reduction ratio is a value of 2. As a result, the dial operation unit 401 connected to the driven gear 410 also rotates by 30 ° together with the driven gear 410.

Further, the operation unit 400 is fixed to the base member 420 so as to cover the upper side of the upper cover 422 and extends outward from both the left and right sides of the opening 426a through which the inner cylinder portion 401a of the dial operation portion 401 can pass and the opening 426a. A cover main body 426 having a fixing portion 426b for fixing to the operation unit mounting portion 314c in the dish unit 300, a surface cover 428 covering the upper surface of the cover main body 426, and an operation portion holding member 416 attached to the upper surface of the base member 420. The dial decorative board 430 has an opening 430a through which the inner cylinder portion 401a of the button support cylinder 416b and the dial operation portion 401 can pass, and a plurality of color LEDs 430b are mounted at positions corresponding to the ring of the dial operation portion 401 on the upper surface. A pair of rotation detection switches 432a and 432b fixed to the lower side of the base member 420 to detect the rotation of the dial operation unit 401, a pressure detection switch 432c to detect the operation of the pressing operation unit 405, and a pressing operation unit 405. It includes a button decorative substrate 432 having a color LED 432d mounted on the upper surface directly below. The rotation detection switches 432a and 432b and the pressure detection switch 432c have a U-shape, and the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b are mounted on the button decorative substrate 432 so that their open sides face upward. On the other hand, the press detection switch 432c is mounted on the button decorative substrate 432 with its open side tilted 90 ° from upward to the front side.

The dial operation unit 401 in the operation unit 400 is formed of a translucent material, and has a tubular inner cylinder portion 401a extending in the vertical direction and a surface extending outward from the upper end of the inner cylinder portion 401a. An annular top plate portion 401b with a predetermined decoration (specifically, a design having smooth unevenness is applied) and a tubular top plate portion 401b extending downward from the outer peripheral end of the top plate portion 401b. It mainly includes an outer cylinder portion 401c that is shorter than the outlet inner cylinder portion 401a, and a flange portion 401d that extends outward from the lower end of the outer cylinder portion 401c in an annular shape. The outer diameter of the flange portion 401d of the dial operation portion 401 is larger than the inner diameter of the opening 422a of the upper cover 422. Further, the dial operation unit 401 is provided with a connection locking portion (see FIG. 44) at the lower end of the inner cylinder portion 401a, and the dial operation unit 401 is locked by locking the connection locking claw 410b of the driven gear 410. The 401 and the driven gear 410 can be connected to each other. Further, the dial operation unit 401 further includes a projecting portion 401f protruding from the inner wall of the inner cylinder portion 401a toward the center at a position lowered by a predetermined distance from the upper end. The protruding portion 401f of the dial operating portion 401 is formed in an annular shape along the inner circumference of the inner cylinder portion 401a. Although the details will be described later, the protruding portion 401f can come into contact with the stepped portion 407a of the button cap 407 in the pressing operation portion 405, and the stepped portion 407a of the button cap 407 protrudes from the dial operating portion 401. By contacting the portion 401f, the button cap 407 (pressing operation portion 405) can be prevented from further immersing in the inner cylinder portion 401a (see FIG. 46).

As shown in the figure, the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401 and the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 in the pressing operation portion 405 are lowered so that their contact surfaces become lower toward the center of the dial operation portion 401. The surface is sloped so that the contact area when they come into contact with each other becomes large. As a result, the load from the pressing operation unit 405 can be more dispersed (released) to the dial operation unit 401 side, and the vibration from the dial operation unit 401 can be easily transmitted to the pressing operation unit 405 side. It has become.

Further, the pressing operation unit 405 in the operation unit 400 is formed in a cylindrical shape with the upper end closed, and has a bottomed tubular button body 406, a button cap 407 that closes the upper end of the button body 406, and a button cap. It includes a cap inner 408 that is arranged inside the 407 and is sandwiched between the upper end of the button body 406 and the button cap 407. The button body 406 of the pressing operation unit 405 has a truncated cone shape in which the lower surface of the bottom portion narrows downward, and the upper end of the coiled spring 418 is inserted into the lower surface of the truncated cone shape. In addition, a through hole 406a penetrating in the vertical direction is provided in the center of the lower end surface of the truncated cone shape, and light from the LED 432d of the button decorative substrate 432 is irradiated to the button cap 407 and the cap inner 408 through the through hole 406a. It has become like.

Further, the button body 406 has a pair of locking claws 406b whose lower end extends downward from the lower part of the outer circumference and protrudes outward in the direction perpendicular to the axis, and the locking claws 406b are the operating portion holding member 416. By locking with the locking convex portion 416g (see FIGS. 45 and 46) formed in the button support cylinder 416b, the upward moving end is moved so that the button body 406 does not come off from the button support cylinder 416b. It can be regulated. Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, a contact portion for preventing the locking claw 406b of the button body 406 from moving in the circumferential direction is provided in the button support cylinder 416b of the operation portion holding member 416. The button body 406 (pressing operation unit 405) is prevented from rotating in the button support cylinder 416b. A predetermined amount of gap is formed in the circumferential direction between the locking claw 406b of the button body 406 and the contact portion in the button support cylinder 416b, and the gap allows the button body 406 to have a predetermined angle. It can rotate within the range.

Further, the button body 406 includes a press detection piece 406c that can be detected by a press detection switch 432c mounted on the button decorative substrate 432 that extends downward from a position different from that of the locking claw 406b. When the button body 406 (pressing operation unit 405) moves downward against the urging force of the spring 418, the pressing detection piece 406c blocks the optical axis on the open side of the U-shaped pressing detection switch 432c. It is supposed to be detected.

As described above, the press detection switch 432c is mounted on the button decorative substrate 432 with its open side tilted toward you, and when the button body 406 (press operation unit 405) is operated and moves downward. In addition, a through hole 432h is formed in the button decorative substrate 432 so that the press detection piece 406c can penetrate the button decorative substrate 432. When the press detection piece 406c passes through the through hole 432h, it collides with the surface of the piezoelectric element 425 attached to the lower cover 424 and pushes the piezoelectric element 425. When the pressure detection piece 406c collides with the piezoelectric element 425 and is pushed in, the piezoelectric element 425 bends, and when the button body 406 (pressing operation unit 405) is not operated, the button body 406 (pressing operation unit 406) is urged by the spring 418. When 405) is pushed upward, the pressure detection piece 406c is also pushed upward, the deflection of the piezoelectric element 425 is eliminated and returns to the original state, and the penetration of the pressure detection piece 406c into the through hole 432h is released. At the same time, the blocking of the pressing detection switch 432c by the pressing detection piece 406c to the open side optical axis is also released. The piezoelectric element 425 is subjected to vibration that the deflection is eliminated, so that mechanical strain is generated and an electromotive force is generated. The piezoelectric element 425 obtains an electromotive force from the mechanical strain generated by its vibration, but since the electric power is alternating current, it is fully-wave rectified by a full-wave rectifier circuit described later and then charged by an electrolytic capacitor described later. It has become like.

The electric power charged by the electrolytic capacitor is supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 due to a power failure in the pachinko hall where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed due to an electrical trouble or a power failure due to an emergency in which a disaster occurs. When it is cut off, it is discharged to emit light of a plurality of color LEDs 430b mounted on the dial decorative board 430 and a color LED 432d mounted on the button decorative board 432, and a plurality of colors can be emitted. The light from the LED 430b is emitted toward the space formed by the inner cylinder portion 401a and the outer cylinder portion 401c of the dial operation unit 401, so that the entire dial operation unit 401 emits light, and the light from the color LED 432d emits light from the button cap. The entire pressing operation unit 405 emits light by being irradiated toward the 407 and the cap inner 408.

As a result, even if a power outage (a power outage due to an electrical trouble in the pachinko hall where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed or a power outage due to an emergency when a disaster occurs) occurs and the pachinko hall is pitch black. Since the pachinko game machine 1 is installed adjacent to the pachinko island facility by emitting light from the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 by the electric power charged in the electrolytic capacitor WAC0, the dial operation unit 401 is installed in the event of a power failure. , And the light emission of the pressing operation unit 405 becomes an emergency light, which can be used as a mark for the player to evacuate to the outside of the concourse or the pachinko hall. In other words, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can function as a mark for evacuating the player to the outside of the concourse or the pachinko hall by emitting light as an emergency light in the event of a power failure. There is.

In addition, a power outage (a power outage due to an electrical trouble in the pachinko hall where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed or an emergency occurs) is caused by the player simply operating the pressing operation unit 405 while playing the game. When a power failure occurs and the pachinko hall becomes pitch black, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can generate electric power to emit light as an emergency light in the event of a power failure and charge the electrolytic capacitor WAC0. Therefore, although the player does not notice it, it contributes to evacuating other players to the outside of the concourse or pachinko hall.

Further, as shown in the figure, the button cap 407 of the pressing operation unit 405 has an outer diameter lower than the substantially center in the vertical direction and a smaller diameter than the upper side, and the step portion 407a is located between the upper side and the lower side. Is formed. The button cap 407 (pressing operation unit 405) has a diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the protruding portion 401f in the dial operation unit 401 on the lower side of the step portion 407a, and a dial operation unit on the upper side of the step portion 407a. The diameter is smaller than the inner diameter of the inner cylinder portion 401a of the 401 and is larger than the inner diameter of the protruding portion 401f. As a result, when the button cap 407 (pressing operation unit 405) is inserted into the inner cylinder portion 401a from above the dial operation unit 401, the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 comes into contact with the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation unit 401. , The button cap 407 (pressing operation unit 405) can no longer be immersed in the inner cylinder portion 401a (see FIG. 46).

Further, the button cap 407 and the cap inner 408 of the pressing operation unit 405 are formed of a material having a translucent ring. The characters "Push" are displayed on the upper surface of the cap inner 408, and the characters can be visually recognized from the outside through the button cap 407.

The driven gear 410 in the operation unit 400 is provided with a plurality of gear teeth that mesh with the drive gear 412 on the outer circumference of the annular shape. The inner diameter of the driven gear 410 is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the button support cylinder 416b in the operating portion holding member 416, and the annular sliding surface is in contact with the gear rail 416a of the operating portion holding member 416 on the lower surface. It has a moving surface 410a. By inserting the driven gear 410 into the button support cylinder 416b and bringing the sliding surface 410a into contact with the gear rail 416a, the driven gear 410 can slide and rotate substantially concentrically with the button support cylinder 416b. It has become.

Further, the driven gear 410 includes a pair of connecting locking claws 410b that extend upward from the opposite positions of the upper ends and then project inward, and the connecting locking claws 410b are used in the dial operation unit 401. By locking the inner cylinder portion 401a with the connection locking portion 401e, the driven gear 410 and the dial operation portion 401 are integrally rotatably connected.

Further, the driven gear 410 includes a plurality of rotation detection pieces 410c that protrude downward from the lower end and are arranged in a row at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. These rotation detection pieces 410c are detected by blocking the optical axis on the open side of the pair of U-shaped rotation detection switches 432a and 432b attached to the button decorative substrate 432, and the details will be described later. However, due to the slit 410d formed between the rotation detection piece 410c and the rotation detection piece 410c, the driven gear 410, that is, the dial operation unit 401, is subjected to the detection pattern of the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b for the rotation detection piece 410c. The direction of rotation can be detected. In the present embodiment, the rotation detection piece 410c and the slit 410d have substantially the same length in the circumferential direction.

Further, as shown in the figure, the drive gear 412 in the operation unit 400 is a spur gear that meshes with the driven gear 410, and is fixed so as to be integrally rotatable with the rotation shaft of the dial drive motor 414. Further, the dial drive motor 414 is a known stepping motor capable of arbitrarily controlling the rotation direction, rotation speed, and rotation angle, and the dial drive motor 414 rotationally drives the drive gear 412 via the rotation shaft. Therefore, the dial operation unit 401 can be rotated via the driven gear 410. Further, the dial drive motor 414 alternately repeats the rotation of rotating the drive gear 412 (rotating shaft) in the forward direction and the rotation in which the drive gear 412 (rotating shaft) is rotated in the reverse direction in small steps to rotate the dial operation unit 401 clockwise and counterclockwise. Since the rotation can be alternately repeated in small steps, the dial operation unit 401 can be vibrated. Further, by stopping the rotation of the dial drive motor 414 for a short time at each predetermined rotation angle based on the detection signals from the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b, the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 is clicked. It is possible to give a feeling.

Further, the operation unit holding member 416 of the operation unit 400 includes an annular gear rail 416a that rotatably supports the driven gear 410, and a button body 406 of the operation unit 405 that protrudes upward from the inside of the gear rail 416a in a tubular shape. A button support cylinder 416b that slidably supports the switch in the vertical direction, and a locking convex portion 416g that is formed on the inner peripheral surface of the button support cylinder 416b near the bottom and can be locked with the locking claw 406b of the button body 406. (See FIGS. 45 and 46) and a through hole 416c that penetrates the center of the bottom of the button support cylinder 416b and sends light from the LED 432d mounted on the button decorative substrate 432 into the button support cylinder 416b (pressing operation unit 405). The opening 416d through which the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b attached to the button decorative substrate 432 can pass through the bottom portion outside the button support cylinder 416b in the vertical direction, and the bottom portion inside the button support cylinder 416b in the vertical direction. An opening 416e in which a pressure detection switch 432c attached to the button decorative substrate 432 is seen from above, and a pair of substrate holding claws 416f for locking and holding the button decorative substrate 432 extending downward from the lower surface. I have.

Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the operation unit holding member 416 is arranged in the button support cylinder 416b, and forms a predetermined amount of gap in the circumferential direction with respect to the locking claw 406b of the button body 406 and locks the button body 406. It further includes a plurality of contact portions capable of contacting the claw 406b. The contact portion allows the button body 406 (pressing operation portion 405) to rotate within a predetermined angle range and prevents the button body 406 (pressing operation unit 405) from rotating around in the button support cylinder 416b. Further, although detailed description of the operation unit holding member 416 is omitted, screw holes for fixing to the base member 420, positioning bosses for positioning with the base member 420 and the button decorative substrate 432, and the like are appropriately positioned. Be prepared for.

The operation unit holding member 416 slides the driven gear 410 (dial operation unit 401) around a predetermined rotation axis by inserting the driven gear 410 on the outer circumference of the button support cylinder 416b and mounting it on the gear rail 416a. It can be supported so that it can move and rotate. Further, by inserting the button body 406 of the pressing operation unit 405 into the button support cylinder 416b, the pressing operation unit 405 can be slidably supported in the vertical direction via the button body 406. .. A coiled spring 418 is arranged between the bottom of the button support cylinder 416b and the truncated cone-shaped lower surface of the button body 406. The spring 418 causes the button body 406 (pressing operation unit). 405) is in a state of being urged upward.

The base member 420 in the operation unit 400 is made of a metal such as an aluminum alloy, so that the operation unit 400 is not easily damaged even if the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 is strongly hit. The base member 420 penetrates the lower concave portion 420b, which is recessed upward so that the outer periphery of the operating portion holding member 416 can be fitted, and the bottom portion (ceiling portion) of the lower concave portion 420b in the vertical direction, and the operating portion holding member 416. An opening 420a having an inner shape through which the gear rail 416a of the above can pass, and an upper recess 420c arranged on the opposite side of the opening 420a from the lower recess 420b and recessed downward to accommodate at least the driven gear 410. Is equipped with. Further, as shown in FIG. 44, the base member 420 is opened downward to the outside of the lower recess 420b, and the motor mounting portion 420d for mounting the dial drive motor 414 and the lower recess 420b from the outside to the bottom. A plurality of (four in the present embodiment) leg portions 420e projecting by a predetermined amount, and positioning holes 420f opening downward at the lower ends of each leg portion 420e are provided.

Further, the base member 420 has a plurality of cover fixing portions 420g for fixing the cover main body 426 arranged above the upper recess 420c, and the cover fixing portion 420g is upward from different positions outside the upper recess 420c. It is provided with a plurality of board mounting bosses 420h for mounting the dial decorative board 430 projecting to. Further, although detailed description is omitted, the base member 420 is formed with positioning bosses, mounting holes, and the like for positioning each member at appropriate positions on the upper surface and the lower surface thereof.

The base member 420 has a predetermined screw after fitting and inserting the operation portion holding member 416 into the lower recess 420b so that the button support cylinder 416b and the gear rail 416a pass from the lower side with respect to the central opening 420a. Is screwed into the operation portion holding member 416 from the upper side through the ceiling portion of the lower recess 420b, so that the operation portion holding member 416 can be supported. Although detailed illustration of the base member 420 is omitted, when the operation unit holding member 416 is supported, the upper end of the gear rail 416a is slightly above the upper surface of the ceiling portion of the lower recess 420b, that is, the bottom surface of the upper recess 420c. The driven gear 410 mounted on the gear rail 416a can slide and rotate in the upper recess 420c without any problem.

Further, in the leg portion 420e of the base member 420, the positioning hole 420f formed at the lower end thereof is fitted with the positioning projection 424a formed on the upper surface of the bottom portion of the lower cover 424 described later, and the base member 420. The 420 and the lower cover 424 can be positioned at positions determined to each other. Further, the board mounting boss 420h of the base member 420 protrudes to a position above the driven gear 410 housed and arranged in the upper recess 420c, and the dial decorative board 430 mounted on the board mounting boss 420h is driven. It is designed so that it does not come into contact with the gear 410.

Further, the base member 420 comes into contact with the upper surface of the dial drive motor 414 by attaching the dial drive motor 414 to the motor mounting portion 420d, and the heat from the dial drive motor 414 is transferred to the base member 420 side. The heat of the dial drive motor 414 can be sufficiently transferred to and dissipated by the base member 420. As a result, overheating of the dial drive motor 414 can be suppressed, and it is possible to prevent a malfunction of the dial drive motor 414 or the like due to overheating.

The upper cover 422 of the operation unit 400 has a box shape with the lower side open, and has an inner diameter opening 422a through which the outer cylinder portion 401c of the dial operation portion 401 can pass and the collar portion 401d cannot pass through. ing. The upper cover 422 has a direction (left-right direction in the pachinko gaming machine 1) connecting the axis of the pressing operation unit 405 (driven gear 410) and the axis of the dial drive motor 414 (drive gear 412) in a plan view. It is formed so as to extend long, and is provided with engaging claws 422b protruding downward at both ends in the long axis direction. By engaging the engaging claws 422b with the engaging portion 424b of the lower cover 424, The upper cover 422 and the lower cover 424 can be assembled.

Further, the upper cover 422 is a claw-shaped locking that extends downward from the outer circumference in one of the short axis directions (front-rear direction in the pachinko game machine 1) (front side in the pachinko game machine 1) and the lower end protrudes outward. It has a piece 422c. The locking piece 422c can be locked to the upper plate front decorative member 316 of the plate unit 300, and by locking the locking piece 422c to the upper plate front decorative member 316, It is possible to prevent the operation unit 400 from coming out of the operation unit mounting portion 314c upward.

The upper cover 422 has the operation unit holding member 416, the driven gear 410, the dial decorative substrate 430, the dial operation unit 401, and the like attached to the base member 420, and the dial operation unit 401 from below with respect to the opening 422a. By covering the upper part of the base member 420 so as to pass through, it is possible to prevent the dial operation unit 401 from coming out upward by the opening 422a.

On the other hand, the lower cover 424 of the operation unit 400 has a box shape with an open upper part, and the outer peripheral shape is substantially the same as the outer peripheral shape of the upper cover 422, and the legs of the base member 420 are located at predetermined positions on the upper surface of the bottom. It is provided with a positioning protrusion 424a that can be fitted with the positioning hole 420f at the lower end of the 420e. The lower cover 424 is provided with engaging portions 424b that can be engaged with the engaging claws 422b of the upper cover 422 at the upper ends of both ends in the long axis direction (left-right direction in the pachinko game machine 1), and the engaging portions 424b. By engaging the engaging claw 422b with the lower cover 424, the upper cover 422 can be attached to the lower cover 424.

As shown in the figure, the cover body 426 of the operation unit 400 has an opening 426a that penetrates in the center in the vertical direction and allows the dial operation unit 401 (excluding the collar portion 401d) to pass through, and extends outward from both the left and right sides of the opening 426a. It includes a fixing portion 426b fixed to the operation unit mounting portion 314c of the serving plate unit 300, and a fixing boss 426c fixed to the cover fixing portion 420g of the base member 420 extending downward from the lower surface of the outer circumference of the opening 426a. ..

The operation unit 400 is attached to the dish unit 300 via the fixing portion 426b of the cover main body 426, and although detailed illustration is omitted, when the operation unit 400 is attached to the operation unit attachment portion 314c of the dish unit 300, it is attached. The lower surface of the operation unit 400 (lower cover 424) is mounted so as to be slightly above the upper surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c (for example, 0.5 mm to 2.0 mm), and the operation unit 400 is pressed. The cover body 426 is elastically deformed when it is hit or hit, so that the impact can be mitigated.

In the operation unit 400, with the surface cover 428 removed, the fixing portion 426b of the cover main body 426 is attached to the operation unit mounting portion 314c of the dish unit 300 with a predetermined screw, and then the cover main body 426 The structure is such that the surface cover 428 is attached to the upper surface.

In the operation unit 400 of the present embodiment, the rotation detection piece 410c of the driven gear 410 that rotates together with the dial operation unit 401 has the length in the circumferential direction in the slit between the adjacent rotation detection pieces 410c and the circumference of the rotation detection piece 410c. The lengths in the directions are the same. Further, in the pair of rotation detection switches 432a and 432b mounted on the button decorative substrate 432, the circumferential interval corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 is 2.5 times the circumferential length of the rotation detection piece 410c. It is said that. As a result, although details will be described later, when the player rotates the dial operation unit 401, a time lag occurs between the detection and non-detection of the rotation detection piece 410c by the pair of rotation detection switches 432a and 432b, and each rotation. From the detection pattern of the rotation detection piece 410c by the detection switches 432a and 432b, it is possible to detect in which direction the dial operation unit 401 is rotating.

Further, the operation unit 400 of the present embodiment will be described in detail later, but the dial operation unit 401 can be rotated in the clockwise or counterclockwise direction by the driving force of the dial drive motor 414. There is. Further, the operation unit 400 rotates the dial operation unit 401 stepwise by the driving force of the dial drive motor 414 using the stepping motor, or when the player rotates the dial operation unit 401, the operation unit 400 rotates the dial operation unit 401. It is possible to assist the rotation, prevent it from rotating intentionally, and give a click feeling to the rotation. Further, the operation unit 400 can vibrate the dial operation unit 401 by alternately repeating the rotation of rotating the dial drive motor 414 in the forward direction and the rotation in which the dial drive motor 414 is rotated in the reverse direction in small steps.

Further, in the operation unit 400 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 46, when the pressing operation portion 405 is pressed downward, the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 comes into contact with the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401, and the button is pressed. Since the cap 407 (pressing operation unit 405) can no longer be immersed in the inner cylinder portion 401a, the load applied to the pressing operation unit 405 is applied to the step portion 407a and the protruding portion 401f. It can be dispersed to the dial operation unit 401 side via the dial operation unit 401, so that the pressing operation unit 405 (operation unit 400) is not easily broken.

Further, in the operation unit 400 of the present embodiment, the dial drive motor 414 is moved in small steps in a state where the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed and the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 and the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation unit 401 are in contact with each other. By alternately repeating the rotation of forward rotation and the rotation of reverse rotation, the pressing operation unit 405 can be vibrated together with the dial operation unit 401, and the vibration of the pressing operation unit 405 surprises the player to play a game. It is designed to entertain the production.

Next, a dial vibration control capable of vibrating the dial operation unit 401 by alternately repeating the rotation of rotating the dial drive motor 414 in the forward direction and the rotation of the dial drive motor 414 in the reverse direction will be described. As described above, the dial drive motor 414 is a stepping motor whose output shaft rotates by 15 ° in one step and 360 ° in 24 steps. Therefore, when the output shaft of the dial drive motor 414 rotates by 15 ° in one step, the drive gear 412 fixed to the output shaft also rotates by 15 °, and this rotation is transmitted to the driven gear 410, and the reduction ratio is a value of 2. As a result, the dial operation unit 401 connected to the driven gear 410 also rotates by 30 ° together with the driven gear 410.

The output shaft of the dial drive motor 414 is rotated forward by one step and then reversed by one step. By alternately repeating such one-step forward rotation and reverse rotation, the dial operation unit 401 Can be rotated alternately in both clockwise and counterclockwise directions in small steps to create a state in which the dial operation unit 401 is vibrating. Since the surface of the top plate portion 401b of the dial operation portion 401 is designed to have smooth irregularities, the dial operation portion 401 can be rotated alternately clockwise and counterclockwise in small steps. When the player's finger or palm touches the top plate 401b of the dial operation unit 401, the smooth unevenness on the surface of the top plate 401b moves the finger or palm to add vibration. It is also possible to make people feel.

Specifically, the dial vibration control that alternately repeats the rotation of rotating the output shaft of the dial drive motor 414 in the forward direction and the rotation in the reverse direction by one step is specifically performed by the peripheral control unit 4150 of the peripheral control board 4140 (FIG. See 100). The peripheral control MPU 4150a (see FIG. 100) of the peripheral control unit 4150 is a command from the main control board 4100 (see FIG. 100) (for example, a special figure 1 tuning effect start command classified in relation to the special drawing 1 tuning effect). When a special figure 2 tuning effect start command, etc. (see FIG. 118), which is classified as related to the special figure 2 tuning effect, is received, peripheral control of the peripheral control unit power-on processing described later is based on the received command. In the part steady processing (see steps S1009 to S1038 in FIG. 143), the dial excitation is performed according to the schedule data for alternately repeating the rotation of rotating the output shaft of the dial drive motor 414 forward and reverse rotation by one step. Take control. The schedule data of the dial vibration control defines the start time and the end time of the dial vibration control, and is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 4150b (see FIG. 100) of the peripheral control unit 4150. .. The peripheral control MPU4150a performs dial vibration control according to the schedule data in the motor and solenoid drive processing in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing (see step S1104 in FIG. 145), which will be described later.

Next, a rotation direction change control capable of rotating the dial operation unit 401 in a clockwise direction or a counterclockwise direction will be described. As described above, the dial operation unit 401 is connected to the driven gear 410, and a plurality of rotation detection pieces 410c arranged in a row at the driven gear 410 at regular intervals are detected by a pair of rotation detection switches 432a and 432b. The rotation direction is detected based on the detection pattern.

The rotation direction change control changes the rotation direction when the player's finger or palm touches the dial operation unit 401 and the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 stops while the dial operation unit 401 is rotating clockwise. When the dial operation unit 401 is started to rotate counterclockwise or the dial operation unit 401 is rotated counterclockwise, the player's finger or palm touches the dial operation unit 401 to perform the dial operation unit 401. When the rotation of the dial is stopped, the rotation direction is changed and the dial operation unit 401 is started to rotate clockwise. When the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 is stopped, the rotation of the driven gear 410 connected to the dial operation unit 401 is also stopped. Therefore, the dial drive motor 414 fixed to the drive gear 412 that meshes with the driven gear 410. The rotation of the output shaft is also stopped, and the dial drive motor 414, which is a stepping motor, is in a stepped-out state. As described above, in the present embodiment, the dial drive motor 414, which is a stepping motor, can be stepped out by the player's will, so that the player touches the dial operation unit 401 with his / her finger or palm. The rotation of the dial operation unit 401 can be forcibly stopped or the rotation direction can be changed.

Specifically, it is performed by the peripheral control unit 4150 (see FIG. 100) of the peripheral control board 4140. The peripheral control MPU 4150a (see FIG. 100) of the peripheral control unit 4150 is a command from the main control board 4100 (see FIG. 100) (for example, a special figure 1 tuning effect start command classified in relation to the special drawing 1 tuning effect). When a special figure 2 tuning effect start command, etc. (see FIG. 118), which is classified as related to the special figure 2 tuning effect, is received, peripheral control of the peripheral control unit power-on processing described later is based on the received command. In the partial steady processing (see steps S1009 to S1038 of FIG. 143), the rotation direction change control is performed according to the schedule data for rotating the output shaft of the dial drive motor 414 in the forward direction and in the reverse direction. The schedule data of the rotation direction change control defines the rotation start time and rotation end time of the output shaft of the dial drive motor 414, and is previously stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b (see FIG. 100) of the peripheral control unit 4150. Multiple are stored. The peripheral control MPU4150a is a rotation detection switch history creation process (see FIG. 148) executed as one process (see step S1108 of FIG. 145) in the operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later. From the created rotation detection switch detection history information DSW0-HIST and DSW1-HIST, is the dial operation unit 401 stopped (in other words, is the dial drive motor 414 out of step)? In the motor and solenoid drive processing in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing (step S1104 in FIG. 145), it is grasped whether the state is rotating in the clockwise direction or the counterclockwise direction. ), Rotation direction change control is performed according to the schedule data.

For example, in the peripheral control MPU4150a, when the dial operation unit 401 is currently rotated clockwise, the dial operation unit 401 is rotated clockwise from the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW0-HIST and DSW1-HIST. When it is grasped that the dial operation unit 401 is in the state of being stopped, the rotation direction change control is continuously performed according to the schedule data for rotating the dial operation unit 401 clockwise (in other words, the dial operation unit 401 is stopped). When it is grasped that the dial drive motor 414 is out of step) or is rotating counterclockwise, the rotation direction change control is performed according to the schedule data for rotating the dial operation unit 401 counterclockwise. ..

Further, in the peripheral control MPU4150a, when the dial operation unit 401 is currently rotated counterclockwise, the dial operation unit 401 is rotated counterclockwise from the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW0-HIST and DSW1-HIST. When it is grasped that the dial operation unit 401 is in a state of being stopped, the rotation direction change control is continuously performed according to the schedule data for rotating the dial operation unit 401 counterclockwise (while the dial operation unit 401 is stopped (). In other words, when it is grasped that the dial drive motor 414 is out of step) or rotating clockwise, the rotation direction change control is performed according to the schedule data for rotating the dial operation unit 401 clockwise. Do.

As described above, the dial vibration control and the rotation direction change control described above both rotate the output shaft of the dial drive motor 414 in the forward or reverse direction, but the latter rotation direction change control is the dial operation unit 401. The former dial vibration control is executed when an external factor such as when the rotation direction of the peripheral control MPU4150a is actually rotating in the opposite direction to the intended direction or when the motor is stopped. Is completely different in that the period for rotating the output shaft of the dial drive motor 414 forward or reverse is preset and executed regardless of the occurrence of an external factor.

Further, in the rotation direction change control, when it is grasped that the dial drive motor 414 is out of step, the rotation direction of the dial operation unit 401 is suddenly changed to the reverse rotation direction, whereas the dial vibration control Then, since the dial operation unit 401 is completely different in that it vibrates, in the rotation direction change control, the effect of the effect using the dial operation unit 401 created by the dial vibration control is the same as the effect of the effect. It can be created by using the dial operation unit 401 of.

Next, a click generation control that can give a click feeling to the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 will be described. As described above, since the dial drive motor 414 is a stepping motor, a static torque is generated in the output shaft of the dial drive motor 414 by maintaining an energized state (excited state) in a specific phase of the stepping motor. Can be done. Here, in the present embodiment, the first static torque generation state in which the excited state is maintained for the specific one phase and the static torque is generated, and the stationary torque state in which the excited state is maintained for the specific two phases is stationary. A mechanism for creating a second static torque generation state for generating torque is adopted.

In the first static torque generation state, when the dial operation unit 401 is rotated beyond the static torque in this state, the dial operation unit 401 is rotated by the driven gear 410, and the drive gear 412 is fixed to the dial drive. When transmitted to the output shaft of the motor 414, this output shaft detuns and rotates step by step, that is, it rotates by 15 °, and this detuning and rotating operation is transmitted as a click feeling of the dial operation unit 401. .. Even in the second static torque generation state, when the dial operation unit 401 is rotated beyond the static torque in this state, the dial operation unit 401 is rotated by the driven gear 410, and the drive gear 412 is fixed to the dial drive. When transmitted to the output shaft of the motor 414, this output shaft detuns and rotates step by step, that is, it rotates by 15 °, and this detuning and rotating operation is transmitted as a click feeling of the dial operation unit 401. ..

In the second static torque generation state, the excited state is maintained for the specific two phases, so that the exciting state is maintained for the specific one phase, which is 2 for the first static torque generation state. Double the static torque can be obtained. In other words, the click feeling of the dial operation unit 401 in the second static torque generation state is transmitted twice as much as the click feeling of the dial operation unit 401 in the first static torque generation state.

The stepping motor is usually controlled so as to prevent step-out so as not to become uncontrollable, but in the present embodiment, the dial operation unit is controlled by positively stepping out the stepping motor. A click feeling can be obtained from the rotation operation of the 401, and by generating the click feeling in two stages, the click feeling of the dial operation unit 401 in the first static torque generation state can be lightly felt. On the other hand, the click feeling of the dial operation unit 401 in the second static torque generation state can be felt heavily.

Specifically, the peripheral control unit 4150 (see FIG. 100) of the peripheral control board 4140 performs the click generation control that can give a click feeling to the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401. The peripheral control MPU 4150a (see FIG. 100) of the peripheral control unit 4150 is a command from the main control board 4100 (see FIG. 100) (for example, a special figure 1 tuning effect start command classified in relation to the special drawing 1 tuning effect). When a special figure 2 tuning effect start command, etc. (see FIG. 118), which is classified as related to the special drawing 2 tuning effect, is received, peripheral control of the peripheral control unit power-on processing described later is based on the received command. In the partial steady processing (see steps S1009 to S1038 of FIG. 143), click generation control is performed according to schedule data for generating static torque in the output shaft of the dial drive motor 414. The schedule data of the click generation control defines the timing of generating the static torque on the output shaft of the dial drive motor 414 and the timing of stopping, and the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 (see FIG. 100). Multiple are stored in advance in. Peripheral control MPU4150a performs click generation control according to schedule data in motor and solenoid drive processing in peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing (see step S1104 in FIG. 145).

In this way, the click generation control is executed when the dial operation unit 401 is stopped, whereas the rotation direction change control is executed when the dial operation unit 401 is rotating. It is completely different in that it is a thing. Further, in the click generation control, there is a click feeling when the dial operation unit 401 is rotated, whereas in the rotation direction change control, the rotation direction is changed by hindering (preventing) the rotation of the dial operation unit 401. Since it is completely different in that it suddenly changes in the reverse rotation direction, in the click generation control, the same dial operation is performed with a completely different feeling from the effect using the dial operation unit 401 created by the rotation direction change control. It can be created by using the part 401.

Here, torque-free control in which no static torque is applied to the output shaft of the dial drive motor 414 will be described. In this torque-free control, each phase of the dial drive motor 414 is in a non-energized state (non-excited state), and the output shaft of the dial drive motor 414 is torque-free. That is, even if the dial operation unit 401 is rotated in the clockwise or counterclockwise direction, no load or click feeling that hinders the operation is generated.

To briefly explain the effect using the torque-free control, for example, the effect screen selected by operating the dial operation unit 401 and rotating the dial operation unit 401 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 (see FIG. 95). At the same time, the click generation control described above gives a click feeling to the dial operation unit 401, and suddenly when the player operates the dial operation unit 401 to rotate it clockwise or counterclockwise. , It can be used for a state in which the click generation control is stopped and torque-free, that is, the torque-free control is shifted to, and the player selects an unintended effect screen (scoops his / her foot). In other words, in the click generation control, the static torque is generated in the output shaft of the dial drive motor 414, whereas in the torque-free control, the generated static torque is forcibly released to the player's finger. Since the static torque that is the load from the dial operation unit 401 applied to the palm can be suddenly removed, the forced release of the static torque gives a slip feeling to the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401, and the player's finger or palm. Will be given to.

As described above, the present embodiment is based on a completely new idea of using the stepping motor as a man-machine interface in addition to the conventional idea of driving the movable body by using the stepping motor.

Although not shown in the present embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 4150a (see FIG. 100) of the peripheral control board 4140 is used in the operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later (step S1108 in FIG. 145). The dial operation unit 401 is stopped from the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW0-HIST and DSW1-HIST created in the rotation detection switch history creation process (see FIG. 148) executed as one process (see). Because it knows whether it is rotating clockwise, counterclockwise, or counterclockwise, the player is irrespective of the progress of the production (for example, with the production). It is possible to monitor the presence or absence of the dial operation unit 401 (an effect other than linking and operating the dial operation unit 401 (an effect that prompts the operation, etc.)). As a result, when the peripheral control MPU 4150a grasps that the dial operation unit 401 is being operated by the player's finger or palm, the peripheral control MPU 4150a rotates the output shaft of the dial drive motor 414 to rotate the dial operation unit 401 clockwise. Alternatively, the behavior of rotating the dial counterclockwise is given so that the dial operation unit 401 is rotated in opposition to the rotation direction of the dial operation unit 401 by the player.

Peripheral control MPU4150a rotates the output shaft of the dial drive motor 414 when it grasps that the dial operation unit 401 is being operated by the player's finger or palm regardless of the progress of the effect. Rotation behavior imparting control is performed according to the schedule data of rotating the The schedule data of the rotation behavior imparting control defines the rotation direction, rotation speed, and the like for rotating the output shaft of the dial drive motor 414, and is described in the peripheral control ROM 4150b (see FIG. 100) of the peripheral control unit 4150. Multiple are stored in advance. Peripheral control MPU4150a performs rotation behavior imparting control according to schedule data in motor and solenoid drive processing in peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing (see step S1104 in FIG. 145).

In this way, when the peripheral control unit 4150 of the peripheral control board 4140 grasps that the dial operation unit 401 is being operated by the player's finger or palm regardless of the progress of the effect, the dial drive motor 414 Since the dial operation unit 401 is given a behavior by rotating the output shaft, the dial operation unit 401 suddenly starts to move. In other words, when the player performs a meaningless operation on the dial operation unit 401 that has nothing to do with the production, the pachinko gaming machine 1 responds to this and the dial operation unit 401 is given a behavior. , The player behaves to call attention not to perform a meaningless operation on the dial operation unit 401. Due to the behavior of the dial operation unit 401, it is possible to give the player the impression that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a will. Therefore, it is possible to create a novel playability by the operating member.

[3-8. Handle device]
Next, the handle device 500 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 47. FIG. 47 is an exploded perspective view of the handle device in the door frame as viewed after being disassembled. As shown in the figure, the handle device 500 of the present embodiment is attached to the handle bracket 140 attached to the front surface of the door frame base body 110 of the door frame base unit 100 through the handle insertion hole 334a of the plate side outer cover 334 of the plate unit 300. A fixed, cylindrical handle base 502 with a rounded front end bulging in the direction perpendicular to the axis, an annular rotating handle body rear 504 arranged on the front side of the handle base 502 so as to be rotatable relative to the handle base 502, and a rotating handle. Rotating handle fixed to the front of the rear 504 of the main body and rotatable integrally with the rear 504 of the main body. The front 506 of the rotating handle body and the front 506 of the rotating handle main body are arranged and fixed to the handle base 502, A front end cover 508 that rotatably supports the front 506 of the rotary handle body and the rear 504 of the rotary handle body in cooperation with each other is provided.

Further, the handle device 500 is mounted and fixed so as to project from the front side to the rear side at the rotation center in front of the rotary handle body, and has a shaft member 510 having a non-circular bearing portion 510a at the rear end and a bearing portion of the shaft member 510. A potentiometer 512 that has a detection shaft portion 512a that is fitted with 510a and is rotatable and is non-rotatably fitted to the front surface of the handle base 502, and the front surface of the handle base 502 so as to sandwich the potentiometer 512 between the handle base 502. A switch support member 514 having a through hole 514a fixed to and through which a detection shaft portion 512a of the potentiometer 512 can pass, a touch switch 516 attached to the rear surface of the switch support member 514, and a touch switch 516 are the switch support members 514. A launch stop switch 518 mounted at a different position on the rear surface, a single-shot button 520 rotatably supported by the switch support member 514 to operate the launch stop switch 518, and a single-shot button 520 arranged and rotated so as to cover the outer periphery of the shaft member 510. It is provided with a handle return spring 522 that urges the front 506 of the handle body and the rear 504 of the rotary handle body to return to the original rotation position (rotation end in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front). The potentiometer 512 is for electrically adjusting the strength of launching the game ball toward the game area 1100 according to the rotation position of the rotation handle main body front 506. Further, the rotary handle main body front 506 and the rotary handle main body rear 504 rotate from the original rotation position to the limit rotation position (rotation end in the clockwise direction in the front view) which is the maximum rotation position in the clockwise direction in the front view. Move.

As shown in the figure, the handle base 502 of the handle device 500 has a shape in which the front end side is hemispherically bulged and spreads toward the front side, and the rear end side is formed in a cylindrical shape with the rear end open. Three groove portions 502a extending in the axial direction are formed on the outer circumference of the cylinder on the rear end side. The three grooves 502a of the handle base 502 are one on the upper side, two on the lower side, and unequally spaced in the circumferential direction so as to correspond to the three ridges 143 in the tubular portion 141 of the handle bracket 140. Have been placed. The handle base 502 is supported in a non-rotatable state by being inserted into the tubular portion 141 of the handle bracket 140 so that the groove portion 502a fits with the ridge 143.

In the handle device 500, an arcuate slit 506a arranged concentrically with the rotation axis is formed in the front 506 of the rotary handle body, and three mounting bosses 508a protruding rearward are formed in the front end cover 508. These mounting bosses 508a are fixed to the front surface of the handle base 502 through a slit 506a in front of the rotary handle body 506. As a result, the circumferential end of the slit 506a in the front 506 of the rotary handle body comes into contact with the mounting boss 508a of the front end cover 508, so that the rotation range of the rotary handle body 504 and 506 is restricted.

Further, in the handle device 500, a locking protrusion 506b projecting rearward is formed in the front 506 of the rotating handle body, and one end side (front end side) of the coiled handle return spring 522 is formed in the locking protrusion 506b. Is locked, and the other end side (rear end side) of the handle return spring 522 is locked to the switch support member 514. The handle return spring 522 locks the rotary handle body 504. , 506 are urged to rotate counterclockwise in front view.

The handle device 500 is attached to the handle attachment portion 114 of the door frame base main body 110 via the handle bracket 140. Since the mounting surface of the handle mounting portion 114 of the door frame base main body 110 is inclined so as to face the outside (open side) in a plan view viewed from above, the handle mounted via the handle bracket 140 The device 500 is also tilted outward in a plan view (in other words, its tip is tilted toward the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 with respect to a line orthogonal to the front vertical plane of the pachinko gaming machine 1). It is designed to be attached and fixed to the door frame 5. As a result, the player can easily grip the handle device 500, and the rotation operation is easy to perform without any discomfort in the rotation operation.

Further, in the handle device 500, the potentiometer 512 is a variable resistor, and when the rotary handle main body 504,506 (handle device 500) is rotated, the detection shaft portion 512a of the potentiometer 512 rotates via the shaft member 510. It will be. Then, the internal resistance of the potential meter 512 changes according to the rotation position (rotation angle) of the detection shaft portion 512a, and the driving force of the firing solenoid 654 in the ball launching device 650 described later changes according to the internal resistance of the potential meter 512. The game ball is driven into the game area 1100 at a rotation angle of the rotation handle main bodies 504 and 506, that is, a firing intensity corresponding to the rotation position of the rotation handle main bodies 504 and 506.

The outer peripheral surfaces of the rotary handle body 504, 506 and the front end cover 508 are electrically plated, and the touch switch 516 detects the contact when the player comes into contact with the rotary handle body 504, 506, etc. It has become like. Then, when the rotation handle main body 504, 506 rotates while the touch switch 516 detects the contact of the player, the rotation drive of the firing solenoid 654 is controlled by the strength corresponding to the rotation, and the game ball. You can type in. That is, even if the player tries to drive the game ball by rotating the handle device 500 in some way without touching the handle device 500, the launch solenoid 654 is not driven and the game ball cannot be driven. It is possible to prevent the player from playing a game different from the original one and reduce the load (burden) on the game hall in which the pachinko game machine 1 is installed.

Further, when the player presses the single-shot button 520 while rotating the handle device 500, the firing stop switch 518 detects the operation of the single-shot button 520, and the firing control unit 4120 stops the rotational drive of the firing solenoid 654. It has become like. As a result, the firing of the game ball can be temporarily stopped without returning the rotation operation of the handle device 500, and by releasing the pressing operation of the single-shot button 520, before operating the single-shot button 520. It is possible to launch a game ball with the driving strength.

The handle device 500 electrically detects the rotation operation of the rotary handle main bodies 504 and 506 by the potentiometer 512, and then, based on the detection of the rotation position from the potentiometer 512, the launch control unit 4120 drives the launch solenoid 654 to rotate. Since the strength is controlled, the handle device 500 provided in the door frame 5 and the ball launching device 650 provided in the main body frame 3 are used when the door frame 5 is closed, as in a conventional pachinko gaming machine. It is not necessary to provide a mechanical (for example, a joint unit) mechanism that cooperates with each other and is released when the door frame 5 is opened, so that the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be simplified and the joint can be simplified. It is possible to eliminate the occurrence of defects in the unit, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest due to the malfunction of the gaming ball.

[3-9. Foul cover unit]
Next, the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 to 50. FIG. 48 is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit in the door frame disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 49 is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit in the door frame disassembled and viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 50 is a front view showing a state in which the front cover of the foul cover unit is removed.

The foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 is attached to the rear surface below the game window 101 in the door frame base unit 100, and is launched by a game ball paid out from the prize ball unit 700, which will be described later, or a hit ball launching device 650. The game ball (foul ball) that has not reached the game area 1100 in spite of this is guided to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300. The foul cover unit 540 includes a cover base 542 whose front side is open and has a plurality of game ball flow paths inside, and a front cover 544 that closes the front end of the cover base 542.

As shown in FIG. 49, the cover base 542 of the foul cover unit 540 has a first ball inlet 542a arranged in the upper right corner in the rear view and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a front end of the cover base 542 communicating with the first ball entrance. The first ball passage 542b that expands to the right side of the front view, and the second ball entrance 542c that is located outside the first ball entrance 542a (on the right side in the rear view) and is larger than the first ball entrance 542a. Inside the cover base 542 that communicates with the ball passage 542d, a second ball entrance 542c that extends downward and is inclined so as to be lowered toward the lower right corner in the front view is provided. The first ball entrance 542a and the second ball entrance 542c are the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank outlet 77 of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 in a state where the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3. It is formed at a position facing each other. As shown in the figure, the height of the portion of the cover base 542 extending in the left-right direction along the lower end of the second ball passage 542d is about three times as high as the outer diameter of the game ball. , A storage space 546 that can accommodate a predetermined amount of game balls is formed.

Further, the cover base 542 can guide the game ball to the upper part near the downstream side of the second ball passage 542d by communicating with the foul ball entrance 542e arranged at the substantially central upper part in the left-right direction and opening upward and the foul ball entrance 542e. It is provided with a foul ball passage 542f. Further, the cover base 542 is provided with an opening / closing actuating piece 542g for operating the opening / closing shutter 792 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 on the lower rear surface of the second ball inlet 542c. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the opening / closing operation piece 542g abuts on the spherical contact portion 793d of the opening / closing crank 793 in the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 to rotate the opening / closing crank 793. The open / close shutter 792 can be opened.

The front cover 544 of the foul cover unit 540 is formed in a substantially plate shape that closes the front surface of the cover base 542, is arranged in the upper left corner of the front view, communicates with the first ball passage 542b of the cover base 542, and penetrates in the front-rear direction. The first ball outlet 544a is provided, and the second ball outlet 544b which is arranged in the lower right corner of the front view and communicates with the downstream end of the second ball passage 542d of the cover base 542 and penetrates in the front-rear direction. The first ball outlet 544a of the front cover 544 is connected to the upper plate ball supply port 310c of the plate unit 300 through the notch 101a of the door frame base unit 100. Further, the second ball outlet 544b is connected to the rear end of the lower plate ball supply gutter 310h in the plate unit 300 through the ball passage port 110f of the door frame base main body 110.

The foul cover unit 540 is a dish from the first ball outlet 544a through the first ball passage 542b through the game ball supplied from the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 to the first ball inlet 542a. It can be supplied to the upper plate 301 through the upper plate ball supply port 310c of the unit 300. Further, the foul cover unit 540 passes the game ball supplied from the full tank outlet 776 of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 to the second ball entrance 542c through the second ball passage 542d to the second ball outlet. It is possible to supply from 544b to the lower plate 302 via the lower plate ball supply gutter 310h and the lower plate ball supply port 310g of the plate unit 300.

Further, although the details of the foul cover unit 540 will be described later, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball entrance 542e is located below the foul space 626 of the main body frame 3. If the game ball launched by the hit ball launching device 650 does not reach the game area 1100 and becomes a foul ball and falls in the foul space 626, it can be received by the foul ball entrance 542e. Then, the foul cover unit 540 discharges (supplies) the game ball received at the foul ball inlet 542e from the second ball outlet 544b to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 through the foul ball passage 542f and the second ball passage 542d. ) Can be done.

Further, the foul cover unit 540 forms a side surface on the upstream side (left side in front view) of the accommodation space 546 in the second ball passage 542d, and is pivotally supported by the cover base 542 so as to be swingable by the game ball stored in the accommodation space 546. The swing member 548 is provided, a full tank switch 550 for detecting the swing of the swing member 548, and a spring 552 for urging the swing member 548 in a direction in which the swing member 548 is not detected by the full tank switch 550. ing. As shown in FIG. 50, the lower end of the swing member 548 is rotatably supported by the cover base 542, and the upper end of the swing member 548 rotates to the left side in the front view, and is substantially vertical. The left side wall of the accommodation space 546 is formed in such a state. Further, the swing member 548 is urged by a spring 552 to a position where it is in a substantially vertical state. Further, the rocking member 548 is formed with a detection piece 548a projecting outward on the side surface opposite to the accommodation space 546 side, and the detection piece 548a is detected by the full tank switch 550. .. That is, based on the detection signal from the full tank switch 550, it is possible to determine whether or not the accommodation space 546 is full with the stored game ball.

Further, the foul cover unit 540 includes an earth rail 554 arranged at the bottom of the accommodation space 546 in the second ball passage 542d, and a plate-shaped earth metal fitting 556 that covers the right end and the left end of the cover base 542 when viewed from the rear. , And it is possible to remove the static electricity generated by the rolling resistance due to the circulation of the game ball.

In the present embodiment, the game balls paid out from the prize ball unit 700 are supplied from the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branch unit 770 to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 via the foul cover unit 540. When the game ball is further discharged from the prize ball unit 700 even if the upper plate 301 is full, it stays in the first ball passage 542b of the foul cover unit 540, and further, the normal ball outlet 774 in the full tank branch unit 770. When the inside of the normal passage 773 upstream of the above is also full, the game balls are circulated to the full tank passage 775 side through the branch space 772 of the full tank branch unit 770 (see FIG. 72), and the full tank branch unit 770. It will be supplied from the full tank outlet 776 to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 via the second ball inlet 542c, the second ball passage 542d, and the second ball outlet 544b of the foul cover unit 540.

Then, when the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 was filled with the game balls, the game balls could not be discharged from the second ball outlet 544b of the foul cover unit 540, and the game balls stayed in the accommodation space 546 in the second ball passage 542d. The game balls will be stored. Further, as the game balls are discharged from the prize ball unit 700 and a large number of game balls are stored in the accommodation space 546, the storage pressure of the game balls acts on the swing member 548 against the urging force of the spring 552. The upper end of the swing member 548 will move to the left. Then, when the detection piece 548a of the swing member 548 is detected by the full tank switch 550, that is, when the game ball in which the accommodation space 546 is stored fills up, the game ball from the prize ball unit 700 on the payout control board 4110. The payout is stopped, and a notification is given to the player to urge the player to discharge the game ball in the plate unit 300 to the outside.

When the game ball in the accommodation space 546 (lower plate 302) is discharged and the swing member 548 returns to a substantially vertical state by the urging force of the spring 552, the detection piece 548a is not detected by the full tank switch 550. Upon detection, the payout of game balls from the prize ball unit 700 is resumed.

[3-10. Ball feed unit]
Subsequently, the ball feeding unit 580 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 51 and 52. FIG. 51 (A) is a front perspective view of the ball feed unit in the door frame, and FIG. 51 (B) is a rear perspective view of the ball feed unit in the door frame. Further, FIG. 52 (A) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 52 (B) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit viewed from the rear with the rear case removed. The ball feeding unit 580 in the door frame 5 can supply the game balls supplied from the upper plate 301 in the plate unit 300 to the hitting ball launching device 650 one by one, and also supplies the game balls stored in the upper plate 301. The upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 can be removed to the lower plate 302 by operating the upper plate ball removing button 341.

In the ball feed unit 580, the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 are supplied through the upper plate ball discharge port 310d of the plate unit base 310 and the ball feed opening 113 of the door frame base main body 110 in the front-rear direction. A box-shaped front cover 581 having a penetrating entrance 581a and a ball outlet 581b that opens below the entrance 581a and having an open rear, and a box-shaped front cover 581 that closes the rear end of the front cover 581 and opens the front. A rear cover 582, a rear cover 582, and a front cover, which are box-shaped and have a ball hitting supply port 582a for supplying a game ball that penetrates in the front-rear direction and enters from the entrance 581a of the front cover 581 to the hitting ball launcher 650. A ball pulling member 583 that is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between 581 and has a partition portion 583a that separates the entrance 581a and the ball pulling port 581b on the rear side of the front cover 581. , The game balls on the partition portion 583a of the ball removing member 583 are sent one by one to the hit ball supply port 582a of the rear cover, and are rotatably supported around the axis extending in the vertical direction between the front cover 581 and the rear cover 582. The ball feed member 584 and the ball feed solenoid 585 that rotates the ball feed member 584 are provided. In the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, the ball feeding member 584 is arranged on the right side of the entrance 581a, the ball feeding member 583 is on the left side of the ball feeding member 584, and the ball feeding solenoid 585 is on the right side. Each is arranged.

The front cover 581 of the ball feeding unit 580 is provided with an arcuate slit 581c formed concentrically with respect to the rotation center of the ball pulling member 583 on the left side of the ball pulling port 581b when viewed from the front. From 581c, the operating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583, which will be described later, extends forward. Further, the front cover 581 extends upward from the upper edge of the entrance 581a, and when assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the rear end opening of the ball guiding flow path 344b in the upper plate ball removing base 344. Is formed to close.

Further, the ball pulling member 583 has a partition portion 583a and a partition portion 583a that partition the entrance 581a and the ball pulling port 581b below the entrance 581a and the upper surface of the ball feeding member 584 is lowered toward the ball feeding member 584. It extends downward from the end opposite to the ball feeding member 584, and bends in a dogleg shape from the middle of the vertical direction toward the lower center of the ball outlet 581b, and the lower end extends in the front-rear direction around the axis. A rotating paddle portion 583b that is rotatably supported, a rod-shaped operating rod 583c that projects forward from the upper end of the rotating rod portion 583b, and a side surface of the rotating rod portion 583b below the operating rod 583c. It is provided with a weight portion 583d protruding to the opposite side of the partition portion 583a. The operating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 is formed so as to project forward through an arc-shaped slit 581c formed in the front cover 581 (see FIG. 51), and a ball feeding opening of the door frame base main body 110. The plate unit 300 comes into contact with the upper end of the contact piece 343a of the upper plate ball removing slider 343 in the upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 via 113.

Further, the ball feeding member 584 has a fan-shaped blocking portion 584a and a blocking portion 584a centered on a rotation axis extending in the vertical direction in the direction of the entrance 581a and the partition portion 583a of the ball pulling member 583. It is provided with a ball holding portion 584b recessed in an arc shape from the rear end toward the center of the rotation axis, and a rod-shaped rod-shaped rod portion 584c extending downward from the rear end of the ball holding portion 584b. The blocking portion 584a and the ball holding portion 584b of the ball feeding member 54 are each formed within an angle range of about 90 ° about the center of rotation axis. Further, the ball holding portion 584b of the ball feeding member 584 has a size capable of holding one game ball. The ball feeding member 584 rotates around the rotating shaft core by moving the paddle portion 584c arranged at a position eccentric to the rotating shaft core in the left-right direction by driving the ball feeding solenoid 585. ing.

In the ball feeding member 584, the blocking portion 584a faces the direction of the partition portion 583a, and at the same time, the ball holding portion 584b faces the supply position in the direction in which the ball holding portion 584b communicates with the hit ball supply port 582a, and the ball holding portion 584b faces the direction of the partition portion 583a. It is designed to rotate with and from the holding position. When the ball feeding member 584 is in the supply position, the game ball held by the ball holding portion 584b is supplied from the hitting ball supply port 582a to the hitting ball launching device 650, and the game enters the partition portion 583a from the entrance 581a. The ball is blocked from moving toward the ball holding portion 584b (ball hitting port 582a) by the blocking portion 584a, and stays on the partition portion 583a. On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 584 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding portion 584b faces the direction of the partition portion 583a, and the end of the ball holding portion 584b on the paddle portion 584c side closes the ball hitting supply port 582a. , Only one game ball on the partition portion 583a is held in the ball holding portion 584b.

Further, the ball feeding unit 580 has a ball feeding operating rod 586 whose tip swings in the vertical direction by driving (energizing) the ball feeding solenoid 585 and a ball feeding operating rod 586 which swings back and forth by the movement of the tip swinging in the vertical direction. It is provided with a ball feed crank 587 that rotates around an axis extending in the direction and rotates the ball feed member 584 around an axis extending in the vertical direction. The ball feed crank 587 has an engaging portion 587a extending in the left-right direction so as to be engageable with the vertically moving tip of the ball feed actuating rod 586, and a side of the engaging portion 587a that engages with the ball feed actuating rod 586. Is arranged on the opposite side and is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 581 and the rear cover 582, and a shaft portion 587b and a ball feeding member 584 extending upward from the shaft portion 587b. A transmission portion 587c that engages with a rod-shaped rod-shaped rod portion 584c (see FIG. 52) that projects downward from a position eccentric with respect to the rotation center in the above. In the present embodiment, a flapper solenoid in which the ball feed solenoid 585 and the ball feed operating rod 586 are integrally formed is used.

The ball feeding unit 580 rotates the ball feeding member 584 by transmitting the movement of the ball feeding operating rod 586 that swings by the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 585 that advances and retreats in the vertical direction by the ball feeding operating rod 586 and the ball feeding crank 587. It can be moved. When the ball feed solenoid 585 is not driven (normal time), the tip of the ball feed operating rod 586 that swings away from the lower end of the ball feed solenoid 585 is positioned downward. In this state, the ball feeding member 584 is located at the supply position. Further, when the ball feed solenoid 585 is driven, the ball feed operating rod 586 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feed solenoid 585 and the swinging tip is positioned upward so that the ball feed member 584 rotates to the holding position. It has become. That is, when the ball feeding solenoid 585 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 584 accepts one game ball, and when the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 585 is released (OFF state), the ball feeding member 584 receives one. The game ball is sent (supplied) to the hit ball launching device 650 side. The drive of the ball feed solenoid 585 in the ball feed unit 580 is controlled by the launch control unit 4120 in synchronization with the drive control of the launch solenoid 654.

Further, the ball removing member 583, which is rotatably supported by the ball feeding unit 580, is subjected to a moment such that the weight portion 583d rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, but it projects forward. The operation rod 583c is brought into contact with the upper end of the contact piece 343a of the upper plate ball removal slider 343 in the upper plate ball removal mechanism 340 of the plate unit 300, so that its rotation is restricted. Then, the partition portion 583a of the ball pulling member 583 partitions between the entrance 581a and the ball pulling port 581b so that the game ball does not enter the ball pulling port 581b side. Then, when the player presses the upper plate ball removal button 341 of the upper plate ball removal mechanism 340 in the plate unit 300 downward, the upper plate ball removal slider 343 slides downward together with the abutting piece 343a to abut. As the piece 343a moves downward, the working paddle 583c also moves relatively downward.

In this way, when the operating rod 583c moves downward together with the contact piece 343a of the upper plate ball removing mechanism 340, the ball removing member 583 rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, and the entrance by the partition portion 583a. The partition between the ball outlet 381a and the ball outlet 381b is released, and the game ball that has entered from the entrance 381a is discharged from the ball outlet 381b to the ball extraction flow path 344c of the upper plate ball extraction base 344 of the plate unit 300. , It is designed to be discharged (supplied) to the lower plate 302.

Since the contact piece 343a of the upper plate ball pulling slider 343 with which the operating paddle 583c of the ball pulling member 583 comes into contact is urged upward by the coil spring, the game ball is vigorously supplied onto the partition portion 583a. However, the impact can be absorbed by the coil spring that urges the upper plate ball pulling slider 343 via the operating paddle 583c, so that the ball pulling member 583 and the like can be prevented from being damaged, and the game ball can be moved. It is possible to prevent the partition portion 583a from bouncing back.

[3-11. Glass unit]
Next, the glass unit 590 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 and 23. The glass unit 590 has an opening of substantially the same size as the game window 101, and is an annular and vertically long octagonal unit frame 592 molded from synthetic resin, and two pieces that close the front and rear ends of the opening of the unit frame 592, respectively. It is provided with a transparent glass plate 594. The unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590 is composed of four pieces 592a which are arranged at both left and right ends apart from each other in the vertical direction and extend outward in a plate shape, and a plate extending in the horizontal direction along the lower end and extending downward. It is provided with a locking piece 592b and the like.

The glass unit 590 locks the locking piece 592b at the lower end so as to engage with the vertically bent projecting piece 161 of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 in the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 from the rear upper side. Then, the outer peripheral edge of the unit frame 592 is fitted into the glass unit support step 110a of the door frame base main body 110, and the stop piece 592a of the unit frame 592 is locked by the glass unit locking member 190 to lock the door frame. It is designed to be detachably attached to the base unit 100 (see FIGS. 23, 26, etc.).

As described above, in the door frame 5 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 for storing the game balls are arranged vertically on the lower side of the vertically elongated elliptical game window 101. To drive the game ball stored in the upper plate 301 into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 arranged behind the transparent glass unit 590 that closes the game window 101 on the right side of the lower plate 302 when viewed from the front. The handle device 500 of the above is arranged. Further, in the door frame 5, the right side decoration unit 200, the left side decoration unit 2200, and the upper decoration unit 280 are arranged so as to surround the left, right, and upper sides of the game window 101, and surround the lower side of the game window 101. The dish unit 300 is arranged so as to be continuous with the lower ends of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 220 with the side speaker cover 290 in between, and the appearance of each unit 200, 220, 280, 300 is rounded. It has an appearance with continuous integration.

Further, the door frame 5 emits light from the LEDs mounted on the decorative substrates 214, 216, 254, 256, 286, 320, 322, etc. provided in the units 200, 220, 280, 300, and the game window 101. And, it is possible to illuminate and decorate the lower plate cover 328 with an arbitrary luminescent color so as to surround the opening 328a. Further, among the LEDs mounted on the decorative substrates 214, 216, 254, 256 provided in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 220, the radiation lens portions 210b, 250b of the side lenses 210, 250 are located behind. By turning on and off the arranged LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256, it is possible to change the mode of the light emitting decoration surrounding the game window 101.

Specifically, the light emitting modes of the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a corresponding to the peripheral lens portions 210a, 250a of the side lenses 210, 250 and the light emitting modes of the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b corresponding to the radiating lens portions 210b, 250b. If the modes are the same light emitting mode (the light emitting color and the light emitting pattern are the same), the entire light emitting decoration can be made substantially uniform, and if the light emitting modes are different so as to emphasize the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a. It can be used as a light emitting decoration that is interrupted in the circumferential direction, and when the light emitting modes are different so as to emphasize the radial lens portions 210b and 250b, they shine radially around the center of the game window 101. It can be a luminescent decoration, which can strongly attract the attention of the player.

Further, in the door frame 5, the base member 420 that supports the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 in the operation unit 400 is made of die-cast aluminum alloy, and the base member 420 is made of the dish unit 300 by the cover body 426. Since it is suspended from the operation unit mounting portion 314c, when the dial operation portion 401 or the pressing operation portion 405 is hit, the cover body 426 is elastically deformed so as to bend, and then the base member 420 is lowered. The contact with the upper surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c via the cover 424 can alleviate the impact applied to the dial operation portion 401, the pressing operation portion 405, etc., and prevent the operation unit 400 from being damaged. You can do it.

Further, the operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 has the pressing operation unit 405 inserted into the annular dial operation unit 401, and even if a player or the like tries to hit the pressing operation unit 405 strongly, the dial operation unit 401 is also included. Since the door is hit, the dial operation unit 401 can disperse the hit impact, prevent the impact from concentrating, and make it less likely to be damaged. Further, the gear rail 416a of the operation unit holding member 416 that rotatably supports the dial operation unit 401 is attached so as to slightly project from the lower surface to the opening 420a of the metal base member 420 to operate the dial. When the impact of hitting the portion 401 is transmitted to the operating portion holding member 416 (gear rail 416a) via the driven gear 410 and the operating portion holding member 416 bends downward, the lower surface of the driven gear 410 is the outer circumference of the metal opening 420a. Since it comes into contact with the upper surface and the impact can be received by the base member 420, the load on the operation unit holding member 416 can be reduced and the gear rail 416a can be prevented from being crushed by the impact. , The durability of the operation unit 400 can be improved.

Further, since the operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 is attached to the dish unit 300 from above, even if the operation unit 400 is damaged, the operation unit 400 can be easily replaced and operated. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the operating rate of the pachinko gaming machine 1 due to the replacement of the unit 400.

[3-12. Luminous decoration on the door frame]
Subsequently, the light emitting decoration in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. FIG. 53 is a front view showing the arrangement of LEDs for light emitting decoration in the door frame. Further, FIG. 54 is a front view showing a system of LEDs for light emitting decoration in the door frame. In the door frame 5 of the present embodiment, the outer circumference of the game window 101 substantially corresponding to the game area 1100 of the game board 4 by the right side decoration unit 200, the left side decoration unit 240, the upper decoration unit 280, and the plate unit 300 is substantially circular. It is formed so as to surround it. Each of these units 200, 240, 280, 300 is provided with decorative substrates 214,216, 254, 256, 286, 320, 322 on which LEDs are mounted, and by appropriately emitting light from each LED, the game window 101 The outer circumference of the window can be decorated with light emission.

As described above, the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 of the door frame 5 are formed so as to surround most of the outer periphery except the lower side of the game window 101, and a plurality of circumferences of the side lenses 210 and 250. The lens portions 210a and 250a are arranged along the outer periphery of the game window 101, and the radial lens portions 210b and 250b extend along a radial axis centered on the vicinity of the lower center in the left-right direction of the game window 101. It is arranged between the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a adjacent to each other. The circumferential lens portions 210a, 250a and the radiating lens portions 210b, 250b of the side lenses 210, 250 are formed by the side decorative frames 202, 242 that are opaque (in this embodiment, have a plating layer on the surface). The outer circumference is surrounded.

Side inner lenses 212 and 252 are arranged on the rear side of these side lenses 210 and 250, and the main body portions 212a and 252a of the side inner lenses 212 and 252 with respect to the rear surface of the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a. It is formed so as to be separated by a predetermined distance, and the plate-shaped light guide portions 212b and 252b are formed so as to extend to a position as close as possible to the rear surface of the radiation lens portions 210b and 250b. Has been done. Although detailed illustration is omitted, a plurality of fine prisms are formed on the surface of the main bodies 212a and 252a of the side inner lenses 212 and 252, and the decorative substrates 214,216 and 254 arranged on the rear side thereof. , 256 can be diffused.

The right side upper decorative substrate 214, the right side lower decorative substrate 216, the left side upper decorative substrate 254, and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 arranged behind the side inner lenses 212 and 252 have peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a. It includes LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a arranged at corresponding positions, and LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b arranged at positions corresponding to the radiation lens portions 210b, 250b. In the present embodiment, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a corresponding to the peripheral lens portions 210a, 250a are full-color LEDs, and the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b corresponding to the radiation lens portions 210b, 250b are white LEDs (upper part). The normal brightness is lower than that of the LED 286b of the upper decorative substrate 286 in the decorative unit 280). Further, the two LEDs 214c arranged vertically corresponding to the side sub-lens 228 on the right side upper decorative substrate 214 are red LEDs.

In the present embodiment, the surfaces of the right side upper decorative substrate 214, the right side lower decorative substrate 216, the left side upper decorative substrate 254, and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 are white photoresist and white printing (for example, silk). It is made white by printing), white painting, etc. As a result, the reflectance of the decorative substrates 214,216,254,256 can be increased, so that the light from the player side is reflected by the decorative substrates 214,216, 254, 256 when the LEDs 210a, 210b, etc. are not lit. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the side lenses 210 and 250 from becoming too dark and unsightly, and by reflecting the light from the light emitting LEDs 210a, 210b and the like toward the player side by the substrate, the side lenses 210 and 250 can be prevented from becoming too dark. The lenses 210 and 250 can be brightly luminescent and decorated.

Next, as described above, the upper decorative unit 280 of the door frame 5 connects between the ends of the right side decorative unit 200 and the left side decorative unit 240 facing the center side in the left-right direction of the door frame 5. It is formed so as to decorate the upper center of the game window 101. The upper decorative unit 280 includes a large central lens 282 formed in a jewel shape in the center, side lenses 284 formed in a blade shape on both the diagonally upper left and right sides of the central lens 282, and lower left and right sides of the central lens 282. It is equipped with an arranged lower lens 289. The central lens 282 of the upper decorative unit 280 is formed of a bluish transparent member, and the side lens 284 and the lower lens 289 are formed of a translucent white (milky white) member. .. As a result, the inner lens 283 arranged on the rear side of the central lens 282 can be visually recognized from the player side.

The inner lens 283 of the upper decoration unit 280 has a plurality of fine lenses (including prisms) formed on the surface thereof, and can diffusely reflect or refract light. Looking at the inner lens 283, the central lens 282 seems to have a deep taste, and the central lens 282 itself seems to be shining. Further, the upper decorative substrate 286 arranged on the rear side of the inner lens 283 cannot be seen from the player side.

On the upper decorative substrate 286 of the upper decorative unit 280, a plurality of (six in this embodiment) LEDs 286a corresponding to the central lens 282 and arranged behind the inner lens 283, and a side lens 284 and a lower lens 289 are provided. It is provided with a plurality of LEDs 286b arranged on the rear side (in this embodiment, two are arranged for the side lens 284 and one is arranged for the lower lens 289 on the left and right sides). In the present embodiment, the LED 286a corresponding to the central lens 282 is a full-color LED, and the LED 286b corresponding to the side lens 284 and the lower lens 289 is a high-brightness white LED. Further, the front surface of the upper decorative substrate 286 is also white, so that the same effects as described above can be obtained.

Subsequently, in the plate unit 300, a plurality of jewel-shaped light guide portions 318a in the upper plate upper lens 318 are provided along the front end of the upper plate 301 so as to connect the lower ends of the left and right side decoration units 200 and 240. The front decorative members 316 are arranged in a row so as to be exposed through the opening 316a. (Lower side) is designed to be decorated. Below the upper plate upper lens 318, an upper plate upper inner lens 319 having a protrusion corresponding to each light guide portion 318a is arranged. The upper plate upper lens 318 of the plate unit 300 is formed of a bluish transparent member, and the upper plate upper inner lens 319 is formed of a transparent member.

The upper plate upper inner lens 319 of the plate unit 300 has a plurality of fine prisms formed on the surface (upper surface) corresponding to the light guide portion 318a of the upper plate upper lens 318 to diffusely reflect or refract light. As with the central lens 282 of the upper decoration unit 280, the light guide portion 318a of the upper plate upper lens 318 is given a deep taste and a glittering shine to guide the light. The light part 318a looks like a jewel. Further, the upper plate upper inner lens 319 prevents the upper plate right decorative substrate 320 and the upper plate left decorative substrate 322 arranged on the lower side from being seen through the light guide portion 318a from the player side.

On the upper surfaces of the upper plate right decorative substrate 320 and the upper plate left decorative substrate 322 in the plate unit 300, a plurality of (six in each in the present embodiment) so as to correspond to the light guide portion 318a of the upper plate upper lens 318. LEDs 320a and 322a are provided. In the present embodiment, the LEDs 320a and 322a of the upper plate right decorative substrate 320 and the upper plate left decorative substrate 322 are full-color LEDs. Further, the surfaces (upper surface) of the upper plate right decorative substrate 320 and the upper plate left decorative substrate 322 are also white, so that the same effects as described above can be obtained.

Next, the operation unit 400 attached to the dish unit 300 has a translucent annular dial operation unit 401 and a translucent columnar pressing operation unit arranged inside the dial operation unit 401. A dial decorative board 430 and a button decorative board 432 are respectively arranged under the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405. The dial decorative substrate 430 is provided with a plurality of (four in this embodiment) LEDs 430b arranged in the circumferential direction so as to correspond to the dial operation unit 401. Further, the button decorative substrate 432 is provided with one LED 432d so as to correspond to the pressing operation unit 405. In the present embodiment, the LED 430b of the dial decorative substrate 430 is a high-brightness white LED, and the LED 432d of the button decorative substrate 432 is a full-color LED. Further, the surfaces (upper surface) of the dial decorative substrate 430 and the button decorative substrate 432 are also white, so that the same effects as described above can be obtained.

By the way, in the door frame 5, the LEDs 214a and 216a corresponding to the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a of the side lenses 210 and 250 in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 covering the outer periphery above the lower side of the game window 101. , 254a, 256a are the first annular group 102 (within the range of the hatch in FIGS. 53 and 54) near the game window 101 and the second annular group 103 (within the range of the hatch in FIGS. 53 and 54) arranged outside the first annular group 102. And in FIG. 54, it is divided into (within the range of the cross hatch), and by appropriately emitting the LEDs of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103, a plurality of lenses (within a substantially concentric circle) surrounding the game window 101 ( In this embodiment, two) light emitting decorations can be made. That is, when all the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a of the first annular group 102 are made to emit light, the range of the hatch near the game window 101 is illuminated and decorated in an annular manner, and the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a of the second annular group 103 are emitted. When all the light is emitted, the range of the cross hatch away from the game window 101 is illuminated and decorated in a ring shape.

Further, in the door frame 5, the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b corresponding to the radiation lens portions 210b, 250b of the side lenses 210, 250 in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 are the first annular group 102 and the first ring group 102. A radial group 104 (within the shaded area in FIGS. 53 and 54) extending radially around the lower center in the left-right direction of the game window 101 (game area 1100) so as to divide the bicyclic group 103 in the circumferential direction. ing. By appropriately emitting light of the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b of the radial group 104, the outside of the game window 101 can be radiated and decorated, and the ring by the first ring group 102 and the second ring group 103. It is possible to make the luminescent decoration so as to divide it in the circumferential direction. Further, the LED 214c corresponding to the side sub-lens 228 on the upper right surface of the right side decoration unit 200 is an upper right side group 105, and by appropriately emitting light from the LED 214c, one of the upper right surfaces of the door frame 5 is formed. The part (side sub-lens 228) can be decorated with light emission.

Further, in the door frame 5, the LED 286a corresponding to the central lens 282 in the upper decoration unit 280 that decorates the upper center of the game window 101 emits light and decorates the upper center of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103. It is group 106. By appropriately emitting light from the LED 286a of the upper center group 106, the upper center of the game window 101 can be light-emitting and decorated, and also as a reference point for the ring-shaped light emitting decoration by the first ring group 102 and the second ring group 103. It is possible to make a luminescent decoration like this. Further, the LED 286b corresponding to the side lens 284 and the lower lens 289 in the upper decoration unit 280 is an upper center side group 107 that emits and decorates both the left and right sides of the upper center group 106. By appropriately emitting light of the LED 286b of the upper center side group 107, the boundary between the first ring group 102 and the second ring group 103 and the upper center group 106 can be light-emitting and decorated, or the upper side (including the upper part) of the game window 101 is emitted. It is possible to make a V-shaped luminescent decoration.

Further, in the door frame 5, the LED 320a corresponding to the light guide portion 318a of the upper plate upper lens 318 fitted into the plurality of openings 316a of the upper plate front decorative member 316 in the plate unit 300 that decorates the lower side of the game window 101. , 322a are lower groups 108 that illuminate and decorate the outer periphery of the lower side of the game window 101 so as to connect the left and right lower ends of the first ring group 102 and the second ring group 103. By appropriately emitting light of the LEDs 320a and 322a of the lower group 108, the lower side of the game window 101 and the front edge of the upper plate 301 can be light-emittingly decorated, and the LEDs 214a of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 can be illuminated. , 216a, 254a, 256a, so that the entire outer circumference of the game window 101 can be luminescent and decorated in a ring shape.

Further, in the door frame 5, the LEDs 430b and 432d corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 arranged in the upper center of the plate unit 300 at the lower center of the game window 101 press the operation unit 400. It is said to be an operation unit group 109 for light emission decoration. By appropriately emitting light of the LEDs 430b and 432d of the operation unit group 109, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be decorated with light emission, and the operation timing and operation direction of the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be set. It is possible to inform the player.

More specifically, the light emitting decoration in the door frame 5 in the present embodiment will be described in more detail. In the present embodiment, the LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 286a provided in the door frame 5 , 286b, 320a, 322a, 430b, 432d are further subdivided according to the control system within the groups 102, 103, 104, 106, 107, 108, 109 to which they belong. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54, the 20 LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a belonging to the first annular group 102 are 102a to 102j for each of the peripheral lens portions 210a, 250a of the side lenses 210, 250. The 26 LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a belonging to the second annular group 103 are divided into 10 systems, and each of the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a of the side lenses 210 and 250 is divided into 10 systems of 103a to 103j. Has been done.

Further, the 20 LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b belonging to the radial group 104 are divided into eight systems of 104a to 104h for each of the radial lens portions 210b, 250b of the side lenses 210, 250. Further, the two LEDs 214c belonging to the upper right side group 105 are divided into two systems, an upper 105a and a lower 105b. Further, the six LEDs 286a belonging to the upper center group 106 are divided into three systems of a lower part 106a, an upper right part 106b, and an upper left part 106c. Further, the six LEDs 286b belonging to the upper center side group 107 are divided into two systems, a right side 107a and a left side 107b.

Further, the 12 LEDs 320a and 322a belonging to the lower group 108 are divided into four systems 108a to 108d, three from the right side in the front view. Further, in the five LEDs 430b and 432d belonging to the operation unit group 109, the four LEDs 430b corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 are arranged diagonally across the pressing operation unit 405 as a set, and the left and right 109a The two systems of 109b and one LED 432c corresponding to the pressing operation unit 405 are divided into three systems of one system. As described above, in the door frame 5, each LED 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 286a, 286b, 320a, 322a, 430b, 432d is divided into 42 systems.

By the way, in the door frame 5, as described above, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a, 286a, 320a, 322a, 432d are full-color LEDs, and these LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a, 286a, 320a, 322a, The 28 systems 102a to 102j, 103a to 103j, 106a to 106c, 108a to 108d, and 109c to which the 432d belongs are further provided with three independent systems of RGB in order to emit light in full color, and the actual light emission control is 3 It is doubled to 84 systems. Further, the LEDs 286b and 430b are white LEDs with high brightness, and the four systems 107a, 107b, 109a and 109b to which the LEDs 286b and 430b belong require a large amount of current to emit light with high brightness. Two systems are connected to each, and the actual light emission control is doubled to eight systems.

The LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b are white LEDs having normal brightness, and belong to eight systems 104a to 108h. Further, the LED 214c is a red LED and belongs to two systems 105a and 105b. Since the 10 systems 104a to 108h, 105a, 105b by these LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b, and 214c can be sufficiently controlled by each system, the actual light emission control has the same number of 10 systems.

Therefore, the actual number of systems for light emission control in the door frame 5 is 102, and each LED 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 286a, 286b, 320a, 322a, For each system to which 430b and 432d belong, lighting, blinking, etc. are controlled by dynamic lighting, and gradation (color and brightness) is controlled by PWM control (pulse width modulation control). .. This makes it possible to produce an expressive light emission.

As a light emitting effect in the door frame 5, for example, by sequentially emitting light from the first annular group 102 to the second annular group 103 (sequential emission of the same color or a similar color), the light emission effect spreads outward around the game window 101. A light emitting effect, or conversely, a light emitting effect that converges from the outside toward the game window 101 by sequentially emitting light from the second ring group 103 to the first ring group 102 (sequentially emitting light with the same color or a similar color). Alternatively, by simultaneously emitting light from the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103, it is possible to produce a light emitting effect that causes the entire outer periphery of the game window 101 to emit light widely.

Further, by cooperating with the LEDs provided on the front surface of the game board 4 and the front unit 2000 (detailed illustration is omitted), the LEDs of the game board 4 and the LEDs of the first ring group 102 close to the game window 101 And, the LED of the second ring group 103 arranged outside the first ring group 102 makes it possible to perform a more expressive light emitting effect, and it is possible to strongly attract the interest of the player. It is possible to entertain the player and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, in the first ring group 102, the second ring group 103, and the lower group 108, the light circulates around the outer periphery of the game window 101 by appropriately emitting light from each system 102a to 102j, 103a to 103j, 108a to 108d. Such a light emission effect, light moves toward the central lens 282 of the upper decoration unit 280 along the outer circumference of the game window 101, or light from the central lens 282 is along the outer circumference of the game window 101. It is possible to create a moving light emission effect. In the present embodiment, the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 are divided into 10 systems 102a to 102j and 103a to 103j in the circumferential direction (10 divisions), but the present embodiment is not limited to this. However, if it is divided into about 8 systems (about 8 divisions), it is possible to satisfactorily perform a light emitting effect such that light circulates around the outer circumference of the game window 101.

Further, by emitting light only in the radial group 104, a light emitting effect of emitting light radially around the game window 101 is produced, or the first ring group 102, the second ring group 103, and the lower group 108 are emitted at the same time as the radial group 104. By making the game window 101 emit light substantially uniformly, the radial group 104 emits light (lights / blinks) during the light emission of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103. It is possible to create a light emitting effect that gives an accent to the light emitting decoration of. Further, by individually emitting light from each system 104a to 104h of the radial group 104, it is possible to produce a light emitting effect such that the radial lens portions 210b and 250b circulate.

Further, the light emission effect that the entire central lens 282 emits light by simultaneously emitting light from each system 106a to 106c of the upper center group 106, and the light rotates in the central lens 282 by sequentially emitting light from each system 106a to 106c. It is possible to perform various light emission effects. In addition, by emitting light from the upper center side group 107, the side lens 284 and the lower lens 289 are light-emitting and decorated with high brightness to give the player a chance or a specific gaming state (for example, a jackpot gaming state, a probabilistic gaming state). It is possible to perform a light emitting effect that suggests a state, a time-saving game state, a probability variation time-saving game state, etc. The lower lens 289 is arranged so as to irradiate light from above the player toward the player, so that the light emission of the high-brightness LED 286b can be easily noticed by the player. ..

Further, by appropriately emitting light from each system 108a to 108d of the lower group 108, a light emitting effect for illuminating the leading edge of the upper plate 301 can be produced, or by emitting light in association with the operation unit group 109, the dial operation unit can emit light. It is possible to produce a light emitting effect that encourages the operation of the 401 and the pressing operation unit 405. Further, by appropriately emitting light of the systems 109a and 109b corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 in the operation unit group 109, the operation of the dial operation unit 401 is promoted and the rotation operation direction of the dial operation unit 401 is guided. Can be done. Further, by causing the system 109c corresponding to the pressing operation unit 405 in the operating unit group 109 to emit light, it is possible to produce a light emitting effect that encourages the operation of the pressing operation unit 405.

Since the systems 109c of the first ring group 102, the second ring group 103, the upper center group 106, the lower group 108, and the operation unit group 109 are full-color LEDs, each group 102, 103, 106, 108. , 109, and each system 102a-102j, 103a-103j, 106a-106c, 108a-108d, 109c, it is possible to perform light emission effects with different gradations such as emission color and brightness. It is possible to produce an expressive light emission.

As described above, in the door frame 5, in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a corresponding to the peripheral lens portions 210a, 250a are attached to the first annular group 102 close to the game window 101. Since the light can be emitted separately from the first ring group 102 to the second ring group 103 far from the game window 101, a plurality of substantially concentric circles outside the game window 101 (game area 1100) can be emitted. The pachinko game machine 1 can be decorated with light emission in a shape, and by surrounding the outer periphery of the game window 101 with light, it is possible to perform a light emission effect that has not been seen in conventional pachinko game machines, and the pachinko game machine 1 that strongly attracts the interest of players. It is possible to do.

Further, one peripheral lens unit 210a and 250a is provided with two systems of LEDs arranged substantially concentrically, and even if the appearance looks like one, each of the two systems of LEDs emits light. Since the light emitting decoration can be made substantially concentrically, it is possible to make it difficult to imagine the mode of the light emitting decoration from the appearance, and the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a (right side decoration unit 200 and left side decoration unit 200) by the light emitting decoration. The change in 240) can be made large, and the impact of the light emitting decoration can be increased to make the pachinko gaming machine 1 strongly attract the attention of the player.

[4. Overall configuration of the main body frame]
Next, the main body frame 3 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 to 60. FIG. 55 is a front view of the main body frame, and FIG. 56 is a rear view of the main body frame. Further, FIG. 57 is a front perspective view of the main body frame, and FIG. 58 is a rear perspective view of the main body frame. Further, FIG. 59 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 60 is a perspective view of the main body frame disassembled and viewed from the rear. The main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is pivotally supported on the left side of the front view with respect to the outer frame 2, and is supported in a door shape so as to open and close the front surface of the outer frame 2 on the rear side of the door frame 5. , The front side can be opened and closed by the door frame 5. Further, the main body frame 3 is capable of detachably holding the game board 4 from the front side at a position corresponding to the game window 101 of the door frame 5.

The main body frame 3 has a main body frame base 600 having a rectangular game board holding port 601 for forming the skeleton of the main body frame 3 and penetrating in the front-rear direction to hold the game board 4, and the front surface of the main body frame base 600. The upper shaft support bracket 630 and lower shaft support bracket 640, which are attached to the upper and lower ends of the left end of the view and are pivotally supported by the outer frame 2 and the door frame 5, and the lower front surface of the main body frame base 600. A prize for paying out the game ball to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 and the hit ball launching device 650 for driving the game ball into the game area 1100 of the game board 4. A ball outlet that is attached to the front surface of the ball unit 700 and the main body frame base 600 and blocks the flow of game balls from the prize ball unit 700 to the plate unit 300 of the door frame 5 when the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3. It is equipped with an opening / closing unit 790.

Further, the main body frame 3 is attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and various control boards, power supply boards 851, etc. for controlling the door frame 5 excluding the game board 4 and the electrical parts provided in the main body frame 3 and the like. The board unit 800 that is unitized as a unit, the back cover 900 that covers the rear opening of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame base 600, and the side security plate 950 that covers the left end of the main body frame base 600 in front view. A locking device 1000 attached to the right end of the main body frame base in front view to open / close and lock the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 and to open / close the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3.

[4-1. Body frame base]
Next, the main body frame base 600 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62. FIG. 61 is a front perspective view of the main body frame base in the main body frame. Further, FIG. 62 is a rear perspective view of the main body frame base in the main body frame. The main body frame base 600 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is integrally molded with synthetic resin, and the outer shape in the front view is a vertically long rectangular shape along the outer shape of the door frame 5, and is located in the front-rear direction. It is formed to have a certain depth. As shown in the figure, the main body frame base 600 holds a game board that can fit and hold the outer periphery of the game board 4 by penetrating the entire range of about 3/4 from the upper part to the lower part in a rectangular shape in the front-rear direction. The door frame base main body in the door frame 5 is recessed from the front to the rear of the mouth 601 and the U-shaped front end frame portion 602 forming the outer periphery of the front end excluding the left side of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front. The door frame projecting piece 110c projecting rearward from the lower end of 110, the upper bent projecting piece 167 projecting rearward of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 in the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame 5, and the open side projecting rearward of the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153. It includes an engaging groove 603 into which the outer bent projectile 163 is inserted and engaged.

Further, the main body frame base 600 extends from the lower side of the game board holding port 601 to the lower end of the main body frame base 600, and is recessed from the front end of the front end frame portion 602 to the rear side by a predetermined amount and spreads in a plate shape in the left-right direction. It includes a peripheral wall portion 605 that protrudes rearward inside the front end frame portion 602 and forms an inner peripheral wall of the game board holding port 601. The peripheral wall portion 605 connects the free ends of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602 (upper and lower left end portions when viewed from the front), and the outer shape of the main body frame base 600 becomes a frame shape. It has become like.

Further, the main body frame base 600 is formed by forming the lower side of the game board holding port 601 at the upper end of the lower rear wall portion 604 and mounting the game board 4 on the game board mounting portion 606 and the game board mounting portion 606. A positioning protrusion 607 that projects upward from approximately the center in the left-right direction and engages with the out ball discharge groove 1156 of the game panel 1150 in the game board 4, and a game board of the game board 4 that is formed at a predetermined position on the inner wall on the right side of the front view of the peripheral wall portion 605. The game board locking portion 608 (see FIG. 55) to which the stopper 1120 is fastened, and the lower end of the peripheral wall portion 605 that hangs downward from the upper inner wall and has a plate shape that can contact the upper end of the game board 4 in the left-right direction. It is provided with a plurality of arranged upper end regulation ribs 609. By fitting the positioning protrusion 607 of the main body frame base 600 with the out ball discharge groove 1156 of the game board 4, it is possible to regulate the lower end of the game board 4 from moving in the left-right direction and the rear direction. ing. Further, the game board locking portion 608 can regulate the movement of the right side of the game board 4 in the front-rear direction by locking the game board stopper 1120 of the game board 4. There is. Although the details of the left side of the game board 4 in front view will be described later, the movement in the front-rear direction is restricted by the positioning member 956 of the side security plate 950.

Further, the main body frame base 600 has a metal fitting attachment for attaching the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 and the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 to the rear surface of the free end portion (upper and lower left end portions) of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602. It includes a section 610 (see FIG. 62). As shown in FIG. 61 and the like, the metal fitting mounting portion 610 is reinforced by a plurality of ribs whose front side extends vertically and horizontally, and the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 and the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 are mounted with sufficient strength. Can be done. Further, the main body frame base 600 is formed with a substantially circular cylinder lock through hole 611 penetrating in the front-rear direction in the upper right end of the lower rear wall portion 604 in the front view and a door frame 5 formed in the lower left of the front view of the cylinder lock through hole 611. A U-shaped fitting groove 612 that fits with a positioning protrusion 110d projecting rearward from the door frame base main body 110 and a launch solenoid 654 of the ball launching device 650 formed in the lower left of the fitting groove 612 in the front view are accommodated. It is provided with a solenoid accommodating recess 613.

As described above, the main body frame base 600 is formed at a position where the lower rear wall portion 604 is recessed one step to the rear side from the front surface of the front end frame portion 602, and is formed on the right front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 in front view. The ball striking device 650 is attached from the front side so that the launching solenoid 654 of the ball striking device 650 is accommodated in the solenoid accommodating recess 613. When the ball launching device 650 is attached to the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604, as shown in FIGS. 57 and 87, the ball launching device 650 is on the left side in the front view from the upper end of the launch rail 660, in the left direction and A foul space 626 that extends downward is formed. In the present embodiment, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball entrance 542e in the foul cover unit 540 is located below the foul space 626, and the foul space 626 is lowered. The game ball is received by the foul ball entrance 542e of the foul cover unit 540 and discharged to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300.

Further, the main body frame base 600 is formed in a plurality of openings 614 that penetrate in a rectangular shape in the front-rear direction to the left side of the left-right center of the lower rear wall portion 604 in the front view, and on the upper side of the opening 614 and on the left and right sides in the front view. It is provided with a through hole 615 penetrating in the front-rear direction. The opening 614 of the main body frame base 600 is closed by the relay terminal plate cover 692 (see FIG. 59 and the like) from the front side, and the lower rear wall portion 604 is passed through the opening 692a of the relay terminal plate cover 692. The main door relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 of the board unit 800 mounted on the rear surface face the front side. Further, the plurality of through holes 615 are for transmitting the sound from the speaker box 820 of the substrate unit 800 to the front side of the main body frame base 600. The through holes 615 arranged on both the left and right sides of the opening 614 are ventilation type holes having an opposition wall on the front side.

Further, the main body frame base 600 is a fixture support portion that rotatably supports the game board fixture 690 for detachably fixing the game board 4 on the upper side of the opening 614 near the upper end of the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604. It is provided with 616 and a stopper 617 that projects forward from the lower right of the front view of the fixture support portion 616 and regulates the rotational position of the game board fixture 690.

Here, as shown in FIG. 55 and the like, the game board fixture 690 includes a fixing piece 690a and a fixing piece 690a that spread in a fan shape around an axial center pivotally supported by the fixture support portion 616 of the main body frame base 600. It is provided with an operation piece 690b that extends outward from one end side in the circumferential direction (the side that becomes the rear end when rotated in the clockwise direction in the front view). The game board fixture 690 is pivotally supported by the fixture support portion 616 of the main body frame base 600, and then the operation piece 690b is operated to rotate the game board fixture 690 in the clockwise direction in the front view. The fixed piece 690a protrudes upward from the game board mounting portion 606 and is inserted into the fixed recess 1121 of the game board 4 mounted on the game board mounting portion 606. Can be prevented from moving forward. Further, in the game board fixture 690, the operation piece 690b comes into contact with the stopper 617, and by contacting the stopper 617, the rotating end in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front is restricted. It has become.

Further, the main body frame base 600 is provided with a door frame opening switch 618 for detecting the opening of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 on the lower front surface of the cylinder lock through hole 611, with respect to the main body frame 3. When the door frame 5 is opened (opened), the pressure is released so that the opening of the door frame 5 can be detected. Further, in the main body frame base 600, a main body frame opening switch 619 for detecting the opening of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 is attached to the rear surface below the position where the door frame opening switch 618 is attached ( (See FIG. 62), when the main body frame 3 is opened (opened) with respect to the outer frame 2, the pressing is released so that the opening of the main body frame 3 can be detected.

Further, the main body frame base 600 has three vertically elongated penetrations in the front-rear direction on the inside (shaft support side) of the engagement groove 603 on the right side (open side) side in the front view of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602. It is provided with a door hook hole 620 and two lock locking holes 621 that penetrate in the front-rear direction and are arranged in the left-right direction under the door hook hole 620 at the lower end. These three door hook holes 620 are formed in the vicinity of both upper and lower ends in the vertical direction and substantially in the center in the vertical direction, respectively. Locking protrusions 1004 provided on both upper and lower ends of the locking device 1000 are engaged and locked in the upper and central door hook holes 620 and the lock locking hole 621, and the front end frame portion 602 The lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame base 600 along the outer wall of the peripheral wall portion 605 on the rear side of the right side of the front view. When the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame base 600, the three door frame hook portions 1041 of the lock device 1000 project forward from the three door hook holes 620 and the cylinder lock of the lock device 1000. The 1010 is in a state of protruding forward from the cylinder lock through hole 611 (see FIG. 57).

Further, the main body frame base 600 gently and diagonally descends from the upper right end toward the substantially center in the left-right direction on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604, and then the lower rear wall portion 604 at the substantially center in the left-right direction. It is provided with a main body frame base ball pulling passage 622 that hangs down from the middle in the vertical direction to a position slightly upward in the above direction and allows the game ball to be distributed. The rear side of the main body frame base ball pulling passage 622 is closed by the board unit base 810 in the board unit 800, and the details will be described later. It is now in circulation.

Further, a plurality of main body frame bases 600 are arranged at the rear end of the left side of the peripheral wall portion 605 in the vertical direction at predetermined intervals, and the shaft support pins 906 of the back cover 900 are rotatably supported by the back cover shaft support portion 623. A mounting portion 624 for mounting the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 on the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 and diagonally upper left in the front view of the opening 614, and a locking device 1000 on the right side (open side) side surface of the peripheral wall portion 605 in the front view. It is provided with a lock mounting portion 625 for mounting and fixing.

Although detailed description will be omitted, in addition to the above, mounting bosses, mounting holes, etc. for mounting the ball launching device 650, the prize ball unit 700, the board unit 800, etc. are appropriately positioned on the main body frame base 600. Is formed in.

[4-2. Upper shaft support and lower shaft support]
Next, the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 and the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60. The upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 in the main body frame 3 are attached to the metal fitting mounting portions 610 on the upper and lower rear surfaces of the left end of the main body frame base 600 by using predetermined screws, respectively, to the main body frame 3. The door frame 5 can be pivotally supported so as to be openable and closable, and the main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported with respect to the outer frame 2.

First, the upper shaft support bracket 630 has a plate-shaped mounting portion 631 that is attached to the upper bracket mounting portion 610 of the main body frame base 600 and extends in the vertical and horizontal directions, and a plate-shaped mounting portion 631 that extends forward from the upper end of the mounting portion 631. The front extension portion 632, the shaft support pin 633 projecting upward from the vicinity of the front end of the front extension portion 632, and the shaft pin 155 of the door frame 5 arranged on the left side of the front view of the shaft support pin 633. The door frame shaft support hole 634 (see FIG. 57, etc.) through which the door frame is inserted and the door frame shaft support hole 634 (see FIG. It is equipped with a stopper (not shown) that regulates the end. The upper shaft support metal fitting 630 is integrally formed with a mounting portion 631, a front extending portion 632, and a stopper by bending and molding a single metal plate.

On the other hand, the lower shaft support bracket 640 is arranged below the door frame shaft support bracket 642 for pivotally supporting the door frame 5 and the door frame shaft support bracket 642, and supports the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2. It is provided with a main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 for the purpose. The door frame shaft support bracket 642 in the lower shaft support bracket 640 is attached to the lower bracket mounting portion 610 of the main body frame base 600 and has a plate-shaped mounting portion 642a that extends in the vertical and horizontal directions, and the mounting portion 642a from the lower end to the front. A plate-shaped front extension portion 642b that extends, a door frame shaft support hole 642c that penetrates vertically near the front end of the front extension portion 642b and into which the shaft pin 157 of the door frame 5 is inserted, and a front extension portion. It is provided with a stopper 642d which is erected upward from the left end portion of the front view of 642b and regulates the rotating end of the door frame 5 toward the open side. The door frame shaft support metal fitting 642 is integrally formed by bending and molding a single metal plate with a mounting portion 642a, a front extending portion 642b, and a stopper 642d.

Further, the main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 in the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 is attached to the metal fitting mounting portion 610 on the lower side of the main body frame base 600 and extends in the vertical and horizontal directions from the plate-shaped mounting portion 644a and the lower end of the mounting portion 644a. It is provided with a front extending portion 644b extending forward and a main body frame shaft support hole (not shown) penetrating in the vertical direction near the front end of the front extending portion 644b. The main body frame shaft support bracket 644 also has a mounting portion 644a and a front extending portion 644b integrally formed by bending a single metal plate.

The lower shaft support bracket 640 is in a state in which the mounting portion 642a of the door frame shaft support bracket 642 and the mounting portion 644a of the main body frame shaft support bracket 644 are overlapped (contacted) in the front-rear direction, and the door frame shaft support bracket is in contact with each other. The front extension portion 642b of the main body frame 642 and the front extension portion 644b of the main body frame shaft support bracket 644 are separated from each other by a predetermined distance in the vertical direction, and can be attached to the lower metal fitting attachment portion 610 of the main body frame base 600. ing.

The upper shaft support metal fitting 630 and the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 are attached to the main body frame base 600, and the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 and the main body frame shaft support hole (not shown) of the lower shaft support metal fitting 640. Is positioned coaxially, and the main body frame shaft support hole of the main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 in the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 is fitted and inserted into the support protrusion 21d of the lower support metal fitting 21 in the outer frame 2. As described above, the front extension portion 644b of the main body frame shaft support bracket 644 is placed on the support protrusion 21c of the lower support bracket 21, and then the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support bracket 630 is attached to the outer frame 2. By inserting the upper support metal fitting 20 into the support hook hole 20c, the main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported with respect to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable.

Further, the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 and the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 are attached to the main body frame base 600, and the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 and the door frame shaft support of the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 are attached. The hole 642c is positioned coaxially with the door frame so that the shaft pin 157 of the door frame 5 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 642c of the door frame shaft support metal fitting 642 in the lower shaft support metal fitting 640. After placing the lower shaft support 158 of the frame 5 on the front extension portion 642b of the door frame shaft support bracket 642, the shaft pin 155 of the door frame 5 is placed in the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support bracket 630. By inserting the door frame 5, the door frame 5 can be pivotally supported with respect to the main body frame 3. In the present embodiment, the upper shaft pin 155 of the door frame 5 is slidable in the vertical direction, and the shaft pin 155 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support bracket 630. Is once slid downward so that the upper shaft support portion 156 of the door frame 5 and the front extension portion 632 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 overlap each other, and then the shaft pin 155 is slid upward. It can be inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 634.

[4-3. Hit ball launcher]
Next, the hitting ball launching device 650 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 63 and 64. FIG. 63 is a front perspective view of the hitting ball launching device in the main body frame. Further, FIG. 64 is a rear perspective view of the hitting ball launching device in the main body frame. The hitting ball launching device 650 can hit the game ball supplied from the ball feeding unit 580 of the door frame 5 into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 with a strength corresponding to the rotation operation of the handle device 500. is there.

In the ball launching device 650 of the present embodiment, the launch base 652 of a metal plate attached to the front predetermined position of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600, and the rotation drive shaft 654a projecting forward on the lower rear surface of the launch base 652. Movement of the launching solenoid 654, the hammering mallet 656 fixed to the rotary drive shaft 654a of the launching solenoid 654 so as to be integrally rotatable, the mallet tip 658 fixed to the tip of the ball hammer 656, and the mallet tip 658. A mallet at the tip of a ball hammer 656 between a launch rail 660 attached to the front surface of the launch base 652 and a launch rail 660 above the base end of the launch rail 660, extending diagonally to the upper left of the front view from a predetermined position on the trajectory. At the same time that the tip 658 is made passable, a ball stop piece 662 that forms a gap through which the game ball cannot pass and holds the game ball at the base end of the launch rail 660, and a ball stop piece 662 at the base end of the launch rail 660. It is provided with a stopper 664 that restricts the hammer 656 (hammer tip 658) from rotating toward the launch rail 660 side from the position where the held game ball can be hit.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the firing solenoid 654 in the hitting ball launching device 650 is configured such that the rotation drive shaft 654a reciprocates with a strength (speed) according to the rotation operation angle of the handle device 500. .. Further, the ball striking mallet 656 of the ball striking device 650 has a fixed portion 656a fixed to the rotary drive shaft 654a of the launch solenoid 654 and a tip extending from the fixed portion 656a in a gentle arc shape to the axial center of the rotary drive shaft 654a. On the other hand, a solenoid portion 656b in which the tip 658 is fixed to the tip facing the normal direction, and a stopper portion 656c that can come into contact with the stopper 664 extending to the opposite side of the rod portion 656b with the fixing portion 656a in between. It has. When the stopper portion 656c of the hitting mallet 656 comes into contact with the stopper 664, the mallet tip 658 at the tip rotates toward the launch rail 660 from the hitting position (rotating end in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front). It is becoming regulated.

Further, the launch rail 660 of the ball striking device 650 has a loose arc shape with a lower portion recessed substantially along the lower end extension line of the outer rail 1111 of the game board 4 (see FIG. 87), and in the front-rear direction. On the other hand, the center has a V-shaped depression, and the game ball hit by the ball hammer 656 can be smoothly guided to the game board 4 side along the launch rail 660. The launch rail 660 is formed by bending a metal plate.

Further, the hitting ball launching device 650 has a stopper cover 666 covering the front surface of the stopper 664 that can regulate the rotation end of the hitting mallet 656 toward the hitting position side, and rotation at a position away from the hitting position of the hitting mallet 656. It is provided with a stopper 668 that regulates an end (a rotating end in a clockwise direction when viewed from the front). In the ball striking device 650, the surfaces of the stoppers 664 and 668 are covered with rubber, and it is possible to absorb the impact when the ball striking mallet 656 abuts and suppress the generation of noise due to the abutment. It has become like.

As shown in FIGS. 57 and 87, when the ball striking device 650 is attached to the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600, the upper end of the launch rail 660 is substantially in the center in the left-right direction and the lower rear wall portion. The upper end of the 604, that is, the outer rail 1111 in the game board 4 held by the game board holding port 601 is located below the game board mounting portion 606 (the lower side of the game board holding port 601). A foul space 626 that extends downward with a predetermined width in the left-right direction is formed between the lower end and the lower end. Then, the ball striking device 650 launches the game ball so as to jump over the foul space 626 on the left side of the launch rail 660 so that the game ball can be driven into the game area 1100 of the game board 4. It has become. As described above, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball entrance 542e of the foul cover unit 540 is located at the lower part of the foul space 626, and the game area 1100 The game ball, which has become a foul ball without being driven in, falls in the foul space 626, is received at the foul ball entrance 542e, and is discharged to the lower plate 302.

Further, in the ball striking launcher 650, the launch solenoid 654 is driven by the launch control unit 4130 with a drive strength corresponding to the rotation operation of the handle device 500, and the ball feed solenoid 585 of the ball feed unit 580. It is designed to be driven in synchronization with the drive of. Specifically, in the ball feeding unit 580 that supplies the game ball to the hitting ball launching device 650, when the ball feeding solenoid 585 is driven (ON), the ball feeding member 584 receives the game ball, and the ball feeding solenoid 585 is driven from that state. When the ball feed member 584 is released (OFF), the game ball received by the ball feed member 584 is sent to the ball feed launcher 650 side, so that the launch solenoid 654 is driven at the same time as the ball feed solenoid 585 of the ball feed unit 580 ( By turning it ON), the game ball can be smoothly supplied from the ball feeding unit 580 to the rear end of the launch rail 660, and the game ball can be reliably launched by the rotation of the ball hammer 656. There is.

[4-4. Prize ball unit]
Next, the prize ball unit 700 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 65 to 72. FIG. 65 is a front perspective view of the prize ball unit in the main body frame, and FIG. 66 is a rear perspective view of the prize ball unit in the main body frame. Further, FIG. 67 is an exploded perspective view of the prize ball unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of the prize ball unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 69 is an exploded perspective view showing the relationship between the prize ball tank and the tank rail unit in the prize ball unit from the rear. FIG. 70 is an exploded perspective view of the prize ball device in the prize ball unit as viewed after being disassembled. FIG. 71 is a rear view showing the relationship between the payout passage, the payout motor, and the payout rotating body in the prize ball device. Further, FIG. 72 is a cross-sectional view showing a ball circulation passage in the prize ball unit.

The prize ball unit 700 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment stores the game balls supplied from the pachinko island equipment side to the pachinko game machine 1 in the pachinko island equipment in the game hall where the pachinko game machine 1 is installed. It is paid out to the upper plate 301 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 based on a predetermined payout instruction. The prize ball unit 700 receives and stores the prize ball base 710 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 600 and the game balls attached to the upper rear surface of the prize ball base 710 and supplied from the pachinko island facility side. The 720, the tank rail unit 730 arranged below the prize ball tank 720 and storing the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and sent to the downstream side, and the game balls aligned by the tank rail unit 730 are predetermined. The prize ball device 740 to be paid out based on the payout instruction and the game ball paid out by the prize ball device 740 can be guided to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit, and the upper plate 301 is paid out when the game ball is full. It mainly includes a full tank branch unit 770 capable of branching and guiding the game ball to the lower plate 302 side.

Further, the prize ball unit 700 includes a prize ball passage lid 780 that closes the rear opening of the prize ball passage 715 formed in the prize ball base 710, and an earth fitting for grounding the tank rail unit 730 and the prize ball device 740. The 782, an external terminal plate 784 attached to the rear surface of the prize ball base 710, and an external terminal plate cover 786 that covers the rear side of the external terminal plate 784 are provided. The prize ball passage lid 780 in the prize ball unit 700 is formed with a back cover engaging groove 780a for fixing the back cover 900 on the rear surface (see FIG. 68).

In this prize ball unit 700, the prize ball base 710 is formed in an inverted L shape along the upper side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front, and the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail unit 730 are formed on the upper side. In addition to being arranged, a vertically long prize ball device 740 is arranged on the left side, and a full tank branch unit 770 is arranged below the prize ball device 740. Further, an external terminal plate 784 and an external terminal plate cover 786 are arranged directly above the prize ball device 740 and above the tank rail unit 730 so as to be adjacent to the prize ball tank 720.

Next, as shown in the figure, the prize ball base 710 in the prize ball unit 700 is formed in an inverted L shape in front view so as to substantially correspond to the left side of the game board holding port 601 in front view with the upper side of the main body frame base 600. And is integrally molded with synthetic resin. The prize ball base 710 is arranged so that the peripheral wall portion 710a extending rearward along the outer outer circumference of the inverted L shape and the peripheral wall portion 710a extend inward from the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 710a with a predetermined width and substantially on the same plane. It is provided with a rear wall portion 710b. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 68, the upper side of the peripheral wall portion 710a is formed so as to extend rearward from a position one step lower than the upper end of the prize ball base 710. The prize ball base 710 has a rear wall portion 710b located at a position deeper than the front end, and when attached to the main body frame base 600, a space capable of accommodating the game board 4 can be formed. ing.

Further, the prize ball base 710 is arranged next to the prize ball tank mounting portion 711 for mounting the prize ball tank 720 on the upper side of the peripheral wall portion 710a and the prize ball tank mounting portion 711 (on the right side when viewed from the rear), and is an external terminal plate 784. The external terminal plate mounting portion 712 for mounting the external terminal plate cover 786, the plurality of mounting locking portions 713 for mounting the tank rail unit 730 on the rear side of the upper end and the lower end of the rear wall portion 710b, and the rear wall portion 710b. A prize ball device mounting portion 714 for mounting the prize ball device 740 on the rear side of the vertical side, and a prize ball passage 715 that guides the game ball paid out from the prize ball device 740 adjacent to the prize ball device mounting portion 714 downward. And a mounting locking portion 716 for mounting the full tank branch unit 770 at the lower end of the rear wall portion 710b.

Further, the prize ball base 710 penetrates in the front-rear direction at the position of the prize ball device mounting portion 714 of the rear wall portion 710b, and has an escape hole 717 for allowing the payout motor 744 and the like protruding forward from the prize ball device 740 to escape, and the back. It includes a back cover engaging groove 718 for fixing the cover 900. Further, although detailed description is omitted on the prize ball base 710, mounting holes, mounting bosses, etc. for mounting the prize ball tank 720, the prize ball device 740, etc., or mounting on the main body frame base 600 are appropriately positioned. Is formed in.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 69, the prize ball tank 720 in the prize ball unit 700 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with an open upper portion, and a bottom wall portion having a horizontally long substantially rectangular shape in a plan view. 721, the outer peripheral wall portion 722 rising upward from the outer periphery of the bottom wall portion 721, and only the right rear portion (rear portion on the open side) protruding rearward from the bottom wall portion 721 in a plan view, and the outer peripheral wall portion. A plate-shaped discharge port 723 formed by a portion of the 722 that protrudes rearward from the bottom wall portion 721 at the rear right side, and a plate shape from the left side (shaft support side) of the discharge port 723 in a plan view to the left end of the prize ball tank 720. The eaves 724 extending to the eaves, the rod-shaped shaft 725 extending rearward from the lower left end of the eaves 724 in a plan view, and the prize balls formed near the base end of the shaft 725 and at both ends of the front side of the outer peripheral wall 722. A mounting portion 726 for mounting the tank 720 to the prize ball tank mounting portion 711 on the prize ball base 710 is provided.

In the prize ball tank 720, the outer circumference of the bottom wall portion 721 is surrounded by the outer peripheral wall portion 722, and a predetermined amount of game balls can be stored on the bottom wall portion 721. Further, the prize ball tank 720 is inclined so that the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 721 is lowered toward the discharge port 723, so that the game ball on the bottom wall portion 721 rolls toward the discharge port 723. It has become.

Further, the prize ball tank 720 includes two ball leveling members 727 that are rotatably supported by the shaft portion 725. As shown in the figure, the ball leveling member 727 has one end side pivotally supported by the shaft portion 725 and holds a weight inside, and the other end side hangs down due to its own weight. .. The ball leveling member 727 hangs down in the tank rail unit 730, which will be described later, and allows the game balls circulating in the tank rail unit 730 to be leveled and aligned. Further, the eaves 724 of the prize ball tank 720 is formed so as to cover substantially the upper half of the tank rail unit 730, so that it is possible to prevent the game balls from overflowing from the inside of the tank rail unit 730 and the tank. It is possible to prevent dust and the like from entering the rail unit 730.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 721 of the prize ball tank 720 is inclined so that the left side (the side far from the discharge port 723) becomes lower toward the right side in a plan view. The right side (the side closer to the discharge port 723) in a plan view is formed so as to be inclined toward the rear discharge port 723. As a result, the flow of the game ball can be smoothed, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clogging in the prize ball tank 720, and from the discharge port 723 to the tank rail unit 730 side. The game ball can be discharged smoothly.

Next, as shown in FIG. 69, the tank rail unit 730 of the prize ball unit 700 includes a tank rail 731 that is arranged below the prize ball tank 720 and extends long in the left-right direction. The tank rail 731 has a gutter shape with an open upper part and a predetermined depth, and has a width (depth) that allows the game balls to be aligned in two rows in the front-rear direction, and has a left end (shaft support side) end when viewed from the front. The bottom is tilted so that The tank rail 731 includes a discharge port 731a (see FIG. 72) that opens downward to the left end (shaft support side) end, a partition wall 731b extending upward from the bottom at substantially the center in the front-rear direction, and the lower surface of the front end. A plurality of locking projecting pieces 731c (see FIG. 67), which project downward and are locked from above to the mounting locking portion 713 of the prize ball base 710, are provided. The right end (open side) end of the tank rail 731 is located directly below the discharge port 723 of the prize ball tank 720, and the game ball discharged from the discharge port 723 of the prize ball tank 720 is placed. After receiving it, it can be rolled to the left and delivered from the discharge port 731a to the prize ball device 740 side. Further, by locking the locking projection piece 731c of the tank rail 731 to the mounting locking portion 713 of the prize ball base 710, the tank rail 731, that is, the tank rail unit 730 can be mounted on the prize ball base 710. ing.

Further, the tank rail unit 730 is continuous with the alignment gear 732 rotatably supported on the upper portion of the discharge port 731a of the tank rail 731, the gear cover 733 covering the upper portion of the alignment gear 732, and the right end of the gear cover 733 in the front view. A ball holding plate 734 that closes the upper part of the tank rail 731, and a ball stop piece that can advance and retreat into the tank rail 731 and can stop the game ball in the tank rail 731 from rolling toward the discharge port 731a. It includes a 735 and a ground plate 736 that is arranged in the tank rail 731 and is in contact with the game ball in the tank rail 731. As shown in the figure, two alignment gears 732 are provided side by side in the front-rear direction so as to correspond to two flow paths of the game balls partitioned in two rows by the partition wall 731b of the tank rail 731. Further, the ball holding plate 734 includes a mounting portion 734a to which the ball stop piece 735 is mounted on the upper portion, and two slits 734b that penetrate in the vertical direction and allow the projecting piece 735a of the ball stop piece 735 to be inserted.

In the tank rail unit 730, two ball leveling members 727 pivotally supported by the prize ball tank 720 are inserted from above on the upstream side (open side) of the ball holding plate 734. The game balls discharged from the discharge port 723 of the prize ball tank 720 into the tank rail 731 by the ball leveling member 727 can be smoothed in one step and arranged in two rows along the partition wall 731b. You can do it. Further, the ball holding plate 734 is for forcibly making the game ball which was not made one step by the ball leveling member 727 into one step, and the gap with the bottom of the tank rail 731 becomes narrower toward the discharge port 731a side. It is attached to the tank rail 731 as described above.

As shown in the figure, the alignment gear 732 of the tank rail unit 730 has a plurality of teeth formed on its outer circumference, and is pivotally supported so that the pitch of the teeth in the pair of alignment gears 732 is deviated by half a pitch. As a result, when the upper part of the game ball flowing down the tank rail 731 flows down to the discharge port 731a on the downstream side while meshing with the teeth of the alignment gear 732, the game balls arranged in two rows are alternately awarded one by one. It is designed to be sent to the device 740.

The bottom of the tank rail 731 is formed with fine grooves that penetrate vertically so that foreign matter such as dust that rolls together with the game ball in the tank rail 731 falls downward from the fine grooves. It has become. Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the ground plate 736 arranged on the inner wall of the tank rail 731 is grounded to the outside via the grounding connector of the power supply board 851 via the grounding metal fitting 782. When the game ball comes into contact with the ground plate 736 in the tank rail 731, the charged static electricity can be removed.

Further, the tank rail unit 730 rotates the ball stop piece 735 rotatably attached to the mounting portion 734a of the ball holding plate 734, and passes the projecting piece 735a of the ball stop piece 735 through the slit 734b into the tank rail 731. By inserting the ball into the tank rail 735a, the two rows of flow paths in the tank rail 731 can be closed, and the game ball can be stopped from being supplied to the prize ball device 740 side. There is.

Subsequently, the prize ball device 740 in the prize ball unit 700 discharges and supplies the game balls discharged and supplied from the discharge port 731a of the tank rail unit 730 to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 based on a predetermined payout instruction. It is a thing. As shown in FIGS. 70 to 72 and the like, the prize ball device 740 includes a unit base 741 extending in the vertical direction attached to the prize ball device mounting portion 714 of the prize ball base 710. As shown in the figure, the unit base 741 in the prize ball device 740 is a supply passage that opens at the upper end and extends slightly wider than the outer shape of the game ball to a position slightly below the center in the vertical direction. The 741a, the distribution space 741b having a space of a predetermined size communicating with the lower end of the supply passage 741a, and the lower end of the rear view left side (open side) of the distribution space 741b are connected to each other and bent in an abbreviated shape for rear view. It is provided with a prize ball passage 741c that opens on the left side surface, and a ball removal passage 741d that communicates with the lower end of the distribution space 741b on the right side (shaft support side) of the rear view and extends downward to open at the lower end. The supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, and the ball removal passage 741d of the unit base 741 are formed in a state of being open to the rear.

The prize ball device 740 includes a back cover 742 that is attached to the rear side of the unit base 741 and has a shorter vertical length than the unit base 741, and a plate-shaped motor support plate 743 that is arranged under the back cover 742. , The payout motor 744, which is arranged on the front side of the motor support plate 743 and is fixed to the unit base 741 so that the rotary shaft 744a protrudes rearward from the motor support plate 743, and the rotary shaft 744a of the payout motor 744 can be integrally rotated. The first gear 745 fixed and arranged behind the motor support plate 743, the second gear 746 that meshes with the first gear 745 and is pivotally supported by the unit base 741, and the unit base 741 that meshes with the second gear 746. The third gear 747, which is pivotally supported by the third gear 747, the payout rotating body 748, which rotates integrally with the third gear 747 and is arranged in the distribution space 741b of the unit base 741, and the payout rotating body 748 sandwich the third gear 747. It is provided with a rotation detection board 749 which is fixed to the opposite side so as to be integrally rotatable and has a plurality of (three in this embodiment) detection slits 749a formed at equal intervals in the circumferential direction.

Further, the prize ball device 740 has a ball-out switch 750 attached to the unit base 741 for detecting the presence or absence of a game ball in the supply passage 741a, and a game ball attached to the unit base 741 and flowing down in the prize ball passage 741c. The back cover 742, which holds the count switch 751 for detecting the rotation angle switch 751, the rotation angle switch 752 for detecting the detection slit 749a formed in the rotation detection board 749 that rotates integrally with the payout rotating body 748, and the rotation angle switch 752. Award that is attached to the rear surface of the back cover 742 by relaying the connection between the rotation angle switch board 753 attached to the rear surface, the payout motor 744, the ball-out switch 750, the counting switch 751, and the rotation angle switch 752 and the payout control board 4110. It includes a sphere case inner substrate 754.

Further, the prize ball device 740 includes a board cover 755 that covers the board 754 in the prize ball case from the rear side and is attached to the rear surface of the back cover 742, and the first gear 745, the second gear 746, and the third gear 747 (rotation detection board). 749), and the gear cover 756 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 741 with the back cover 742 sandwiching the rotation angle switch board 753 from the rear side, and the game ball circulating in the supply passage 741a of the unit base 741 can be contacted. The supply passage grounding bracket 757 and the payout motor 744 are fixed to the unit base 741 with the motor support plate 743 sandwiched between them, and the screw 758 for grounding the payout motor 744 and the back cover 742 can be attached to and detached from the unit base 741. It is provided with a detachable button 759 that supports the device.

In the prize ball device 740, the back cover 742 is attached to the rear side of the unit base 741, so that the open rear ends of the supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, and the ball removal passage 741d are closed. It has become so. Further, the unit base 741 has a shape in which the position below the upper end in the supply passage 741a once bulges rearward, so that the momentum of the game ball discharged and dropped from the tank rail unit 730 can be relaxed. You can do it. Further, the unit base 741 is partially notched on one side surface (left side when viewed from the rear) below the position of the supply passage 741a bulging backward, and is outside the notched position of the supply passage 741a. The switch mounting portion 741e for mounting the ball-cutting switch 750, the switch mounting portion 741f for mounting the counting switch 751 in the middle of the prize ball passage 741c, and the switch mounting portion 741f below the prize ball passage 741c so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction. It is provided with a motor insertion hole 741 g, which is formed and can insert the payout motor 744.

By attaching the ball-cutting switch 750 to the switch mounting portion 741e of the unit base 741, the working piece of the ball-cutting switch 750 forms a part of the side wall of the supply passage 741a, and exists in the supply passage 741a. When the operating piece is pressed by the game ball, the ball-out switch 750 can detect the presence or absence of the game ball in the supply passage 741a. When the game ball in the supply passage 741a is not detected by the ball-out switch 750 (ball-out state), the payout motor 744 does not rotate, and the player or the hall indicates that the ball is out. It is designed to be notified to the side.

Further, the unit base 741 is provided between the bearing portion 741h for axially supporting the second gear 746 and the third gear 747 (delivery rotating body 748), the switch mounting portion 741e in the supply passage 741a, and the distribution space 741b. The ground fitting mounting portion 741i for mounting the supply passage ground fitting 757 and the button support hole 741j arranged on the upper part of the unit base 741 and supporting the detachable button 759 for attaching and detaching the back cover 742. I have. In this unit base 741, by attaching the supply passage ground fitting 757 to the ground fitting mounting portion 741i, the rear surface of the supply passage ground fitting 757 can come into contact with the game ball in the supply passage 741a. The front surface of the supply passage ground fitting 757 is in contact with the lower end rear surface of the U-shaped ground fitting 782, and the static electricity of the game ball circulating in the supply passage 741a is removed through the supply passage ground fitting 757. Can be done.

The back cover 742 of the prize ball device 740 has a vertically long plate shape as a whole and has a shape in which the upper end bulges rearward. At the upper part of the back cover 742, there is a button insertion hole 742a through which the attachment / detachment button 759 is inserted, a relay board mounting portion 742b for mounting the prize ball case inner board 754 and the board cover 755 on the substantially central rear surface in the vertical direction, and a relay board. It is provided with a rotation angle switch board mounting portion 742c arranged below the mounting portion 742b for mounting the rotation angle switch board 753, and a through hole 742d through which the payout rotating body 748 can pass. The relay board mounting portion 742b of the back cover 742 is formed so as to be located behind the ground fitting mounting portion 741i of the unit base 741.

Further, the motor support plate 743 of the prize ball device 740 is an aluminum plate in the present embodiment, and is in contact with the metal motor housing of the payout motor 744, and heat generated by the payout motor 744. It is possible to easily dissipate heat.

Further, as shown in FIG. 71, the payout rotating body 748 of the prize ball device 740 is provided with three recesses 748a having a size capable of accommodating one game ball at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. By rotating the 748, the game balls supplied from the supply passage 741a are housed in the recesses 748a one by one, and can be discharged to the prize ball passage 741c or the ball removal passage 741d side. Further, the three detection slits 749a formed in the rotation detection board 749 that rotates integrally with the payout rotating body 748 are formed on the outer periphery of the rotation detection board 749 in equal parts (every 120 degrees), and the payout rotating body 748 It is provided at a position corresponding to the recess 748a, and the rotation position of the payout rotating body 748 can be detected by detecting the detection slit 749a with the rotation angle switch 752. In the present embodiment, the rotation of the rotation detection board 749 (payout rotating body 748) between the detection slits 794a (120 degrees) is designed to correspond to the rotation of the payout motor 744 in 18 steps.

In the prize ball device 740, the payout motor 744 is rotated by inputting a payout command from the main control board 4100, a lending command from the CR unit, or the like to the payout control board 4110, or by operating the ball ejection switch 860b. Therefore, a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out to the player side (upper plate 301) and discharged to the game hall side (rear side of the pachinko game machine 1). When the rotary shaft 744a of the payout motor 744 is rotationally driven, the first gear 745 fixed to the rotary shaft 744a is rotated, and at the same time, the second gear 746 that meshes with the first gear 745 is rotated, and further, the second gear 746 is rotated. The third gear 747 that meshes with the gear 747 rotates. A payout rotating body 748 is fixed to the third gear 747 so as to be integrally rotatable on the rear side, and a payout rotating body 748 and a rotation detecting board 794 are fixed together with the third gear 747. It is designed to rotate. Since the first gear 745, the second gear 746, and the third gear 747 have play (back crash), the payout rotating body 748 rotates clockwise or counterclockwise, but this back crash causes the payout rotating body 748 to rotate clockwise or counterclockwise. The rotation of the payout rotating body 748 is designed to correspond to the rotation of the payout motor 744 in about two steps.

In this prize ball device 740, as shown in FIG. 71, the payout rotating body 748 is rotatably supported in the substantially center of the distribution space 741b. Then, when the payout rotating body 748 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the rear by the payout motor 744, the game ball in the supply passage 741a is paid out to the prize ball passage 741c side, and the payout rotation The game balls paid out to the prize ball passage 741c side by the rotation of the body 748 are counted one by one by the counting switch 751 and then delivered to the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710. On the other hand, when the payout rotating body 748 is rotated in the rear view clockwise direction by the payout motor 744, the game ball in the supply passage 741a is paid out to the ball ejection passage 741d side, and the payout rotating body 748 The game balls discharged to the ball pulling passage 741d side are the ball pulling passage 778 of the full tank branch unit 770 described later, the main frame base ball pulling passage 622 of the main body frame base 600, and the board unit 800 from the lower end of the ball pulling passage 741d. The pachinko game machine 1 can be discharged to the rear side and the outside through the opening 812 of the board unit base 810 and the discharge passage 842 of the power supply board box holder 840.

Next, the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 67, 68, and 72. The full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 is attached to the lower end of the prize ball base 710, and guides the game ball paid out to the prize ball passage 741c side of the prize ball device 740 to the plate unit 300. When the game ball is full in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300, the game ball can be distributed so as to be paid out to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300.

The full tank branch unit 770 is fixed to a locking portion 770a that is locked to the mounting locking portion 716 of the prize ball base 710 at the substantially central upper part in the front-rear direction, and to the lower back surface of the prize ball base 710 at the upper rear end. It is provided with a fixing portion 770b. The full tank branch unit 770 is in a state of being suspended from the mounting locking portion 716 by locking the locking portion 770a to the mounting locking portion 716 of the prize ball base 710 from the rear side, and the prize ball base. By fixing the fixing portion 770b to the 710 with a predetermined screw, the full tank branch unit 770 can be attached and fixed to the lower end of the prize ball base 710.

Further, as shown in the figure, the full tank branch unit 770 is formed in a box shape so that the whole becomes lower from the rear end to the front end, and opens upward at substantially the center in the left-right direction at the upper part of the rear end. The prize ball receiving port 771 that receives the game ball that has flowed down the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710, and the branch space 772 that is arranged under the prize ball receiving port 771 and extends in the left-right direction (see FIG. 72). And the normal passage 773 (see FIG. 72) that guides the game ball from directly below the prize ball receiving port 771 in the branch space 772 to the front side, and the game ball that has passed through the normal passage 773 is discharged forward and in front of the front end. The normal ball outlet 774 opened at the right end of the view and the full tank passage 775 (see FIG. 72) that guides the game ball from a position far to the right side of the rear view from directly below the prize ball receiving port 771 in the branch space 772 toward the front side. ), And a full tank outlet 776 that discharges the game ball that has passed through the full tank passage 775 forward and opens on the left side of the front view of the normal ball outlet 774.

Further, the full tank branch unit 770 has a ball ejection port 777 that opens upward to the left end portion of the upper rear end in front view and receives a game ball that has flowed down the ball ejection passage 741d of the prize ball device 740, and a ball. The ball ejection passage 778 (see FIG. 72) that guides the game ball received by the extraction port 777 to the front side and the game ball that has circulated through the ball extraction passage 778 are discharged forward and the normal ball outlet 774 and the normal ball outlet 774 at the left end of the front view. It is provided with a ball outlet 779 which is opened at a position behind the full ball outlet 776.

When the door frame 5 of the full tank branch unit 770 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank outlet 776 are the first ball inlets 542a of the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5, respectively. The game ball released from the normal ball outlet 774 passes through the first ball entrance 542a of the foul cover unit 540 and communicates with the second ball entrance 542c facing the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300. The game ball supplied to the plate unit 300 and released from the full tank outlet 776 is supplied to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 through the second ball inlet 542c of the foul cover unit 540. Further, the ball outlet 779 is formed so as to communicate with the upper right end of the rear view of the main body frame base ball extraction passage 622 in the main body frame base 600, and the game ball released from the ball extraction outlet 779 is formed in the main body frame base 600. It is designed to be delivered to the main body frame base ball pulling passage 622.

In this full tank branch unit 770, the game balls paid out to the prize ball passage 741c side of the prize ball device 740 can be received at the prize ball receiving port 771 via the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710. The game ball that has entered the prize ball receiving port 771 hangs down the branch space 772 and flows down into the normal passage 773 arranged directly under the prize ball receiving port 771 in a normal state. Then, the game ball that has flowed down into the normal passage 773 enters the first ball inlet 542a of the foul cover unit 540 from the normal ball outlet 774, passes through the first ball passage 542b, and enters the plate unit 300 from the first ball outlet 544a. It will be supplied to the upper plate 301.

By the way, when the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 is filled with the game balls and the game balls are further discharged from the prize ball unit 700 (prize ball device 740), the first ball exit of the foul cover unit 540. The game ball that cannot come out from 544a to the upper plate 301 side stagnates in the first ball passage 542b of the foul cover unit 540, and eventually fills the upstream normal passage 773 through the normal ball outlet 774 in the full tank branch unit 770. become. In this state, the game ball that entered the branch space 772 from the prize ball receiving port 771 could not enter the normal passage 773, and started to move laterally in the branch space 772 and moved laterally. The game ball enters the full tank passage 775, and is under the plate unit 300 from the full tank outlet 776 via the second ball entrance 542c, the second ball passage 542d, and the second ball exit 544b of the foul cover unit 540. It is designed to be supplied to the plate 302.

In this way, when the game ball is full in the upper plate 301, the full tank branch unit 770 automatically lowers the game ball paid out from the prize ball device 740 until the full tank is cleared. Since it can be supplied to the plate 302, the upper plate becomes full and the game ball is not supplied to the hitting ball launcher by operating the ball removal button on the upper plate as in the conventional pachinko game machine. It is possible to prevent the pachinko machine from being interrupted, eliminate the annoyance during the game, and suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

As described above, when the upper plate 301 is full, the full tank branching unit 770 branches the passage of the gaming ball to be paid out directly under the prize ball device 740, that is, at the rear of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Since the game balls staying in the normal passage 773 of the full tank branch unit 770 are discharged to the upper plate 301, the game balls in the upper plate 301 and the game balls in the normal passage 773 are directly hit by the hit ball launching device 650. It becomes a game ball that can be played, and the storage amount of the game ball in the upper plate 301 is substantially the sum of the capacity of the upper plate 301 and the capacity of the normal passage 773. That is, even if the capacity of the upper plate 301 is made smaller than the capacity of the upper plate in the conventional pachinko gaming machine, the capacity of the normal passage 773 is added, so that the same amount of game balls as the conventional one is stored in the upper plate 301. be able to. Therefore, by making the upper plate 301 smaller, the game window 101 in the door frame 5 can be made relatively larger (wider), and the pachinko game machine 1 having a wider game area 1100 can be obtained. The pachinko gaming machine 1 has a high appeal to the players who play the game, and the wide gaming area 1100 makes it possible to entertain the players.

[4-5. Ball exit opening / closing unit]
Next, the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 73 to 75. FIG. 73 is a front perspective view of the ball outlet opening / closing unit in the main body frame. Further, FIG. 74 is a rear perspective view of the ball outlet opening / closing unit in the main body frame. Further, FIG. 75 is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the ball outlet opening / closing unit in the main body frame and the foul cover unit in the door frame. The ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is attached to a mounting portion 624 formed near the upper left end of the front view of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600, and is attached to the main body frame 3. When the door frame 5 is opened, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 are closed, and the prize ball unit 700 is moved to the plate unit 300 of the door frame 5. It is possible to block the flow of the game ball.

The ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 is attached to a mounting portion 624 formed near the upper left end of the front view of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600 so as not to protrude from the upper end of the lower rear wall portion 604. A plate-shaped opening / closing shutter 792 that is slidably held in the shutter base 791 in the vertical direction, an opening / closing crank 793 that slides the opening / closing shutter 792 in the vertical direction, and an opening / closing shutter 792 that rises via the opening / closing crank 793. It is equipped with an opening / closing spring 794 that urges the vehicle.

The shutter base 791 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 includes a pair of vertically extending slide grooves 791a for holding the opening / closing shutter 792 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction so as to project upward from the upper end of the shutter base 791. A rectangular opening 791b that penetrates in the front-rear direction between a pair of slide grooves 791a, and a crank that is arranged in front of the left end portion in a front view and rotatably supports an opening / closing crank 793 that extends in the front-rear direction. It includes a support portion 791c and a spring locking portion 791d that locks one end (upper end) of the opening / closing spring 794. The crank support portion 791c of the shutter base 791 is arranged on the left side of the opening 791b in the front view, and the spring locking portion 791d is arranged in the vicinity of the upper portion on the left side from the center in the left-right direction in the front view.

Further, the opening / closing shutter 792 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 is a pair of sliding protrusions (not shown) that project from the front surface of the flat shutter body 792a and the shutter body 792a and slide in the slide groove 791a of the shutter base 791. ), And a horizontally long rectangular drive hole 792b arranged at a position facing the opening 791b of the shutter base 791 between the pair of sliding protrusions and penetrating in the front-rear direction.

Further, the opening / closing crank 793 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 has a shaft portion 793a rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction by the crank support portion 791c of the shutter base 791, and the outer periphery on the right side of the front view of the shaft portion 793a. A drive rod 793b whose tip extends outward from the tip to the vicinity of the center in the left-right direction of the opening 791b, and a drive rod 793b that protrudes rearward from the tip and is slidably inserted into the drive hole 792b of the opening / closing shutter 792. Drive pin 793c, abutment portion 793d extending downward from the lower outer periphery of the shaft portion 793a and having a spherical tip, and the other end (lower end) of the opening / closing spring 794 formed on the upper surface of the drive rod 793b. ) Is provided with a spring locking portion 793e.

In the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790, the opening / closing crank 793 rotates around an axis extending in the front-rear direction, so that the drive pin 793c of the opening / closing crank 793 rotates in the vertical direction in an arc shape, and at the same time, the drive pin 793c is inserted. The opening / closing shutter 792 slides in the vertical direction through the drive hole 792b. In the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the contact portion 793d of the opening / closing crank 793 comes into contact with the opening / closing operation piece 542g of the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5. The contact portion 793d is rotated in the clockwise direction in the front view against the urging force of the opening / closing spring 794, and the drive pin 793c is rotated in the front view clockwise direction together with the contact portion 793d. By moving, the open / close shutter 792 is lowered so that the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 can be opened.

When the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3 from this state, the contact portion 793d of the opening / closing crank 793 and the opening / closing operation piece 542g of the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 are released, and the opening / closing crank 793 is released. Is rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front by the urging force of the opening / closing spring 794, and at the same time, the opening / closing shutter 792 rises to close the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770. You can do it.

In this way, according to the opening and closing of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3, the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 automatically opens the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank outlet 767 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700. Since it can be opened and closed, even if the door frame 5 is opened with the game ball remaining in the full tank branch unit 770, it is possible to prevent the game ball from spilling from the normal ball outlet 774 or the full tank outlet 776. You can do it.

[4-6. Board unit]
Next, the substrate unit 800 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 80. FIG. 76 is a front perspective view of the substrate unit in the main body frame, and FIG. 77 is a rear perspective view of the substrate unit in the main body frame. Further, FIG. 78 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit as viewed from the front after being disassembled. Further, FIG. 79 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit as viewed after being disassembled. FIG. 80A is a front view of the firing power supply board box, and FIG. 80B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA shown in FIG.

The board unit 800 in the main body frame 3 includes a board unit base 810 attached to the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600, a speaker box 820 attached to the left rear surface of the board unit base 810 in front view, and a board unit base. A power supply board box 830 mounted on the rear surface of the right end of the front view of the 810, a power supply board box holder 840 mounted on the rear surface of the board unit base 810 so as to surround the launch power board box 830 from the rear side, and a power supply board box holder 840. A power supply board box 850 that is mounted on the rear surface and has a rear end substantially flush with the rear end of the speaker box 820, and a payout control board box 860 that is mounted on the rear surfaces of the power supply board box 850 and the speaker box 820. The terminal board box 870 attached to the rear surface of the speaker box 820 so as to cover the left end of the payout control board box 860 in front view, the main door relay terminal board 880 attached to the front surface of the board unit base 810, and the peripheral door relay. It includes a terminal board 882.

As shown in the figure, the substrate unit base 810 of the substrate unit 800 has a shape that extends long in the left-right direction, and a substantially central portion in the left-right direction is lowered by one step and gently inclined upward toward both left and right ends, and is inclined from the front to the front. A wall-shaped shielding wall portion 811 protruding to the left, an opening 812 arranged above the position one step lower in the center in the left-right direction and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a front view below the shielding wall portion 811. A board mounting portion 813 formed on the front surface near the left end for mounting the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and a cylinder penetrating in a horizontally long rectangular shape in the front-rear direction on the left side of the board mounting portion 813 when viewed from the front. A plurality of vertically elongated slit-shaped through holes 815 penetrating in the front-rear direction at positions corresponding to the shape-shaped duct portion 814 and the lower speaker 821 of the speaker box 820 fixed to the rear surface, and the upper part on the left side (right side in front view) of the rear view. The rear surface is provided with a box accommodating portion 816 that is open rearward and upward and can accommodate the front side of the firing power supply board box 830.

The substrate unit base 810 is formed so that the shielding wall portion 811 is formed along the lower side of the main body frame base ball pulling passage 622 formed on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600. It is possible to prevent the game ball from falling downward from the base ball pulling passage 622, and it is possible to increase the strength of the substrate unit base 810. Further, the board unit base 810 sends the game balls flowing down the main body frame base ball pulling passage 622 to the power supply board box holder 840 arranged on the rear side of the board unit base 810 through the opening 812 penetrating in the front-rear direction. You can do it.

Further, in the board unit base 810, the board mounting portion 813 for mounting the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 is arranged at a position corresponding to the rectangular opening opening 614 in the main body frame base 600. When the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are attached to the board mounting portion 813, the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are on the front side from the opening 614 of the main body frame base 600. It is designed to face. Further, the substrate unit base 810 can satisfactorily transmit the sound from the lower speaker 821 of the speaker box 820 to the front side by the duct portion 814 and the plurality of through holes 815.

The speaker box 820 in the board unit 800 literally includes a lower speaker 821 mounted facing forward. The speaker box 820 covers the rear side of the lower speaker 821 in a hermetically sealed manner, and at the same time, a horizontally long rectangular opening 822 is formed on the left side of the lower speaker 821 in front view. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the opening 822 communicates with the space behind the lower speaker 821 via a predetermined maze-shaped passage to invert the phase of the sound behind the lower speaker 821. It is a bass-reflex type speaker box that can emit deeper bass to the diameter of the lower speaker 821. The duct portion 814 of the board unit base 810 is formed at a position corresponding to the opening port 822 of the speaker box 820, so that the sound radiated from the opening port 822 can be satisfactorily transmitted forward. ing.

The firing power board box 830 in the board unit 800 is formed in a box shape with an open rear portion, and includes a firing power board 831 attached so as to close the rear end opening. The firing power supply board 831 includes a DC / DC converter 831a and an electrolytic capacitor SC0 for charging and discharging the electric power from the DC / DC converter 831a, and the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0. The merged current, which is the sum of the current generated by the discharge from the ball, is driven by passing the current through the firing solenoid 654 of the ball launching device 650. The firing power supply board box 830 is formed with slits 830a as heat dissipation holes on its upper surface and lower surface in order to release the heat generated by the DC / DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 mounted on the firing power supply board 831 to the outside. ing. Since the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is an electronic component that is more easily damaged by heat than the DC / DC converter 831a, a slit 830a as a heat dissipation hole is formed on the side surface of the firing power supply board box 830 in which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is arranged. .. Further, in the firing power supply board box 830, a partition wall 830b that divides the internal space into two spaces, a space for accommodating the DC / DC converter 831a and a space for accommodating the electrolytic capacitor SC0, is an upper inner wall. It is integrally formed from the bottom surface to the edge of the end opening so as to connect the bottom surface and the inner wall of the bottom surface. As a result, when the firing power supply board 831 is attached to the end opening of the firing power supply board box 830 to close the internal space of the firing power supply board box 830, the internal space of the firing power supply board box 830 accommodates the electrolytic capacitor SC0 by the partition wall 830b. Since two spaces are formed, the accommodation space 830c for accommodating the DC / DC converter 831a and the accommodation space 830d for accommodating the DC / DC converter 831a, the partition wall 830b and the accommodation space 830c for accommodating the electrolytic capacitor SC0. , A storage space 830d for accommodating the DC / DC converter 831a, and a heat insulating wall that blocks the inflow and outflow of heat. The heat in the accommodation space 830c in which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is housed, that is, the heat generated by the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is slits as heat dissipation holes formed on the upper surface, the side surface, and the lower surface, respectively, which communicate the accommodation space 830c with the outside air. By being discharged to the outside via the 830a, it is possible to prevent the released heat from entering the accommodation space 830d in which the DC / DC converter 831a is accommodated. Therefore, the heat generated by the electrolytic capacitor SC0 can be prevented from being transferred to the DC / DC converter 831a. Further, the heat in the accommodation space 830d in which the DC / DC converter 831a is accommodated, that is, the heat generated by the DC / DC converter 831a is used as heat radiation holes formed on the upper surface and the lower surface that communicate the accommodation space 830d and the outside air, respectively. By being discharged to the outside through the slit 830a of the above, it is possible to prevent the released heat from entering the accommodation space 830c in which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is accommodated. Therefore, the heat generated by the DC / DC converter 831a can be prevented from being transferred to the electrolytic capacitor SC0.

In the present embodiment, the DC / DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for creating the combined current to be passed through the firing solenoid 654 of the ball launching device 650 are not provided on the power supply board 851, but are launched separately from the power supply board 851. By being provided on the power supply board 831, the size of the firing power supply board 831 can be made smaller than the size of the power supply board 851. The miniaturization of the firing power supply board 831 makes it easier to handle, facilitates the replacement work of the firing power supply board 831, and contributes to shortening the time spent for the replacement work. In this replacement work, the firing power board 831 can be replaced as it is attached to the end opening of the firing power board box 830, that is, the entire firing power board box 830 can be replaced. Further, even if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is operated and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 reaches the end of its life, and the drive firing by the firing solenoid 654 suddenly becomes impossible to fire and the game has to be interrupted, the replacement work of the firing power supply board 831 is required. Since it can be easily performed, the interruption of the game can be resolved at an early stage. Therefore, the inability to fire due to the life of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 can be eliminated extremely easily, and the interruption of the game due to the inability to fire can be eliminated at an early stage to restart the game.

The electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the firing power supply board 831 deteriorates and reaches the end of its life due to repeated charging and discharging every time the driving firing is performed by the firing solenoid 654, for example, at a frequency of 100 times per minute. On the other hand, although the power supply board 851 creates a DC power supply from the AC power supply of the Pachinko Island facility, it is not repeatedly charged and discharged at the same frequency as the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the firing power supply board 831. Compared to, its life is extremely long. In other words, the firing power supply board 831 reaches the end of its life due to deterioration due to charging and discharging of the electrolytic capacitor SC0, whereas the power supply board 851 reaches the end of its life due to aging. The DC / DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for creating the merged current flowing through the firing solenoid 654 are not provided on the power supply board 851, but are provided on the firing power supply board 831 which is separate from the power supply board 851. Electronic components that accompany long-term changes can be concentrated on the power supply board 851. As a result, it is possible to prevent electronic components having a long life from being replaced together with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 having a short life due to aging.

Further, the power supply board box holder 840 in the board unit 800 is opened upward on the left front side of the center on the left and right in the front view, and receives the game ball discharged downward from the out ball discharging portion 1161 of the game board 4. The discharge ball receiving portion 841 and the discharge passage 842 that guides and discharges the game ball received by the discharge ball receiving portion 841 downward, and the front side (right side in front view) of the discharge passage 842 and the discharge ball receiving portion 841. The front box accommodating portion 843 which is opened forward and upward and can accommodate the rear side of the power supply board box 830, and the front end of the power supply board box 850 which is formed so that the entire rear surface of the power supply board box holder 840 is recessed to the front side. It is provided with a rear box accommodating portion 844 capable of accommodating.

In this power supply board box holder 840, the open front end side of the discharge passage 842 is closed by the rear surface of the board unit base 810, and the opening 812 of the board unit base 810 is at a position desired to the discharge passage 842. It is formed, and flows through the main body frame base ball pulling passage 622 formed on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600, passes through the opening 812 of the board unit base 810, and is the rear side of the board unit base 810. The game ball that has flowed down to the pachinko game machine 1 and the game ball that has been discharged from the out-ball discharge unit 1161 of the game board 4 and received by the discharge ball receiving unit 841 of the game board 4 will be passed through the discharge passage 842 to the rear side of the pachinko game machine 1. It can be discharged downward.

Further, the power supply board box 850 in the board unit 800 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with an open front, and includes a power supply board 851 attached so as to close the front end opening thereof. The power supply board box 850 accommodates various electronic components attached to the power supply board 851, and externally receives heat from the electronic components and the like through a plurality of slits 850a formed on the upper surface and the lower surface. It can be released to. As shown in FIG. 79, the power switch 852 attached to the power supply board 851 faces the rear surface of the power supply board box 850.

The power supply board box 850 and the power supply board box holder 840 are formed so that the front-rear direction dimensions in the assembled state are substantially the same as the front-rear direction dimensions of the speaker box 820, and the board unit base 810 is formed. When attached, the rear surface of the power supply board box 850 and the rear surface of the speaker box 820 are substantially flush with each other.

Further, the payout control board box 860 in the board unit 800 has a horizontally long thin box-shaped box base 861 with an open rear and a thin box-shaped cover fitted into the box base 861 from the rear side and the front is open. It includes a 862 and a payout control board 4110 (see FIG. 97) that is attached to the rear surface of the box base 861 and whose rear surface is covered by a cover 862. Further, the payout control board box 860 includes a plurality of separated cutting portions 863 formed on both the box base 861 and the cover 862 protruding outward from the left end of the rear view, and at one location of the plurality of separated cutting portions 863. The box base 861 and the cover 862 are caulked and fixed. As a result, in order to separate the box base 861 and the cover 862, it is not possible to separate the box base 861 and the cover 862 without cutting the separation cutting portion 863, and when the payout control board box 860 is opened, the trace remains. .. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the payout control board box 860 has been opened or closed illegally. In this embodiment, the payout control board box 860 can be opened and closed only once for inspection and the like.

In the payout control board box 860, the error release switch 860a, the ball ejection switch 860b, the inspection output terminal 860c, etc. attached to the payout control board 4110 face rearward through the cover 862 (see FIG. 56). ). Further, in the payout control board box 860, terminals for various connections for connecting to the main control board 4100 and the like face rearward through the cover 862.

Further, the terminal board box 870 in the board unit 800 has a board base 871 mounted on the rear surface of the speaker box 820 and a frame peripheral relay terminal mounted on the rear surface of the board base 871 and fixed with peripheral panel relay terminals 872 toward the rear. The plate 868, the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 attached to the rear surface of the board base 871 and the CR unit relay terminal 873 fixed rearward, and the peripheral panel relay terminal 872 and the CR unit relay terminal 873 are rear. A substrate cover 874 that covers the rear side of the substrate base 871 so as to face the side is provided. The peripheral panel relay terminal 872 is for connecting to a frequency display for displaying the operating status of the pachinko gaming machine 1 provided on the pachinko island facility side where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed, and is for connecting to a CR unit relay. Terminal 873 is for connecting to a CR unit installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1.

Further, the main door relay terminal board 880 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 in the board unit 800 are the peripheral control board 4140 provided on the game board 4 attached to the main body frame 3, the payout control board 4110 of the board unit 800, and the like. This is for relaying the connection with the handle device 500 provided on the door frame 5, each decorative board, the operation unit 400, and the like. The main door relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are attached to the board mounting portion 813 formed on the front surface of the board unit base 810 so that they face the front side from the front surface of the main body frame base 600. , The wiring extending from the door frame 5 can be connected.

The front side of the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 is covered by the relay terminal plate cover 692 attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600, and the relay terminal plate cover 692 Only the connection terminals face the front side through the opening 692a, so that the front surface of the main body frame 3 has a neat appearance (see FIG. 55 and the like).

Further, the main door relay terminal plate 880 includes a ball rental button 361, a return button 362, a loan balance display unit 363, a potentiometer 512 of the handle device 500, and a touch of the ball rental unit 360 in the dish unit 300 arranged on the door frame 5 side. This is for relaying the connection between the full switch 550 of the switch 516, the launch stop switch 518, and the foul cover unit 540, and the payout control board 4110 arranged on the main body frame 3 side. Further, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 is attached to the decorative units 200, 240, 280 arranged on the door frame 5 side, the decorative substrates 430, 432 provided in the dish unit 300 and the operation unit 400, and the operation unit 400. This is for relaying the connection between the dial drive motor 414 and the switches 432a, 432b, 432c provided and the peripheral control board 4140 of the game board 4 arranged on the main body frame 3 side.

[4-7. Back cover]
Subsequently, the back cover 900 in the main body frame 3 will be described with reference to FIG. 81. FIG. 81A is a front perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame, and FIG. 81B is a rear perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame. The back cover 900 in the main body frame 3 covers the rear side of the game board holding port 601 (the game board 4 attached to the main body frame 3) for holding the game board 4 in the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable. .. The back cover 900 is provided on a plate-shaped main body 902 that closes the rear opening of the game board holding port 601, a side portion 904 that extends forward from the right side of the main body 902 in front view, and a front end of the side portion 904. A plurality of shaft support pins 906 arranged side by side in the vertical direction and projecting downward and supported by the back cover shaft support 623 of the main body frame base 600, and a prize ball formed on the upper and lower left sides of the main body 902, respectively. It includes an engaging piece 908 that engages with the back cover engaging groove 718 of the base 710 and the back cover engaging groove 780a of the prize ball passage lid 780, respectively.

Further, the back cover 900 penetrates the main body portion 902 in a horizontally long rectangular shape along the lower side on the left side of the front view of the connection notch 910 and the connection notch 910 which is cut out upward in a rectangular shape at the lower end of the right side of the front view. The confirmation opening 912 and the confirmation notch 914 notched in the lower left corner of the main body 902 in a rectangular shape are provided.

The back cover 900 can open and close the rear opening of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 by pivotally supporting the shaft support pin 906 to the back cover shaft support 623 of the main body frame base 600, and the engaging piece. By engaging the 908 with the back cover engaging grooves 718 and 780a of the main body frame base 600 and the prize ball passage lid 780, the closed state can be obtained. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the left side of the back cover 900 in front view is the rear surface of the prize ball unit 700 with a predetermined screw in addition to the engagement between the engaging piece 908 and the back cover engaging grooves 718 and 780a. It is designed to be fixed to.

Further, with the back cover 900 closed to the main body frame 3, the RAM clear switch 4100e, the test terminal 4100f, etc. of the main control board box 1170 in the game board 4 face the rear side through the connection notch 910. It has become. Further, in the back cover 900, the sealing seal (not shown) of the main control board box 1170 faces to the rear side through the confirmation opening 912, and the main control board box 1170 passes through the confirmation notch 914. The sealing portion 1176 of the above faces. As a result, it is possible to check the operation and appearance of the main control board box 1170 and the main control board 4100 without opening the back cover 900 with respect to the main body frame 3.

Further, the back cover 900 is formed with a plurality of slits 916 that are elongated and penetrated through the main body portion 902 and the side portion 904, and the heat generated in the game board 4 or the like through these slits 916 is transferred to the main body frame 3 (pachinko gaming machine 1). It can be discharged to the outside on the rear side.

[4-8. Side security board]
Next, the side security plate 950 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60. As shown in the figure, the side security plate 950 in the main body frame 3 forms the left side surface of the main body frame 3 in the front view, and is attached to the main body frame base 600. The side security plate 950 includes a metal main body 952 that is extruded into a shallow U shape in a plan view, and a mounting bracket 954 that is fixed vertically near the inner front end of the main body 952 and attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600. A positioning member 956 which is fixed inside the main body 952 and engages with the positioning recess 1119 of the game board 4 is provided.

The main body 952 of the side security plate 950 extends in the vertical direction with substantially the same length as the height of the main body frame base 600, and has a side plate piece 952a having a substantially constant depth in the front-rear direction, and a front view right from the front end of the side plate piece 952a. The front end piece 952b extending in the direction, the middle piece 952c which is arranged so as to form a predetermined amount of gap on the rear side of the front end piece 952b and has a smaller protrusion amount than the front end piece 952b, and the front end to the front of the side plate piece 952a. It includes a rear end piece 952d that extends longer than the front end piece 952b in the rightward direction. The main body 952 is formed in a shallow U shape by a side plate piece 952a, a front end piece 952b, and a rear end piece 952d.

In the side security plate 950, the mounting bracket 954 is attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600, and the rear end piece 952d of the main body 952 is attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 600. In this side security plate 950, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the front end piece 952b of the main body 952 is the shaft support side of the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 in the reinforcement unit 150 of the door frame 5. It is designed to be inserted into the U-shape of the character-shaped projecting piece 166, and prevents a tool for performing fraudulent acts from being inserted between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 on the left side of the front view. Can be done. Further, the main body 952 of the side security plate 950 is made of an extruded metal (for example, aluminum alloy), and the front end piece 952b, the middle piece 952c, and the middle piece 952c arranged in the direction perpendicular to the surface of the side plate piece 952a, and Since the rear end piece 952d is provided, the strength and rigidity of the side security plate 950 are increased, and the strength of the main body frame 3 as a whole can be increased so that the game board 4 and the door frame 5 can be supported satisfactorily. It has become.

[4-9. Locking device]
Subsequently, the lock device 1000 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 82 to 86. FIG. 82 (A) is a left side view of the lock device in the main body frame, and FIG. 82 (B) is a perspective view of the lock device in the main body frame as viewed from the front. Further, FIG. 83 (A) is a rear perspective view of the locking device, and FIG. 83 (B) is a sliding rod for a glass door frame and sliding for a main body frame provided slidably inside the U-shaped substrate of the locking device. It is a rear perspective view which shows the 杆, and (C) is the front perspective view of (B). Further, FIG. 84 is an exploded perspective view of the locking device disassembled and viewed later, and FIG. 85 is an explanatory view showing the operation of the sliding rod for the glass door frame and the sliding rod for the main body frame in the locking device. Yes, FIG. 86 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation of the fraud prevention member in the locking device.

The lock device 1000 in the main body frame 3 is attached from substantially the upper end to the lower end of the main body frame 3 along the outer side surface of the peripheral wall portion 605 of the main body frame base 600 on the open side, as shown in FIG. In addition, a door hook hole 620 formed in the upper part of the front end frame portion 602 of the main body frame base 600 on the right side (open side) side of the front view, a lock locking hole 621 formed in the lower part, and a peripheral wall in the main body frame base 600. It is designed to be attached to a plurality of lock attachment portions 625 formed on the right side surface of the front view of the portion 605.

As shown in FIGS. 82 to 84, the locking device 1000 is for a U-shaped base 1001 as a lock base formed in a U-shaped cross section and a door frame slidably provided in the U-shaped base 1001. The sliding rod 1040, the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame slidably provided in the U-shaped base 1001, and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame are U-shaped so as not to be illegally slid. It includes fraud prevention members 1023 and 1032 that are attached to the lower part of the substrate 1001.

The U-shaped base 1001 in the lock device 1000 is formed by bending a predetermined metal plate so as to have a U-shaped cross section, and inside the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame. And are slidably arranged. The U-shaped substrate 1001 is extremely thin as compared with the conventional locking device in which the width dimension is concentrated on the substrate formed into an L-shaped cross section. As a result, the size of the lock device 1000 in the left-right direction can be made as thin as possible, and the size of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 can be made relatively large in the left-right direction. It is possible to provide a wide game board 4 of 1100.

The U-shaped substrate 1001 is attached with the open side having a U-shaped cross section facing the back surface of the main body frame base 600, and when the locking device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3, it is U-shaped. The open side of the base 1001 is closed to the main body frame base 600. As a result, the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame arranged inside the U-shaped base 1001 are attached to the U-shaped base 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1050, and 1065, respectively. It is completely covered and has a fraud prevention structure that makes it difficult to cheat on the lock device 1000 from the outside.

Further, the U-shaped base 1001 in the locking device 1000 has a rectangular shape through which the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame can penetrate up and down on the closing side (front side) opposite to the opening side (rear side). The hook penetration opening 1002, the screw fixing portion 1003 projecting outward in the upper and middle of the side surface 1001b (see FIG. 84) in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 of the main body frame base 600 on the front side, and the screw fixing portion. The upper end and middle portion of the open side (front side) of the side surface 1001a (see FIG. 84) opposite to the side surface 1001b on which 1003 is projected, and the lower end portions of both side surfaces 1001a and 1001b on the open side project forward. The locking projection 1004 is provided.

The screw fixing portion 1003 and the locking protrusion 1004 of the U-shaped base 1001 are for attaching the locking device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame base 600, and the locking protrusion 1004 is attached to the door hook hole 620 of the main body frame base 600. And when it is inserted into the lock locking hole 621 from the rear side and then moved upward, the screw fixing portion 1003 and the lock mounting portion 625 of the main body frame base 600 are aligned with each other. By screwing a screw (not shown) to the lock attachment portion 625 via the screw device 1000, the lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame base 600 (main body frame 3).

The lock device 1000 is attached by screws not only to the upper and middle screw fixing portions 1003, but also to the screw fixing portion 1003 formed on the lock attachment piece 1008 described later and near the upper side of the cylinder lock through hole 611. The lock attachment portion 625 is fastened to the main body frame base 600 with screws (not shown), and the lower part of the lock device 1000 can also be attached.

Further, when the locking device 1000 is attached, the locking projections 1004 formed at the upper, middle and lower parts of the U-shaped base 1001 on the open side (front side) are provided with the hook hole 620 for the door in the upper part and the lock locking hole. The lock device 1000 is mounted on the main body frame base 600 with an extremely simple structure because it has a structure in which the screw fixing portion 1003 of the U-shaped base 1001 is fixed to the lock attachment portion 625 with screws while being inserted into 621 for positioning and locking. It can be firmly fixed to (main body frame 3).

In other words, even when the lock device 1000 is integrated on the U-shaped substrate 1001 having an extremely thin width dimension, the lock device 1000 is firmly attached to the main body frame 3 by locking and fixing the front side and the rear side of the lock device 1000. It can be fixed to. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, the locking projection 1004 constituting the locking structure (which may be a fixed structure) on the front side is projected onto the side surface 1001a which does not contact the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped substrate 1001. Since the screw fixing portion 1003 constituting the fixing structure on the rear side projects from the side surface 1001b which is in close contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped substrate 1001 toward the peripheral wall portion 605, the locking structure on the front side is the peripheral wall portion 605. The lock device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 so as not to cause rattling, as compared with the case where the side surface 1001b is formed in close contact with the main body frame 3.

Further, the U-shaped base 1001 is provided with insertion holes 1005 penetrating in the left-right direction at the upper, middle, and lower portions of both side surfaces 1001a and 1001b, and the U-shaped base 1001 is provided with a sliding rod 1040 for a door frame and By inserting the rivet 1006 into the insertion hole 1005 and crimping it with the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame stored, the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame are inside the U-shaped base 1001. Can be slidably attached in the vertical direction.

That is, as shown in FIG. 83 (C), the rivet 1006 penetrates through the upper end portion of the rivet slot 1042 formed at the upper, middle, and lower parts of the door frame sliding rod 1040, and FIG. 83 As shown in (B), the rivet 1006 penetrates through the lower end of the rivet slot 1055, 1061 formed in the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame, respectively. The sliding rivet 1040 for the door frame can be moved upward, and the sliding rivet 1050 for the main body frame can be moved downward.

Further, the U-shaped substrate 1001 projects laterally from the front end of the fraud prevention notch 1007 formed on the closed side surface of the lower portion thereof and the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 of the main body frame base 600 on the open side. A lock mounting piece 1008 for mounting the cylinder lock 1010, an insertion vertical opening 1020, a spring locking piece 1021, and an escape horizontal hole 1022 are formed on the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605, respectively. The fraud prevention cutout portion 1007 of the U-shaped substrate 1001 will be described in detail later, but the stopper piece portion 1027 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is moved forward and backward. Further, the lock attachment piece 1008 of the U-shaped base 1001 is located on the side surface 1001b so as to be located below the lower end side of the game board holding port 601 in a state where the lock device 1000 is attached to the back surface of the main body frame base 600. A lock insertion hole 1009, which is projected from the front end toward the side and through which the cylinder lock 1010 penetrates, and a mounting hole 1013 formed in the lock mounting board 1011 of the cylinder lock 1010 are mounted at two locations above and below for mounting with screws 1012. A mounting hole 1014 drilled in the above and a screw fixing portion 1003 drilled to mount the lower portion of the locking device 1000 on the back surface of the main body frame 3 are formed.

Further, the U-shaped base 1001 has an insertion vertical opening 1020 in which the first engaging projecting piece 1017 and the second engaging projecting piece 1018 of the engaging cam 1016 fixed to the cylinder lock 1010 enter when the cylinder lock 1010 rotates. A spring locking piece 1021 for locking the spring 1035 for urging the second fraud prevention member 1032 upward, and an escape horizontal hole 1022 for forming an escape hole so as not to interfere with the movement of the connecting pin 1034. It has.

The cylinder lock 1010 in the lock device 1000 is attached to the lock attachment piece 1008 in the U-shaped substrate 1001. In this cylinder lock 1010, a lock mounting board 1011 for mounting on the lock mounting piece 1008 is fixed to the rear end of the cylindrical cylinder lock body, and the lock shaft 1015 of the cylinder lock body extends from the rear surface of the lock mounting board 1011. At the same time, the engagement cam 1016 is fixed to the rear end of the lock shaft 1015 by a screw 1019. The engaging cam 1016 is formed in a boomeran shape, and one end side is a first engaging projecting piece 1017 that engages with the descending engaging hole 1062 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame when rotating. It is a second engaging projecting piece 1018 that engages with the rising engaging hole 1045 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 when the end side rotates.

In this cylinder lock 1010, the cylindrical cylinder lock main body portion is inserted into the lock insertion hole 1009 formed in the lock attachment piece 1008 from the rear side, and then the attachment holes 1013 formed in the upper and lower two places of the lock attachment substrate 1011. The cylinder lock 1010 can be fixed to the U-shaped base 1001 by screwing the screw 1012 into the mounting hole 1014 of the lock mounting piece 1008.

The fraud prevention member 1023, 1032 attached to the U-shaped base 1001 of the lock device 1000 illegally uses a piano wire, a wire, or the like to illegally slide the cylinder lock 1010 without rotating the cylinder lock 1010 with a formal key. This is to prevent the lowering of the. As shown in FIG. 84, the fraud prevention member 1023, 1032 has a structure in which the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 are connected by a connecting pin 1034. The first fraud prevention member 1023 has a vertically long plate shape and is swingably supported by the U-shaped substrate 1001 around the swing shaft hole 1025 at the upper end. Specifically, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is the most together with the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 arranged inside the U-shaped base 1001 through the swing shaft hole 1025. It is attached by a lower insertion hole 1005 and a rivet 1006.

Further, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is vertically elongated at a position overlapping the insertion vertical opening 1020 of the U-shaped base 1001 on the plate-like surface, and the second engagement projecting piece 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 can be inserted. It is provided with a protruding piece insertion hole 1026. The door frame sliding rod 1040 provided inside the U-shaped base 1001 by the second engaging projecting piece 1018 of the engaging cam 1016 penetrating the projecting piece insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020. The ascending engaging hole 1045 and the second engaging projecting piece 1018 are engaged with each other. Further, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is obliquely inclined so as to be able to come into contact with the rear surface side of the first engaging projectile 1017 when the engaging cam 1016 rotates on the outer side of the projecting piece insertion hole 1026 diagonally above the front surface. The inclined portion 1024 is provided, and the inclined portion 1024 comes into contact with the first engaging projecting piece 1017 when the engaging cam 1016 rotates, so that the first fraud prevention member 1023 is centered on the swing shaft hole 1025. It swings (in the clockwise direction in FIG. 86 (B)).

Further, the first fraud prevention member 1023 further includes a stopper piece portion 1027 protruding toward the U-shaped base 1001 side from the diagonally rearward and lower outer side of the projecting piece insertion hole 1026, and a position where the stopper piece portion 1027 protrudes. It is provided with a regulating projecting piece 1031 projecting downward, and a pin hole 1029 and a connecting hole 1030 penetrating in the left-right direction and arranged vertically on the front side of the regulating projecting piece 1031. When the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is locked, the stopper piece portion 1027 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is intruded into and engaged with the fraud prevention notch 1007 and the engagement notch 1066 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050. Therefore, the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame can be prevented from sliding illegally. Further, the regulation projecting piece 1031 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 comes into contact with the second fraud prevention member 1032 urged upward by the spring 1035, so that the second fraud prevention member 1032 moves upward (in the urging direction). It is possible to regulate the movement.

Further, in the pin hole 1029 of the first fraud prevention member 1023, the guide pin 1028 is inserted and fixed from the back surface side of the first fraud prevention member 1023, and the guide pin 1028 fixed to the pin hole 1029 is inserted and fixed. By engaging with the horizontally long opening formed at the lowermost end of the insertion vertical opening 1020 in the U-shaped base 1001, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is guided along the side surface 1001b of the U-shaped base 1001. Can be done. Further, the connecting hole 1030 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is for rotatably connecting the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 by the connecting pin 1034.

On the other hand, the second fraud prevention member 1032 connected to the first fraud prevention member 1023 is formed of an inverted "" -shaped plate material, and has a connecting hole 1033 at one upper end thereof and a spring locking hole 1036 at the other end. And are bored, and a contact portion 1037 is provided at the lower end portion. The second fraud prevention member 1032 can be connected to the first fraud prevention member 1023 so as to be relatively rotatable by inserting the connecting pin 1034 after aligning the connecting hole 1033 with the connecting hole 1030 of the first fraud prevention member 1023. You can do it. Further, the second fraud prevention member 1032 locks the lower end (the other end) of the spring 1035 whose upper end (one end) is locked to the spring locking piece 1021 of the U-shaped base 1001 in the spring locking hole 1036. As a result, it is urged upward by the spring 1035. Further, in the second fraud prevention member 1032, the contact portion 1037 comes into contact with the closing plate 25 fixed to the inner lower portion of the outer frame 2 when the main body frame 3 is closed.

Next, the door frame sliding rod 1040 in the lock device 1000 is slidably supported inside the U-shaped substrate 1001 and is formed of a vertically long metal plate-shaped member. The door frame sliding rod 1040 is provided with door frame hook portions 1041 projecting forward at three locations above, middle, and lower on one side of the vertical side. The door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 projects forward from the open side of the U-shaped base 1001 with the door frame sliding rod 1040 housed in the U-shaped base 1001. When the locking device 1000 is fixed to the back surface of the main body frame base 600, the door protrudes forward from the door hook hole 620 (see FIGS. 57 and 61) formed in the main body frame base 600. It can be locked to the hook cover 165 (see FIG. 18) formed on the back surface of the frame 5. As shown in the figure, the door frame hook portion 1041 has a downward engaging claw shape, whereby the door frame sliding rod 1040 is raised to raise the door frame hook portion 1041 and the hook cover. The locked state with the 165 can be released.

Further, the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame is formed in the center of the upper, middle and lower side surfaces and has a vertically long rivet slot 1042 through which the rivet 1006 is inserted, and below the uppermost rivet slot 1042 and for the door frame. At the lowermost end of the sliding rod 1040, a guide projecting piece 1043 projecting in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame is provided. The rivet slot 1042 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is designed so that the rivet 1006 to be inserted into the insertion hole 1005 of the U-shaped base 1001 is inserted, and the rivet 1006 is slid for the door frame. It is formed vertically so as not to interfere with the ascending operation of the rivet 1040. In the normal state, the rivet 1006 penetrating the upper end of the rivet slot 1042 is in contact with the upper end. Further, in the door frame sliding rod 1040, the guide projecting piece 1043 is inserted into the projecting piece moving holes 1056, 1064 formed in the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050. It is possible to guide the mutual sliding operation of the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050.

Further, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is formed with a spring hook portion 1046 that locks one end of the spring 1048 at the upper end portion. The other end of the spring 1048 locked to the spring hook portion 1046 is locked to the spring hook portion 1057 of the upper hook member 1051 in the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame, and the spring 1048 slides the door frame. The rod 1040 is urged downward and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame is urged to each other in the upward direction. Further, the door frame sliding rod 1040 includes a contact elastic piece 1047 formed in a convex shape in the middle in the vertical direction, and is punched out from one side surface of the door frame sliding rod 1040 by press molding. It is formed in a convex shape. The contact elastic piece 1047 comes into contact with the inner side surface of the U-shaped base 1001, and it is possible to prevent the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame from rattling inside the U-shaped base 1001. It has become like.

Further, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is provided with a vertically long play hole 1044 and a rising engagement hole 1045 on the side surface of the lower portion. The play hole 1044 is the tip of the first engaging projecting piece 1017 so as not to interfere with the rotating operation of the engaging cam 1016 when the first engaging projecting piece 1017 of the engaging cam 1016 is inserted and rotated. The part constitutes a movable space. Further, in the ascending engagement hole 1045, when the second engaging projecting piece 1018 of the engaging cam 1016 is inserted and rotated, the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame is raised by the rotating operation of the engaging cam 1016. Is for engaging with. The door frame sliding rod 1040 is provided with an escape notch 1049 which is notched in the vertical direction larger than the fraud prevention notch 1007 behind the lower part of the vertical side. In this escape cutout portion 1049, the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame is in the way so that the stopper piece portion 1027 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is surely engaged with the fraud prevention cutout portion 1007 and the engagement cutout portion 1066. The relevant part is cut out so that it does not become.

On the other hand, the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame includes an upper hook member 1051 made of a metal plate, a lower hook member 1052 made of a metal plate, and a connecting wire rod 1053 connecting the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052. It has. That is, the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame is not composed of one vertically elongated plate made of metal as in the conventional case, but the upper hook member 1051 having the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the lower hook member 1052 are made of metal. The plate material is formed by a press, and the metal upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 are connected by a thin metal connecting wire rod 1053. As a result, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 can be efficiently stored in the narrow space of the U-shaped substrate 1001.

The upper hook member 1051 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame includes a hook portion 1054 formed at the upper end portion toward the rear and a rivet elongated hole 1055 penetrating the plate surface portion adjacent to the hook portion 1054 in the left-right direction. , A projecting piece moving hole 1056 penetrating below the rivet slot 1055 in the left-right direction, a spring hook portion 1057 formed at the lower end of the vertical side in front of the projecting piece moving hole 1056, and a lower side of the spring hook portion 1057. It is provided with a connecting hole 1058 formed in the above hook member 1051 and a contact portion 1059 formed on the upper side and the lower side of the upper hook member 1051. The hook portion 1054 of the upper hook member 1051 penetrates the hook penetration opening 1002 above the U-shaped base 1001 and engages with the closing plate 24 provided on the inner upper portion of the outer frame 2 on the open side. The locking claws are formed upward.

Further, the rivet slot 1055 of the upper hook member 1051 is arranged at a position corresponding to the rivet slot 1042 formed in the upper part of the door frame sliding rod 1040, and is arranged in the rivet slot 1055. In the normal state in which the rivet 1006 penetrates, the rivet 1006 penetrates the lowermost end portion of the elongated hole 1055 for rivets, and the upper hook member 1051 can move downward. A guide projecting piece 1043 above the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame is inserted into the projecting piece moving hole 1056 of the upper hook member 1051, and the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod for the main body frame are inserted. It is possible to guide the mutual movement with the 1050.

Further, the other end of the spring 1048 is locked in the spring hook portion 1057 of the upper hook member 1051. Further, the connecting hole 1058 of the upper hook member 1051 is inserted by bending the upper end of the connecting wire rod 1053. Further, the contact portion 1059 of the upper hook member 1051 abuts on the inner side wall of the U-shaped base 1001 when it is housed in the U-shaped base 1001, and in the sliding operation of the upper hook member 1051. There is no rattling and it can slide smoothly.

On the other hand, the lower hook member 1052 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame is for a rivet that penetrates in the left-right direction near the upper end of the plate surface portion of the lower hook member 1052 and the hook portion 1065 that protrudes rearward from the lower end portion. An elongated hole 1061, a descending engaging hole 1062 arranged below the elongated rivet hole 1061, a play hole 1063 extending downward from the lower rear side of the descending engaging hole 1062, and a play hole 1063 below. A projecting piece moving hole 1064 formed near the lower end, a connecting hole 1060 formed in the front end side of the upper end of the vertical side of the lower hook member 1052, and a engagement formed in the lower part of the vertical side behind the lower hook member 1052. The joint notch portion 1066 and the contact portion 1067 formed on the upper side and the lower side of the lower hook member 1052 are provided.

The hook portion 1065 of the lower hook member 1052 penetrates the lower hook penetration opening 1002 of the U-shaped substrate 1001 and engages with the closing plate 25 formed in the lower part of the outer frame 2 on the open side. The locking claws are formed upward. Further, the rivet slot 1061 of the lower hook member 1052 is formed at a position corresponding to the rivet slot 1042 formed in the lower part of the door frame sliding rod 1040, and the rivet slot 1061 is formed in the rivet slot 1061. In the normal state in which the 1006 is penetrated, the rivet 1006 is in a state of penetrating the lowermost end portion of the rivet slot 1061. As a result, the lower hook member 1052 can move downward.

Further, when the first engaging projecting piece 1017 of the engaging cam 1016 is inserted into the lower hook member 1052 and rotates, the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame is lowered by the rotating operation. It is for engaging in such a way. Further, the play hole 1063 of the lower hook member 1052 is a second engaging projecting piece 1018 so as not to interfere with the rotating operation when the second engaging projecting piece 1018 of the engaging cam 1016 is inserted and rotated. It is possible to form a movable space at the tip of the. Further, in the projecting piece moving hole 1064 of the lower hook member 1052, the guide projecting piece 1043 below the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame is inserted, and the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod for the main body frame are inserted. It is possible to guide the mutual movement with the moving rod 1050.

Further, a bent lower end of the connecting wire rod 1053 is inserted into the connecting hole 1060 of the lower hook member 1052. Further, the contact portion 1067 of the lower hook member 1052 abuts on the inner side wall of the U-shaped base 1001 when it is housed in the U-shaped base 1001, and is lower than the U-shaped base 1001. When the hook member 1052 slides, it can be slid smoothly without rattling.

Next, the assembly of the lock device 1000 of the present embodiment will be described. In order to assemble this locking device 1000, the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame are connected by the connecting wire rod 1053, and in that state, the guide protrusion of the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame is connected. The piece 1043 is inserted into the projecting piece moving holes 1056, 1064 of the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052, and the mutual rivet slot 1042 and the rivet slot 1055, 1061 are aligned and overlapped with each other. For the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the main body frame while passing the hook portion 1054 of the upper hook member 1051 and the hook portion 1065 of the lower hook member 1052 through the hook penetration opening 1002 of the U-shaped base 1001 in a superposed state. After inserting the sliding rod 1050 into the U-shaped space of the U-shaped base 1001, the rivet 1006 is inserted through the insertion hole 1005.

When inserting the rivet 1006, the rivet 1006 is inserted so as to penetrate the rivet slot 1055, 1061 and 1042. When inserting the lowermost rivet 1006, it is necessary to insert the rivet 1006 into the swing shaft hole 1025 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 and simultaneously attach the first fraud prevention member 1023 to the U-shaped base 1001. Further, before attaching the first fraud prevention member 1023 to the U-shaped base 1001, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 are connected by the connecting pin 1034, and the guide pin 1028 is inserted into the pin hole. After fixing to 1029 with a screw (not shown), it is necessary to further insert the guide pin 1028 into the lowermost opening of the insertion vertical opening 1020.

Further, with the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame stored and fixed in the U-shaped base 1001 by the rivet 1006, the spring 1048 is hung between the spring hook portions 1046 and 1057, and the door is opened. The frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are urged in opposite directions, and the spring 1035 is hung on the spring locking piece 1021 and the spring locking hole 1036 to prevent the second fraud. It is assumed that the member 1032 is in contact with the regulation projecting piece 1031. After that, the cylindrical main body portion of the cylinder lock 1010 is inserted into the lock insertion hole 1009 of the lock mounting piece 1008, and the cylinder lock 1010 is fixed to the mounting hole 1014 with a screw 1012. At this time, the tip of the first engaging protrusion 1017 of the engaging cam 1016 is slightly inserted outside the inclined portion 1024 and into the insertion vertical opening 1020, and the second engaging protrusion of the engaging cam 1016 is inserted. The cylinder lock 1010 is attached to the lock attachment piece 1008 so that the tip end portion of the piece 1018 is slightly inserted into the projecting piece insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020 of the first fraud prevention member 1023.

In order to attach the assembled lock device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame base 600 in this way, the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted into the door hook hole 620 formed in the main body frame base 600. While inserting, the locking protrusion 1004 protruding into a hook shape is inserted into the door hook hole 620 and the lock locking hole 621 of the main body frame base 600 and moved upward, and in that state, the screw fixing portion 1003 protruding in the horizontal direction is inserted. The lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the back surface of the main body frame base 600 by matching the lock attachment portion 625 and screwing a screw (not shown) into the matched hole. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, the locking projection 1004 constituting the locking structure of the front portion is formed so as to project from the side surface 1001a which does not contact the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped substrate 1001, while the rear portion is fixed. Since the screw fixing portion 1003 constituting the structure is formed so as to project horizontally from the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped substrate 1001, the locking structure of the front portion is in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605. Compared with the case where the side surface 1001b is formed, the locking device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame base 600 so as not to cause rattling.

Next, the operation of the lock device 1000 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86. As shown in FIG. 85, when the main body frame base 600 (main body frame 3) is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 and the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. 85 (A). In addition, the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 and the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame are locked, and the hook portions 1041 for the door frame and the door frame 5 of the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame are engaged. The hook cover 165 is locked. In this state, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the first engaging projection piece 1017 of the engaging cam 1016 rotates in the direction of entering the insertion vertical opening 1020, as shown in FIG. 85 (B). The tip of the first engaging projecting piece 1017 engages with the descending engaging hole 1062 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame, pushes the lower hook member 1052 downward against the urging force of the spring 1048, and connects to the lower hook member 1052. The connecting wire rod 1053 and the upper hook member 1051 are also pushed down and lowered. As a result, the locked state between the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 and the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame is released, and the main body frame 3 is removed by pulling the main body frame 3 toward the front side. It can be opened to the frame 2.

When the main body frame 3 is closed, the hook portions 1054 and 1065 are in a raised state due to the urging force of the spring 1048 (the same raised position as shown in FIG. 85 (A)), but the hook portion 1054 Since the upper side of 1065 is inclined downward toward the outside, by forcibly pressing the main body frame 3 against the outer frame 2, the upper side inclined portion of the hook portions 1050 and 1065 is formed on the closing plates 24 and 25. Since it comes into contact with the lower end, the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame descends downward, and the upward claws of the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the closing plates 24 and 25 are locked again and slide for the main body frame. The 杆 1050 rises and returns to the locked state.

On the other hand, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the second engaging projecting piece 1018 of the engaging cam 1016 rotates in the direction of entering the insertion vertical opening 1020, as shown in FIG. (Ii) The tip of the engaging projecting piece 1018 engages with the rising engaging hole 1045 of the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame, and pushes up the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame upward against the urging force of the spring 1048. Therefore, the hook cover 165 of the door frame 5 and the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 are released from the locked state, so that the door frame 5 can be pulled by pulling the door frame 5 toward the front side. It can be opened to the main body frame 3.

When the door frame 5 is closed, the door frame hook portion 1041 is in a lowered state due to the urging force of the spring 1048 (the same lowered position as shown in FIG. 85 (A)), but the door frame. Since the lower side of the hook portion 1041 for door frame is inclined upward toward the outside, by forcibly pressing the door frame 5 against the main body frame 3, the lower side inclined portion of the hook portion 1041 for the door frame is inclined to the hook cover 165. The sliding rod 1040 for the door frame rises upward in contact with the upper end portion of the door frame, and the downward claw portion of the hook portion 1041 for the door frame and the hook cover 165 are locked again to slide the door frame. The moving door 1040 descends and returns to the locked state. The door frame sliding rod 1040 in the present embodiment is formed to have substantially the same length as the total length of the U-shaped base 1001, and the U-shaped base 1001 is substantially the same as the vertical side surface of the main body frame 3. The door frame hook portion 1041 which is attached over the entire length and is a locking portion with the door frame 5 is formed at three positions of the upper end portion, the central portion, and the lower end portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040. Therefore, the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 can be securely locked in the total length in the vertical direction, and the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 are forcibly opened and an illegal tool such as a piano wire is inserted between them. It is not possible to perform an act.

As described above, the lock device 1000 of the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment unlocks the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 by rotating the key inserted in the cylinder lock 1010 in one direction, and moves in the other direction. By rotating, the lock of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 can be released. Further, the lock device 1000 cannot perform an illegal act such as hooking a piano wire or the like on the hook portions 1054, 1065 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame and lowering the hook portion 1054, 1065 without inserting the key into the cylinder lock 1010. It has become. The first structure for preventing such fraud is a lock mechanism composed of a first fraud prevention member 1023 and a second fraud prevention member 1032, and the second fraud prevention structure is a U-shaped substrate 1001. The structure is such that the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame are housed in the closed space of the above.

First, the operation of the lock mechanism, which is the first fraud prevention structure, will be described with reference to FIG. 86. First, in a state where the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 3 are closed, as shown in FIG. 86 (A), the closing plate 25 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second fraud prevention member 1032 come into contact with each other. It is in a state of being. In this state, the first fraud prevention member 1023 rotates counterclockwise due to the urging force of the spring 1035, the stopper piece 1027 penetrates into the fraud prevention notch 1007, and the stopper piece 1027 is the fraud prevention notch. It is in a state of being engaged with the engaging notch 1066 formed in the lower hook member 1052 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame at the position corresponding to 1007. As a result, even if a piano wire or the like is hooked on the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame and an attempt is made to pull it down, the stopper piece portion 1027 and the engaging notch portion 1066 are engaged, so that the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame is used. It is impossible to illegally pull it down (unlock), and it is not possible to perform an illegal act of opening the main body frame 3.

On the other hand, when the key is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 to normally unlock the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. 86 (B), the first engaging protrusion of the engaging cam 1016 is formed by rotating the key. The piece 1017 is rotated so as to enter the insertion vertical opening 1020. When the first engagement protrusion 1017 is rotated, the inclined portion 1024 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the side surface of the first engagement protrusion 1017 come into contact with each other, so that the first fraud prevention member 1023 has a swing shaft hole. The rotation starts in the clockwise direction shown in the figure around 1025, and the stopper piece 1027 also moves so as to retract from the fraud prevention notch 1007. As a result, the engagement between the stopper piece portion 1027 and the engagement notch portion 1066 is released. At this time, the second fraud prevention member 1032 is in a position where the spring 1035 is extended and the contact portion 1037 is retracted. In this state, when the engaging cam 1016 is further rotated to rotate the first engaging projecting piece 1017, the tip of the first engaging projecting piece 1017 engages with the descending engaging hole 1062 of the lower hook member 1052. Since the entire sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame is lowered, the locked state between the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 is released, and the main body frame 3 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2. You can do it.

When the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the second fraud prevention member 1032 is in contact with the regulation projecting piece 1031, so that the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1023 are in contact with each other. The positional relationship with 1032 is substantially the same as the state shown in FIG. 86 (A). When the main body frame 3 is closed in this state, the closing plate 25 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second fraud prevention member 1032 come into contact with each other from the front, and finally the state shown in FIG. 86 (A) is obtained. As a result, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 do not get in the way when the main body frame 3 is closed. Further, in the present embodiment, it is the main body that prevents the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 from illegally performing only the lowering operation of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame. If the frame sliding rod 1050 is illegally opened, the door frame sliding rod 1050 can be easily opened manually after the release, and it is practically difficult to perform fraudulent acts of raising the sliding rod with a piano wire or the like. For this reason, it is devised to prevent unauthorized operation of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame.

Further, even with the lock mechanism having the first fraud prevention structure described above, it is not possible to disable the function of the lock mechanism by swinging the first fraud prevention member 1023 with a piano wire or the like. Absent. Therefore, assuming that the lock function of the lock mechanism is disabled by an illegal act, in the present embodiment, when the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600), it is inside. The sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame provided in the above are completely covered by being housed in the closed space of the U-shaped base 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1050, and 1065, respectively. Since it is in a state, even if a piano wire or the like is inserted to pull down the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame provided inside the closed space of the U-shaped base 1001, both side surfaces 1001a, 1001b of the U-shaped base 1001 This prevents fraudulent equipment from entering the closed space, making it difficult to cheat.

As described above, the lock device 1000 of the present embodiment has the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame inside the U-shaped base 1001 whose width dimension is extremely thin as compared with the lock device whose width dimension is concentrated on the conventional L-shaped base. The sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame is slidably provided, and the mounting position of the cylinder lock 1010 for operating the lock device 1000 on the U-shaped base 1001 is set to a position below the lower end side of the game board 4. Therefore, even if the size of the game board 4 in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction is made extremely large and the space surrounded by the side walls 540 to 543 of the main body frame 3 is made large, the lock device 1000 is placed on the back side of the main body frame 3. Can be firmly attached.

Further, since the U-shaped open side of the U-shaped base 1001 is attached so as to face the back surface of the main body frame 3, the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600) inside. The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 arranged in the above are completely covered with the U-shaped base 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1050, and 1065, respectively. , A piano wire or the like is inserted to pull down the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame provided inside, and other fraudulent acts cannot be easily performed.

Further, when the lock device 1000 is attached, the locking projections 1004 formed at the upper, middle and lower parts of the open side (front portion) of the U-shaped base 1001 are inserted into the door hook hole 620 and the lock locking hole 621. It is extremely simple because it has a structure in which the screw fixing portions 1003 formed at the upper, middle and lower parts of the closed side (rear portion) of the U-shaped base 1001 are fixed to the lock attachment portion 625 with screws. The locking device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600) with such a structure.

In the lock device 1000, the screw fixing portion 1003 formed on the lock attachment piece 1008 and the lock formed near the upper portion of the cylinder lock through hole 611 of the main body frame 3 as a structure for screwing the lower portion of the U-shaped base 1001. The structure in which the mounting portion 625 is screwed is shown. Instead, the screw 1012 for mounting the cylinder lock 1010 to the lock mounting piece 1008 is used, and the tip of the screw 1012 attaches the lock mounting piece 1008. A structure may be configured in which lock mounting holes to be screwed through are formed above and below the cylinder lock through hole 611. Further, even if the lower portion of the U-shaped base 1001 is not screwed, the lock device 1000 can be attached to the main body frame 3 (main body frame) simply by fixing the screw fixing portion 1003 and the lock attachment portion 625 at the rear portion of the lock device 1000. It can be sufficiently firmly fixed to the back surface of the base 600).

Further, in the lock device 1000, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are completely covered with a U-shaped substrate 1001 having left and right side surfaces 1001a and 1001b. The frame sliding door 1040 and the main body frame sliding door 1050 are slidably attached to the side surface 1001a on the opposite side not in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 with a rivet or the like, and the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 is omitted. A door frame sliding rod 1040 and a main body frame sliding rod 1050 are housed in a closed space formed by a base (lock base) and a side surface 1001a of the L-shaped base (lock base) and a first side wall. The structure may be good, and the same effect as that of the lock device 1000 described above can be obtained.

[5. Basic configuration of the game board]
Next, the basic configuration of the game board 4 in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 87 to 94. FIG. 87 is a front view showing a game board attached to the main body frame with the door frame of the pachinko gaming machine removed. Further, FIG. 88 is a front view of the game board, FIG. 89 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 90 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled and viewed from the rear. It is a figure. Further, FIG. 91 is an enlarged front view showing a function display unit on the gaming board in a state of being attached to the pachinko gaming machine. Further, FIG. 92 is an exploded perspective view of a game board using a game panel of an embodiment different from the example of FIG. 89 and the like by disassembling and viewed from the front, and FIG. 93 is a game in which FIG. 92 is viewed from the rear. It is an exploded perspective view of a board. Further, FIG. 94 is a cross-sectional view of the game panel of the game board of FIG. 92 cut in the vertical direction.

As shown in the figure, the game board 4 of the present embodiment has a front configuration in which the outer periphery of the game area 1100 in which the game ball is driven by the player operating the handle device 500 is divided and the outer shape is substantially rectangular in the front. A member 1110, a plate-shaped game panel 1150 arranged behind the front component 1110 and partitioning the rear end of the game area 1100, a board holder 1160 arranged at the lower rear side of the game panel 1150, and a board holder 1160. A predetermined main control board box 1170 that houses the main control board 4100 that is attached to the rear surface and controls the game content that is performed by driving the game ball into the game area 1100, and a predetermined control signal from the main control board 4100. It is provided with a function display unit 1180 that can display the game status and is visually attached to the player side at a predetermined position of the front component 1110. The game board 4 includes a front unit 2000 attached to the front surface of the game panel 1150 and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1150, although not shown in FIGS. 87 to 94 will be omitted and details will be described later. Further provided (see FIGS. 95 and 96).

The game board 4 of the present embodiment has a basic configuration formed by a front component 1110, a game panel 1150, a board holder 1160, a main control board box 1170, and a function display unit 1180, and is attached to the game panel 1150. The front unit 2000, the back unit 3000, and the main control board 4100 housed in the main control board box 1170 form a detailed configuration that characterizes the pachinko gaming machine 1 (game board 4). Here, the basic configuration of the game board 4 will be described, and the detailed configuration will be described later.

[5-1. Front component]
Subsequently, the front component 1110 in the game board 4 will be described. The front component 1110 of the game board 4 has a substantially rectangular shape that can be inserted into the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3, and the inner shape penetrates in a substantially circular shape in the front-rear direction. The outer circumference of the game area 1100 is divided by the inner circumference. The front component 1111 includes an outer rail 1111 extending in an arc shape from the lower end to the left from the center in the left-right direction in a front view along the circumferential direction in the clockwise direction, passing through the upper end in the center in the left-right direction in the front view, and extending diagonally to the upper right. The inner rail 1112, which is arranged inside the outer rail 1111 along the outer rail 1111 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the left-right direction in the front view to the diagonally upper left in the front view, and the inner rail 1112 so as to be smoothly continuous from the lower end of the inner rail 1112. The inner peripheral rail 1113 extending in an arc shape to a position below the end (upper end) of the outer rail 1111 along the circumferential direction counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and the end (upper end) and outer rail 1111 of the inner peripheral rail 1113. At the boundary between the abutment portion 1114 where the game ball that has rolled along the outer rail 1111 and the end (upper end) of the inner rail 1111 can come into contact with the game ball, and the inner rail 1113 and the inner peripheral rail 1113, the game area 1100 From the upper end of the inner rail 1112 so as to close between the out port guide surface 1115 arranged at the lowermost end and lowered toward the rear and the outer rail 1111 rotatably supported by the upper end of the inner rail 1112. It is possible to rotate only between the closed position extending upward and the open position where it rotates clockwise in the front view and opens between the outer rail 1111 and returns to the closed position side. It includes a backflow prevention member 1116 urged by a spring (not shown).

Assuming that the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3 of the front component 1110, as shown in FIG. 87 and the like, the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 fires the ball of the main body frame 3. It is located on the extension of the launch rail 660 in the device 650. A space extending in the left-right direction and downward is formed between the lower end of the outer rail 1111 and the upper end of the launch rail 660, and the game ball launched along the launch rail 660 of the ball launcher 650 is formed. The space is jumped over, and the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 is driven into the space between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112. The game ball driven between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 rolls upward along the outer rail 1111 according to the momentum, and the backflow prevention member 1116 pivotally supported at the upper end of the inner rail 1112. By rotating to the open position side against the urging force, it is possible to enter the game area 1100.

Further, when the game ball is strongly hit by the hit ball launching device 650, the game ball that has rolled along the outer rail 1111 in the game area 1100 comes into contact with the abutment portion 1114 provided at the end of the outer rail 1111. When the game ball comes into contact with the abutting portion 1114, the rolling direction of the game ball can be forcibly changed, and the game ball continuously rolls from the outer rail 1111 to the inner rail 1113. It is designed to prevent it from moving. Even if the game ball that has entered (dried) into the game area 1100 tries to return between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112, the backflow prevention member 1116 returns to the closed position by the urging force before that. As a result, the backflow prevention member 1116 prevents the backflow of the game ball.

Further, if the game ball driven into the game area 1100 is not accepted by the start ports 2101, 1022 and the winning ports 2103, 2104, 2201 of the table unit 2000 described later, it flows down to the lower end of the game area 1100. Then, the out port guiding surface 1115 at the boundary between the inner rail 1112 and the inner peripheral rail 1113 guides the game panel 1150 to the out port 1151 and discharges the game board 4 downward from the out port 1151. ing.

On the other hand, if the game ball launched from the ball striking device 650 cannot enter the game area 1100 beyond the backflow prevention member 1116 at the tip of the inner rail 1112, the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 are combined. The foul space 626 formed between the upper end of the launch rail 660 and the lower end of the outer rail 1111 is formed from the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 by rolling downward in the opposite direction. It will fall, and will be received by the foul ball entrance 542e of the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 located at the lower part of the foul space 626, and will be discharged to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300.

A metal plate is attached to the surface of the outer rail 1111 of the front component 1110 to improve the wear resistance due to the rolling of the game ball, and the game ball rolls smoothly. ing. Further, the impact portion 1114 has an elastic body such as rubber or synthetic resin arranged on the surface thereof, and even if the game ball rolls vigorously along the outer rail 1111 and collides with the abutment portion 1114, the impact is alleviated. At the same time, the game ball can be repelled inward.

Further, the front component 1110 has a wall-shaped security protrusion 1117 protruding from the lower outer side of the outer rail 1111 toward the front, and a substantially center in the vertical direction from the lower side of the out port guide surface 1115 along the inner peripheral rail 1113. It is provided with a groove-shaped rail security groove 1118 that is recessed by a predetermined amount from the front end of the extension. The security protrusion 1117 in the front component 1110 overlaps the security rear end projecting piece 183 of the security cover 180 in the door frame 5 in the vertical direction when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3. As a result, even if an illegal tool such as a piano wire is intruded between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 on the shaft support side (left side when viewed from the front), the illegal tool can reach the game area 1100. Can not be done.

Further, in the front component 1110, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the security rear projection piece 182 of the security cover 180 in the door frame 5 is inserted into the rail security groove 1118. At the same time, the post-crime prevention projectile piece 182 is inserted between the inner rail 1112 and the outer rail 1111 so as to substantially contact the outer surface (opposite side of the game area 1100) of the inner rail 1112. The inner rail 1112, the rail security groove 1118, and the security rear projection piece 182 also prevent unauthorized tools such as piano wires that have entered between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 from reaching the game area 1100. You can do it.

Further, the front component 1110 is vertically separated from the left end of the front view and is vertically separated from the pair of positioning recesses 1119 which are recessed from the front to the rear and opened to the left end. A pair of game board stoppers 1120 arranged in a row, and a fixed recess 1121 arranged on the left side of the outer rail 1111 on the left side of the front view and opened downward, and the upper side formed in an arc shape and recessed from the front side. A notch 1122 for a ball passage, which is notched in a rectangular shape extending upward from the lower end in the left-right direction, is provided near the left end of the lower end. The positioning recess 1119 of the front component 1110 is fitted with the positioning member 956 attached to the inside of the side security plate 950 in the main body frame 3, so that the left end of the game board 4 inserted into the game board holding port 601 is viewed from the front. However, it is possible to regulate the movement in the front-back direction. Further, the game board stopper 1120 can be detachably locked to the game board locking portion 608 of the main body frame base 600 in the main body frame 3, and the game board stopper 1120 can be locked to the game board. By locking to the locking portion 608, it is possible to restrict the right end of the game board 4 inserted into the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3 from moving in the front-rear direction. ..

Further, the fixing recess 1121 of the front component 1110 is a front view of the game board fixing tool 690 axially supported on the front surface of the main body frame 3 with the game board 4 inserted into the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3. When rotated in the clockwise direction, the fixing piece 690a of the game board fixture 690 is inserted, and the game board fixture 690 restricts the lower end of the game board 4 from moving forward. It has become like. Further, in the ball passage notch 1122 of the front component 1110, a similar ball passage notch 1152 is formed at the same position of the game panel 1150, and the game board 4 is used as the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3. In the state of being inserted into, the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 is inserted into the notch portion 1122, 1152 for the ball passage.

Further, the front component 1110 has a horizontally long through hole 1123 penetrating in the front-rear direction near the right end in the front view at the lower end portion, and a thickness in the front-rear direction from the center in the left-right direction to the left side in the front view on the lower side of the through hole 1123. It is provided with a fastening portion 1124 formed thinly and a certificate stamp attaching portion 1125 arranged on the left side of the through hole 1123 in the front view and for attaching a certificate stamp for confirming certification. Although detailed illustration of the fastening portion 1124 in the front component 1110 is omitted, when the game board is attached to the conventional main body frame, a predetermined fastening band is formed in the fastening hole formed in the conventional main body frame. By wrapping and fastening the game board 4 around each other, it is possible to make it difficult to remove the game board 4, and it is possible to prevent the game board 4 from being illegally removed.

Further, in the front component 1110, the display unit 1181 of the function display unit 1180, which will be described later, is arranged on the outside of the rail security groove 1118 along the inner peripheral rail 1113 and at the lower right of the front view. Further, the front component 1110 includes a plurality of mounting bosses 1126 projecting rearward from the left and right ends of the lower portion of the rear surface, and a plurality of positioning projections 1127 projecting rearward from the rear surface of the inner rail 1112. The mounting boss 1126 penetrates the game panel 1150 and engages with the fixed boss 1162 of the board holder 1160, and a predetermined screw is screwed into the mounting boss 1126 from the rear side of the board holder 1160 through the fixed boss 1162. By wearing it, the game panel 1150 can be sandwiched between the front component 1110 and the board holder 1160. Further, the positioning protrusion 1127 is fitted into the inner rail fixing hole 1155 formed in the game panel 1150 so that the inner rail 1112 can be fixed at a predetermined position of the game panel 1150.

[5-2. Game panel]
Subsequently, the game panel 1150 in the game board 4 will be described. The game panel 1150 is formed of a wood board material such as veneer plywood having a predetermined thickness (for example, 18 mm to 21 mm), and has an outer shape substantially the same as the outer shape of the front component 1110. The game panel 1150 has an out port 1151 that penetrates in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the out-port guidance surface 1115 in the front component 1110 at the lower part in the substantially center in the left-right direction in the front view, and is horizontally elongated in the front-rear direction on the left side in the front view at the lower end. The notch 1152 for the ball passage having the same shape as the notch 1122 for the ball passage of the front component 1110 and the rear protrusion of the function display unit 1180 which penetrates in the front-rear direction through the lower right corner of the front view. It includes an insertion hole 1153 into which 1182 is inserted.

Further, in the game panel 1150, a plurality of boss insertion holes 1154 penetrating in the front-rear direction at positions corresponding to the mounting bosses 1126 of the front component member 1110 and positioning protrusions 1127 of the front component member 1110 are inserted and fixed in the vicinity of the lower left and right ends. A plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1155 and a groove-shaped out ball discharge groove 1156 having a predetermined amount recessed from the rear surface to the front on the rear surface side of the out port 1151 and the lower end side being opened downward (see FIG. 90). And 1157, which is formed at a position corresponding to the game board stopper 1120 of the front component member 1110 and is notched so as to penetrate from the right end of the front view in the front-rear direction. Further, the game panel 1150 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes for mounting and fixing to the rear surface of the front component 1110 at appropriate positions.

The game panel 1150 in the game board 4 can partition the rear end of the game area 1100 whose outer circumference is divided by the front component 1110, and although not shown, the range corresponding to the game area 1100 on the front surface. A plurality of obstacle nails are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and a table unit 2000 is mounted therein. Further, a back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1150. Further, the game panel 1150 is formed so that the out port 1151 is located at the lowermost end of the game area 1100, and is formed at the lowermost end of the game area 1100 in the front component 1110 when assembled on the game board 4. The game ball guided backward by the out-port guide surface 1115 enters the out-port 1151 and is discharged to the rear side of the game board 4.

[5-3. Board holder]
Next, the board holder 1160 in the game board 4 will be described. The substrate holder 1160 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with the upper side and the front side open. In the substrate holder 1160, an out-ball discharge portion 1161 formed so as to penetrate in the vertical direction is formed at the front end of the bottom wall portion at substantially the center in the left-right direction of the front view, and the upper surface of the bottom wall portion is an out-ball. The game ball is formed so as to be lowered toward the discharge portion 1161, and is discharged from the out port 1151 of the game panel 1150, the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000, and supplied (discharged) to the upper surface of the bottom of the board holder 1160. Is discharged downward from the out-ball discharge unit 1161. The out-ball ejection unit 1161 is located directly above the ejection ball receiving portion 841 of the board unit 800 in the main body frame 3 when the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3. All the game balls discharged from the pachinko game machine 1 are discharged downward to the rear side of the pachinko game machine 1 through the discharge passage 842 of the substrate unit 800.

Further, the substrate holder 1160 includes a plurality of fixed bosses 1162 protruding forward from the front ends of both upper and lower ends of the side wall portion. The tips of the plurality of fixed bosses 1162 are inserted into the boss insertion holes 1154 from the rear side of the game panel 1150, and then are fitted to the rear ends of the mounting bosses 1126 of the front component 1110. In the state of being fitted with the boss 1126, the board holder 1160 is screwed to the mounting boss 1126 from the rear side of the board holder 1160 through the fixed boss 1162 to attach the board holder 1160 to the front component 1110. In addition to being able to be assembled, the game panel 1150 can be sandwiched between the front component 1110 and the board holder 1160.

Further, as shown in FIG. 90, the substrate holder 1160 has a fixing portion 1163 and a fixing portion 1163 in which the fixing piece 1174 of the main control board box 1170 can be fitted from the side to the left end portion of the rear surface of the rear wall portion when viewed from the rear. The elastic fixing piece 1175 of the main control board box 1170, which is arranged so as to face the 1163, is provided with a locking portion 1164 which can be locked from the rear. The fixing portion 1163 and the locking portion 1164 of the board holder 1160 allow the main control board box 1170 to be detachably supported on the rear surface of the board holder 1160.

[5-4. Main control board box]
Subsequently, the main control board box 1170 in the game board 4 will be described. The main control board box 1170 has a thin horizontally long box-shaped board base 1171 with an open rear side and a thin horizontally long box-shaped board base 1171 that covers the rear surface of the board base 1171 and has an open front side, and is fitted into the inside of the board base 1171 from the rear side. A matching board cover 1172 and a main control board 4100 in which electronic components, terminals, and the like are mounted on the rear side of the front end of the board cover 1172 are provided. Further, the main control board box 1170 extends outward from the left end portion of the substrate base 1171 when viewed from the rear, and from the fixing piece 1174 which fits with the fixing portion 1163 of the substrate holder 1160 and the right end of the rear view of the substrate cover 1172. It includes an elastic fixing piece that projects rearward and is elastically locked to the locking portion 1164 of the substrate holder 1160.

Further, as shown in FIG. 90 and the like, the main control board box 1170 is arranged at the right end of the rear view, two at the top and two at the bottom with the elastic fixing piece 1175 sandwiched between them, and seals the opening and closing of the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172. A possible sealing portion 1176, a sealing seal (not shown) that is affixed across the substrate base 1171 and the substrate cover 1172 at the lower ends of the substrate base 1171 and the substrate cover 1172, and a transparent seal that covers the surface of the sealing seal. It includes a protective cover 1177 and. The sealing portion 1176 of the main control board box 1170 has the same configuration as the separation and cutting portion 863 of the payout control board box 860 in the board unit 800, and is fixed by caulking in any one of the four sealing portions 1176. Has been done. In this main control board box 1170, in order to separate the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172, it is necessary to cut the sealing portion 1176 fixed by caulking so that a trace of opening and closing of the main control board box 1170 remains. It has become. As a result, it is possible to clearly visually determine from the outside whether or not the main control board box 1170 has been opened illegally.

Since four sealing portions 1176 of the main control board box 1170 are provided in the present embodiment, the main control board box 1170 can be opened and closed up to three times. Further, the main control board box 1170 has a sealing seal affixed across the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172, and when the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172 are separated, the sealing seal is cut or peeled off. It is necessary to do so, and even with this sealed seal, traces of opening and closing remain. Therefore, the main control board box 1170 is illegally opened and closed, and the internal main control board 4100 is illegally modified or replaced with an illegal main control board (or a ROM that stores a game content program or the like). However, it can be visually confirmed from the outside, and it is possible to prevent such fraudulent acts from being carried out.

Further, in the main control board box 1170, an opening penetrating the board cover 1172 in the front-rear direction is formed at an appropriate position, and the RAM clear switch 4100e and the test terminal 4100f attached to the main control board 4100 through the opening, Various connection terminals for connecting to the peripheral control board 4140, the payout control board 4110, and the like face to the rear side. By connecting a predetermined measuring device to the test terminal 4100f facing from the rear surface of the main control board box 1170, the main control board 4100 can be checked from the outside without opening the main control board box 1170. Even if the above-mentioned sealing portion 1176 and the sealing seal are skillfully crafted, it is possible to confirm the presence or absence of unauthorized modification of the main control board 4100 other than visually, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 having high security performance. You can do it.

[5-5. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1180 in the game board 4 will be described. The function display unit 1180 is mounted and arranged at a predetermined position of the front constituent member 1110, and is a display unit 1181 that is visibly arranged from the player side on the front surface of the front constituent member 1110 and the front constituent member 1110. It is provided with a rear protruding portion 1182 that protrudes rearward from the rear surface.

As shown in an enlarged view in FIG. 91, the display unit 1181 of the function display unit 1180 has one LED for displaying a game state changed by a game ball driven into the game area 1100 at the left end portion of the front view. It consists of a game status display 1183 consisting of two LEDs arranged in the vertical direction on the right side of the game status display 1183, and an upper special symbol memory display for displaying the number of reservations related to the acceptance of the game ball to the upper starting port 2101. One 7-segment LED for displaying the result of the first special lottery, which is arranged on the right side of the device 1184 and the upper special symbol memory display 1184 and is drawn by accepting the game ball to the upper start port 2101, as the first special symbol. The second special lottery result, which is arranged diagonally to the right of the upper special symbol display 1185 and the upper special symbol display 1185 and is drawn by accepting the game ball to the lower starting port 2102, is displayed as the second special symbol. The number of reservations for accepting game balls to the lower starting port 2102, which consists of a lower special symbol display 1186 consisting of one 7-segment LED and two LEDs arranged vertically on the right side of the lower special symbol display 1186. It is equipped with a lower special symbol storage display 1187 for displaying.

Further, the display unit 1181 of the function display unit 1180 is arranged in an arc shape substantially along the inner peripheral rail 1113 from directly above the lower special symbol display 1186, and displays the number of reservations related to the passage of the gate portion 2350 by the game ball. The normal symbol memory display 1188 composed of four LEDs for the purpose of the operation, and the normal symbol lottery result arranged under the normal symbol storage display and drawn by passing the game ball through the gate 2350 are displayed as the normal symbol. 1189, a normal symbol display consisting of one LED, and 1188, a normal symbol storage display, are arranged side by side on the upper right side, and when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is a "big hit", the big winning opening 2103 It is provided with a round display 1190 composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening / closing operation of.

The game status display 1183 in the function display unit 1180 is a full-color LED capable of changing the emission color of red, green, and orange, and the combination of the emission color and lighting / blinking Various gaming states (for example, probability fluctuation state, time shortening state, probability variation time saving state, big hit game state, small hit game state, etc.) can be displayed.

Further, when the upper special symbol storage display 1184 in the function display unit 1180 cannot display the first special symbol in a variable manner on the upper special symbol display 1185, when a game ball is received in the upper starting port 2101, The number of holds (stored number) of the first special symbol whose start of variable display is held (stored) is displayed. Further, the special symbol storage display 1184 has a first special symbol storage lamp 1184a composed of a predetermined LED and a first special symbol storage lamp 1184b, and the first special symbol storage lamps 1184a and 1184b are lit. The number of holds can be displayed by the blinking pattern. Specifically, for example, when the number of holds is one, the first special symbol storage lamp 1184a is turned on and the first special symbol storage lamp 1184b is turned off, and when the number of holds is two, the first special symbol storage lamps 1184a and 1184b are turned on. 1184a blinks and the first special symbol memory lamp 1184b lights up when the number of holds is three, and the first special symbol memory lamps 1184a and 1184b both light up when the number of holds is four. It is supposed to blink. In this embodiment, up to four are reserved.

Further, when the lower special symbol storage display 1187 in the function display unit 1180 cannot display the second special symbol in a variable manner on the lower special symbol display 1186, when the game ball is received in the lower starting port 2102, The number of holds (stored number) of the second special symbol whose start of variable display is held (stored) is displayed. The lower special symbol storage display 1187 has a second special symbol storage lamp 1187a and a second special symbol storage lamp 1187b made of predetermined LEDs, and the second special symbol storage lamps 1187a and 1187b are lit. The number of holds can be displayed by the blinking pattern. Specifically, for example, when the number of holds is one, the second special symbol storage lamp 1187a is turned on and the second special symbol storage lamp 1187b is turned off, and when the number of holds is two, the second special symbol storage indicator lamp 1187a, When 1187b is lit together and the number of holdings is 3, the second special symbol storage lamp 1187a blinks and the second special symbol storage lamp 1187b is lit, and when the number of holdings is 4, the second special symbol storage lamps 1187a and 1187b are lit. Both are designed to blink. In this embodiment, up to four are reserved.

Further, the upper special symbol display 1185 and the lower special symbol display 1186 in the function display unit 1180 receive the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game balls to the upper start port 2101 and the lower start port 2102. The special lottery result is displayed, and the 7-segment LED stops after fluctuating for a predetermined time according to the special lottery result, and the light emission pattern (special symbol) of the stopped 7-segment LED indicates the first special lottery result or The result of the second special lottery can be recognized by the player.

Further, the normal symbol display 1189 in the function display unit 1180 is a full-color LED capable of changing the emission color of red, green, and orange, and is a combination of the emission color to emit light and lighting / blinking. As a result, it is possible to display the result of a normal lottery that is drawn when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2350. As with the special symbol, the display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 1189 is also stopped and displayed in a light emitting pattern corresponding to the normal lottery result after the display is changed for a predetermined time.

Further, the normal symbol storage display 1188 in the function display unit 1180 suspends the start of the variable display when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2350 when the normal symbol cannot be variablely displayed on the normal symbol display 1189. It displays the number of reserved ordinary symbols (stored) (stored). This ordinary symbol storage display 1188 includes four ordinary symbol storage lamps 1188a to 1188d arranged side by side from the bottom, each of which is a predetermined LED, and the ordinary symbol storage lamps 1188a are arranged from the bottom according to the number of holdings. By sequentially lighting ~ 1188d, the number of reserved symbols can be displayed. In addition, in this embodiment, up to four variable displays of ordinary symbols are reserved (stored).

Further, the round indicator 1190 in the function display unit 1180 includes a two-round indicator lamp 1190a and a 15-round indicator lamp 1190b composed of predetermined LEDs, and when each lamp is turned on, a round in a "big hit" game is provided. It is possible to display the number.

As shown in FIG. 91, the function display unit 1180 can be visually recognized from the player side through the game window 101 of the door frame 5 in a state where the game board 4 is attached to the pachinko game machine 1. In addition, the game status display 1183 of the function display unit 1180, the upper special symbol storage display 1184, the upper special symbol display 1185, the lower special symbol display 1186, the lower special symbol storage display 1187, the normal symbol storage display 1188, The normal symbol display 1189 and the round display 1190 are mounted on the front surface of the function display board 1191 (see FIG. 97). Further, a connection terminal for connecting the function display board 1191 and the main control board 4100 is attached to the rear end of the rear protrusion 1182 of the function display unit 1180.

In the present embodiment, since the function display unit 1180 is provided in the front component 1110 of the game board 4, it is compared with the case where the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 attached to the game panel 1150 are provided. The function display unit 1180 can be diverted as the basic configuration of the gaming board 4, the configuration related to the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be simplified to prevent the cost from increasing, and the model of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (table). The position of the display unit 1181 of the function display unit 1180 does not change even if the detailed configuration of the game board 4 embodied by the unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 and capable of characterizing the model of the pachinko game machine 1) is different. It is possible for a player, a clerk in a game hall, or the like to recognize the position of the display unit 1181 without any confusion.

[5-6. Second Embodiment of the game panel]
Subsequently, a game panel 1200 having a form different from that of the game panel 1150 in the game board 4 described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 92 to 94. The front component 1110, the board holder 1160, and the main control board box 1170 in FIGS. 92 to 94 have the same configuration as those described above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted here. The game panel 1200 of the present embodiment is thinner than the above-mentioned game panel 1150 and has a plate shape capable of partitioning the rear end of the game area 1100 whose outer circumference is partitioned by the front component 1110. Also includes a panel plate 1210 having a small outer shape, and a frame-shaped panel holder 1220 that holds the panel plate 1210 detachably from the front side and is attached to the rear surface of the front component 1110.

The game panel 1200 panel board 1210 has a polygonal shape whose outer shape is slightly larger than that of the game area 1100. It is made of an inorganic plate. The thickness of this panel plate 1210 is thinner than that of the panel holder 1220 (game panel 1150), and it is the minimum necessary that can be sufficiently held even if an obstacle nail (not shown) is planted on the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. It has a thickness (8 to 10 mm). In this embodiment, the panel plate 1210 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

The panel plate 1210 includes a plurality of fitting holes 1211 arranged in the vicinity of the outer periphery and formed of round holes penetrating in the front-rear direction, and elongated holes 1212 arranged in the vicinity of the outer periphery of the lower left portion and penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending in the vertical direction. It has. These fitting holes 1211 and elongated holes 1212 are arranged outside the game area 1100 and are positioned with the panel holder 1220. Further, the panel plate 1210 is provided with stepped engaging step portions 1213 having a recessed front side at both ends of the upper side and both ends of the lower side thereof. The engaging step portion 1213 is formed so as to be cut out to approximately half the thickness of the panel plate 1210, and is arranged outside the game area 1100 as in the fitting hole 1211 and the elongated hole 1212. This is for engaging and fixing the panel plate 1210 to the panel holder 1220.

Further, the panel plate 1210 is provided with a plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1214 at predetermined positions. The inner rail 1112 can be fixed at a predetermined position by fitting and fixing the positioning protrusion 1127 projecting from the rear side of the inner rail 1112 to the inner rail fixing hole 1214.

On the other hand, the panel holder 1220 in the game panel 1200 has a size including the panel plate 1210 and has a substantially quadrangular outer shape, and has substantially the same thickness as the thickness of the game panel 1150 made of the above-mentioned wooden board (in the present embodiment, It is made of a synthetic resin (for example, a thermoplastic synthetic resin) having a size of about 20 mm). The panel holder 1220 has a holding step portion 1221 that holds the panel plate 1210 detachably and is recessed from the front side to the rear side, and front and rear having a size substantially equal to that of the game area 1100 inside the holding step portion 1221. It is mainly provided with a through-hole 1222 that penetrates in the direction.

The depth from the front surface of the holding step portion 1221 of the panel holder 1220 is substantially the same as the thickness of the panel plate 1210, and the front surface of the panel plate 1210 held in the holding step portion 1221 is the front surface of the panel holder 1220. It is designed to be almost on the same side as. Further, the holding step portion 1221 has a size such that a predetermined amount of clearance is formed on the front inner peripheral surface thereof with respect to the outer peripheral surface of the panel plate 1210. Due to this clearance, even if the panel plate 1210 expands and contracts relatively due to changes in temperature and aging, the expansion and contraction can be absorbed. An elastic member such as rubber may be packed in the clearance.

Further, the panel holder 1220 is arranged at a position corresponding to the fitting hole 1211 and the elongated hole 1212 formed in the panel plate 1210 held by the holding step portion 1221, and is arranged from the front surface of the holding step portion 1221 toward the front. It is provided with a plurality of protruding pins 1223 that extend and can be fitted and inserted into the fitting holes 1211 and the elongated holes 1212 of the panel plate 1210. By fitting and inserting these protruding pins 1223 into the fitting holes 1211 and the elongated holes 1212 of the panel plate 1210, the panel holder 1220 and the panel plate 1210 can be positioned with each other.

Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with an engaging claw 1224 and an engaging piece 1225 that engage with the engaging step portion 1213 at a position corresponding to the engaging step portion 1213 of the panel plate 1210. More specifically, the engaging claw 1224 is arranged on the upper holding step portion 1221 of the panel holder 1220, corresponds to the upper engaging step portion 1213 in the panel plate 1210, and is forward from the front surface of the holding step portion 1221. It protrudes toward the surface and is elastically engaged with the engaging step portion 1213. The engaging claw 1224 is sized so that its tip does not protrude from the front surface of the panel holder 1220. On the other hand, the engaging piece 1225 is arranged in the lower holding step portion 1221 of the panel holder 1220, corresponds to the lower engaging step portion 1213 in the panel plate 1210, and is connected to the front surface of the holding step portion 1221. In a state where the engaging step portion 1213 of the plate 1210 is formed with a predetermined gap having a size capable of being inserted, a predetermined amount extends toward the upper side (center side) along the front surface of the panel holder 1220. By engaging the engaging step portion 1213 of the panel plate 1210 with the engaging claw 1224 and the engaging piece 1225, the panel plate 1210 is detachably held with respect to the panel holder 1220.

Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a boss insertion hole 1226 that penetrates the mounting boss 1126 provided in the front constituent member 1110 in the front-rear direction, and the mounting boss of the front constituent member 1110 is provided in the boss insertion hole 1226. By inserting the 1126, the panel holder 1220 and the front component 1110 are positioned with each other.

As shown in FIG. 93, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a mounting support portion 1227 on the rear surface side, which is recessed by a predetermined amount on the front side so as to leave a lower side and an outer peripheral edge slightly below the center in the vertical direction. ing. Due to this mounting support portion 1227, the rear surface of the panel holder 1220 is recessed above the predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, with the outer peripheral portion on the rear surface side protruding rearward, and the amount of the depression (the amount of the depression). Depth) is a depth (in this embodiment, about 2.5 mm) that can accommodate the flange-shaped fixing portion 3001a (see FIG. 96) of the back box 3001 in the back unit 3000 that is mounted and fixed to the mounting support portion 1227. It is said that it is preferably between 1 and 3 mm). By mounting and fixing a predetermined member to the mounting support portion 1227, it is possible to prevent the fixing portion 3001a from protruding to the rear side of the panel holder 1220, and the panel holder 1220, that is, the game board 4 can be attached to the main body frame. 3 (Pachinko game machine 1) can be securely installed and installed in the game board holding port 601.

Further, as shown in the panel holder 1220, a plurality of mounting holes 1228 arranged in the mounting support portion 1227 on the rear surface side and above the accommodating recess 630h and capable of screwing a predetermined screw are arranged in a predetermined arrangement. ing. Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of positioning holes 1229 arranged so as to correspond to the mounting holes 1228. The positioning hole 1229 is a positioning protrusion formed on a member to be mounted and fixed using the mounting hole 1228 (for example, a positioning protrusion protruding forward from a flange-shaped fixing portion 3001a on the front surface of the back box 3001 (not shown). Is omitted)) is inserted. In the present embodiment, the positioning hole 1229 is a stop hole having a substantially rectangular shape (square hole shape) in the rear view.

It should be noted that, with respect to the mounting hole 1228, a mounting hole having a large diameter and a small diameter are mixed, and the mounting hole has an appropriate diameter according to the size and weight of a predetermined member to be mounted and fixed. 1228 may be used.

Further, the panel holder 1220 is formed with a plurality of lightening portions 1230 that open to the rear surface side at least in a predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, so that the lightening portion 1230 reduces the weight of the panel holder 1220. It has become. As shown in FIG. 92, these lightening portions 1230 are not formed in the front side of the accommodating recess 630h, that is, within a predetermined range from the lower end of the front surface side of the panel holder 1220 to a predetermined height, and are within that range. Since the front surface of the panel holder 1220 is a substantially flat surface, the rear surface of the front component 1110 arranged on the front surface is a substantially flat surface, and the game ball launched from the ball striking device 650. However, it is guided smoothly. Further, in this panel holder 1220, as shown in the drawing, the lightening portion 1230 is formed so that the mounting holes 1228 and the like are formed in a boss shape, and at the same time, they are supported and the strength of the panel holder 1220 is maintained. In order to do so, a box-shaped rib is formed.

The panel holder 1220 is formed with an obstacle nail planting device (not shown) and a positioning unit 1231 corresponding to positioning means such as an assembly jig, and holds the game panel 1150 in the obstacle nail planting device. It is possible to set it in the state that it is. Further, in the lower part of the panel holder 1220, an out port 1232 that penetrates in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the out-port guidance surface 1115 of the front component 1110, and a lower end that penetrates horizontally in the front-rear direction to the left side of the front view and downward. A ball passage notch 1233 having the same shape as the ball passage notch 1122 of the front component 1110 and a rear protrusion 1182 of the function display unit 1180 penetrating in the front-rear direction are inserted into the lower right corner of the front view. It includes an insertion hole 1234 and.

Further, the panel holder 1220 has a front configuration including a groove-shaped out ball discharge groove 1235 (see FIG. 93) in which a predetermined amount is recessed from the rear surface to the front on the rear surface side of the out port 1232 and the lower end side is opened downward. It is provided with a notch portion 1236 formed at a position corresponding to the game board stopper 1120 of the member 1110 and notched so as to penetrate from the right end in the front view in the front-rear direction. Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes for mounting and fixing to the rear surface of the front component 1110 at appropriate positions.

When the game board 4 is inserted into and held in the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3, the out ball discharge groove 1235 in the panel holder 1220 becomes the main body frame 3 (the upper surface of the game board mounting portion 606 in the main body frame base 600). It is designed to fit with the provided positioning protrusion 607, and when the out-ball discharge groove 1235 fits with the positioning protrusion 607, the game board 4 moves relative to the main body frame 3 in the left-right direction. It is becoming regulated.

In the game panel 1200 of the present embodiment, the panel plate 1210 is fitted and inserted into the holding step portion 1221 of the panel holder 1220 from the front, and the engaging claw 1224 and the engaging piece 1225 are engaged with the engaging step portion 1213. By combining them, the panel plate 1210 can be held by the panel holder 1220, and the front side of the panel plate 1210 and the panel holder 1220 are substantially flush with each other. It is possible to set the panel plate 1210 in the conventional obstacle nail planting device while holding it in the panel holder 1220 without modifying the installation device, and suppress the increase in the cost for planting the obstacle nail. You can do it.

Further, although not shown in the game panel 1200, a plurality of obstacle nails are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement within a range corresponding to the game area 1100 on the front surface of the panel plate 1210. The table unit 2000 can be attached. Further, a back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1220. As a result, in the thin panel plate 1210, only the front unit is supported, so that it is possible to prevent the panel plate 1210 from being distorted by the load of the front unit.

Further, since the game panel 1200 is divided into a panel plate 1210 and a panel holder 1220, even if the panel plate 1210 is used as a transparent plate, it is possible to suppress an increase in the weight of the entire game panel 1200, and the transparent panel. The pachinko game machine 1 in which the rear side of the game area 1100 can be seen by the player through the plate 1210 can be embodied, and the pachinko game machine 1 can be strongly attracted by the player.

Further, since the game panel 1200 is divided into a panel plate 1210 and a panel holder 1220, the panel plate 1210 whose position of the obstacle nail, the winning opening, etc. changes depending on the model of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is used as a replacement part. At the same time, the panel holder 1220 can be used as a common part, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 equipped with the gaming board 4 compatible with various models can be obtained by simply replacing the panel plate 1210. ..

Further, since the panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes 1228 in a predetermined arrangement in advance, mounting and fixing positions of various predetermined members such as the back unit 3000 which is mounted and fixed on the rear surface side of the panel holder 1220 depending on the model. By designing the fixing portions of various members to correspond to the positions of the mounting holes 1228, the panel holder 1220 can be used as a common part of the pachinko gaming machine 1 regardless of the model, even if the positions are different. It has become like.

[5-7. Detailed configuration of the game board]
Next, the detailed configuration of the game board 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 95 and 96. FIG. 95 is a detailed front view of the game board. Further, FIG. 96 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of FIG. 95 as viewed from the front by disassembling.

The game board 4 in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has an outer rail 1111 and an inner rail 1112, and the outer circumference of the game area 1100 in which the game ball as a game medium is driven by the player operating the handle device 500. At a position where the frame-shaped front component 1110 and the front component 1110 can be visually recognized from the game window 101 of the door frame 5 to the player side when attached to the pachinko gaming machine 1 at the lower right corner of the front view. A plurality of openings 1158 which are attached to the rear side of the arranged function display unit 1180 and the front component 1110 so as to close the game area 1100 and penetrate in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the game area 1100 (FIG. A plate-shaped gaming panel 1150 having (see 96), a front unit 2000 attached to the opening 1158 of the gaming panel 1150 from the front side, and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the gaming panel 1150. There is.

Further, the game board 4 in the pachinko game machine 1 is arranged between the game panel 1150 and the back unit 3000, and is rear of the game panel 1150 with respect to a plurality of light emitting decorative holes bored so as to penetrate the game panel 1150. A panel lens member 2500 inserted from the side, a liquid crystal display device detachably attached to the rear side of the back unit 3000, and a liquid crystal display device capable of displaying a predetermined effect image visible from the player side according to the game state. It includes a board holder 1160 attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the game panel 1150 so as to cover the lower part of the back unit 3000 from the rear side, and a main control board box 1170 attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1160.

[5-7-1. Table unit]
The front unit 2000 in the game board 4 is arranged above the out port 1151 at the lower center in the left-right direction in the game area 1100 and supported on the front surface of the game panel 1150, and the game area on the left side of the attacker unit 2100. A side winning opening member 2200 arranged along the outer periphery of the 1100 and supported on the front surface of the game panel 1150, and a frame-shaped center accessory 2300 arranged in a substantially central portion of the game area 1100 and supported by the game panel 1150. It has.

The table unit 2000 is inserted from the front side into the opening 1158 formed at a position corresponding to the game area 1100 in the game panel 1150, and is attached to the front surface of the game panel 1150. The portion protruding forward from the game panel 1150 is located within the game area 1100. As a result, the front unit 2000 comes into contact with the game ball driven into the game area 1100 at an appropriate position, and with the obstacle nails planted on the front surface of the game panel 1150, with respect to the movement of the game ball. It is possible to give a change. Further, the table unit 2000 can decorate the inside of the game area 1100.

[5-7-1a. Attacker unit]
The attacker unit 2100 in the front unit 2000 of the game board 4 has a plurality of entrances (winning openings) in which a game ball driven into the game area 1100 can be received, and specifically, in the left-right direction. From the upper start port 2101 arranged substantially in the center of the above, the lower start port 2102 arranged below the upper start port 2101, and the upper start port 2101 and the lower start port 2102 arranged below the lower start port 2102. Also has a rectangular large winning opening 2103 that greatly extends in the left-right direction, and a general winning opening 2104 that is arranged slightly above the left and right sides of the large winning opening 2103. The game balls received in the upper starting port 2101, the lower starting port 2102, the large winning opening 2103, and the general winning opening 2104 are guided from the front side to the rear side of the game panel 1150.

The upper start port 2101 of the attacker unit 2100 is open on the upper side so that game balls can always be received (winning). On the other hand, in the lower starting port 2102 arranged below the upper starting port 2101, a pair of movable pieces 2106 that can be expanded by the starting port solenoid 2105 (see FIG. 97) are arranged between the lower starting port 2102 and the upper starting port 2101. In a state where the pair of movable pieces 2106 stands up substantially vertically, the upper starting port 2101 and the pair of movable pieces 2106 make the game ball unacceptable to the lower starting port 2102, whereas the pair of movable pieces are movable. When the piece 2106 is expanded in the left-right direction, the game ball can be accepted into the lower starting port 2102. That is, the lower starting port 2102 is a variable winning opening by the pair of movable pieces 2106. The pair of movable pieces 2106 are opened and closed by driving the start port solenoid 2105 based on the detection of the passage of the game ball by the gate switch 2352 of the gate portion 2350 in the center accessory 2300 described later.

Further, the large winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 can be opened and closed by a horizontally long rectangular opening and closing member 2107 that can close the opening. The lower side of the opening / closing member 2107 is rotatably supported by the shaft, and in a substantially vertical state, the large winning opening 2103 can be closed to make the game ball unacceptable, and the upper side moves to the front side. When it is rotated to, the large winning opening 2103 is opened so that the game ball can be accepted. The opening / closing member 2107 is in a state in which the large winning opening 2103 is closed in a normal gaming state, and is specially drawn by receiving a game ball into the upper starting opening 2101 or the lower starting opening 2102 (starting prize). Depending on the lottery result (when the special lottery result is "big hit" or "small hit"), the attacker solenoid 2108 (see FIG. 97) is driven to open and close.

Further, as shown in the figure, the general winning opening 2104 of the attacker unit 2100 is opened upward so that the game ball can always be accepted (winning).

Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the attacker unit 2100 has a lower start port switch 2109 for detecting a game ball received in the lower start port 2102 and a count switch for detecting a game ball received in the grand prize opening 2103. 2110 is further provided, and the game ball detected by the lower start port switch 2109 and the count switch 2110 is discharged onto the bottom wall portion of the board holder 1160. The upper start opening switch 3022 for detecting the game ball received in the upper start opening 2101 and the general winning opening switch 3020 for detecting the game ball received in the general winning opening 2104 are provided in the back unit 3000 described later. ing.

[5-7-1b. Side winning opening member]
The side winning opening member 2200 of the front unit 2000 in the game board 4 is formed in the lower portion of the game panel 1150 on the left side from the center in the left-right direction to the opening 1158 formed on the left side of the opening 1158 into which the attacker unit 2100 is inserted and fixed. On the other hand, after being inserted from the front side, it is fixed to the front surface of the game panel 1150, and is back to each other along the outer periphery of the game area 1100 so as to be aligned with the general winning opening 2104 on the left side of the front view of the attacker unit 2100. It is equipped with two general winning openings 2201 that are oriented toward it. These two general winning openings 2201 are opened upward so that game balls can always be received (winning), and the game balls accepted into the general winning opening 2201 are guided from the front side to the rear side of the game panel 1150. After that, it is detected by the general winning opening switch 3020 provided in the back unit 3000, which will be described later.

Further, the side winning opening member 2200 is arranged at a position where the left end portion is substantially in contact with the outer periphery of the game area 1100 at the upper left end portion thereof, and is inclined so as to be lowered toward the right end portion. The shelf portion 2202 and the first shelf portion 2202 are arranged on opposite sides and lower sides of the two general winning openings 2201 and are located on the left-right center side of the game area 1100 (the lower starting opening 2102 and the large winning opening of the attacker unit 2100). It is provided with a second shelf portion 2203 that becomes lower toward the 2103 side), and the game ball that has flowed down along the outer periphery of the game area 1100 by the first shelf portion 2202 can be moved toward the center side of the game area 1100. You can do it.

The two general winning openings 2201 are arranged on the right side of the right end of the first shelf 2202, and even if the game ball is moved to the center side of the game area 1100 by the first shelf 2202, There is a possibility of winning a prize in the general winning opening 2201. Further, a third shelf portion 2204 inclined so as to be lowered toward the center side of the game area 1100 is also provided on the upper side between the two general winning openings 2201.

The side winning opening member 2200 is formed so as to have translucency as a whole, and although detailed illustration is omitted, a side winning opening decorative substrate is provided on the rear side of the second shelf portion 2203. At the same time, the side lamp decorative substrate 3014 in the back unit 3000 described later is arranged behind the side winning opening member 2200, and the side winning opening member 2200 is provided by these side winning opening decorative substrate and the side lamp decorative substrate 3014. Is luminescent and can be decorated.

[5-7-1c. Center role]
Further, the center accessory 2300 of the front unit 2000 in the game board 4 is inserted from the front side into an opening 1158 formed large so as to penetrate substantially the center of the game panel 1150, and then the game panel 1150. It is fixed to the front surface, and as shown in the figure, it is formed in a frame shape so as to occupy most of the game area 1100, and the outer peripheral surface on the right side of the front view is outside the game ball with the outer circumference of the game area 1100. It is formed in an arc shape so that a gap slightly larger than the diameter is formed, and the outer peripheral surface on the left side is on a substantially straight line hanging so as to form a region having a predetermined width from the outer circumference of the game area 1100. Is formed in.

The center accessory 2300 is an upper shelf portion 2301 that is inclined to the left from a position slightly to the right of the center in the left-right direction on the upper outer peripheral surface of the front wall portion located in front of the game panel 1150 so as to be lowered toward the left. When a game ball driven into the upper part of the game area 1100 flows down to the upper shelf part 2301, it flows down through the left side of the center accessory 2300 and to the right side of the upper shelf part 2301. The game ball that has flowed down (entered) passes through the right side of the center accessory 2300 and flows down to the lower part of the game area 1100 at once. In other words, if the game ball is driven so that the game ball enters to the right side of the upper shelf 2301 in the center accessory 2300, the chance of enjoying the flow of the game ball is reduced, so that the driving force of the game ball is strong. It is possible to adjust the ball as appropriate, and it is possible to maintain a feeling of tension and suppress the game from becoming a vague game.

Further, the center accessory 2300 has entered the warp entrance 2302 and the warp entrance 2302 in which the game ball flowing down the game area 1100 can enter the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the front wall portion located on the front side of the game panel 1150. A warp outlet (not shown) that discharges the game ball into the frame, and a center accessory that rolls the game ball released from the warp outlet in the left-right direction and then releases it into the game area 1100 above the attacker unit 2100. The stage 2310 formed on the upper surface of the lower side in the frame of the 2300 is mainly provided.

Although detailed illustration of the stage 2310 in the center accessory 2300 is omitted, the first stage to which the game balls released from the warp outlet are supplied and the game balls arranged in front of the first stage are arranged from the first stage. It is provided with a second stage, which is supplied and capable of releasing a game ball into the game area 1100. The stage 2310 is formed in a curved surface shape so that the substantially center in the left-right direction is lowered. In addition, a chance entrance 2313 through which a game ball can enter is formed on the rear side of the first stage substantially in the center in the left-right direction, and the game ball that has entered the chance entrance 2313 is a chance at the lowermost front of the center accessory 2300. It is designed to be discharged into the game area 1100 from the exit 2314. As shown in the figure, the chance exit 2314 is arranged directly above the upper starting port 2101 in the attacker unit 2100, and the game ball released from the chance exit 2314 is received by the upper starting port 2101 with a high probability (winning). To do).

The stage 2310 in the center accessory 2300 is formed of a transparent member, and the decorative body arranged below the stage 2310 in the back unit 3000 can be visually recognized from the player side through the stage 2310. It has become.

Further, the center accessory 2300 has a transparent outer peripheral surface on the left side of the front wall portion located on the front side of the game panel 1150, which extends to the left so as to be substantially in contact with the inner rail 1112 above the warp entrance 2302. It further includes an arch portion 2315. The arch portion 2315 extends from the substantially front end of the front wall portion in a thin plate shape, and forms a space through which the game ball can pass between the arch portion 2315 and the front surface of the game panel 1150. As a result, the game ball driven into the upper part of the game area 1100 and guided to the left side of the center accessory 2300 by the upper shelf portion 2301 flows down to the downstream side through the rear side of the arch portion 2315.

Further, the center accessory 2300 is provided with a gate portion 2350 that detects the passage of the game ball near the arch portion 2315 on the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the front wall portion located on the front side of the game panel 1150. The gate portion 2350 detects a gate entrance on the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the front wall portion, which is arranged above the arch portion 2315 and allows a game ball flowing down the game area 1100 to enter, and a game ball that has entered the gate entrance. The gate switch 2352 and the gate outlet for discharging the game ball detected by the gate switch 2352 from the outer peripheral surface of the front wall portion to the game area 1100 are provided. In this embodiment, although detailed illustration is omitted, the gate exit of the gate portion 2350 is formed at the same height as the arch portion 2315, and the game ball detected by the gate switch 2352 is an arch. It looks as if you have dived in part 2315.

[5-7-2. Panel lens member]
The panel lens member 2500 of the game board 4 in the pachinko game machine 1 penetrates in the front-rear direction in a circular or × shape at a position outside the opening 1158 in which the center accessory 2300 is inserted in the game area 1100 of the game panel 1150. A plurality of light emitting decorative holes formed so as to be light emitting and decorating. The panel lens member 2500 includes a transparent upper panel lens 2510 corresponding to a plurality of light emitting decorative holes formed on the upper left side on the outer periphery of the center accessory 2300, and a plurality of panels arranged on the rear side of the upper panel lens 2510 on the surface. It is arranged behind the upper panel lens substrate on which the LED is mounted, the transparent lower panel lens 2520 corresponding to a plurality of light emitting decorative holes formed on the lower left side on the outer periphery of the center accessory 2300, and the lower panel lens 2520. It includes a lower panel lens substrate on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the surface.

The upper panel lens 2510 and the lower panel lens 2520 in the panel lens member 2500 project forward from the plate-shaped lens base portion and have a plurality of rod-shaped insertion guide guides having substantially the same shape as the shape of the light emitting decorative hole to be inserted. It has a part. When the insertion light guide unit 2502 is inserted into the light emitting decorative hole of the game panel 1150 from the rear side, the tip thereof is formed so as to substantially coincide with the front surface of the game panel 1150, and flows down the front surface of the game panel 1150. It is designed so as not to affect the game ball as much as possible.

By appropriately emitting the LEDs of the upper panel lens substrate and the lower panel lens substrate, the panel lens member 2500 can illuminate and decorate the area where the gaming ball flows down even if an opaque gaming panel 1150 such as veneer plywood is used. The decoration of the game panel 1150, which has never been seen before, can be shown to the player, and the pachinko game machine 1 can be made to stand out to be differentiated from other pachinko game machines.

[5-7-3. Back unit]
The back unit 3000 in the game board 4 of the present embodiment is mounted and fixed to the rear surface of the game panel 1150, and supports the liquid crystal display device 1900 at a position separated from the game panel 1150 to the rear side by a predetermined distance as shown in the figure. In the back box 3001, the upper unit 3002 arranged in the back box 3001 above the liquid crystal display device 1900, the character unit 3400 arranged in the back box 3001 on the right side of the liquid crystal display device 1900, and in the back box 3001. It mainly includes a gear decoration unit 3500 arranged on the left side of the liquid crystal display device 1900.

Further, the back unit 3000 is arranged at a position corresponding to the side winning opening member 2200 in the front unit 2000 attached to the front surface of the game panel 1150 near the lower left front end of the back box 3001, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the surface. A game ball attached to the side lamp decorative substrate 3014 and the lower front end of the back box 3001 and received in the general winning opening 2201 of the side winning opening member 2200, and a game received in the general winning opening 2104 on the left side of the attacker unit 2100. The left guiding member 3016 that guides the ball downward, and the right that guides the game ball that is arranged on the right side of the left guiding member 3016 and is received to the upper starting port 2101 and the right general winning opening 2104 of the attacker unit 2100 downward. It mainly includes a guide member 3018.

Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the back unit 3000 includes a horizontally long rectangular lamp drive board box arranged in the lower rear side of the back box 3001 and accommodating the lamp drive board 4170 (see FIG. 99), and a back box. A panel relay terminal plate 4161 (see FIG. 97) fixed to the rear side of the 3001 and arranged on the left side when viewed from the rear of the lamp drive board box, and a horizontally long rectangular upper resistor arranged on the rear upper part of the back box 3001. It further includes a substrate and a lock member attached to the rear side of the back box 3001 to hold the liquid crystal display device 1900 detachably.

In the present embodiment, the back unit 3000 can be visually recognized from the player side through the frame of the center accessory 2300 in the front unit 2000, and the units 3100 and 3400 shaped into a predetermined shape are formed. , 3500, etc. make it possible to characterize the concept of the pachinko game machine 1. Further, in the back unit 3000, each unit 3100, 3400, and 3500 can be moved independently or in cooperation with each other according to the game state, and the movement causes the player to change the game state. It is possible to suggest the arrival of a chance, etc., and entertain the player.

[5-7-3a. Back box]
The back box 3001 in the back unit 3000 is formed in a box shape with the front side open, and is provided with a plurality of flange-shaped fixing portions 3001a protruding outward at the front end, and the game panel 1150 is provided via the fixing portions 3001a. It is designed to be fixed to the rear side. Further, the back box 3001 has a rectangular opening formed substantially in the center of the rear wall, and the liquid crystal display device 1900 supported on the rear side through the opening can be visually recognized from the player side. Further, in the back box 3001, mounting portions for mounting and fixing the units 3100, 3400, 3500, the boards 3014, and the like are formed at appropriate positions.

Although not shown, the back box 3001 is a liquid crystal that inserts and locks a fixed piece 1902 that protrudes outward from both the left and right sides of the liquid crystal display device 1900 (right side in the rear view) on the right side of the opening in the rear view. Along with having a support portion, a lock member is attached to the left side when viewed from the rear of the opening, and the lock member supports the other fixed piece 1902 of the liquid crystal display device 1900 (left side when viewed from the rear) to display the liquid crystal. The device 1900 is detachably attached to the rear side of the back box 3001.

[5-7-3b. Guidance member]
The left guiding member 3016 in the back unit 3000 guides the game ball received into the general winning opening 2201 of the side winning opening member 2200 and the general winning opening 2104 on the left side of the attacker unit 2100 downward through different flow paths. It is designed to be discharged, and each flow path is provided with a general winning opening switch 3020 for detecting the passage of a game ball. On the other hand, the right guiding member 3018 guides and discharges the game balls received into the upper starting port 2101 of the attacker unit 2100 and the general winning opening 2104 on the right side through different flow paths to the vicinity of the lower end. The flow path corresponding to the upper start port 2101 is provided with the upper start port switch 3022, and the flow path corresponding to the general winning port 2104 on the right side is provided with the general winning port switch 3020. Further, the right guiding member 3018 is provided with a magnetic detection switch 3024 capable of detecting magnetism.

The game balls guided downward by the left guide member 3016 and the right guide member 3018 are discharged onto the bottom wall portion of the board holder 1160, and are discharged downward from the out ball discharge portion 1161 of the board holder 1160 to the lower side of the game board 4. It has become so.

[5-7-3c. Upper unit]
The upper unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 is formed horizontally as a whole, and is attached and fixed to the upper side of the opening facing the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the back box 3001. The upper unit 3100 is arranged in the front at substantially the center in the left-right direction and is arranged in a circular shape in front view, and is arranged behind the rotating decoration unit 3200 to raise and lower the rotating decoration unit 3200. Mainly provided with 3250, a swinging decorative unit 3300 arranged substantially in the center in the left-right direction behind the elevating mechanism 3250, and movable ceiling units 3350 arranged on both left and right sides of the swinging decorative unit 3300. ing.

The rotary decorative body unit 3200 of the upper unit 3100 is moved in the vertical direction between the ascending position located at the upper part of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the descending position located at substantially the center of the liquid crystal display device 1900 by the elevating mechanism 3250. You can do it. In the rotating decoration unit 3200, the rotating decoration formed in the shape of a shuriken arranged on the front surface rotates, and the rotation causes the rotational radius of the rotating decoration to increase due to the centrifugal force. It has become like.

In this rotating decoration unit 3200, not only the rotating decoration rotates at the end, but also the rotating decoration unit protrudes outward in the radial direction, so that the turning radius of the entire rotating decoration body is expanded and the appearance is greatly changed. It is possible to have a strong impact on the player, entertain the player and suppress the decline in the interest in the game, and strongly attract the player's interest. This makes it easier to select the pachinko gaming machine 1 as the pachinko gaming machine that plays a game with a great difference from other pachinko gaming machines.

Further, the swinging decoration unit 3300 of the upper unit 3100 is provided with swinging decorations arranged on the left and right sides on the rear side so as to be adjacent to the rotating decoration unit 3200 located at the raised position, depending on the gaming state. The left and right swinging ornaments can be swung in the left-right direction all at once. Further, the movable ceiling unit 3350 of the upper unit 3100 is provided with plate-shaped ceiling decorations extending in the horizontal direction at both left and right ends of the upper unit 3100. The ceiling decoration is rotatably formed around an axis extending in the left-right direction around the front end side, and the rear end side of the ceiling decoration rotates in the descending direction according to the game state. It has become.

[5-7-3d. Character unit]
As shown in the figure, the character unit 3400 in the back unit 3000 includes a character body that is a model of a ninja and three-dimensionally shaped, and the character body moves from the rightmost position to the center side according to the game state. It is possible to move to the left and right direction. Further, when the character body of the character unit 3400 moves in the left-right direction, it rotates by a predetermined angle around an axis extending in the up-down direction with the movement.

Further, the character body of the character unit 3400 can reciprocate around an axis whose head extends in the left-right direction, and reciprocates around an axis whose right arm extends in the vertical direction. Can be done. As a result, by rotating the head back and forth, it is possible to make the character move as if it were nodding. In addition, by rotating the right arm back and forth in the horizontal direction, it is possible to make the character act as if he were throwing a shuriken.

[5-7-3e. Gear decoration unit]
The gear decoration unit 3500 in the back unit 3000 is provided with a plurality of gear-shaped gear decorations that are rotatable around an axis extending in the left-right direction and are arranged in the vertical direction, and each gear decoration is provided according to the gaming state. The body is designed to rotate all at once.

[5-7-4. Liquid crystal display device]
The liquid crystal display device 1900 in the game board 4 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the back box 3001 in the back unit 3000, and can display a predetermined effect image according to the game state. There is. The liquid crystal display device 1900 includes a fixing piece 1902 protruding outward from both the left and right sides, and is attached to the back box 3001 via the fixing piece 1902.

Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the liquid crystal display device 1900 includes a peripheral substrate box accommodating the peripheral control substrate 4140 on the rear side thereof.

[6. Main control board, payout control board and peripheral control board]
Next, the control board that performs various controls of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 97 to 101. FIG. 97 is a block diagram of a main control board, a payout control board, and a peripheral control board, FIG. 98 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 97, and FIG. 99 is a payout control board, a CR unit, and a frequency constituting the main board. FIG. 100 is a schematic diagram of various detection signals input / output to / from a game ball rental device connection terminal plate that relays an electrical connection with a display board, FIG. 100 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 97, and FIG. 101 is a block diagram. It is a block diagram which shows the outline of the peripheral control MPU.

As shown in FIG. 97, the control configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is mainly composed of a main control board 4100, a payout control board 4110, and a peripheral control board 4140, and various controls are shared. First, the main control board 4100 will be described, and then the payout control board 4110 and the peripheral control board 4140 will be described.

[6-1. Main control board]
As shown in FIG. 97, the main control board 4100 that controls the progress of the game is a main control MPU 4100a that is a microprocessor having a built-in ROM for storing various control programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. The main control I / O port 4100b as an input / output device (I / O device), the main control input circuit 4100c into which detection signals from various detection switches are input, and the main control solenoid for driving various solenoids. It includes a drive circuit 4100d and a RAM clear switch 4100e for completely erasing the information stored in the RAM (hereinafter, referred to as "main control built-in RAM") built in the main control MPU 4100a. .. In addition to its built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in ROM") and main control built-in RAM, the main control MPU4100a has a watch dock timer for monitoring its operation (system) and for preventing fraud. Functions etc. are also built-in. In addition, the main control MPU4100a has a built-in non-volatile RAM, and this non-volatile RAM has a unique code for identifying an individual by the manufacturer of the main control MPU4100a (a code that exists only once in the world). ) Is stored in advance as a unique ID code. Since the ID code once attached is stored in the non-volatile RAM, it cannot be rewritten even if an external device is used. The main control MPU4100a can take out the ID code from the non-volatile RAM and refer to it.

The upper start port switch 3022 for detecting the game ball entering the upper start port 2101, the lower start port switch 2109 for detecting the game ball entering the lower start port 2102, and the general winning opening 2104 shown in FIG. 95. The detection signal from the general winning opening switch 3020 for detecting the entered game ball is first input to the main control input circuit 4100c, and is input to the main control MPU 4100a via the main control I / O port 4100b. Further, as shown in FIG. 95, the gate switch 2352 for detecting the game ball passing through the gate portion 2350, the general winning opening switch 3020 for detecting the game ball entering the general winning opening 2201, and the large winning opening 2103 are entered. The detection signals from the count switch 2110 that detects the game ball and the magnetic detection switch 3024 that is attached to the back unit 3000 shown in FIG. 96 and detects fraudulent activity using a magnet are first displayed on the panel attached to the game board 4. It is input to the main control input circuit 4100c via the relay terminal plate 4161 and is input to the main control MPU 4100a via the main control I / O port 4100b.

The main control MPU 4100a outputs a control signal from the main control I / O port 4100b to the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d based on these detection signals, whereby the start port solenoid 2105 and the attacker via the panel relay terminal plate 4161. A drive signal is output to the solenoid 2108, and the upper special symbol display 1185, lower special symbol display 1186, and upper special symbol storage are performed from the main control I / O port 4100b via the panel relay terminal plate 4161 and the function display board 1191. A drive signal is output to the display 1184, the lower special symbol storage display 1187, the normal symbol display 1189, the normal symbol storage display 1188, the game status display 1183, and the round display 1190.

In the present embodiment, the upper start port switch 3022, the lower start port switch 2109, the gate switch 2352, and the count switch 2110 use a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch, whereas they are generally used. A contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switch is used for the winning opening switches 3020 and 3020. This is because the game ball frequently enters the upper start port 2101 and the lower start port 2102 and frequently passes through the gate portion 2350, so that the upper start port switch 3022, the lower start port switch 2109, and the gate switch 2352 are used. The detection of game balls also occurs frequently. Therefore, a proximity switch having a long life is used for the upper start port switch 3022, the lower start port switch 2109, and the gate switch 2352. Further, when a big hit game state that is advantageous for the player occurs, the big winning opening 2103 is opened and the game ball frequently enters, so that the count switch 2110 also frequently detects the game ball. Therefore, the count switch 2110 also uses a proximity switch having a long life. On the other hand, in the general winning openings 210 and 2201 in which the game balls do not enter frequently, the detection by the general winning opening switches 3020 and 3020 does not occur frequently. For this reason, mechanical switches having a shorter life than proximity switches are used for the general winning opening switches 3020 and 3020.

Further, the main control MPU 4100a serially transmits various information (game information) related to the game, various commands related to payout, etc. to the payout control board 4110, and various commands related to the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the payout control board 4110. Etc. are received by the serial method. Further, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various commands related to the control of the game effect and various commands related to the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the peripheral control board 4140. Here, a main peripheral serial transmission port for transmitting various commands to the peripheral control board 4140 in a serial manner will be described. The main control MPU 4100a is configured around the main control CPU core 4100aa, and in addition to the main control built-in RAM, the main control serial transmission port 4100ae, which is one of the main control serial I / O ports, provides a bus 4100ah. The circuit is connected via (see FIG. 105). The main peripheral serial transmission port 4100ae transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 4140 as main peripheral serial data, and is mainly composed of a transmission shift register 4100aea, a transmission buffer register 4100aeb, a serial management unit 4100aec, and the like (FIG. 6). See 105). When the main control CPU core 4100aa sets a command in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb and outputs a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 4100aec, the serial management unit 4100aec outputs a command set in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb from the transmission buffer register 4100aeb. It is transferred to the transmission shift register 4100ea and transmission is started to the peripheral control board 4140 as main peripheral serial data. In this embodiment, the transmission buffer register 4100aeb has 32 bytes as a storage capacity. The main control CPU core 4100aa continuously transmits a plurality of commands to the peripheral control board 4140 by setting a plurality of commands in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb and then outputting a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 4100aec.

The power supply board 851 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 4100 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter, simply "capacitor") as a backup power source for supplying power to the main control board 4100 for a predetermined time even when the power supply is cut off. BC0 (see FIG. 102) is provided. With this capacitor BC0, the main control MPU4100a can store various information in the main control built-in RAM in the power off processing even when the power is cut off. When the RAM clear switch 4100e of the main control board 4100 is operated when the power is turned on, the various stored information is completely erased (cleared) from the main control built-in RAM. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 4100e is also output to the payout control board 4110.

[6-2. Payout control board]
As shown in FIG. 98, the payout control board 4110 that controls the payout of the game ball, etc., performs the payout control unit 4120 that performs various controls related to the payout, the launch control by the launch solenoid 654, and the ball feed by the ball feed solenoid 585. FIG. 66 shows a launch control unit 4130 that controls, an error LED display 860c that displays the status of the pachinko gaming machine 1, an error release switch 860a for canceling an error displayed on the error LED display 860c, and FIG. The above-mentioned prize ball tank 720, tank rail 731, and a ball removal switch 860b for discharging the game ball in the prize ball device 740 to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and starting the ball removal operation are provided. ..

[6-2-1. Payout control unit]
As shown in FIG. 98, the payout control unit 4120 that performs various controls related to payout is a microprocessor that has a built-in ROM for storing various control programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. The external watch dock timer 4120c for monitoring whether or not the payout control I / O port 4120b as an I / O device and the payout control MPU 4120a are operating normally (hereinafter, referred to as "external WDT4120c"). ), The payout motor drive circuit 4120d for outputting the drive signal to the payout motor 744 of the prize ball device 740, the payout control input circuit 4120e for inputting the detection signals from various detection switches related to the payout, and the CR unit 6. It is provided with a CR unit input / output circuit 4120f for exchanging various signals of the above. In addition to the built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as "payout control built-in ROM") and RAM (hereinafter referred to as "payout control built-in RAM"), the payout control MPU4120a is used to prevent fraud. It also has built-in functions.

The payout control MPU 4120a receives various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 4100 and various commands related to the payout in a serial manner via the payout control I / O port 4120b, or clears the RAM from the main control board 4100. The operation signal (detection signal) of the switch 4100e may be input via the payout control I / O port 4120b.

A ball-out switch 750 that detects the presence or absence of a game ball in the supply passage 741a formed in the base unit 741 of the prize ball device 740 and a ball-out switch 750 formed in the base unit 741 flow down in the prize ball passage 741c shown in FIG. The detection signal from the counting switch 751 for detecting the game ball to be played is first input to the payout control input circuit 4120e via the board 754 in the prize ball case of the prize ball device 740, and is paid out via the payout control I / O port 4120b. It is input to the control MPU 4120a. The detection signals from the rotation angle switch 752 for detecting the detection slit 749a formed in the rotation detection board 749 of the prize ball device 740 are first the rotation angle switch board 753 of the prize ball device 740 and then the board 754 in the prize ball case. It is input to the payout control input circuit 4120e via the payout control I / O port 4120b, and is input to the payout control MPU 4120a via the payout control I / O port 4120b.

Further, the detection signals from the door frame opening switch 618 for detecting the opening of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 and the main body frame opening switch 619 for detecting the opening of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 are first generated by the payout control input circuit 4120e. Is input to the payout control MPU 4120a via the payout control I / O port 4120b.

Further, the detection signal from the full tank switch 550 that detects whether or not the accommodation space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 shown in FIG. 48 is full in the stored game ball is first of the handle relay terminal board 192 and then. It is input to the payout control input circuit 4120e via the main door relay terminal plate 880, and is input to the payout control MPU 4120a via the payout control I / O port 4120b.

The payout control MPU4120a outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 744 to the payout motor 744 via the payout control I / O 4120b and the board 754 in the prize ball case, and outputs the status of the pachinko game machine 1 to the error LED. A signal for displaying on the display 860c is output to the error LED display 860c via the payout control I / O port 4120b, and a command for indicating the status of the pachinko game machine 1 is issued to the payout control I / O port. It is serially transmitted to the main control board 4100 via the 4120b, or the number of game balls actually paid out is output to the external terminal board 784 via the payout control I / O port 4120b. The external terminal plate 784 is electrically connected to a hall computer installed in the amusement park (hall). This hall computer monitors the player's game by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko game machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko game machine 1.

The error LED display 860c is a segment display, and displays alphanumeric characters, figures, and the like to display the status of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display 860c are as follows. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it is notified that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it means that it is "connection abnormality" (specifically, with the main control board 4100). Notifies that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the payout control board 4110 and the board, and when the number "1" is displayed, it means that the ball is out (specifically, the ball is out). Based on the detection signal from the switch 750, it notifies that there is no game ball in the supply passage 741a formed in the base unit 741 of the prize ball device 740), and when the number "2" is displayed, "ball is seen". (Specifically, the payout rotating body 748 at the entrance of the distribution space 741b communicating with the supply passage 741a formed in the base unit 741 of the prize ball device 740 based on the detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752. And the game ball are engaged near the entrance to notify that the payout rotating body 748 is difficult to rotate), and when the number "3" is displayed, it means that it is a "counting switch error" (specifically). Notifies that the counting switch 751 has a problem based on the detection signal from the counting switch 751), and when the number "5" is displayed, it means that it is a "retry error" (specifically, Notifies that the number of retries of the payout operation has reached the preset upper limit value), and when the number "6" is displayed, it means that the tank is "full" (specifically, from the full tank switch 550). Based on the detection signal, the accommodation space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is notified that the stored game ball is full), and when the number "7" is displayed, it means that "CR is not connected" (payout). Notifies that the electrical connection is disconnected in any of the control boards 4110 to the CR unit 6), and when the number "9" is displayed, it means that the product is in stock (specifically, in stock). , The number of game balls that have not been paid out has reached a predetermined number).

The ball lending request signal for the game ball from the ball lending switch 365a and the return request signal for the prepaid card from the return switch 365b are, first, the frequency display board 365, the main door relay terminal board 880, and the game ball lending device connection terminal board. It is designed to be input to the CR unit 6 via 869. The CR unit 6 serially transmits a signal specifying the number of game balls to be rented according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 4110 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, and this signal is the CR unit. It is received by the payout control I / O port 4120b via the input / output circuit 4120f and input to the payout control MPU 4120a. Further, the CR unit 6 updates the remaining amount of the inserted prepaid card according to the number of rented game balls, and rents out a signal for displaying the remaining amount on the remaining amount display 365c. It is output to the device connection terminal board 869, the main door relay terminal board 880, and the frequency display board 365, and this signal is input to the residual frequency display 365c.

[6--2-2. Launch control unit]
As shown in FIG. 98, the launch control unit 4130 that performs launch control by the launch solenoid 654 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 585 is a launch control input circuit in which detection signals from various detection switches related to launch are input. 4130a, a transmission circuit 4130b that outputs a clock signal at regular time intervals, a launch timing control circuit 4130c that outputs a launch reference pulse for launching a game ball toward the game area 1100 based on this clock signal, and this launch. It includes a firing solenoid drive circuit 4130d that outputs a drive signal to the firing solenoid 654 based on the reference pulse, and a ball feeding solenoid drive circuit 4130e that outputs a driving signal to the ball feeding solenoid 585 based on the firing reference pulse. The firing timing control circuit 4130c generates a firing reference pulse so that 100 game balls are launched toward the game area 1100 per minute based on the clock signal from the transmitting circuit 4130b, and outputs the firing reference pulse to the firing solenoid drive circuit 4130d. At the same time, a ball feed reference pulse obtained by multiplying the launch reference pulse by a predetermined number is generated and output to the ball feed solenoid drive circuit 4130e.

From the touch switch 516 that detects whether or not the palm or finger is touching the front 506 of the rotary handle body, and the launch stop switch 518 that detects whether or not the launch of the game ball is forcibly stopped by the player's will. The detection signal is first input to the launch control input circuit 4130a via the handle relay terminal plate 192 and the main door relay terminal plate 880, and is input to the launch timing control circuit 4130c. Further, when the CR unit 6 and the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 are electrically connected, they are input as a CR connection signal to the launch control input circuit 4130a and input to the launch timing control circuit 4130c. There is. The signal from the potentiometer 512 that electrically adjusts the strength of launching the game ball toward the game area 1100 according to the rotation position of the rotary handle main body front 506 is first the handle relay terminal plate 192 and then the main door relay terminal plate 880. It is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit 4130d via.

Based on the signal from the potentiometer 512, the launch solenoid drive circuit 4130d uses the launch reference pulse to generate a drive current for launching the game ball toward the game region 1100 with a launch strength commensurate with the rotation position of the rotation handle main body front 506. When it is input, it is output to the firing solenoid 654. On the other hand, the ball feed solenoid drive circuit 4130e applies a constant current to the ball feed solenoid 585 via the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the handle relay terminal plate 192 when the ball feed reference pulse is input. By outputting, the ball feeding member 584 of the ball feeding unit 580 receives one game ball stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300, and when the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed, the constant current is generated. By stopping the output of the ball feeding member 584, the game ball received by the ball feeding member 584 is sent to the hitting ball launching device 650 side. In this way, the drive current output from the launch solenoid drive circuit 4130d to the launch solenoid 654 is variably controlled, whereas the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit 4130e to the ball feed solenoid 585 is constant. It is controlled.

The power supply board 851 that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 4110 includes a capacitor BC1 (see FIG. 102) as a backup power source for supplying power to the payout control board 4110 for a predetermined time even when the power supply is cut off. .. By the capacitor BC1, the payout control MPU4120a can store various information in the payout control built-in RAM in the power off processing even when the power is cut off. When the RAM clear switch 4100e of the main control board 4100 is operated at the time of turning on the power, the various stored information is completely erased (cleared) from the payout control built-in RAM.

[6-2-3. Exchange of various signals with the terminal board for renting game balls, etc.]
Here, the exchange of various signals between the payout control unit 4120 and the CR unit 6 and the exchange of various signals between the CR unit 6 and the frequency display board 365 will be described with reference to FIG. 99. As shown in FIG. 99, the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 relays the electrical connection between the CR unit 6 and the payout control board 4110, and also includes the CR unit 6 and the frequency display board 365. It also relays the electrical connection between the boards. Between the payout control board 4110 and the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869, between the CR unit 6 and the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869, and between the frequency display board 365 and the game ball rental device connection terminal. The boards with the board 869 are electrically connected by each wiring (harness). Further, AC24V described later from the power supply board 851 is supplied to the CR unit 6 via a game ball or the like rental device connection terminal plate 869. The CR unit 6 creates a predetermined voltage VL (in this embodiment, DC + 12V (hereinafter referred to as “+ 12V”)) from the supplied AC24V by a built-in voltage creation circuit (not shown), and together with the ground LG. , The game ball and the like are supplied to the payout control board 4110 and the frequency display board 365 via the terminal board 869 for the rental device.

On the component surface of the frequency display board 365, a ball rental switch 365a, which is a push button switch, is mounted at a position corresponding to the ball rental button 361 of the ball rental unit 360 shown in FIG. 17, and the ball rental unit 360 is returned. A return switch 365b, which is a push button switch, is mounted at a position corresponding to the button 362, and a residual frequency indicator 365c, which is a segment display, is mounted at a position corresponding to the rental balance display unit 363 of the ball rental unit 360.

In the ball rental switch 365a and the return switch 365b, the ground LG from the CR unit 6 is electrically connected via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869. When the ball lending button 361 is pressed, the ball lending switch 365a is switched on (ON), and this ball lending operation signal TDS is input to the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. It has become so. When the return button 362 is pressed, the return switch 365b is switched on (ON) so that the return operation signal RES is input to the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869. It has become.

The residual frequency indicator 365c has three segment indicators arranged side by side in a row, and three digits are driven by a so-called dynamic lighting method in which one digit segment indicator is sequentially driven among these three digit segment indicators. The segment display of is controlled to be lit. By such lighting control, the remaining frequency display 365c displays the remaining amount of the prepaid card inserted in the CR unit 6 and displays the error of the CR unit 6. The residual frequency indicator 365c is a digit signal DG0 to DG2 (three signals in total) for designating a one-digit segment indicator among the three-digit segment indicators, and the designated one-digit segment indicator. Segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G (7 signals in total) for designating the contents to be turned on and displayed are input from the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869. Then, the 1-digit segment display is sequentially emitted according to the input digit signals DG0 to DG2 and the segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G, and the contents of the light emission of these 3-digit segment indicators are left unrented. It can be visually recognized through the display unit 363. A CR unit lamp 365d is mounted on the frequency display board 365 adjacent to the residual frequency display 365c. In this CR unit lamp 365d, a predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is input via a game ball or the like rental device connection terminal plate 869. The predetermined voltage VL is input to the CR unit 6 as a ball lending signal TDL through a current limiting resistor mounted on the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 via the CR unit lamp 365d. When the CR unit 6 creates a predetermined voltage VL from AC24V supplied from the power supply board 851 by the built-in voltage creation circuit, and the ball lending switch 365a and the return switch 365b are in a valid ball lending state. Controls the logic of the ball lending signal TDL to cause the CR unit lamp 365d to emit light, and this light emission can be visually recognized through the loan remaining display unit 363. Further, the segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G are input to the residual power display 365c through the current limiting resistor mounted on the game ball or the like rental device connection terminal plate 869.

When the ball lending operation signal TDS is input from the frequency display board 365 via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869 when the ball lending button 361 is pressed, the CR unit 6 outputs a ball lending request signal BRDY. , The game ball or the like is output to the payout control board 4110 (payout control MPU4120a) via the terminal board 869 for the rental device. Then, the CR unit 6 is a one-time payout operation start request signal for paying out a predetermined number of loaned balls (in this embodiment, 25 balls, which corresponds to an amount of 100 yen) in one payout operation. The BRQ is output to the payout control board 4110 (payout control MPU 4120a) via the game ball or the like rental device connection terminal board 869. The payout control board 4110 (payout control MPU4120a) into which BRDY and BRQ are input sends an EXS, which is a signal for notifying that one payout operation has started or ended, to a game ball or the like rental device connection terminal board 869. PRDY, which is a signal for outputting to the CR unit 6 or for notifying that the payout operation for paying out the ball rental is possible or impossible, is transmitted to the game ball rental device connection terminal board. It is output to the CR unit 6 via 869. For example, if the hall clerk or the like presets the CR unit 6 so that 200 yen worth of game balls are paid out when the ball rental button 361 is pressed, one payout operation is performed. Is to be performed twice in a row, and if 25 balls for 100 yen are paid out, 25 balls for 100 yen will be paid out in succession, and 50 balls for a total of 200 yen will be paid out. Become.

When the return button 362 is pressed and the return operation signal RES is input from the frequency display board 365 via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869, the CR unit 6 ejects the prepaid card from an insertion slot (not shown). Is supposed to be returned. The returned prepaid card stores the remaining amount obtained by subtracting the amount corresponding to the number of game balls paid out as a result of pressing the ball lending button 361.

[6-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 100, the peripheral control board 4140 includes a peripheral control unit 4150 that performs effect control based on various commands from the main control board 4100, drawing control of the liquid crystal display device 1900, and a speaker 821 provided on the main body frame 3. And the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 that controls the sound of music and sound effects flowing from the speakers 130, 222, 262 provided on the door frame 5, calendar information that specifies the date, and time that specifies the hour, minute, and second. Music and sound effects played from a real-time clock (hereinafter referred to as "RTC") control unit 4165 that holds information, speakers 821 provided in the main body frame 3, and speakers 130, 222, 262 provided in the door frame 5. It is provided with a volume adjusting volume 4140a that adjusts the volume of the above by rotating the knob portion.

[6-3-1. Peripheral control unit]
As shown in FIG. 99, the peripheral control unit 4150 that performs the effect control includes a peripheral control MPU 4150a as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM 4150b that stores various control programs, various data, various control data, and various schedule data, which will be described later. Defines various information (for example, a screen to be drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900) that is executed every time a V blank signal is input from the VDP4160a with a built-in sound source of the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160. Peripheral control RAM 4150c that stores schedule data to be executed, information for managing schedule data that defines the light emission mode of various LEDs, etc., and various information that is continued over days (for example, a jackpot game state has occurred). Peripheral control SRAM 4150d that stores information for managing history, information for managing special effect flags, etc.) and peripheral control external watch dock for monitoring whether peripheral control MPU4150a is operating normally. It includes a timer 4150e (hereinafter, referred to as "peripheral control external WDT4150e"). The peripheral control RAM 4150c can hold the stored contents only for a time when a momentary power failure occurs and the power is immediately restored, and the power is cut off for a long time (when a long-time power interruption occurs). ), The peripheral control SRAM 4150d is supplied with backup power by a large-capacity electrolytic capacitor (hereinafter, referred to as "electrolytic capacitor for SRAM") provided on the power supply board 851. As a result, the stored contents can be retained for about 50 hours. Since the power supply board 851 is provided with the electrolytic capacitor for SRAM, when the game board 4 is removed from the pachinko gaming machine 1, backup power is not supplied to the peripheral control SRAM 4150d. Therefore, the peripheral control SRAM 4150d has stored contents. Can no longer hold and lose its contents. The peripheral control external WDT4150e is a timer for monitoring whether the system of the peripheral control MPU4150a is out of control, and when the timer is up, it is reset by hardware. That is, if the peripheral control MPU4150a does not output a clear signal for clearing the timer of the peripheral control external WDT4150e to the peripheral control external WDT4150e within a certain period of time (until the timer starts up), the peripheral control MPU4150a is reset. When the peripheral control MPU4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT4150e within a certain period of time, the timer count of the peripheral control external WDT4150e can be restarted, so that the reset is not applied.

The peripheral control MPU 4150a has a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, etc. built-in, and when various commands from the main control board 4100 are received, each decorative board of the game board 4 is based on these various commands. The game board side light emission data for outputting the lighting signal, blinking signal, or gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided in the lamp drive board is transmitted from the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board to the lamp drive board 4170, or the game is played. The game board side motor drive data for outputting drive signals to electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids that operate various movable bodies provided on the board 4 is transmitted from the serial I / O port for the motor drive board to the motor drive board 4180. The door side motor drive data for transmitting to the door frame 5 or outputting the drive signal to the electric drive source such as the dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 5 is transmitted from the frame decorative drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port to the frame. It is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, or a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a floor of a plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative board of the door frame 5. Door-side light emission data for outputting the tuning signal is transmitted from the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. Send it.

Various commands from the main control board 4100 are input to the main control board serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 4150a. Further, the detection signals from the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b for detecting the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 provided in the operation unit 400 and the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 shown in FIG. 43 are performed. The detection signal from the press detection switch 432c for detection is serialized by a door-side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and the serialized operation unit detection data is serialized by the door-side serial transmission circuit. Is input to the operation unit detection serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 4150a via the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868.

Detection signals from various detection switches for detecting the original position, movable position, etc. of various movable bodies provided on the game board 4 are serialized by a game board side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180. This serialized movable body detection data is input from the game board side serial transmission circuit to the serial I / O port for the motor drive board of the peripheral control MPU4150a. The peripheral control MPU 4150a is adapted to exchange various data between the peripheral control board 4140 and the motor drive board 4180 by switching the input / output of the serial I / O port for the motor drive board.

The peripheral control MPU4150a has a built-in watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as "peripheral control built-in WDT"), and its own system runs out of control by using the peripheral control built-in WDT and the peripheral control external WDT4150e together. I am diagnosing whether or not it is.

[6-3-1a. Peripheral control MPU]
Next, the peripheral control MPU4150a, which is a microcomputer, will be described. As shown in FIG. 101, the peripheral control MPU 4150a is centered on the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa, has a peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab, a peripheral control DMA (abbreviation of Direct Memory Access) controller 4150ac, a peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and various peripheral control serial I. It is composed of a / O port 4150ae, a WDT4150af with built-in peripheral control, various parallel I / O ports for peripheral control 4150ag, a peripheral control analog / digital converter (hereinafter referred to as a peripheral control A / D converter) 4150ak, and the like.

Peripheral control CPU core 4150aa reads and writes various data to peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab and peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac via internal bus 4150ah, while peripheral control various serial I / O ports 4150ae, peripheral control built-in WDT4150af, Peripheral control Various data are read and written to the various parallel I / O ports 4150ag and the peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak via the internal bus 4150ah, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai.

Further, the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa reads various data to the peripheral control ROM 4150b via the internal bus 4150ah, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the external bus 4150h, while reading the peripheral control RAM 4150c and the peripheral control SRAM 4150d. , The internal bus 4150ah, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the external bus 4150h are used to read and write various data.

The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac includes storage devices such as peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab, peripheral control ROM 4150b, peripheral control RAM 4150c, and peripheral control SRAM 4150d, peripheral control various serial I / O ports 4150ae, peripheral control built-in WDT4150af, and peripheral control parallel I. It is a dedicated controller that independently transfers data between the / O port 4150ag and the input / output device such as the peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak without going through the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa, and is DMA0. It has four channels, ~ DMA3.

Specifically, the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac includes a storage device of the peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab built in the peripheral control MPU 4150a, various peripheral control serial I / O ports 4150ae built in the peripheral control MPU 4150a, and a peripheral control built-in WDT4150af. , Peripheral control Various parallel I / O ports 4150ag, and input / output devices such as peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak, to perform data transfer independently without going through the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa. In addition, while reading and writing to the storage device of the RAM 4150ab with built-in peripheral control via the internal bus 4150ah, various serial I / O ports 4150ae with peripheral control, WDT4150af with built-in peripheral control, parallel I / O ports 4150ag with peripheral control, and Reads and outputs to / from an input / output device such as a peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak via the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad and the peripheral bus 4150ai.

The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac includes a storage device such as a peripheral control ROM 4150b, a peripheral control RAM 4150c, and a peripheral control SRAM 4150d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a, and various peripheral control serial I / Os built in the peripheral control MPU 4150a. Independent between devices such as port 4150ae, WDT4150af with built-in peripheral control, various parallel I / O ports for peripheral control, and input / output devices such as peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak, without going through the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa. In order to transfer data, the peripheral control ROM 4150b, the peripheral control RAM 4150c, the peripheral control SRAM 4150d, and other storage devices are read and output via the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad and the external bus 4150h, while various peripheral control serials are used. I / O port 4150ae, WDT4150af with built-in peripheral control, various parallel I / O ports for peripheral control 4150ag, and input / output devices such as peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak via peripheral control bus controller 4150ad and peripheral bus 4150ai. , Read and write.

The peripheral control bus controller 4150ad controls the internal bus 4150ah, the peripheral bus 4150ai, and the external bus 4150h to control the central processing unit of the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa, the peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab, the peripheral control ROM 4150b, the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and the peripheral control. Various devices such as a storage device such as SRAM 4150d, various peripheral control serial I / O ports 4150ae, WDT4150af with built-in peripheral control, various parallel I / O ports 4150ag for peripheral control, and input / output devices such as peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak. It is a dedicated controller that exchanges various data between them.

Peripheral control Various serial I / O ports 4150ae are serial I / O ports for lamp drive boards, serial I / O ports for motor drive boards, serial I / O ports for frame decoration drive amplifier boards, and frame decoration drive amplifier board LEDs. It has a serial I / O port for, a serial I / O port for a frame decoration drive amplifier board motor, a serial I / O port for a main control board, and a serial I / O port for acquiring operation unit information.

The peripheral control built-in watchdog timer (WDT with built-in peripheral control) 4150af is a timer for monitoring whether the system of the peripheral control MPU 4150a is out of control, and when this timer is up, it resets in hardware. It has become. That is, the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa is reset when the watch dock timer is started and the clear signal for clearing the timer is not output to the peripheral control built-in WDT4150af within a certain period (until the timer is up). Will be required. When the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa starts the watch dock timer and outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT4150af within a certain period of time, the timer count can be restarted, so that the reset is not applied.

Peripheral control Various parallel I / O ports 4150ag output various latch signals such as game board side motor drive latch signal and door side motor drive light emission latch signal, as well as output clear signal to peripheral control external WDT4150e, and play games. Detection signals from various detection switches for detecting the original position, movable position, etc. of various movable bodies provided on the board 4 are serialized by a game board side serial transmission circuit provided on the motor drive board 4180, and this serialization is performed. The movable body information acquisition latch signal for receiving the converted movable body detection data from the game board side serial transmission circuit at the serial I / O port for the motor drive board of the peripheral control MPU4150a can be output, or the upper decoration on the door frame 5 can be output. It outputs a lighting signal of the LED 286b mounted on the upper decorative board 286 of the unit 280. As described above, the LED 286b is a high-brightness white LED, and is a confirmation lamp for notifying that the occurrence of the big hit game state is confirmed. In the present embodiment, the path between the LED 286b and the peripheral control parallel I / O ports 4150ag is shortened by adopting a configuration in which the LED 286b and the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150ag are directly connected electrically. It is possible to take noise countermeasures for the lighting control of the LED 286b, which has a heavy game meaning. The lighting control of the LED 286b is executed in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing described later, and the other LEDs and the like other than the LED 286b are executed in the peripheral control unit steady processing described later. It has become.

The peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak is electrically connected to the volume adjustment volume 4140a, and the resistance value is changed by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a, and the resistance at the rotation position of the knob portion is changed. The voltage divided by the value is converted from an analog value to a digital value and converted into a value in 1024 steps from a value to a value of 1023. In the present embodiment, the value of 1024 steps is divided into seven and managed as the substrate volumes 0 to 6. The board volume 0 is set to mute, the board volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the volume is set to increase from the board volume 0 to the board volume 6. Speakers 821 provided in the main body frame 3 and speakers 130 and 222 provided in the door frame 5 by controlling the liquid crystal and the sound control unit 4160 (VDP4160a with a built-in sound source described later) so as to have the volume set in the board volumes 0 to 6. , 262 to play music and sound effects. In this way, music and sound effects are played from the speakers 821 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, 262 provided in the door frame 5 by adjusting the volume based on the rotation operation of the knob portion. In the present embodiment, in addition to music and sound effects, a notification sound for notifying the clerk of the hall of a malfunction of the pachinko game machine 1 or an illegal act against the pachinko game machine 1, contents related to the game production, etc. (For example, the screen unfolded on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is produced as more powerful, or the player is likely to shift to a favorable gaming state, etc.). Sound also flows from the speakers 821 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, 262 provided in the door frame 5, but the notification sound and the notification sound are completely independent of the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the knob portion. It has a flowing mechanism, and the volume from mute to maximum volume can be adjusted by controlling the liquid crystal and the sound control unit 4160 (VDP4160a with built-in sound source described later) by a program. The volume adjusted by this program is different from the substrate volume divided into the above-mentioned seven stages, and can smoothly change from mute to maximum volume. As a result, for example, even when a hall clerk or the like rotates the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a to set the volume low, the speaker 821 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5 are provided. Although the production sounds such as music and sound effects flowing from 130, 222, 262 are reduced, the volume is loud when the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a problem or when the player is cheating (in this embodiment). , Maximum volume) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk and the like from becoming less likely to notice the occurrence of a problem or the cheating of the player due to the notification sound. In addition, based on the current board volume set by adjusting the volume based on the rotation operation of the knob, the volume at which the advertisement sound is played is reduced so as not to interfere with music and sound effects, while the advertisement sound is played. Announcement that there is a high possibility that the screen unfolded by the liquid crystal display device 1900 will be produced as more powerful in addition to music and sound effects by increasing the volume of the sound, or that the game state will be favorable to the player. You can also do it.

[6-3-1b. Peripheral control ROM]
The peripheral control ROM 4150b stores in advance various control programs, various data, various control data, and various schedule data for controlling the peripheral control unit 4150, the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160, the RTC control unit 4165, and the like. The various schedule data include screen generation schedule data for generating a screen to be drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900, light emission mode generation schedule data for generating light emission modes of various LEDs, and sound generation schedule for generating music, sound effects, and the like. There are data, electrical drive source schedule data, etc. that generate drive modes of electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids. The screen generation schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the screen configuration in time series, and defines the order of the screens to be drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900. The light emission mode generation schedule data is configured by arranging light emission data defining the light emission modes of various LEDs in a time series. The sound generation schedule data is composed of sound command data arranged in chronological order, and the order in which music and sound effects are played is defined. The sound command data includes an output channel number for instructing which output channel to use among a plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the sound source built-in VDP4160a of the liquid crystal and the sound control unit 4160 described later, and the sound source built-in VDP4160a. Of the plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the above, a track number for instructing which track to incorporate sound data such as music and sound effects is specified. The electric drive source schedule data is composed of drive data of electric drive sources such as a motor and a solenoid arranged in chronological order, and the operation of the electric drive source such as a motor and a solenoid is specified.

Some of the control programs stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b are directly read from the peripheral control ROM 4150b and executed, and some are executed when the power is turned on in the various control program copy areas 4150cd of the peripheral control RAM 4150c described later. In some cases, the copied one is read and executed. Further, various data, various control data, and various schedule data stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b may be read directly from the peripheral control ROM 4150b, or when the power is turned on to the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c described later. In some cases, the copied data is read out.

Further, the peripheral control ROM 4150b includes a brightness correction program for correcting the brightness of the liquid crystal display device 1900 according to the usage time of the liquid crystal display device 1900 as one of various control programs for controlling the RTC control unit 4165. ing. This brightness correction program corrects the decrease in brightness due to aging of the liquid crystal display device 1900 when the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is an LED type, and is described later in the RTC control unit. The date and time when the liquid crystal display device 1900 is first turned on, the current date and time, the brightness setting information, and the like are acquired from the built-in RAM of the 4165, and the acquired brightness setting information is corrected based on the correction information. This correction information is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 4150b. As will be described later, the brightness setting information is currently set as brightness adjustment information for adjusting the brightness of the LED that is the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in 5% increments in a range from 100% to 70%. The brightness of the LED that is the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is included. For example, the liquid crystal display device 1900 is first used from the date and time when the power of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is first turned on and the current date and time. If six months have already passed since the power was turned on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 4150b, and the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75%. When the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on, the brightness is 80%, which is the correction information acquired for 75%, which is further added by 5%, based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information. If 12 months have already passed since the date and time when the power of the liquid crystal display device 1900 was first turned on by adjusting the brightness of the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900, the peripheral control ROM 4150b provides the corresponding correction information ( For example, when 10%) is acquired and the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on when the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75%, only 10%, which is the correction information acquired for this 75%, is obtained. The brightness of the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is adjusted and turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the added brightness is 85%.

[6-3-1c. Peripheral control RAM]
The peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a includes a backup management target work area 4150ca that exclusively stores the data to be backed up among various information updated by executing various control programs. The backup first area 4150cc and the backup second area 4150cc, which exclusively store the copied data stored in the backup management target work area 4150ca, and the various control programs stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b are copied. Various control program copy area 4150cd that exclusively stores the data, and various control data that stores various data, various control data, various schedule data, etc. stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b exclusively. A copy area 4150ce and a backup unmanaged work area 4150cf that exclusively stores information that is not a backup target among various information updated by executing various control programs are provided. When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on (including when the power is restored due to a momentary power failure or power failure), a value 0 is forcibly written to the backup unmanaged work area 4150 cf and cleared to zero. For the backup management target work area 4150ca, backup first area 4150cc, and backup second area 4150cc, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the power on command (see FIG. 118) from the main control board 4100 starts the RAM clear effect. When the start of each state effect is instructed (for example, the start of the effect when the RAM clear switch 4100e shown in FIG. 97 is operated) is instructed, the state is cleared to zero.

The backup management target work area 4150ca is various information updated in the peripheral control unit steady processing executed every time a V blank signal is input from the sound source built-in VDP 4160a of the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160, which will be described later. Bank0 (1fr) that exclusively stores 1fr) as a backup target, and effect information (1ms) that is various information updated in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing that is executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt, which will be described later, occurs. It is composed of Bank0 (1ms), which is exclusively stored as a backup target. Here, to briefly explain the names of Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1ms), "Bank" is a minimum management unit representing the size of a storage area for storing various information, and is referred to as "Bank". The following "0" means that it is a normally used storage area for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. That is, "Bank 0" means that the size of the storage area normally used is set as the minimum management unit. The "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3", and "Bank4" provided in the area extending from the backup first area 4150 cc to the backup second area 4150 cc, which will be described later, are the same storage areas as the "Bank0". It means that it has a size. As will be described later, "(1fr)" means that when the VDP4160a with built-in sound source outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) to the liquid crystal display device 1900, the screen data from the peripheral control MPU4150a can be accepted. Since a V-blank signal to convey the fact is output to the peripheral control MPU4150a, the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed every time the V-blank signal is input, in other words, every frame (1 frame). Therefore, it is added to "Bank0", "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3", and "Bank4", respectively (the same meaning also applies to the production information (1fr) and the production backup information (1fr) described later). As described later, "(1ms)" means "Bank0", "Bank1", "Bank2", and "Bank0", "Bank1", and "Bank2" because the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs. It is added to "Bank3" and "Bank4", respectively (the effect information (1 ms) and the effect backup information (1 ms) described later are also used with the same meaning).

Bank0 (1fr) includes a lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa, a frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab, a reception command storage area 4150cac, an RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad, and a schedule data storage area 4150cae. Etc. are provided. The game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative board of the game board 4 in the transmission data storage area 4150ca on the lamp drive board side. Is a storage area in which is set, and in the transmission data storage area 4150cab for the LED on the frame decoration drive amplifier board side, a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting for a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the door frame 5 is lit. It is a storage area in which the door-side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a signal is set, and in the reception command storage area 4150cc, various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 are received and the received various commands are stored. It is a storage area to be set, and various information acquired from the RTC control unit 4165 (RTC built-in RAM4165aa of RTC41654a described later) is set in the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad, and is set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae. Is a storage area in which various schedule data corresponding to the received command are set based on the command received from the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a). In the schedule data storage area 4150cae, various schedule data copied from the peripheral control ROM 4150b to the various control data copy areas 4150ce are read and set, and various schedule data are directly read from the peripheral control ROM 4150b. Some are set.

Bank 0 (1 ms) is provided with a frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150 caf, a motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150 cag, a movable body information acquisition storage area 4150 cah, an operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150 cai, and the like. Has been done. In the transmission data storage area 4150 caf for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as the dial drive motor 414 provided in the door frame 5 is provided. It is a storage area to be set, and is for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid for operating various movable bodies provided on the game board 4 in the transmission data storage area 4150 cg on the motor drive board side. It is a storage area in which the motor drive data SM-DAT on the game board side is set, and the movable body information acquisition storage area 4150cah is provided in the game board 4 based on the detection signals from various detection switches provided in the game board 4. It is a storage area in which various information acquired by acquiring the original position and movable position of various movable bodies is set, and the operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150 kai is based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the operation unit 400. Dial operation unit 401 created based on various information acquired from the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 and the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 (for example, detection signals from various detection switches provided in the operation unit 400). (Rotation direction) history information, operation history information of the pressing operation unit 405, etc.) is set in this storage area.

Bank0 (1fr) lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa, frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab, and Bank0 (1ms) frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf. The transmission data storage area 4150 cg on the motor drive board side is divided into two areas, a first area and a second area, respectively.

In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa, when the peripheral control unit steady processing described later is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa. When the next peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa, and the peripheral control unit steady processing. Each time the process is executed, the game board side light emitting data SL-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa. Peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. For example, when the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150ca in the current peripheral control unit steady processing, the previous peripheral When the control unit steady processing is executed, the processing proceeds based on the game board side light emission data SL-DAT set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa.

When the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab is placed in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab. When -DAT is set and the next peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the transmission data storage area 4150cab for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED. The door side emission data STL-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the transmission data storage area 4150cab for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED every time the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. To. Peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. For example, when the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab in the peripheral control unit steady processing this time, When the previous peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, the processing proceeds based on the door side light emission data STL-DAT set in the first area of the transmission data storage area 4150cab for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED. It has become.

The frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150 caf is opened to the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150 caf when the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing described later is executed. When the side motor drive data STM-DAT is set and the next peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the door side motor drive data STM is stored in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150 caf. -DAT is set, and each time the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed, the door side is in the first and second areas of the transmission data storage area 4150 caf for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor. The motor drive data STM-DAT is set alternately. Peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed. For example, in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing this time, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT is stored in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150 caf. When set, the door-side motor drive data STM-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side motor transmission data storage area 4150 caf when the previous peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process was executed. The process is to proceed based on this.

In the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150 cag, when the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150 cag. Then, when the next peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150 cag. Every time the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150 cag. Peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed. For example, in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing this time, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150 cag. Occasionally, when the previous peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the process proceeds based on the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT set in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150 cg. It has become like.

Next, the backup first area 4150 cc and the backup second area 4150 cc, which exclusively store a copy of the effect information which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 4150ca, will be described. In the backup first area 4150cc and the backup second area 4150cc, two pairs with two banks as one pair are managed as one page. The effect information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a normally used storage area, is used as the effect backup information (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1frame). The effect information (1 ms) is copied to the backup first area 4150 cc and the backup second area 4150 cc by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac at high speed, and is stored in the normally used storage area Bank0 (1 ms). Is used as the effect backup information (1 ms) by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac in the backup first area 4150 cc and the backup second area 4150 cc each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt is generated. It is copied at high speed. The consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of the two banks constituting the page match.

Specifically, in the backup first area 4150cc, Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) are set as one pair, and Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) are set as one pair, for a total of two pairs managed as one page. ing. The content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a normally used storage area, is stored in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed every frame (1frame). The memory that is copied at high speed by the controller 4150ac and stored in Bank0 (1ms), which is a normally used storage area, is stored every time a 1ms timer interrupt is generated and every time the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed. It is copied to Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) match. This is performed depending on whether or not the contents of Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (1 ms) match.

Further, in the backup second area 4150cc, Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) are set as one pair, and Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) are set as one pair, so that a total of two pairs are managed as one page. The content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a normally used storage area, is stored in Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed every frame (1frame). The memory that is copied at high speed by the controller 4150ac and stored in Bank0 (1ms), which is a normally used storage area, is stored every time a 1ms timer interrupt is generated and every time the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed. It is copied to Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) match. This is performed depending on whether or not the contents of Bank 3 (1 ms) and Bank 4 (1 ms) match.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the backup first area 4150 kb has Bank 1 (1 fr) and Bank 2 (1 fr) as one pair, and Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (1 ms) as one pair, for a total of two pairs. It is an area for managing as a page, and the backup second area 4150cc has a total of two pairs, one pair of Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) and one pair of Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms). This is an area for managing as one page. Different ID coats are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the backup first area 4150cc and the backup second area 4150cc.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a normally used storage area, is used as the effect backup information (1fr) in the peripheral control unit for each frame (1 frame). Each time a steady process is executed, the contents are copied to the backup first area 4150 cc and the backup second area 4150 cc at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and are stored in Bank0 (1 ms), which is a normally used storage area. The effect information (1 ms) is the effect backup information (1 ms), and each time a 1 ms timer interrupt is generated and each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the backup first area 4150 cc and the backup second area 4150 cc The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac makes a high-speed copy, but the programs that execute the high-speed copy by these peripheral control DMA controllers 4150ac are standardized. That is, in the present embodiment, the effect information (1fr) and the effect information (1 ms) are managed by a common management method (execution of a common program).

[6-3-1d. Peripheral control SRAM]
The peripheral control SRAM 4150d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a includes a backup management target work area 4150da that exclusively stores the information to be backed up among various information updated by executing various control programs. A backup first area 4150db and a backup second area 4150dc are provided for exclusively storing a copy of various information stored in the backup management target work area 4150da. The contents stored in the peripheral control SRAM 4150d include a power-on command (see FIG. 118) from the main control board 4100 when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on (including when the power is restored due to a momentary power failure or a power failure). Zero clear is also instructed to start the clear effect and to start each state effect (for example, to instruct the start of the effect when the RAM clear switch 4100e shown in FIG. 97 is operated). Not done. This point is completely different from the above-mentioned point that the backup management target work area 4150ca, the backup first area 4150cc, and the backup second area 4150cc of the peripheral control RAM 4150c are cleared to zero. Further, when the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. It has become. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 according to the screen of this setting mode, each content (item) stored in the peripheral control SRAM 4150d (for example, a history of occurrence of a jackpot game state, etc.) On the other hand, the contents (items) stored in the peripheral control RAM 4150c are not displayed at all and cannot be cleared in the setting mode. This point is also completely different between the peripheral control RAM 4150c and the peripheral control SRAM 4150d.

The backup management target work area 4150da is used for managing various information such as effect information (SRAM) (for example, information for managing the history of occurrence of a jackpot game state and special effect flags), which is various information that is continued over days. It is composed of Bank0 (SRAM) that stores information etc.) exclusively for backup. Here, briefly explaining the name of Bank0 (SRAM), as described above, "Bank" is a minimum management unit representing the size of a storage area for storing various information, and is referred to as "Bank". The following "0" means that it is a normally used storage area for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. That is, "Bank 0" means that the size of the storage area normally used is set as the minimum management unit. The "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3", and "Bank4" provided in the area extending from the backup first area 4150db to the backup second area 4150dc, which will be described later, are the same storage areas as the "Bank0". It means that it has a size. Since various information stored in the peripheral control SRAM 4150d externally attached to the peripheral control SRAM 4150a is backed up in "(SRAM)", "Bank0", "Bank1", "Bank2", and "Bank3" , And "Bank4", respectively (the effect information (SRAM) and the effect backup information (SRAM) described later are also used with the same meaning).

Next, the backup first area 4150db and the backup second area 4150dc, which exclusively store a copy of the effect information (RAM), which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 4150da, will be described. The backup first area 4150db and the backup second area 4150dc have two banks as one pair, and this one pair is managed as one page. The effect information (SRAM), which is the content stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a normally used storage area, is used as the effect backup information (SRAM) every time the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). In addition, it is copied to the backup first area 4150db and the backup second area 4150dc at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac. The consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of the two banks constituting the page match.

Specifically, the backup first area 4150db has Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) as one pair, and this one pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a normally used storage area, are stored in Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) every time the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed every frame (1 frame). It is copied at high speed by the controller 4150ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) match.

Further, in the backup second area 4150dc, Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) are set as one pair, and this one pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a normally used storage area, are stored in Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) every time the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed every frame (1 frame). It is copied at high speed by the controller 4150ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) match.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the backup first area 4150db is an area for managing Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) as one pair, and managing this one pair as one page, and the backup second area. 4150dc is an area for managing Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) as one pair, and managing this one pair as one page. Different ID coats are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the backup first area 4150db and the backup second area 4150dc.

[6--3-2. LCD and sound control unit]
The liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 that controls the drawing of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the sound such as music and sound effects flowing from the speakers 821 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, 262 provided in the door frame 5. As shown in FIG. 100, a sound source for controlling sounds such as music and sound effects is built-in (hereinafter, referred to as "built-in sound source"), and a VDP with a built-in sound source that controls drawing of the liquid crystal display device 1900 (hereinafter referred to as "built-in sound source") Video Display Processor (abbreviation) 4160a, liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b that store various sound data such as music and sound effects in addition to various character data of the screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, serialized music and It includes an audio data transmission IC 4160c that transmits sound effects and the like as audio data toward the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194.

The peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 extracts screen generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 4100 from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. The schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c is set to 4150 cae, and the screen data at the beginning of the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150 cae is set to the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or various types of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. After extracting from the control data copy area 4150ce and outputting it to the sound source built-in VDP4160a, when the V blank signal described later is input, the first screen data according to the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae. The next screen data following is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c and output to the sound source built-in VDP4160a. In this way, the peripheral control MPU 4150a displays the screen data arranged in time series in the screen generation schedule data according to the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150 cage, each time a V blank signal is input. The first screen data is output to the built-in sound source VDP4160a one by one.

Further, the peripheral control MPU 4150a extracts the sound command data at the head of the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 4100 from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. Then, the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c is set to 4150 cae, and the sound command data at the beginning of the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150 cae is set to the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or peripheral control. After extracting from various control data copy areas 4150ce of RAM 4150c and outputting to VDP4160a with built-in sound source, when a V blank signal is input, the first sound according to the schedule data for sound generation set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae. The next sound command data following the command data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c and output to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a. In this way, the peripheral control MPU4150a inputs the sound command data arranged in time series into the sound generation schedule data according to the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae, and the V blank signal is input. Each time, the first sound command data is output to the built-in sound source VDP4160a one by one.

[6--3-2a. VDP with built-in sound source]
When screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU4150a, the VDP4160a with built-in sound source extracts character data from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b based on the input screen data to create sprite data. A VRAM for generating drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is also built-in (hereinafter, referred to as "built-in VRAM"). The sound source built-in VDP4160a outputs the drawing data generated on the built-in VRAM to the liquid crystal display device 1900. In this way, when the peripheral control MPU4150a outputs the screen data for one screen (one frame) displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 to the sound source built-in VDP4160a, the sound source built-in VDP4160a is based on the input screen data. Character data is extracted from the sound control ROM 4160b, sprite data is created, drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is generated on the built-in VRAM, and the generated drawing data is displayed on the liquid crystal display. Output to device 1900. That is, the "screen data for one screen (one frame)" is the data for generating the drawing data for one screen (one frame) displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the built-in VRAM. ..

Further, the sound source built-in VDP4160a peripherally controls a V blank signal indicating that when the drawing data for one screen (one frame) is output to the liquid crystal display device 1900, the screen data from the peripheral control MPU4150a can be accepted. Output to MPU4150a. In the present embodiment, since the frame frequency of the liquid crystal display device 1900 (the number of screen updates per second) is set to approximately 30 fps per second, the interval at which the V blank signal is output is approximately 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 1000 ms). 30 fps). The peripheral control MPU4150a is configured to execute the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which will be described later, when the V blank signal is input. Here, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies slightly depending on the size of the liquid crystal of the liquid crystal display device 1900. Further, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may change slightly even in the manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 4140 on which the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the sound source built-in VDP 4160a are mounted.

The sound source built-in VDP4160a employs a frame buffer method. In this "frame buffer method", drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be drawn on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is held in the frame buffer (built-in VRAM) and held in this frame buffer (built-in VRAM). This is a method of outputting drawing data for one screen (one frame) to the liquid crystal display device 1900.

Further, the VDP4160a with a built-in sound source receives sound data such as music and sound effects stored in the liquid crystal and the sound control ROM 4160b when the above-mentioned sound command data is input from the peripheral control MPU4150a based on a command from the main control board 4100. By extracting and controlling the built-in sound source, sound data such as music and sound effects are incorporated into the track according to the track number specified in the sound command data, and the output channel to be used is set according to the output channel number. The music, sound effects, and the like flowing from the speakers 821 provided in the frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, 262 provided in the door frame 5 are serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 4160c. The sound command data also includes a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the track that incorporates the sound data, and multiple tracks in the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP4160a include directing sounds such as music and sound effects. In addition to the sound data of and the sub-volume value that adjusts the volume, the sound data of the notification sound and its volume for notifying the clerk of the hall of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko game machine 1 or an illegal act against the pachinko game machine 1. A subvolume value that adjusts is incorporated. Specifically, for the production sound, the substrate volume adjusted by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a described above is set as the sub-volume value, and for the notification sound, the volume is adjusted. The maximum volume is set as the sub-volume value without being completely dependent on the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the knob portion of the volume 4140a. The sub-volume value of the effect sound is the period during which the jackpot game state described later is generated by operating the dial operation unit 401 of the operation unit 400 shown in FIG. 43 (for example, 1 round to 15 rounds as the jackpot game state). When a total of 15 rounds up to are set, it can be adjusted within the period during which each round from 1 round to 15 rounds is digested). In addition, the sound designation data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of the output channel, and the plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP4160a include a plurality of multiple output channels in the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP4160a. Of the tracks, the sound data of the production sound incorporated in the track to be used and the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the production sound incorporated in the track to be used are combined to obtain the volume of the combined production sound. Actually, the speaker 821 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, 262 provided in the door frame 5 are amplified to the master volume value which is the volume to flow, and the amplified production sound is serialized to be audio data as audio data. It is designed to output to the transmission IC 4160c. In the present embodiment, the master volume value is set to a constant value, and when the volume of the combined effect sound is the maximum volume, the speaker 821 and the speaker 821 provided in the main body frame 3 are amplified to the master volume value. The volume flowing from the speakers 130, 222, 262 provided on the door frame 5 is set to be the maximum allowable volume. Specifically, for the effect sound, as a sub-volume value for adjusting the sound data of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used and the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used among a plurality of tracks. By synthesizing the board volume adjusted by rotating the knob of the set volume adjustment volume 4140a, the volume of the combined production sound is actually set to the speaker 821 and the door provided in the main body frame 3. The speakers 130, 222, 262 provided in the frame 5 are amplified to the master volume value which is the volume to flow, and the amplified production sound is serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 4160c. Volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the knob of the volume adjustment volume 4140a set as the sub-volume value for adjusting the sound data of the notification sound incorporated in the track to be used and the volume of the notification sound incorporated in the track to be used. The maximum volume is combined with the maximum volume, and the volume of the combined notification sound is actually the volume that flows from the speakers 821 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, 262 provided in the door frame 5. The master volume value becomes, and the amplified notification sound is serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 4160c. Here, when the production sound is flowing from the speakers 821 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, 262 provided in the door frame 5, a malfunction occurs in the pachinko game machine 1 or an illegal act against the pachinko game machine 1. To briefly explain the control to play the notification sound in order to notify the clerk of the hall, etc., first, the sub-volume value of the track in which the production sound is incorporated is forcibly set to mute, and the track in which this production sound is incorporated. The sound data of, the sub-volume value set to mute the sound, the sound data of the track in which the notification sound is incorporated, and the sub-volume value in which the volume of the notification sound is set to the maximum volume are combined and combined. The volume of the production sound and the volume of the notification sound are actually amplified to the master volume value which is the volume flowing from the speakers 821 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, 262 provided in the door frame 5, and this amplification is achieved. The produced production sound and notification sound are serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 4160c. That is, as for the sound actually flowing from the speaker 821 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, 262 provided in the door frame 5, only the maximum volume notification sound is played. At this time, since the effect sound is muted, the effect sound does not flow from the speakers 821 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, 262 provided in the door frame 5, but the effect sound is the above-mentioned sound generation schedule data. It is proceeding according to. In the present embodiment, the notification sound flows from the speaker 821 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, 262 provided in the door frame 5 for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds). When the period elapses, the volume of the effect sound that has been progressing according to the sound generation schedule data forcibly set to mute is subordinated to the board volume adjusted by rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 4140a. It is set again as the volume value (at this time, the period during which the jackpot game state is generated by operating the dial operation unit 401 of the operation unit 400 (for example, a total of 15 rounds from 1 round to 15 rounds as the jackpot game state) is set. If it is set, if the sub-volume value of the production sound is adjusted within the period during which each round from 1 round to 15 rounds is digested, the sub-volume value of the adjusted production sound is adjusted. The speaker 821 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, 262 provided in the door frame 5 flow from the speaker (set to). In this way, when the production sound is flowing from the speakers 821 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, 262 provided in the door frame 5, a malfunction occurs in the pachinko game machine 1 or an illegality is made to the pachinko game machine 1. When the notification sound is played to notify the clerk of the hall of the action, the volume of the production sound is muted and the notification sound is emitted from the speakers 821 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, 262 provided in the door frame 5. Although it flows, the muted production sound progresses according to the sound generation schedule data, so that the notification sound has passed a predetermined period of time, and the speaker 821 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5 have passed. When the sound stops flowing from 222 and 262, the production sound does not start flowing again from the place where the notification sound starts to flow, but flows again from the place where the notification sound starts to flow and progresses according to the sound generation schedule data until a predetermined period elapses. I'm getting started.

[6--3-2b. LCD and sound control ROM]
In addition to an extremely large amount of character data, the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b also store various sound data such as music, sound effects, notification sounds, and notification sounds in advance.

[6-3-2c. Audio data transmission IC]
When the serialized audio data from the VDP4160a with a built-in sound source is input, the audio data transmission IC 4160c transmits the right side audio data as positive signal and negative signal to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as differential serial data. At the same time, the left side audio data is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as differential serial data with a positive signal and a negative signal. As a result, music, sound effects, and the like that match various effects can be reproduced in stereo from the speakers 821 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, 262 provided in the door frame 5. The audio data transmission IC 4160c outputs audio data as serial data of the difference method between the left and right sides from the peripheral control board 4140 to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, for example, a positive signal of the left side audio data. Even if the negative signal is affected by noise, when combining the noise component on the positive signal and the noise component on the negative signal on the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 to make one left side audio data, Since the noise components are removed by canceling each other, noise countermeasures can be taken.

[6-3-3. RTC control unit]
As shown in FIG. 100, the RTC control unit 4165 that holds the calendar information that specifies the date and the time information that specifies the hour, minute, and second is configured around the RTC4165a. The RTC4165a has a built-in RAM4165aa that holds calendar information and time information (hereinafter, referred to as "RTC built-in RAM4165aa"). The RTC4165a is supplied with power from a battery 4165b (a button battery is adopted in the present embodiment) as a drive power source and a backup power source for the RTC built-in RAM4165aa. That is, the RTC4165a is not supplied with power from the peripheral control board 4140 (pachinko gaming machine 1) at all, but is supplied with power from the battery 4165b independently of the peripheral control board 4140 (pachinko gaming machine 1). As a result, even if the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off, the RTC4165a can update and hold the calendar information and the time information by the power supply from the battery 4165b.

The peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 acquires calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a, sets them in the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad of the peripheral control RAM 4150c described above, and uses the acquired calendar information and time information as the peripheral control MPU 4150a. The effect based on this can be developed by the liquid crystal display device 1900. As such an effect, for example, on December 25, the screen of the Christmas tree or reindeer is unfolded on the liquid crystal display device 1900, and on New Year's Eve, the screen for executing the New Year countdown is unfolded on the liquid crystal display device 1900. And so on. Calendar information and time information are set at the time of shipment from the factory.

In addition to the calendar information and the time information, the RTC built-in RAM4165aa stores and holds the LED brightness setting information when the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is of the LED type. When the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is an LED type, the peripheral control MPU4150a acquires the brightness setting information from the RTC built-in RAM4165aa and adjusts the brightness of the backlight by PWM control. The brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the brightness of the LED that is the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in 5% increments in a range of 100% to 70%, and the currently set liquid crystal display device 1900. The brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the above, is included. Further, in the RTC built-in RAM4165aa, in addition to the calendar information, the time information and the brightness setting information, the calendar information, the time information and the brightness setting information are stored as the date and hour, minute and second information first stored in the RTC built-in RAM4165aa. The input date and time information is also stored. Further, the peripheral control MPU4150a is designed so that when the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is a cold cathode tube type, the backlight is ON / OFF controlled or only ON. Various information such as calendar information, time information, luminance setting information, and input date / time information stored in the RTC built-in RAM4165aa are set in the manufacturing line of the gaming machine manufacturer. In order to perform various tests such as a display test of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the production line, the date and time and hour, minute, and second when the input date and time information was input on the production line as the date and time when the liquid crystal display device 1900 was first turned on. It is set to the manufacturing date and time.

As described above, in addition to the calendar information and the time information, the RTC built-in RAM4165aa has the brightness setting information when the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is of the LED type, the input date and time information, and the like. Information that needs to be maintained can be stored and retained independently of the model information of the machine 1 (for example, the probability that a big hit game state occurs at a low probability or a high probability).

Further, the brightness setting information and the like stored and stored in the RTC built-in RAM4165aa may be too bright or dark with the brightness of the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 set at the manufacturing date and time depending on the environment of the hall where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed. It may be too much. Therefore, by operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 shown in FIG. 43, it is possible to shift to the setting mode and adjust the brightness of the backlight to a predetermined brightness. There is. When the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned on, the screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. If the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated during the period in which the customer is waiting and the demonstration by the liquid crystal display device 1900 is being performed, the screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. It is designed to be displayed in. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 according to the screen of this setting mode, the calendar information and the time information can be reset, and the brightness of the backlight can be adjusted to the desired brightness. it can. This adjusted desired brightness is overwritten (updated and stored) as the brightness of the LED stored in the brightness setting information. In the setting mode, the peripheral control MPU4150a executes the above-mentioned luminance correction program to change the liquid crystal display device 1900 over time when the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is an LED type. Corrects the decrease in brightness that accompanies this. The peripheral control MPU4150a acquires input date and time information from the RTC built-in RAM4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, specifies the date and time when the liquid crystal display device 1900 is first turned on, and outputs calendar information and hours, minutes, and seconds that specify the date. Brightness adjustment information for acquiring the specified time information, specifying the current date and time, and adjusting the brightness of the LED that is the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in increments of 5% from 100% to 70%. The brightness setting information having the brightness of the LED which is the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 currently set is acquired. The acquired luminance setting information is corrected based on the correction information stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 4150b. For example, if six months have already passed from the date and time when the liquid crystal display device 1900 was first turned on and the current date and time, and from the date and time when the liquid crystal display device 1900 was first turned on, the peripheral control ROM 4150b is used. When the correction information (for example, 5%) is acquired and the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75% and the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on, the correction information is acquired for this 75%. The brightness of the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is adjusted and turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness is 80%, which is an additional 5%, and the liquid crystal display device 1900 is first turned on. If December has already passed since the power was turned on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 4150b, and the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75% and the liquid crystal is displayed. When the backlight of the display device 1900 is turned on, the brightness is 85%, which is the correction information acquired for 75%, which is added by 10%, based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information. The brightness of the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is adjusted and turned on. The current date and time may be specified by directly acquiring the calendar information for specifying the date and the time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second from the RTC built-in RAM4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165. Current calendar information set in the calendar information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 4140 in the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad of the peripheral control RAM 4150c in the current time information acquisition process of step S1002 in the control unit power-on processing. And the current time information set in the time information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 4140 may be acquired to specify the current date and time.

[6-3-4. Volume adjustment volume]
As described above, the volume adjusting volume 4140a rotates the knob portion to control the volume of music, sound effects, etc. flowing from the speakers 821 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, 262 provided in the door frame 5. It can be adjusted by. As described above, the resistance value of the volume adjusting volume 4140a is changed by rotating the knob portion, and the electrically connected peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak is used as the knob portion. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position is converted from an analog value to a digital value and converted into a value in 1024 steps from a value to a value of 1023. In the present embodiment, as described above, the value of 1024 steps is divided into seven and managed as the substrate volumes 0 to 6. The board volume 0 is set to mute, the board volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the volume is set to increase from the board volume 0 to the board volume 6. Speakers 821 provided in the main body frame 3 and speakers 130 and 222 provided in the door frame 5 by controlling the liquid crystal and the sound control unit 4160 (VDP4160a with a built-in sound source described later) so as to have the volume set in the board volumes 0 to 6. , 262 to play music and sound effects. In this way, music and sound effects are played from the speakers 821 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, 262 provided in the door frame 5 by adjusting the volume based on the rotation operation of the knob portion. Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, in addition to the music and sound effects, a notification sound for notifying the clerk of the hall of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko game machine 1 or an illegal act against the pachinko game machine 1 and the like. Announce the contents related to the game production (for example, produce the screen unfolded on the liquid crystal display device 1900 as more powerful, or announce that there is a high possibility that the game state will be advantageous to the player, etc. The notification sound for) also flows from the speaker 821 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, 262 provided in the door frame 5, but the notification sound and the notification sound are used for volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the knob portion. It is a mechanism that flows without any dependence, and the volume from mute to maximum volume can be adjusted by controlling the liquid crystal and the sound control unit 4160 (VDP4160a with built-in sound source described later) by a program. The volume adjusted by this program is different from the substrate volume divided into the above-mentioned seven stages, and can smoothly change from mute to maximum volume. As a result, for example, even when a hall clerk or the like rotates the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a to set the volume low, the speaker 821 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5 are provided. Although the production sounds such as music and sound effects flowing from 130, 222, 262 are reduced, the volume is loud when the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a problem or when the player is cheating (in this embodiment). , Maximum volume) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk and the like from becoming less likely to notice the occurrence of a problem or the cheating of the player due to the notification sound. In addition, based on the current board volume set by adjusting the volume based on the rotation operation of the knob, the volume at which the advertising sound is played is reduced so as not to interfere with music and sound effects, while the advertising sound is played. Announcement that there is a high possibility that the screen unfolded by the liquid crystal display device 1900 will be produced as more powerful in addition to music and sound effects by increasing the volume of the sound, or that the game will shift to a game state that is advantageous to the player. You can also do it.

In the present embodiment, in addition to adjusting the volume of music and sound effects by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjusting volume 4140a, the operation unit 400 shown in FIG. 43. The period during which the jackpot game state is generated by operating the dial operation unit 401 (for example, when a total of 15 rounds from 1 round to 15 rounds are set as the jackpot game state, 1 round to 15 rounds) It is possible to adjust the sub-volume value of the sound effect within the period during which each round of is being digested. In the present embodiment, music is played from the speakers 821 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, 262 provided in the door frame 5 while the jackpot game state is being executed. For example, the drum sound reverberates. A player who feels uncomfortable can adjust the volume to a small value to comfortably digest the big hit game state, and a player who wants to digest the big hit game state with a powerful volume can adjust the volume to a large value to comfortably digest the big hit game state. You can do it. The sub-volume value of the effect sound adjusted in the jackpot game state is such that the sub-volume value is maintained and the effect proceeds after the jackpot game state is digested. The sub-volume value of the effect sound is the above-mentioned volume as a default value (initial value) during the period when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a waiting state for customers and the liquid crystal display device 1900 is demonstrating. The knob portion of the adjustment volume 4140a is rotated to set the adjusted substrate volume. Here, a program capable of adjusting the volume of music or sound effects to a desired volume by operating the dial operation unit 401 of the operation unit 400 within the period in which the jackpot game state is occurring will be briefly described. In this program, the peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak converts the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the knob of the volume control volume 4140a from an analog value to a digital value, and for this converted value. By adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation of the dial operation unit 401 of the operation unit 400, the value of the board volume can be increased or decreased. This adjusted volume is set and updated as a sub-volume value for the track in which the sound data of the production sound such as music or sound effect is incorporated among a plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP4160a. Although it is reflected in the adjustment of the volume of, it is not reflected in the adjustment of the volume of the notification sound and the notification sound described above.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the volume of music or sound effect is adjusted by directly rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a, and the volume adjustment volume 4140a is determined according to the operation of the dial operation portion 401 of the operation unit 400. There are two methods, one is to adjust the volume of music and sound effects by increasing or decreasing the value of the substrate volume by adding or subtracting the values. Since the volume adjusting volume 4140a is mounted on the peripheral control board 4140, it is necessary to make sure that the main body frame 3 is open from the outer frame 2. Then, it is the clerk in the hall who can rotate the knob portion of the volume adjusting volume 4140a. However, at the volume adjusted by the clerk in the hall, the player may feel small and it may be difficult to hear the music or sound effect, or the player may feel loud and the music or sound effect may be noisy. Therefore, during the period in which the jackpot game state occurs (for example, when a total of 15 rounds from 1 round to 15 rounds are set as the jackpot game state, each round from 1 round to 15 rounds is digested. By operating the dial operation unit 401 of the operation unit 400 within the period of time), the volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume. As a result, the player can adjust the volume of the music or sound effect to a desired volume. Therefore, if the volume adjusted by the hall clerk feels low and it is difficult to hear the music or sound effect, the operation unit 400 The dial operation unit 401 can be operated to increase the volume to a desired level, and if the volume adjusted by the hall clerk feels loud and the music or sound effects are noisy and unpleasant, the dial operation unit of the operation unit 400 The 401 can be operated to reduce the volume to a desired level. Further, in the present embodiment, music is played from the speakers 821 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, 262 provided in the door frame 5 during the jackpot game state, so that, for example, a drum sound is played. A player who feels uncomfortable with the sound can adjust the volume to a small value to comfortably digest the big hit game state, and a player who wants to digest the big hit game state with a more powerful volume can adjust the volume to a large value to adjust the big hit game state. It is designed to be comfortably digested.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the state in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not playing is continued for a predetermined time and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the waiting state for customers and the demonstration by the liquid crystal display device 1900 is performed, the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is displayed last time. The volume adjusted by the player who was sitting in the game and playing the game is canceled and the volume is initialized. In this volume initialization, the volume is adjusted by the hall clerk, that is, the volume adjusted by the hall clerk by directly rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 4140a (that is, the production sound). The sub-volume value is set as the default value (initial value), and the substrate volume adjusted by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjusting volume 4140a described above is set). As a result, the player who sits in front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and plays the game this time is set to a total of 15 rounds from 1 round to 15 rounds as the jackpot gaming state during the period in which the jackpot gaming state is occurring (for example, the jackpot gaming state is set to 15 rounds. If so, the dial operation unit 401 of the operation unit 400 can be operated to adjust the volume to a desired level within the period during which each round from 1 round to 15 rounds is digested.

[7. Power system]
Next, the electric power supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 102 and 103. FIG. 102 is a block diagram showing a power supply system of a pachinko gaming machine, and FIG. 103 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 102. First, the power supply board 851 will be described, and then the power supply supplied to each control board and the like will be described. Although not shown, the grounds of various boards and the grounds of various terminal boards are electrically connected to the grounds of the power supply board 851.

[7-1. Power supply board]
The power supply board 851 is electrically connected to the power cord, and the plug of the power cord is plugged into the power outlet of the pachinko island facility. When the power switch 852 shown in FIG. 79 is operated, the electric power supplied from the pachinko island facility is supplied to the power supply board 851, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be turned on.

As shown in FIG. 102, the power supply board 851 has a full-wave rectifier circuit 851a, a power factor improvement circuit 851b, a smoothing circuit 851c, a + 5.2V creation circuit 851d, a + 5.25V creation circuit 851e, a + 12V creation circuit 851f, and a + 24V creation. It includes a circuit 851g. The full-wave rectifier circuit 851a full-wave rectifies the AC 24 volt (AC24V) supplied from the pachinko island facility and supplies it to the power factor improvement circuit 851b. The power factor improving circuit 851b improves the power factor of the full-wave rectified electric power to create DC + 37V (DC + 37V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 37V”) and supplies it to the smoothing circuit 851c. This smoothing circuit 851c removes the input + 37V ripple and smoothes + 37V to make the + 5.2V creation circuit 851d, the + 5.25V creation circuit 851e, the + 12V creation circuit 851f, the + 24V creation circuit 851g, and the payout control board. It is supplied to 4110 and the relay terminal board 868 around the frame, respectively. The + 5.2V creation circuit 851d creates a direct current +5.2V (DC +5.2V, hereinafter referred to as “+5.2V”) from + 37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 851c. The power supply system to which this +5.2V is applied and supplied becomes the +5.2V power supply line. The + 5.25V creation circuit 851e creates a DC +5.25V (DC +5.25V, hereinafter referred to as “+5.25V”) from + 37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 851c. The power supply system to which this +5.25V is applied and supplied becomes the +5.25V power supply line. The + 12V creation circuit 851f creates DC + 12V (DC + 12V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 12V”) from + 37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 851c. The power supply system to which this + 12V is applied and supplied becomes the + 12V power supply line. The + 24V creation circuit 851g creates DC + 24V (DC + 24V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 24V”) from + 37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 851c. The power supply system to which this + 24V is applied and supplied becomes the + 24V power supply line. The voltage created by the + 5.2V creation circuit 851d, the + 12V creation circuit 851f, and the + 24V creation circuit 851g is supplied to the payout control board 4110, and is supplied by the + 5.25V creation circuit 851e, the + 12V creation circuit 851f, and the + 24V creation circuit 851g. The generated voltage is supplied to the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868. In addition to the full-wave rectifier circuit 851a, the AC24V supplied from the pachinko island facility is also supplied to the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 via the power supply board 851.

Further, the power supply board 851 includes capacitors BC0 and BC1. The capacitor BC0 is a backup power source for the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100, and the capacitor BC1 is built in the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110. It is a backup power supply for RAM (RAM with built-in payout control).

The + 5.2V created by the + 5.2V creation circuit 851d is supplied to the payout control board 4110 and is also supplied to the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4110, as will be described later. The + 5.2V supplied to the payout control board 4110 is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a and is also applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM via the diode PD0. The + 5.2V supplied to the main control board 4100 is applied to the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 4100a and is also applied to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM via the diode MD0.

The negative terminal of the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 851 (hereinafter, referred to as “-terminal of capacitor BC1”) is grounded to the ground, while the positive terminal thereof (hereinafter, referred to as “+ terminal of capacitor BC1”). ) Is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control board 4110, and is also electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD0 of the payout control board 4110. That is, the power from the + 5.2V creation circuit 851d flows toward the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU4120a, and the power supply terminal of the RAM with built-in payout control and the + terminal of the capacitor BC1 which are in the forward direction by the diode PD0. The current is flowing toward. In this way, the capacitor BC1 is +5 by the electrical connection method in which + 5.2V created by the + 5.2V creation circuit 851d returns from the payout control board 4110 and the power supply board 851 again. 2V is applied so that it can be charged. As a result, when the power from the + 5.2V creation circuit 851d is no longer supplied to the payout control board 4110, the electric charge charged in the capacitor BC1 is supplied to the payout control board 4110 as the payout VBB. Therefore, although the current is blocked by the diode PD0 and does not flow to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU4120a and the payout control MPU4120a does not operate, the stored contents are retained by applying the payout VBB to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM. It has become so.

The negative terminal of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 851 (hereinafter, referred to as “-terminal of capacitor BC0”) is grounded to the ground, while the positive terminal thereof (hereinafter, referred to as “+ terminal of capacitor BC0”). ) Is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM of the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4110, and is also electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 of the main control board 4100. That is, the electric power from the + 5.2V creation circuit 851d flows toward the power supply terminal of the main control MPU4100a, and the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM which is in the forward direction by the diode MD0, the + terminal of the capacitor BC0, and so on. The current is flowing toward. In this way, the capacitor BC0 is electrically such that + 5.2V created by the + 5.2V creation circuit 851d returns from the payout control board 4110, the main control board 4100, and the payout control board 4110 again to the power supply board 851. Depending on the connection method, + 5.2V is applied so that it can be charged. As a result, when the power from the + 5.2V creation circuit 851d is no longer supplied to the main control board 4100, the electric charge charged in the capacitor BC0 is supplied to the main control board 4100 as the main VBB. Therefore, although the current is blocked by the diode MD0 and does not flow to the power supply terminal of the main control MPU4100a and the main control MPU4100a does not operate, the stored contents are retained by applying the main VBB to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM. It has become so.

[7-2. Voltage supplied to each control board, etc.]
Next, the outline of the voltage supplied to each control board and the like will be described, and then the voltage supplied mainly to the payout control board 4110, the main control board 4100, and the emission power supply board 831 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 102, three types of voltages, + 5.2V, + 12V, and + 24V, created by the power supply board 851 are supplied to the payout control board 4110 and the main control board via the payout control board 4110. It is also supplied to the 4100. Further, four types of voltages of +5.25V, + 12V, + 24V, and + 37V created by the power supply board 851 are supplied to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral control board is supplied via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. While being supplied to the 4140, three types of voltages, +5.25V, + 12V, and + 24V, among the four types of voltages, are supplied to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. As shown in FIG. 103 (a), the four types of voltages of + 5.25V, + 12V, + 24V, and + 37V supplied to the peripheral control board 4140 are + 5.25V, + 12V, and + 12V among the four types of voltages. Three types of voltages of + 24V are supplied to the lamp drive circuit 4170a of the lamp drive board 4170, and various signals such as a lighting signal, a blinking signal, and a gradation lighting signal are output from the lamp drive circuit 4170a to various decorative boards of the game board 4. , The four types of voltages are supplied to the drive source drive circuit 4180a of the motor drive board 4180, and the drive signal is output from the drive source drive circuit 4180a to an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid of the game board 4. Further, of the four types of voltages, two types of voltages, + 24V and + 37V, are supplied to the liquid crystal display device 1900. The liquid crystal display device 1900 includes a liquid crystal module 1900a whose drawing is controlled and a backlight power supply which is a power source for the backlight of the liquid crystal module 1900a. + 24V is supplied to the liquid crystal module 1900a and + 37V is a backlight. It is supplied to the power supply. On the other hand, three types of voltages, +5.25V, + 12V, and + 24V, which are supplied to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, are supplied to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as shown in FIG. 103 (b). Of the three types of voltages, + 12V is supplied to the + 9V creation circuit 194a to create DC + 9V (DC + 9V, hereinafter referred to as "+ 9V"). The frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 supplies four types of voltages, including + 9V created by the + 9V creation circuit 194a, to various decorative boards of the door frame 5 in addition to the three types of voltages.

[7-2-1. Voltage supplied to the payout control board]
As shown in FIG. 102, the payout control board 4110 includes a payout control filter circuit 4110a and a power failure monitoring circuit 4110b in addition to the payout control MPU 4120a and the like. The payout control filter circuit 4110a is supplied with + 5.2 V from the power supply board 851, and noise is removed from this + 5.2 V. This +5.2V is supplied to the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 851 via the diode PD0, and is also supplied to, for example, the payout control MPU4120a of the payout control unit 4120. The power failure monitoring circuit 4110b is supplied with + 12V and + 24V from the power supply board 851, and monitors signs of a power failure or momentary power failure of these + 12V and + 24V. When the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b detects a sign of a power failure or momentary power failure of + 12V and + 24V, it outputs a power failure warning signal to the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 as a power failure warning. This power failure warning signal is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 via the main control board 4100, and as shown in FIGS. 103 (a) and 103 (b), the liquid crystal display device 1900 is transmitted via the peripheral control board 4140. While being transmitted to the backlight power supply 1900b of the above, it is also transmitted to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and various types of the door frame 5 are transmitted through the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194. It is transmitted to decorative boards and the like.

In addition to the + 12V and + 24V being supplied to the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b, the + 12V is also supplied to, for example, the payout control input circuit 4120e of the payout control unit 4120, and the + 24V is, for example, the payout of the payout control unit 4120. It is also supplied to the motor drive circuit 4120d and the like. Further, the +37 from the power supply board 851 is not used at all in the payout control board 4110, and is directly supplied to the firing power supply board 831 via the payout control board 4110. The firing power supply board 831 creates a predetermined voltage described later from the supplied + 37V and supplies it to the firing solenoid drive circuit 4130d of the firing control unit 4130.

By providing the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b on the payout control board 4110 on the main body frame 3 side in this way, it is not necessary to mount the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b every time the game board 4 is manufactured, so that the manufacturing cost of the game board 4 is completely eliminated. It can contribute to the reduction.

Here, in the present embodiment, the reason why the payout control board 4110 is provided with the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b will be briefly described. As described above, + 5.2V, + 12V, and + 24V from the power supply board 851 are supplied to the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4110. In other words, the + 5.2V, + 12V, and + 24V from the power supply board 851 provided on the main body frame 3 side have the closest relationship as a transmission path with respect to the main control board 4100 provided on the game board 4 side. It is supplied via the payout control board 4110 provided on the three sides. As a result, compared to the case where the power supply board 851 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit, it is possible to monitor signs of a power failure or momentary power failure of + 12V and + 24V in a closer relationship as a transmission path to the main control board 4100. By configuring the transmission path for transmitting the warning signal to the main control board 4100 to be short, it is possible to contribute to accelerating the timing at which the main control board 4100 starts backing up important game information. Further, by monitoring the voltage applied to each of the two power supply lines of the + 12V power supply line and the + 24V power supply line described above, the voltage applied to one of the + 12V power supply line or the + 24V power supply line is monitored. Compared with the case, it is possible to more accurately grasp the signs of power failure such as power failure or momentary power failure. In addition, in recent pachinko game machines, by providing an extremely large number of illuminations on the door frame and the game board, the number of illuminations is increasing, providing the player with a gorgeous and powerful and attractive production. It tends to increase. Along with this, power consumption is also increasing, and opportunities for improving the power supply board are also increasing. On the other hand, since the payout control board is a board that exclusively pays out game balls, there are very few opportunities to remake it unless there is a major system improvement related to payout. Therefore, in the present embodiment, for the reason described above, the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b is not provided with the power supply board 851, but is provided with the payout control board 4110.

[7-2-2. Voltage supplied to the main control board]
As shown in FIG. 102, the main control board 4100 includes a main control filter circuit 4100 g in addition to the main control MPU 4100a and the like. The main control filter circuit 4100 g is supplied with + 5.2 V from the payout control board 4110, and noise is removed from this + 5.2 V. This +5.2V is supplied to the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 851 via the diode MD0, and is also supplied to, for example, the main control MPU4100a. The + 12V from the payout control board 4110 is supplied to, for example, the main control input circuit 4100c, and the + 24V from the payout control board 4110 is supplied to, for example, the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d.

[7-2-3. Voltage supplied to the firing power supply board]
As shown in FIG. 102, the firing power supply board 831 includes a DC / DC converter 831a and an electrolytic capacitor SC0 (capacitance: 4700 microfarads (μF) in this embodiment). The DC / DC converter 831a steps down + 37V from the payout control board 4110 to create a direct current + 35V (DC + 35V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 35V”), and drives the launch solenoid of the launch control unit 4130 on the payout control board 4110. It is supplied to the circuit 4130d.

The negative terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 (hereinafter referred to as "-terminal of electrolytic capacitor SC0") is grounded to the ground, while its positive terminal (hereinafter referred to as "+ terminal of electrolytic capacitor SC0"). Is electrically connected to the + 35V output terminal of the DC / DC converter 831a. That is, the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is charged by applying + 35V output from the DC / DC converter 831a. In the present embodiment, the combined current obtained by merging the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current due to the discharge of the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor SC0 flows through the firing solenoid drive circuit 4130d of the payout control board 4110. It has become. The detailed description will be described later.

As described above, + 5.2V from the power supply board 851 is supplied to the payout control board 4110, whereas + 5.25V from the power supply board 851 is supplied to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. There is. +5.2V and +5.25V are the control reference voltages of each control board, but when they are electrically connected to the power supply board 851 via wiring (harness), the total length of the wiring, that is, For the payout control board 4110 and the main control board 4100, which have a short power supply path, the voltage drop (voltage drop) associated with the wiring can be underestimated, so that +5.2 V is supplied from the power supply board 851. On the other hand, the total length of the wiring, that is, the power supply path is longer than that of the payout control board 4110 and the main control board 4100, depends on the peripheral control board 4140 in addition to the peripheral control board 4140 and the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194. For the lamp drive board 4170, the motor drive board 4180, the various decorative boards on the door frame side subordinate to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, etc., the voltage drop (voltage drop) due to the wiring cannot be ignored. +5.25V, which is a voltage higher than +5.2V supplied to the payout control board 4110 and the main control board 4100, is supplied from the power supply board 851.

[8. Main control board circuit]
Next, the circuit and the like of the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. 97 will be described with reference to FIGS. 104 and 105. FIG. 104 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit of the main control board, and FIG. 105 is a circuit diagram showing a communication interface circuit between the main control board and the peripheral control board. First, the main control filter circuit 4100 g shown in FIG. 102 will be described, and then the power supply, the main control system reset IC, the main control crystal oscillator, the main control input circuit, and the main control I / O port created by the main control board 4100 will be described. Various input / output signals such as 4100b and a communication interface circuit between the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4140 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 104, the main control board 4100 includes a main control MPU 4100a, a main control I / O port 4100b, a main control 3-terminal filter MIC0, and a main control system reset MIC1 that outputs a reset signal as a peripheral circuit. The main control crystal oscillator MX0 (24 megahertz (MHz) in this embodiment) that outputs a clock signal is mainly configured.

[8-1. Main control filter circuit]
As shown in FIG. 104, the main control filter circuit 4100 g mainly comprises the main control 3-terminal filter MIC0. This main control 3-terminal filter MIC0 is a T-type filter circuit, which is magnetically shielded with ferrite and has excellent attenuation characteristics. In the main control 3-terminal filter MIC0, + 5.2V is applied to the 1st terminal from the power supply board 851 via the payout control board 4110, and the 2nd terminal is grounded to the ground, and the 3rd terminal is grounded. + 5.2V is output with the noise component removed from the terminal number. The + 5.2V applied to the first terminal is first smoothed by removing ripples (AC components folded by the voltage) by the electrolytic capacitor MC0 grounded with the ground (GND).

The + 5.2V output from the 3rd terminal is smoothed by further removing ripples by the capacitor MC1 and the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (capacitance: 470 microfarads (μF) in this embodiment) grounded to the ground. Has been transformed. This smoothed +5.2V is the power supply terminal of the main control system reset MIC1, the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU4100a, and the main control I / O port 4100b. It is applied to each of the VCS terminals and the like, which are the power supply terminals of the above.

The VDD terminal of the main control MPU4100a is electrically connected to the grounded capacitor MC3, and the VCS terminal of the main control I / O port 4100b is electrically connected to the grounded capacitor MC4. And + 5.2V input to the VCS terminal is further stripped of ripples and smoothed. The VSS terminal, which is the ground terminal of the main control MPU 4100a, is grounded to the ground, and the GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the main control I / O port 4100b, is grounded to the ground.

Further, the VDD terminal of the main control MPU4100a is electrically connected to the anode terminal of the diode MD0 in addition to being electrically connected to the capacitor MC3. The cathode terminal of the diode MD0 is electrically connected to the VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU4100a, and is also electrically connected to the grounded capacitor MC5. ing. The VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 and the capacitor MC5, and is also electrically connected to the + terminal of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. 102 via the resistor MR0. Is connected. That is, + 5.2V smoothed by removing the noise component by the main control filter circuit 4100g is applied to the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 4100a, and is applied to the VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM via the diode MD0. It is applied to the + terminal of the capacitor BC0. As a result, as described above, when the power from the + 5.2V creation circuit 851d of the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. 102 is no longer supplied to the main control board 4100, the charge charged in the capacitor BC0 becomes the main VBB. Since it is supplied to the main control board 4100 as a main control board 4100, the current is blocked by the diode MD0 and does not flow to the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 4100a, and the main control MPU 4100a does not operate. The stored contents are retained by applying the main VBB.

[8-2. Main control system reset IC]
As shown in FIG. 104, + 5.2V smoothed by removing the noise component by the main control filter circuit 4100g is applied to the power supply terminal of the main control system reset MIC1. The main control system reset MIC1 resets the main control MPU 4100a and the main control I / O port 4100b, and has a built-in delay circuit. A capacitor MC6 grounded to the ground is electrically connected to the delay capacitance terminal of the main control system reset MIC1, and the delay time due to the delay circuit can be set by the capacitance of the capacitor MC6. .. Specifically, when the + 5.2V input to the power supply terminal reaches the threshold value (for example, 4.25V), the main control system reset MIC1 outputs a system reset signal from the output terminal after the delay time elapses.

The output terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to the SRST terminal which is the reset terminal of the main control MPU 4100a and the RESETN terminal which is the reset terminal of the main control I / O port 4100b. The output terminal is an open collector output type, and is pulled up to the + 5.2V side by the pull-up resistor MR1. The voltage raised to the + 5.2V side is smoothed by removing ripples by the capacitor MC7 grounded to the ground (the capacitor MC7 also plays a role as a low-pass filter). When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is larger than the threshold value, the output terminal is pulled up to the +5.2V side by the pull-up resistor MR1 and the logic becomes HI, and this logic becomes the SRST terminal and main control I / of the main control MPU4100a. While the voltage is input to the SETTN terminal of the O port 4100b, the logic becomes LOW when the voltage input to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold value, and this logic becomes the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 4100a and the SETTN of the main control I / O port 4100b. Input to the terminal. Since the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 4100a and the RESET terminal of the main control I / O port 4100b are negative logic inputs, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal becomes smaller than the threshold value, the main control MPU 4100a and the main control I / O The O port 4100b is reset. The power supply terminal is electrically connected to the grounded capacitor MC8, and the + 5.2V input to the power supply terminal is smoothed by removing ripples. Further, the ground terminal is grounded with the grant, and the NC terminal is electrically unconnected to the outside.

[8-3. Main control crystal oscillator]
As shown in FIG. 104, + 5.2V smoothed by removing the noise component by the main control filter circuit 4100g is applied to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0. This VDD terminal is electrically connected to the grounded capacitor MC9, and the + 5.2V input to the VDD terminal is further stripped of ripples and smoothed. Further, this smoothed + 5.2V is input to the A terminal, the B terminal, the C terminal, and the ST terminal, which are output frequency selection terminals, in addition to the VDD terminal. The main control crystal oscillator MX0 outputs a 24 MHz clock signal from the F terminal, which is an output terminal, by applying +5.2 V to these A terminal, B terminal, C terminal, and ST terminal.

The F terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0 is electrically connected to the CLK terminal, which is the clock terminal of the main control MPU4100a, and a 24 MHz clock signal is input. The main control MPU4100a to which this clock signal is input outputs a clock signal from its E terminal. The E terminal is electrically connected to the CLK terminal, which is the clock terminal of the main control I / O port 4100b, and a 24 MHz clock signal output from the E terminal is input. The distance between the E terminal of the main control MPU 4100a and the CLK terminal of the main control I / O port 4100b is pulled up to the + 5.2V side by the pull-up resistor MR2. The GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, is grounded to ground, and the D terminal, which outputs the partial frequency of the F terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, is not electrically connected to the outside. ing.

[8-4. Main control input circuit]
The main control input circuit 4100c is a detection signal from the general winning port switches 3020 and 3020, the upper start port switch 3022, the lower start port switch 2109, the magnetic detection switch 304, the count switch 2110, and the gate switch 2352 shown in FIG. In addition, it is a circuit in which a detection signal from the RAM clear switch 4100e and a power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b in the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. 102 are input. Since the circuit configuration in which the detection signal from each switch is input is the same, here, a circuit in which the detection signal from the RAM clear switch 4100e is input and a circuit in which the power failure warning signal is input will be described. ..

[8-4-1. Circuit to which the detection signal from the RAM clear switch is input]
As shown in FIG. 104, the 3rd pin as the output pin of the RAM clear switch 4100e is pulled up to the + 5.2V side by the pull-up resistor MR3, and is connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0 and electricity via the resistor MR4. Is connected. The base terminal of the transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to the resistor MR4 and also electrically connected to the resistor MR5 grounded to the ground. The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR0 is grounded to the ground, and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled up to the + 5.2V side by the pull-up resistor MR6 and is electrically connected to the input pin PA0 of the input port PA of the main control I / O port 4100b. It is connected to the. Pins 1 and 2 of the RAM clear switch 4100e are grounded to ground, and pin 4 is electrically connected to pin 3. As a result, when the RAM clear switch 4100e is not operated, the 3rd and 4th pins are pulled up to the + 5.2V side by the pull-up resistor MR3, while when the RAM clear switch 4100e is operated, the 3rd pin is pulled up. And the 4th pin is pulled down to the ground side by being electrically connected to the 1st and 2nd pins.

The circuit composed of the transistor MTR0, the resistors MR4 and MR5 is a switch circuit, and when the RAM clear switch 4100e is not operated, the voltage pulled up to the + 5.2V side by the pull-up resistor MR3 is the base terminal of the transistor MTR0. When applied to, the transistor MTR0 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is lowered to the ground side, and the RAM clear signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input pin PA0 of the main control I / O port 4100b. On the other hand, when the RAM clear switch 4100e is being operated, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0 is lowered to the ground side, so that the transistor MTR0 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled up to the +5.2V side by the pull-up resistor MR6, and the RAM clear signal whose logic is HI is input to the input pin PA0 of the main control I / O port 4100b. Will be done.

[8-4-2. Circuit to which power failure warning signal is input]
As shown in FIG. 104, the power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b on the payout control board 4110 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor MR7, and is connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR1 and electricity via the resistor MR8. Is connected. The base terminal of the transistor MTR1 is electrically connected to the resistor MR8 and also electrically connected to the resistor MR9 grounded to the ground. The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR1 is grounded to ground, and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR1 is pulled up to the + 5.2V side by the pull-up resistor MR10 and is electrically connected to the input pin PA1 of the input port PA of the main control I / O port 4100b. It is connected to the. The power failure monitoring circuit 4110b that outputs a power failure warning signal is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to the ground, and is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor MR7. As a result, when the power failure warning signal is not input, the pull-up resistor MR7 pulls it up to the + 12V side, while when the power failure warning signal is input, it is pulled down to the ground side.

The circuit composed of the transistor MTR1 and the resistors MR8 and MR9 is a switch circuit, and when the power failure warning signal is not input, the voltage pulled up to the + 5.2V side by the pull-up resistor MR7 is sent to the base terminal of the transistor MTR1. When applied, the transistor MTR1 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR1 is lowered to the ground side, and the power failure warning signal 1 whose logic is LOW is input to the input pin PA1 of the main control I / O port 4100b. On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is input, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR1 is lowered to the ground side, so that the transistor MTR1 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR1 is pulled up to the +5.2V side by the pull-up resistor MR10, and the power failure warning signal 1 whose logic is HI is sent to the input pin PA1 of the main control I / O port 4100b. Entered.

The detection signal from the RAM clear switch 4100e is pulled up to the + 5.2V side by the pull-up resistor MR3, while the power failure warning signal is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor MR7. This is because the detection signal from the RAM clear switch 4100e is input to the main control board 4100, while the power failure warning signal is input via the payout control board 4110. That is, between the boards of the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110, in order to suppress the influence of noise invading the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the boards, the control reference voltage is +5.2 V. The high voltage of + 12V is used to improve the reliability of the signal. As a result, the detection signals from the general winning port switch 3020, the upper start port switch 3022, and the lower start port switch 2109 input to the main control board 4100 are pulled up in the same manner as the detection signals from the RAM clear switch 4100e. Detection from the magnetic detection switch 304, the count switch 2110, the general winning opening switch 3020, and the gate switch 2352, which are input via the panel relay terminal plate 4161 shown in FIG. 97 while being pulled up to the + 5.2V side by the resistor. The signal is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor, similarly to the power failure warning signal from the payout control board 4110.

[8-5. Various input / output signals such as main control I / O port]
Next, various input / output signals of the main control MPU 4100a and the main control I / O port 4100b will be described. The data input / output terminals D0 to D7 of the main control I / O port 4100b exchange various information and various signals with the data input / output terminals D0 to D7 of the main control MPU 4100a via the data bus.

At the RXA terminal, which is the serial data input terminal of the main control MPU 4100a, the serial data from the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. 97 is input as the payer serial data reception signal. On the other hand, the TXA terminal and the TXB terminal, which are the serial data output terminals of the main control MPU 4100a, output the serial data transmitted from the TXA terminal to the payout control board 4110 as the main pay serial data transmission signal, and from the TXB terminal, as shown in FIG. The serial data to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 shown is output as a main peripheral serial data transmission signal.

On the input pin PA2 of the input port PA of the main control I / O port 4100b, the payer ACK signal from the payout control board 4110 that notifies the completion of normal reception of the main pay serial data reception signal described above is the main control input described above. Among the other input pins of the input port PA and the ports PB to PE that are input via the circuit 4100c, the input pin of the port set as the input port is, for example, the upper start port switch 3022 shown in FIG. Detection signals from various switches such as the above are input via the main control input circuit 4100c. Various detection signals input to the main control I / O port 4100b are input to the main control MPU 4100a via the data bus.

On the other hand, the main control MPU 4100a outputs a main payment ACK signal from the output pin PB0 of the output port PB of the main control I / O port 4100b via the data bus to the effect that the above-mentioned normal reception of the payer serial data reception signal is completed. Then, among the ports PB to PE, the drive signal from the output pin of the port set to the output port to, for example, the start port solenoid 2105 shown in FIG. 97 is transmitted via the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d. It outputs, or outputs a drive signal to various indicators such as the upper special symbol indicator 1185 shown in FIG. 97.

[8-6. Interface circuit for communication between the main control board and the peripheral control board]
Next, the communication interface circuit between the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4140 will be described with reference to FIG. 105. In the main control board 4100, + 12V and + 5.2V from the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. 102 are supplied via the payout control board 4110. The main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 is affected by noise that invades the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4140. In order to suppress the above, the reliability is enhanced by transmitting using + 12V, which is a voltage higher than the control reference voltage of + 5.2V.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 105, the main control board 4100 mainly includes pull-up resistors MR20, resistors MR21, MR22, and a transistor MTR20 as communication interface circuits. On the other hand, the peripheral control board 4140 includes a diode AD10, an electrolytic capacitor AC10 (capacitance: 47 μF in this embodiment), and a photocoupler AIC10 (infrared LED and photoIC) as communication interface circuits. It is mainly composed of.).

+ 12V supplied from the power supply board 851 is applied to the anode terminal of the diode MD20 of the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4110, and the cathode terminal of the diode MD20 is an electrolytic capacitor whose negative terminal is grounded to ground. It is electrically connected to the positive terminal of MC20 (capacitance: 220 microfarad (μF) in this embodiment). The cathode terminal of the diode MD20 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC20, and is also electrically connected to the anode terminal (terminal 1) of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 4140 via wiring (harness). It is connected to the. As a result, when the power from the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. 102 is not supplied to the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4110 due to, for example, a power failure or a momentary power failure, the electrolytic capacitor MC20 The charged charge can be continuously applied from the main control board 4100 to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 4140 as + 12V.

Here, the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 4100a, is charged to the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (capacitance: 470 μF in this embodiment) shown in FIG. 104 when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs. Since the electric charge is applied as +5.2V, the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the main control MPU 4100a to the peripheral control board 4140 by this applied +5.2V is at least the main built-in in the main control MPU4100a. The main peripheral serial data set in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb of the peripheral serial transmission port 4100ae can be completely transmitted. As described above, the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 is connected to the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the boards between the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4140. In order to suppress the influence of invading noise, its reliability is enhanced by transmitting using + 12V, which is a voltage higher than the control reference voltage of + 5.2V. That is, in the event of a power failure or momentary power failure, the main control MPU4100a can complete the transmission of the main peripheral serial data set in the transmission buffer register of the serial transmission unit, but this main peripheral serial data is used as a control reference. Even if the main frequency serial data transmission signal whose logic is HI is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 by the voltage + 5.2V, the main frequency serial data transmission signal whose logic is HI by + 12V is transmitted from the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20. Cannot output. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC20 is applied as + 12V from the main control board 4100 to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 4140. The main peripheral serial data set in the transmission buffer register of the serial transmitter of the main control MPU4100a can be output from the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 by + 12V to output the main peripheral serial data transmission signal whose logic is HI. There is. As a result, the main peripheral serial data transmission signal during transmission, that is, the main peripheral serial data is surely received by the peripheral control board 4140 without being interrupted. In the present embodiment, the storage capacity of the transmission buffer register 4100aeb of the main peripheral serial transmission port 4100ae built in the main control MPU 4100a has 32 bytes, and one packet is composed of 3 bytes of data. Therefore, a maximum of 10 packets of data are stored in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb. Further, in the present embodiment, the transfer bit rate of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control MPU 4100a is set to 19200 bps.

The cathode terminal (terminal 3) of the photocoupler AIC10 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 of the main control board 4100 via the resistor AR10 and its wiring (harness). The resistor AR10 of the peripheral control board 4140 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10.

The TXB terminal that outputs the main peripheral serial data transmission signal from the main control MPU4100a shown in FIG. 104 is pulled up to the + 5.2V side by the pull-up resistor MR20, and is connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 via the resistor MR21. It is electrically connected. The base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the resistor MR21 and also electrically connected to the resistor MR22 grounded to the ground. The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR20 is grounded to ground.

The circuit composed of the resistors MR21, MR22, and the transistor MTR20 is a switch circuit, and when the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is lowered to the ground side. The transistor MTR20 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, no forward current flows through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 4140, so that the photocoupler AIC10 is turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the main circumference serial data transmission signal is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled up to + 5.2V side from the pull-up resistor MR20, the transistor MTR20 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. Will be done. As a result, a forward current flows through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 4140, so that the photocoupler AIC10 is turned on.

+ 5.2V supplied from the power supply board 851 is applied to the anode terminal of the diode AD10 of the peripheral control board 4140 via the payout control board 4110 and the main control board 4100, and the cathode terminal of the diode AD10 is a minus terminal. Is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10 grounded to the ground. The cathode terminal of the diode AD10 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10, and is also electrically connected to the Vcc terminal (terminal 6) which is the power supply terminal of the photocoupler AIC. The emitter terminal (terminal 4) of the photocoupler AIC10 is grounded to the ground, and the collector terminal (terminal 5) of the photocoupler AIC is +5 by the pull-up resistor AR11 electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10. It is pulled up to the 2V side and is electrically connected to the input terminal of the serial I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU4150a. When the photocoupler AIC10 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 changes, and the signal is used as the main peripheral serial data transmission signal as the peripheral control MPU4150a serial I / O port for the main control board. It is input to the input terminal of. As a result, as described above, when the power from the power supply board 851 is not supplied to the peripheral control board 4140 via the payout control board 4110 and the main control board 4100 due to, for example, a power failure or a momentary power failure. The electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor AC10 can be continuously applied to the Vcc terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 as +5.2V. When +5.2V from the electrolytic capacitor AC10 is applied when electricity or momentary power failure occurs, the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 4100a to the peripheral control board 4140 is at least at least. The data set in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb of the main peripheral serial transmission port 4100ae built in the main control MPU 4100a can be completely transmitted, and the main peripheral serial data transmission signal during transmission, that is, the main peripheral serial The data is reliably received by the peripheral control board 4140 without being fragmented or lost.

When the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 4100a to the peripheral control board 4140 is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR 20 is lowered to the ground side and the transistor MTR 20 is turned off. Since the photocoupler AIC10 is turned off by doing so, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is raised to +5.2V by the pull-up resistor AR11, and the logic becomes HI. While the transmission signal is input to the input terminal of the serial I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 4150a, the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 4100a to the peripheral control board 4140 is LOW. In this case, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled up to + 5.2V side from the pull-up resistor MR20, and when the transistor MTR20 is turned on, the photocoupler AIC10 is turned on. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the AIC 10 is lowered to the ground side, and the main peripheral serial data transmission signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal of the serial I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU4150a. As described above, the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is the same as the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 4100a to the peripheral control board 4140. It is the logic of.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the + 5.2V supplied to various electronic components via the main control filter circuit unit 4100g, that is, the reference control voltage created by the + 5.2V creation circuit 851d of the power supply board 851. The + 5.2V power supply line to which 2V is applied and the + 12V power supply line to which + 12V applied via the diode M20, that is, + 12V created by the + 12V creation circuit 851f is applied as the communication control voltage, have a power failure or momentary power failure. Measures are taken when the reference control voltage and communication control voltage drop due to the occurrence. That is, for the main peripheral serial transmission port 4100ae built in the main control MPU 4100a, the plus of the +5.2V power supply line and the electrolytic capacitor MC2 using the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit unit 4100g as the first auxiliary power supply. Even if the reference control voltage applied from the +5.2V power supply line drops due to a power failure or momentary power failure due to the electrical parallel connection between the terminals, the main control filter, which is the first auxiliary power supply. By applying the reference control voltage from the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the circuit unit 4100 g, the state in which the reference control voltage is applied can be maintained, and the pull-up resistors MR20 and the resistors MR21 can be maintained. For the interface circuit composed of MR22, MR22, and transistor MTR20, + 12V applied to the + 12V power supply line is applied to the anode terminal of the diode M20 as a communication control voltage, and the cathode terminal of the diode MD20 and the second When the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC20, which is an auxiliary power supply, is electrically connected in parallel, a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the communication control voltage applied from the + 12V power supply line via the diode MD20 drops. However, by applying the communication control voltage from the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC20, which is the second auxiliary power source, the state in which the communication control voltage is applied can be maintained. As a result, it is possible to prevent the command being transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 to be interrupted and to prevent the command from being missing, so that the peripheral control board 4140 reliably receives the command being transmitted. can do. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate missing commands immediately after a power failure occurs or during a momentary power failure.

Further, a plurality of commands set in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb of the main peripheral serial transmission port 4100ae built in the main control MPU4100a are all composed of pull-up resistors MR20, resistors MR21, MR22, and transistor MTR20 as main peripheral serial data. The capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is set to 470 μF, and the capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC20 is set to 220 μF so that transmission to the peripheral control board 4140 can be completed via the interface circuit. As a result, even if a power failure or momentary power failure occurs during transmission from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140, the plurality of commands set in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb are all peripheral through the interface circuit as main peripheral serial data. Since the transmission to the control board 4140 can be completed, the peripheral control board 4140 can reliably receive the plurality of commands set in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb without interruption and without omission.

[9. Payout control board circuit]
Next, the circuit and the like of the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. 98 will be described with reference to FIGS. 106 to 111. FIG. 106 is a circuit diagram showing a power failure monitoring circuit, FIG. 107 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit of a payout control unit, FIG. 108 is a circuit diagram showing a payout control input circuit, and FIG. 109 is a CR unit input / output. FIG. 110 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit, FIG. 110 is a circuit diagram showing a launch control input circuit, and FIG. 111 is an input / output diagram showing various input / output signals to and from the main control board and various output signals to an external terminal board. is there. First, the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b will be described, followed by the payout control filter circuit 4110a, the payout control unit 4120 circuit, the launch control unit 4130 circuit, various input / output signals with the main control board 4100, and the external terminal board 784. The various output signals of the above will be described.

[9-1. Power failure monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 102, the payout control board 4110 is supplied with + 24V, + 12V, and + 5.2V from the power supply board 851, and + 24V and + 12V are input to the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b. The power failure monitoring circuit 4110b monitors signs of power failure or momentary power failure of + 24V and + 12V, and when it detects a sign of power failure or momentary power failure, it sends a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning, and the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 In addition, it outputs to the main control MPU4100a. Here, the configuration of the power failure monitoring circuit will be described first, followed by the monitoring of + 24V power failure or momentary power failure, and the monitoring of + 12V power failure or momentary power failure.

[9-1-1. Power failure monitoring circuit configuration]
As shown in FIG. 106, the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b mainly includes a shunt type stabilized power supply circuit PIC20, an open collector output type comparator PIC21, a D type flip-flop PIC22, and a transistor PTR20 (2SC1815 in this embodiment). There is.

+5.2V is applied to the REF terminal, which is the reference voltage input terminal of the shunt-type regulated power supply circuit PIC20, and the K terminal, which is the cathode terminal, via the resistor PR20, and the current input to the REF terminal is the resistor PR20. Limited by The K terminal outputs a reference voltage Vref (2.495V is set in this embodiment) which is a comparison reference voltage of the comparator PIC21. This reference voltage Vref is smoothed by removing ripples (AC components folded by the voltage) by the capacitor PC20 grounded to the ground (the capacitor PC20 also plays a role as a low-pass filter). The A terminal, which is the anode terminal of the shunt-type regulated power supply circuit PIC20, is grounded to ground (GND).

The comparator PIC21 includes two voltage comparison circuits, one of which (PIC21A) is used to compare the + 24V monitoring voltage V1 with the reference voltage Vref, and the + terminal has a + 24V monitoring voltage V1. It is input, and the reference voltage Vref is input to the-terminal. The remaining one (PIC21B) is used to compare the + 12V monitoring voltage V2 with the reference voltage Vref, with the + 12V monitoring voltage V2 input to the + terminal and the reference voltage Vref input to the-terminal. There is. The results of these comparisons are input to the D-type flip-flop PIC22. The D-type flip-flop PIC22 includes two D-type flip-flop circuits, one of which (PIC23A) is used in the present embodiment. The + 5.2V input to the Vcc terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the comparator PIC21, is smoothed by removing ripples by the capacitor PC21 grounded to the ground. Further, the + 5.2V input to the D-type flip-flop PIC 22 is smoothed by removing ripples by the capacitor PC 22 grounded to the ground.

[9-1-2. + 24V power outage or momentary power failure monitoring]
As described above, the monitoring of the + 24V power failure or momentary power failure is performed by comparing the monitoring voltage V1 of the comparator PIC21 with the reference voltage Vref by the PIC21A of the comparator PIC21. As shown in FIG. 106, the voltage of + 24V is distributed by the resistance ratio of the resistors PR21 and PR22, the ripple is removed by the capacitor PC23 grounded to the ground, and the voltage is input to the + terminal of the PIC21A (the capacitor PC23 is input to the + terminal of the PIC21A. It also plays a role as a low-pass filter). The values of the resistors PR21 and PR22 become the power failure detection voltage V1pf (set to 21.40V in this embodiment) set in advance when the voltage starts to drop from + 24V when + 24V has a power failure or momentary power failure. At that time, the monitoring voltage V1 of + 24V is set to be the same value as the reference voltage Vref. When the voltage of + 24V is larger than the failure detection voltage V1pf, the monitoring voltage V1 of + 24V becomes larger than the reference voltage Vref, and as a result, the logic becomes LOW, but since the comparator PIC21 is an open collector output type as described above, It is pulled up to the + 5.2V side by the pull-up resistor PR23, its logic becomes HI, ripples are removed by the capacitor PC24 grounded to the ground, and it is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D type flip flop PIC22 (capacitor). The PC 24 also plays a role as a low-pass filter). Since this PR terminal is a negative logic input, when the monitoring voltage V1 of + 24V is larger than the reference voltage Vref, the payout control of the payout control unit 4120 shown in FIG. 98 is performed from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop PIC22. The power failure warning signal 1 is not output to the I / O port 4120b.

On the other hand, when the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the monitoring voltage V1 of + 24V becomes smaller than the reference voltage Vref, and as a result, the logic becomes HI, but the comparator PIC21 is an open collector output type, so that logic. Is LOW, ripples are removed by the capacitor PC24 grounded to the ground, and the voltage is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D type flip flop PIC22. Since this PR terminal is a negative logic input, when the monitoring voltage V1 of + 24V is smaller than the reference voltage Vref, the power failure warning signal 1 is sent from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop PIC22, to the payout control I / O port 4120b. It is output.

[9-1-3. + 12V power outage or momentary power failure monitoring]
As described above, the monitoring of the + 12V power failure or momentary power failure is performed by comparing the monitoring voltage V2 of the comparator PIC21 with the reference voltage Vref by the PIC21B of the comparator PIC21. As shown in FIG. 106, the voltage of + 12V is distributed by the resistance ratio of the resistors PR24 and PR25, the ripple is removed by the capacitor PC25 grounded to the ground, and the voltage is input to the + terminal of the PIC21B (the capacitor PC25 is input to the + terminal). It also plays a role as a low-pass filter). The values of the resistors PR24 and PR25 become the power failure detection voltage V2pf (set to 10.47V in this embodiment) set in advance when the voltage starts to drop from + 12V when + 12V has a power failure or momentary power failure. At that time, the monitoring voltage V2 of + 12V is set to be the same value as the reference voltage Vref. When the voltage of + 12V is larger than the failure detection voltage V2pf, the monitoring voltage V2 of + 12V becomes larger than the reference voltage Vref, and as a result, the logic becomes LOW, but since the comparator PIC21 is an open collector output type as described above, It is pulled up to the + 5.2V side by the pull-up resistor PR23, its logic becomes HI, ripples are removed by the capacitor PC24 grounded to the ground, and it is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D type flip flop PIC22. Since this PR terminal is a negative logic input, when the monitoring voltage V2 of + 12V is larger than the reference voltage Vref, the payout control of the payout control unit 4120 shown in FIG. 98 is performed from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop PIC22. The power failure warning signal 1 is not output to the I / O port 4120b.

On the other hand, when the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the monitoring voltage V2 of + 12V becomes smaller than the reference voltage Vref, and as a result, the logic becomes HI, but since the comparator PIC21 is an open collector output type, the logic is It becomes LOW, the ripple is removed by the capacitor PC24 grounded with the ground, and it is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D type flip flop PIC22. Since this PR terminal is a negative logic input, when the monitoring voltage V2 of + 12V is smaller than the reference voltage Vref, the power failure warning signal 1 is sent from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop PIC22, to the payout control I / O port 4120b. It is output.

The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop PIC22, is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 via the resistor PR26. The base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is electrically connected to the resistor PR26 and also electrically connected to the resistor PR27 grounded to the ground. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR20 is grounded to ground, and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor MR7 of the main control input circuit 4100c shown in FIG. 104 via wiring (harness). Therefore, the signal output from the 1Q terminal is pulled up to the + 12V side and transmitted to the main control board 4100 as a power failure warning signal. That is, the transistor PTR 20 is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded. As described above, the D type flip flop PIC 22 and the payout control I / O port 4100b are paid out between the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop PIC 22 and the input terminal of the payout control I / O port 4100b. Since it is mounted on the control board 4110, the payout control board 4110 and the main control board 4100 give a power failure warning by the power failure warning signal 1 which is an ON / OFF signal using the control reference voltage of +5.2V. In order to suppress the influence of noise that invades the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the boards, ON / using + 12V, which is a voltage higher than the control reference voltage of +5.2V, is used. A power failure warning signal is used to give a power failure warning signal, which is an OFF signal.

Further, a power failure clear signal is input to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop PIC22, from the payout control MPU4120a of the payout control unit 4120 shown in FIG. 98 via the payout control I / O port 4210b. It has become like. Since the CLR terminal is a negative logic input, the power failure clear signal from the payout control MPU4120a is input to the CLR terminal with its logic set to LOW via the payout control I / O port 4210b. The D-type flip-flop PIC22 is designed to release the latch state when a power failure clear signal is input to the CLR terminal. At this time, the logic input to the PR terminal, which is a preset terminal, is inverted and the output terminal is output. Output from the 1Q terminal.

On the other hand, when the output of the power failure clear signal from the payout control MPU4120a is stopped, the logic becomes HI and is input to the CLR terminal via the payout control I / O port 4210b. The D-type flip-flop PIC 22 is designed to set a latch state when a power failure clear signal is not input to the CLR terminal, and latches the state in which the logic is LOW and is input to the PR terminal. The 1D terminal which is a D input terminal, the 1CK terminal which is a clock input terminal, and the GND terminal which is a ground terminal are grounded and grounded. Further, the negative logic 1Q terminal, which is the reverse of the logic of the 1Q terminal, is in a state of being electrically unconnected to the outside.

[9-2. Payout control filter circuit]
As shown in FIG. 107, the payout control filter circuit 4110a mainly includes the payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0. The payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0 is a T-type filter circuit, which is magnetically shielded with ferrite and has excellent attenuation characteristics. In the payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0, + 5.2V from the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. 102 was applied to the 1st terminal, the 2nd terminal was grounded to the ground, and the noise component was removed from the 3rd terminal. + 5.2V is output. The + 5.2V applied to the first terminal is first smoothed by removing ripples (alternating current components folded by the voltage) by the electrolytic capacitor PC0 grounded with ground (GND).

The + 5.2V output from the 3rd terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples by the capacitor PC1 and the electrolytic capacitor PC2 grounded to the ground. This smoothed +5.2V is the Vcc terminal which is the power supply terminal of the external WDT4120c, the VCS terminal which is the power supply terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU4120a, and the payout control I / O port. It is applied to each of the VCS terminals and the like, which are the power supply terminals of the 4120b.

The VDD terminal of the payout control MPU4120a is electrically connected to the grounded capacitor PC3, and the VCS terminal of the payout control I / O port 4120b is electrically connected to the grounded capacitor PC4. And + 5.2V input to the VCS terminal is further stripped of ripples and smoothed. The VSS terminal, which is the ground terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a, is grounded to the ground, and the GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the payout control I / O port 4120b, is grounded to the ground.

Further, the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU4120a is electrically connected to the anode terminal of the diode PD0 in addition to being electrically connected to the capacitor PC3. The cathode terminal of the diode PD0 is electrically connected to the VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the RAM (RAM with built-in payout control) built in the payout control MPU4120a, and is also electrically connected to the capacitor PC5 grounded to the ground. ing. The VBB terminal of the RAM with built-in payout control is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD0 and the capacitor PC5, and is also electrically connected to the + terminal of the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. 102 via the resistor PR0. Is connected. That is, + 5.2V smoothed by removing the noise component by the payout control filter circuit 4110a is applied to the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU4120a, and is applied to the VBB terminal of the RAM with built-in payout control via the diode PD0. It is applied to the + terminal of the capacitor BC1. As a result, as described above, when the power from the + 5.2V creation circuit 851d of the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. 102 is no longer supplied to the payout control board 4110, the electric charge charged in the capacitor BC1 is paid VBB. Since the electric charge is supplied to the payout control board 4110, the current is blocked by the diode PD0 and does not flow to the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU4120a, and the payout control MPU4120a does not operate, but the payout control MPU4120a does not operate. The stored contents are retained by applying the pay VBB.

[9-3. Payout control circuit]
As shown in FIGS. 107 to 109, the payout control unit 4120 includes a payout control MPU 4120a, a payout control I / O port 4120b, an external WDT 4120c, a payout motor drive circuit 4120d, a payout control input circuit 4120e, and a CR unit input / output circuit 4120f. In addition, as a peripheral circuit, a payout control crystal oscillator PX0 (8 megahertz (MHz) in this embodiment) is mainly configured. Here, the external WDT4120c will be described first, followed by various input / output signals such as the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, the payout motor drive circuit 4120d, the payout control input circuit 4120e, the CR unit input / output circuit 4120f, and the main control I / O port. Various input / output signals such as a payout control I / O port will be described.

[9-3-1. External WDT (external watchdog timer)]
As shown in FIG. 107, + 5.2V smoothed by removing the noise component by the payout control filter circuit 4110a is applied to the Vcc terminal which is the power supply terminal of the external WDT 4120c. The external WDT4120c resets the payout control MPU4120a, and has a built-in watch dock timer. The external WDT4120c has a function of monitoring the voltage of + 5.2V input to the Vcc terminal and a function of monitoring whether or not the payout control MPU4120a is operating normally, and is input to the Vcc terminal. When the voltage of + 5.2V reaches the threshold value (in this embodiment, it is set to 4.2V), a reset signal is output from the negative logic RESET terminal, or the payout control MPU4120a pays out control I / If the external WDT clear signal is not input to the CK terminal within the clear signal release time via the O port 4120b, a reset signal may be output from the negative logic reset terminal.

The TC terminal of the external WDT4120c is electrically connected to the grounded capacitor PC6, and the RCT terminal of the external WDT4120c is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR1 pulled up to the + 5.2V side. The clear signal release time described above can be set by the capacitance of the capacitor PC6 and the resistance value of the pull-up resistor PR1. In the present embodiment, the time 35 ms (= 1.75 ms × 20 times) corresponding to 20 times of the interrupt timer (1.75 ms) of the payout control MPU 4120a is set as the clear signal release time.

The negative logic RESET terminal of the external WDT4120c is electrically connected to the RST0 terminal which is the reset terminal of the payout control MPU4120a and the RESETN terminal which is the reset terminal of the payout control I / O port 4120b. The negative logic SETET terminal is an open collector output type, and is pulled up to the + 5.2V side by the pull-up resistor PR2. The voltage raised to the + 5.2V side is smoothed by removing ripples by the capacitor PC7 grounded to the ground (the capacitor PC7 also plays a role as a low-pass filter). When the voltage input to the Vcc terminal is larger than the threshold value, the negative logic RESET terminal is pulled up to the +5.2V side by the pull-up resistor PR1 and the logic becomes HI, and the RST0 terminal of the payout control MPU4120a and the payout control I While the voltage is input to the SETTN terminal of the / O port 4120b, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold value, the logic becomes LOW and the RST0 terminal of the payout control MPU4120a and the SETTN of the payout control I / O port 4120b. Input to the terminal.

Further, the negative logic SETET terminal is pulled up to + 5.2V side by the pull-up resistor PR2 when the external WDT clear signal input to the CK terminal is switched from ON to OFF within the clear signal release time and the external WDT clear signal is released. Then, the logic becomes HI and is input to the RST0 terminal of the payout control MPU4120a and the SETTN terminal of the payout control I / O port 4120b, while the external WDT clear signal input to the CK terminal is turned on within the clear signal release time. When the external WDT clear signal is not released, the logic becomes LOW and is input to the RST0 terminal of the payout control MPU4120a and the SETTN terminal of the payout control I / O port 4120b.

Since the RST0 terminal of the payout control MPU4120a and the RESET pin of the payout control I / O port 4120b are negative logic inputs, the voltage input to the Vcc terminal may be smaller than the threshold value or may be input to the CK terminal. When the external WDT clear signal is turned on within the clear signal release time and the external WDT clear signal is not released, the payout control MPU 4120a and the payout control I / O port 4120b are reset. A capacitor PC8 grounded to the ground is electrically connected to the Vs terminal of the external WDT4120c, and a capacitor PC9 grounded to the ground is electrically connected to the Vcc terminal. Ripple is removed and smoothed at + 5.2V input to the Vcc terminal by the capacitor PC9. Further, the GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the external WDT4120c, is grounded to the grant, and the positive logic SETET terminal of the external WDT4120c is not electrically connected to the outside.

[9-3-2. Payout control crystal oscillator]
As shown in FIG. 107, + 5.2V smoothed by removing the noise component by the payout control filter circuit 4110a is input to the VCS terminal which is the power supply terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0. This VCC terminal is electrically connected to the grounded capacitor PC10, and the + 5.2V input to the VCS terminal is further stripped of ripples and smoothed. Further, this smoothed + 5.2V is input to the OE terminal, which is the output enable terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, in addition to the VCS terminal. The payout control crystal oscillator PX0 outputs a clock signal of 8 MHz from the OUT terminal, which is an output terminal, by inputting +5.2 V to its OE terminal. The GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, is grounded to the grant.

The OUT terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0 is electrically connected to the MCLK terminal which is the clock terminal of the payout control MPU4120a and the CLK terminal which is the clock terminal of the payout control I / O port 4120b, and the 8 MHz clock signal is transmitted. It is input to the payout control MPU 4120a and the payout control I / O port 4120b.

[9-3-3. Payout motor drive circuit]
As shown in FIG. 107, the payout motor drive circuit 4120d mainly comprises the drive PIC1. This drive PIC1 includes four Darlington power transistors. In this embodiment, when the emitter terminal is grounded to the ground and the payout motor drive signal is input to the base terminal, it is an excitation signal from the corresponding collector terminal. The drive pulse is output.

As shown in FIG. 107, the + 24V supplied from the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. 102 is input to the cathode terminal of the drive PIC1 via the Zener diode PZD0. The anode terminal of the Zener diode PZD0 is electrically connected to + 24V, and the cathode terminal of the Zener diode PZD0 is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the drive PIC1. The + 24V input to the cathode terminal of the drive PIC1 serves as a drive power source for the payout motor 744. The base terminal of the drive PIC1 is electrically connected to the output pins PC0 to PC3 of the output port PC of the payout control I / O port 4120b, and corresponds to the payout motor drive signal output from the output pins PC0 to PC3. Drive pulses, which are excitation signals, are sent from the collector terminals to the resistors PR3 to PR6, and each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A) of the payout motor 744 via the substrate 754 in the prize ball case shown in FIG. Output to phase). These drive pulses are performed by switching the exciting current flowing through each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) of the payout motor 744, and rotate the payout motor 744. When the drive pulse (excitation signal) of each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) is cut off by this switching, a counter electromotive force is generated. If this counter electromotive force exceeds the withstand voltage of the drive PIC1, the drive PIC1 is damaged. Therefore, as protection, the cathode terminal of the drive PIC1 and the cathode terminal of the Zener diode PZD0 are electrically connected.

[9-3-4. Payout control input circuit]
The payout control input circuit 4120e is a circuit in which detection signals from the door frame opening switch 618, the main body frame opening switch 619, the error release switch 860a, and the ball removal switch 860b shown in FIG. 98 are input. First, a circuit in which the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618 is input will be described, followed by a circuit in which the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 619 is input, and a circuit in which the detection signal from the error release switch 860a is input. , The circuit in which the detection signal from the ball removal switch 860b is input will be described.

[9-3-4 (a). Circuit where the detection signal from the door frame open switch is input]
The door frame opening switch 618 uses a normally closed type (normally closed (NC)), and the switch is turned on (conducting) with the door frame 5 released from the main body frame 3, and the door frame 5 becomes the main body frame 3. The switch is turned off (disconnected) in the closed state. As shown in FIG. 108, + 12V from the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. 102 is applied to one end of the door frame opening switch 618 via the payout control board 4110, and the other end of the door frame opening switch 618 is It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR30 via the resistor PR30 and the resistor PR31. Between the connection between the resistor PR30 and the resistor PR31, the resistor PR32 grounded to the ground and the electrolytic capacitor PC30 grounded to the ground are electrically connected. The base terminal of the transistor PTR30 is electrically connected to the resistor PR31 and also electrically connected to the resistor PR33 grounded to the ground. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR30 is grounded to ground, and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR30 is pulled up to the + 5.2V side by the pull-up resistor PR34 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR31 via the resistor PR35. In addition, it is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR32 via a resistor PR36.

The base terminal of the transistor PTR31 is electrically connected to the resistor PR35 and also electrically connected to the resistor PR37 grounded to the ground. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR31 is grounded to ground, and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR31 is pulled up to the + 5.2V side by the pull-up resistor PR38, and the input ports PA and PE of the payout control I / O port 4120b shown in FIG. Of these, it is electrically connected to a predetermined input pin. When the transistor PTR31 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR31 is changed, and the signal is input to the input pin of the payout control I / O port 4120b as a door opening signal.

On the other hand, the base terminal of the transistor PTR32 is electrically connected to the resistor PR36 and also electrically connected to the resistor PR39 grounded to the ground. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR32 is grounded to the ground, the collector terminal of the transistor PTR32 is electrically connected to the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. 97, and the transistor PTR32 is open with the emitter terminal grounded to the ground. It is configured as a collector output type. The collector terminal of the transistor PTR32 is electrically connected to a pull-up resistor (not shown) provided on the main control board 4100 via a wiring (harness), and is pulled up to the + 12V side by this pull-up resistor. When the transistor PTR32 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR32 changes, and the signal is input to the main control board 4100 as a frame opening information output signal.

The circuit composed of the resistors PR30 and PR32 and the electrolytic capacitor PC30 has a door frame opening switch 618 when the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3 or when the door frame 5 is closed by the main body frame 3. This is a chattering prevention circuit for absorbing fluctuations in voltage from the door frame opening switch 618 due to a fluttering phenomenon in which the contacts constituting the above are repeatedly turned on and off for a short time.

The circuit composed of the resistors PR31, PR33 and the transistor PTR30 is a first-stage switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618, and the circuit composed of the resistors PR35, PR37 and the transistor PTR31 is This is the final stage switch circuit that outputs the door open signal to the payout control I / O port 4120b by turning it on / off by the ON / OFF signal from the first stage switch circuit, and consists of resistors PR36, PR39, and transistor PTR32. The circuit to be used is the final stage switch circuit that outputs the frame opening information output signal to the main control board 4100 by turning on / off by the ON / OFF signal from the first stage switch circuit.

When the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3, since the door frame opening switch 618 is ON, + 12V supplied via the door frame opening switch 618 is absorbed by the chattering prevention circuit and the chattering is absorbed in the first stage. When applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR30 constituting the switch circuit, the transistor PTR30 is turned on and the switch circuit of the first stage is turned on. When the switch circuit of the first stage is turned on, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR30 is lowered to the ground side, so that the voltage applied to the base terminals of the transistors PTR31 and PTR32 constituting the switch circuit of the final stage is also moved to the ground side. When the voltage is lowered, the transistors PTR31 and PTR32 are turned off, and the switch circuit in the final stage is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR31 is pulled up to the +5.2V side by the pull-up resistor PR38, and the door frame open signal whose logic is HI is output to the input pin of the payout control I / O port 4120b. Then, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR32 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor provided on the main control board 4100, and the frame opening information output signal whose logic is HI is output to the main control board 4100. It becomes.

On the other hand, when the door frame 5 is closed to the main body frame 3, the door frame opening switch 618 is turned off, so that + 12V is cut off by the door frame opening switch 618 and the base of the transistor PTR30 constituting the first stage switch circuit is formed. When the voltage applied to the terminal is lowered to the ground side, the transistor PTR30 is turned off and the switch circuit of the first stage is turned off. When the switch circuit of the first stage is turned off, the voltage is applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR30 and is raised to the +5.2V side by the pull-up resistor PR34. Therefore, this voltage is the base terminal of the transistors PTR31 and PTR32 constituting the switch circuit of the final stage. When applied to, the transistors PTR31 and PTR32 are turned on, and the switch circuit in the final stage is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR31 is lowered to the ground side, and the door frame open signal whose logic is LOW is output to the input pin of the payout control I / O port 4120b, and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR32 is output. The frame open information output signal whose logic is LOW by reducing the voltage applied to the main control board 4100 is output to the main control board 4100.

In this way, in the state where the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3, when the door frame opening switch 618 is turned on, the first stage switch circuit is turned on and the final stage switch circuit is turned off. The door frame opening signal whose logic is HI is output to the input pin of the payout control I / O port 4120b, and the frame opening information output signal whose logic is HI is output to the main control board 4100, while the door frame 5 is In the state of being closed to the main body frame 3, when the door frame opening switch 618 is turned off, the switch circuit of the first stage is turned off and the switch circuit of the final stage is turned on together, and the door frame whose logic is LOW. The release signal is output to the input pin of the payout control I / O port 4120b, and the frame opening information output signal whose logic is LOW is output to the main control board 4100.

[9-3-4 (b). Circuit to which the detection signal from the main body frame release switch is input]
The main body frame release switch 619 uses a normally closed type (normally closed (NC)), and the switch is turned on (conducting) while the main body frame 3 is released from the outer frame 2, and the main body frame 3 becomes the outer frame 2. The switch is turned off (disconnected) in the closed state. As shown in FIG. 108, + 12V from the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. 102 is applied to one end of the main body frame opening switch 619 via the payout control board 4110, and the other end of the main body frame opening switch 619 is applied. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR33 via the resistor PR40 and the resistor PR41. Between the connection between the resistor PR40 and the resistor PR41, the resistor PR42 grounded to the ground and the electrolytic capacitor PC31 grounded to the ground are electrically connected. The base terminal of the transistor PTR33 is electrically connected to the resistor PR41 and also electrically connected to the resistor PR43 grounded to the ground. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR33 is grounded to ground, and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR33 is pulled up to the + 5.2V side by the pull-up resistor PR44 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR34 via the resistor PR45. In addition, it is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR35 via a resistor PR46.

The base terminal of the transistor PTR34 is electrically connected to the resistor PR45 and also electrically connected to the resistor PR47 grounded to the ground. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR34 is grounded to ground, and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR34 is pulled up to the + 5.2V side by the pull-up resistor PR48, and the input ports PA and PE of the payout control I / O port 4120b shown in FIG. Of these, it is electrically connected to a predetermined input pin. When the transistor PTR34 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR34 is changed, and the signal is input to the input pin of the payout control I / O port 4120b as a main body frame opening signal.

On the other hand, the base terminal of the transistor PTR35 is electrically connected to the resistor PR46 and also electrically connected to the resistor PR49 grounded to the ground. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR35 is grounded to ground, and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR35 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR32 and also electrically connected to the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. 97. The transistor PTR35 is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded. The collector terminal of the transistor PTR35 is electrically connected to a pull-up resistor (not shown) provided on the main control board 4100 via a wiring (harness), and is pulled up to the + 12V side by this pull-up resistor. When the transistor PTR35 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR35 is changed, and the signal is input to the main control board 4100 as a frame opening information output signal. This frame open information output signal is output not only from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR35 but also from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR32, and is output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR35 and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR32. The OR circuit is configured.

The circuit composed of the resistors PR40, PR42, and the electrolytic capacitor PC31 has a main body frame release switch 619 when the main body frame 3 is released from the outer frame 2 or when the main body frame 3 is closed by the outer frame 2. This is a chattering prevention circuit for absorbing fluctuations in voltage from the main body frame opening switch 619 due to a fluttering phenomenon in which the contacts constituting the main body repeat ON / OFF for a short time.

The circuit composed of the resistors PR41, PR43 and the transistor PTR33 is a first-stage switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 619, and the circuit composed of the resistors PR45, PR47 and the transistor PTR34 is This is the final stage switch circuit that outputs the main body frame opening signal to the payout control I / O port 4120b by turning it on / off by the ON / OFF signal from the first stage switch circuit, from the resistors PR46, PR49, and the transistor PTR35. The configured circuit is the final stage switch circuit that outputs the frame opening information output signal to the main control board 4100 by turning on / off by the ON / OFF signal from the first stage switch circuit.

When the main body frame 3 is released from the outer frame 2, since the main body frame opening switch 619 is ON, + 12V supplied via the main body frame opening switch 619 is absorbed by the chattering prevention circuit in the first stage. When applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR33 constituting the switch circuit, the transistor PTR33 is turned on and the switch circuit of the first stage is turned on. When the switch circuit of the first stage is turned on, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR33 is lowered to the ground side, so that the voltage applied to the base terminals of the transistors PTR34 and PTR35 constituting the switch circuit of the final stage is also moved to the ground side. By pulling it down, the transistors PTR34 and PTR35 are turned off, and the switch circuit in the final stage is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR34 is pulled up to the +5.2V side by the pull-up resistor PR48, and the main body frame open signal whose logic is HI is output to the input pin of the payout control I / O port 4120b. Then, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR35 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor provided on the main control board 4100, and the frame opening information output signal whose logic is HI is output to the main control board 4100. It becomes.

On the other hand, in the state where the main body frame 3 is closed to the outer frame 2, since the main body frame opening switch 619 is OFF, + 12V is cut off by the main body frame opening switch 619 and the base of the transistor PTR33 constituting the first stage switch circuit. When the voltage applied to the terminal is lowered to the ground side, the transistor PTR33 is turned off, and the switch circuit of the first stage is turned off. When the switch circuit of the first stage is turned off, the voltage is applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR33 and is raised to the +5.2V side by the pull-up resistor PR44. Therefore, this voltage is the base terminal of the transistors PTR34 and PTR35 constituting the switch circuit of the final stage. When applied to, the transistors PTR34 and PTR35 are turned on, and the switch circuit in the final stage is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR34 is lowered to the ground side, and the main body frame open signal whose logic is LOW is output to the input pin of the payout control I / O port 4120b, and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR35. The frame open information output signal whose logic is LOW by reducing the voltage applied to the main control board 4100 is output to the main control board 4100.

In this way, when the main body frame 3 is released from the outer frame 2, the main body frame opening switch 619 is turned on, so that the first stage switch circuit is turned on and the final stage switch circuit is turned off. The main body frame opening signal whose logic is HI is output to the input pin of the payout control I / O port 4120b, and the frame opening information output signal whose logic is HI is output to the main control board 4100, while the main body frame 3 In the state of being closed to the outer frame 2, when the main body frame opening switch 619 is turned off, the switch circuit of the first stage is turned off and the switch circuit of the final stage is turned on together, and the main body frame whose logic is LOW. The release signal is output to the input pin of the payout control I / O port 4120b, and the frame opening information output signal whose logic is LOW is output to the main control board 4100.

In the present embodiment, as described above, by adopting the normally closed switch for the door frame opening switch 618 and the main body frame opening switch 619, the door frame opening switch 618 is short-circuited and the switch is turned on (conducting). Even if the door frame 5 is released from the main body frame 3 and the main body frame opening switch 619 is short-circuited and the switch is turned on (conducting), the main body frame 3 is released from the outer frame 2. It will be in a state of being. As described above, by adopting the normally closed switch for the door frame opening switch 618 and the main body frame opening switch 619, for example, the frame opening information output signal can be output to the main control board 4100 even in the case of a short circuit. The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 shown in the above can determine a state in which the door frame 5 is released from the main body frame 3 and a state in which the main body frame 3 is released from the outer frame 2.

If the door frame opening switch 618 and the main body frame opening switch 619 are changed from the normally closed switch to the normally open type (normally open (NO)) switch (door frame opening switch 618', main body frame opening switch 619'), , The door frame opening switch 618'turns on (conducts) when the door frame 5 is closed from the main body frame 3, and turns off (disconnects) when the door frame 5 is opened to the main body frame 3. .. The main body frame opening switch 619'turns on (conducts) when the main body frame 3 is closed from the outer frame 2, and turns off (disconnects) when the main body frame 3 is opened to the outer frame 2. Then, even if the door frame opening switch 618'is disconnected and the switch is turned off (disconnected), the door frame 5 is released from the main body frame 3 and the main body frame opening switch 619'is disconnected and the switch is switched. Is turned off (cut), but the main body frame 3 is released from the outer frame 2. In this way, even if the door frame opening switch 618'and the main body frame opening switch 619' are normally open switches, for example, the frame opening information output signal can be output to the main control board 4100 even when the wire is broken. The main control MPU 4100a of the control board 4100 can determine the state in which the door frame 5 is released from the main body frame 3 and the state in which the main body frame 3 is released from the outer frame 2.

[9-3-4 (c). Circuit to which the detection signal from the error release switch is input]
As shown in FIG. 108, the first pin as the output pin of the error release switch 860a is pulled up to the + 5.2V side by the pull-up resistor PR50, and the input port PA of the payout control I / O port 4120b shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the input pin PA0 of. Pin 1 of the error release switch 860a is electrically connected to pin 2, and pins 3 and 4 are grounded to ground. As a result, when the error release switch 860a is not operated, the 1st and 2nd pins are pulled up to the + 5.2V side by the pull-up resistor PR50, while when the error release switch 860a is operated, the 1st pin is pulled up. And the 2nd pin is pulled down to the ground side by being electrically connected to the 3rd and 4th pins.

The error release switch 860a is electrically connected to the input pin PA0 of the payout control I / O port 4120b, and is smoothed by removing ripples by the capacitor PC32 grounded to the ground (the capacitor PC32 is smoothed). It also plays a role as a low-pass filter). When the error release switch 860a is not operated, the error release detection signal that is pulled up to the +5.2V side by the pull-up resistor PR50 and whose logic becomes HI is input to the input pin PA0 of the payout control I / O port 4120b. On the other hand, when the error release switch 860a is operated, the error release detection signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input pin PA0 of the payout control I / O port 4120b.

[9-3-4 (d). Circuit to which the detection signal from the ball removal switch is input]
As shown in FIG. 108, the first pin as the output pin of the ball removal switch 860b is pulled up to the + 5.2V side by the pull-up resistor PR51, and the input port PA of the payout control I / O port 4120b shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the input pin PA1 of. Pin 1 of the ball removal switch 860b is electrically connected to pin 2, and pins 3 and 4 are grounded to ground. As a result, when the ball removal switch 860b is not operated, pins 1 and 2 are pulled up to the + 5.2V side by the pull-up resistor PR51, while when the ball removal switch 860b is operated, pin 1 is operated. And the 2nd pin is pulled down to the ground side by being electrically connected to the 3rd and 4th pins.

In addition to being electrically connected to the input pin PA1 of the payout control I / O port 4120b, the ball removal switch 860b is smoothed by removing ripples by a capacitor PC33 grounded to the ground (the capacitor PC33 is smoothed). It also plays a role as a low-pass filter). When the ball removal switch 860b is not operated, the ball removal detection signal that is pulled up to the +5.2V side by the pull-up resistor PR51 and whose logic is HI is input to the input pin PA1 of the payout control I / O port 4120b. On the other hand, when the ball removal switch 860b is operated, the ball removal detection signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input pin PA1 of the payout control I / O port 4120b.

[9-3-5. CR unit input / output circuit]
Next, the CR unit input / output circuit 4120f for inputting / outputting various signals with the CR unit 6 shown in FIG. 99 will be described. As described above, the payout control board 4110 includes the BRDY, which is a ball lending request signal, and the BRQ, which is a single payout operation start request signal, via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. , And the predetermined voltage VL (+ 12V) and ground LG created from AC24V supplied from the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. 99 are supplied, while the payout control board 4110 connects the game ball rental device. An XS signal indicating that one payout operation has started or ended, and a PRDY signal indicating that the payout operation for paying out the loaned ball is possible or impossible via the terminal board 869. And output. As shown in FIG. 109, the input / output circuits for inputting / outputting these various signals and the like are mainly composed of photocouplers PIC60 to PIC64 (infrared LED and phototransistor are built-in).

The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC60 via the resistor PR60. The cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC60 is electrically connected to the ground LG from the CR unit 6. The resistor PR60 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC60. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC60, the photocoupler PIC60 is turned on, while the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC60. Occasionally, the photocoupler PIC60 is turned off. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC60 is grounded to ground, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC60 is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR60 via the resistor PR61, and also the base of the transistor PTR61 via the resistor PR62. It is electrically connected to the terminal. The collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC60 is electrically connected to the resistor PR61 and also electrically connected to the pull-up resistor R63 pulled up to the + 5.2V side.

The base terminal of the transistor PTR60 is electrically connected to the resistor PR61 and also electrically connected to the resistor PR64 grounded to the ground. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR60 is grounded to ground, and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR60 is pulled up to the + 5.2V side by the pull-up resistor PR65, and the input ports PA and PE of the payout control I / O port 4120b shown in FIG. Of these, it is electrically connected to a predetermined input pin. When the transistor PTR60 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR60 is changed, and the signal is input to the input pin of the payout control I / O port 4120b as the CR connection signal 1.

On the other hand, the base terminal of the transistor TR61 is electrically connected to the resistor PR62 and also electrically connected to the resistor PR66 grounded to the ground. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR61 is grounded to ground, and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR61 is pulled up to the + 5.2V side by the pull-up resistor PR67 and is electrically connected to the emission timing circuit 4130c described later. When the transistor PTR61 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR61 is changed, and the signal is input to the emission timing circuit 4130c as a CR connection signal.

The circuit composed of the resistors PR61 and PR64 and the transistor PTR60 is a switch circuit, and when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC60, the photocoupler PIC60 is turned off and pulled. When the voltage pulled up by the up resistor PR63 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR60, the transistor PTR60 is turned on and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR60 is lowered to the ground side, and the CR connection signal 1 whose logic is LOW is input to the input pin of the payout control I / O port 4120b. On the other hand, when a predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC60, the photocoupler PIC60 is turned on and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR60 is lowered to the ground side. The PTR60 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR60 is pulled up to the +5.2V side by the pull-up resistor PTR65, and the CR connection signal 1 whose logic is HI is sent to the input pin of the payout control I / O port 4120b. Entered.

The circuit composed of the resistors PR62 and PR66 and the transistor PTR61 is also a switch circuit, and when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC60, the photocoupler PIC60 is turned off and pulled. When the voltage pulled up by the up resistor PR63 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR61, the transistor PTR61 is turned on and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR61 is lowered to the ground side, and the CR connection signal whose logic is LOW is input to the firing timing circuit 4130c. On the other hand, when a predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC60, the photocoupler PIC60 is turned on and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR61 is lowered to the ground side. The PTR61 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR61 is pulled up to the +5.2V side by the pull-up resistor PTR67, and the CR connection signal whose logic is HI is input to the firing timing circuit 4130c. It should be noted that this switch circuit constitutes a part of the input circuit of the launch control input circuit 4130a described later.

The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied not only to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC60 but also to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC61 via the resistor PR68. BRDY from the CR unit 6 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC61. The resistor PR68 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC61. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC61 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC61 is turned on while the photo When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the coupler PIC61 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC61 is turned off. There is. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC61 is grounded to the ground, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC61 is pulled up to the + 5.2V side by the pull-up resistor PR69, and among the input ports PA and PE of the payout control I / O port 4120b, It is electrically connected to the specified input pin. When the photocoupler PIC61 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC61 is changed, and the signal is input to the input pin of the payout control I / O port 4120b as a BRDY signal.

When a predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC61 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC61 is turned on and therefore the photo The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the coupler PIC61 is lowered to the ground side, and the BRDY signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input pin of the payout control I / O port 4120b. On the other hand, when a predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC61 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC61 is turned off. , The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC61 is pulled up to the +5.2V side by the pull-up resistor PR69, and the BRDY signal whose logic is HI is input to the input pin of the payout control I / O port 4120b. As described above, the logic of the BRDY signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC61 is the same as the logic of the BRDY from the CR unit 6.

The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied not only to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC60 and the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC61, but also to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC62 via the resistor PR70. The BRQ from the CR unit 6 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC62. The resistor PR70 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC62. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC62 and the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC62 is turned on while the photo is taken. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the coupler PIC 62 and the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photo coupler PIC 62 is turned off. There is. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC62 is grounded to the ground, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC62 is pulled up to the + 5.2V side by the pull-up resistor PR71, and among the input ports PA and PE of the payout control I / O port 4120b, in advance. It is electrically connected to the specified input pin. When the photocoupler PIC62 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC62 is changed, and the signal is input to the input pin of the payout control I / O port 4120b as a BRQ signal.

When a predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC62 and the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC62 is turned on and therefore the photo The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the coupler PIC62 is lowered to the ground side, and the BRQ signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input pin of the payout control I / O port 4120b. On the other hand, when a predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC62 and the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC62 is turned off. , The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC62 is pulled up to the +5.2V side by the pull-up resistor PR71, and the BRQ signal whose logic is HI is input to the input pin of the payout control I / O port 4120b. As described above, the logic of the BRQ signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC 62 is the same as the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6.

The XS signal output from the output pin PB0 of the output port PB of the payout control I / O port 4120b shown in FIG. 107 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC63 via the resistor PR72. + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC63 via the resistor PR73. The resistor PR73 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC63. When + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC63 via the resistor PR73 and the logic of the EXS signal from the payout control I / O port 4120b is LOW, the photocoupler PIC63 is turned on. On the other hand, when + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC63 via the resistor PR73 and the logic of the EXS signal from the payout control I / O port 4120b is HI, the photocoupler PIC63 It is designed to be turned off. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC63 is grounded with the ground LG from the CR unit 6 together with the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC60, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC63 is connected to a game ball rental device 869 by a pull-up resistor PR74. In the CR unit 6, the voltage is raised to a predetermined voltage VL and is electrically connected to the built-in control device. When the photocoupler PIC63 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC63 is changed, and the signal is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6 as EXS.

When + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC63 via the resistor PR73 and the logic of the EXS signal from the payout control I / O port 4120b is LOW, the photocoupler PIC63 is turned on. Therefore, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC63 is lowered to the ground side, and the EXS whose logic is LOW is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6. On the other hand, when + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC63 via the resistor PR73 and the logic of the EXS signal from the payout control I / O port 4120b is HI, the photocoupler PIC63 In order to turn it off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC63 is raised to a predetermined voltage VL by the pull-up resistor PR74, and the EXS whose logic is HI is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6. As described above, the logic of EXS output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC63 is the same logic as the logic of the EXS signal from the payout control I / O port 4120b.

The PRDY signal output from the output pin PB1 of the output port PB of the payout control I / O port 4120b shown in FIG. 107 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC64 via the resistor PR75. + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC64 via the resistor PR76. The resistor PR76 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC64. When + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC64 via the resistor PR76 and the logic of the PRDY signal from the payout control I / O port 4120b is LOW, the photocoupler PIC64 turns ON. On the other hand, when + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC64 via the resistor PR76 and the logic of the PRDY signal from the payout control I / O port 4120b is HI, the photocoupler PIC64 It is designed to be turned off. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC64 is grounded with the ground LG from the CR unit 6 together with the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC60 and the emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC63, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC64 is played by the pull-up resistor PR77. It is pulled up to a predetermined voltage VL in the CR unit 6 via a ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and is electrically connected to the built-in control device. When the photocoupler PIC64 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC64 changes, and the signal is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6 as a PRDY.

When + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC64 via the resistor PR77 and the logic of the PRDY signal from the payout control I / O port 4120b is LOW, the photocoupler PIC64 turns ON. Therefore, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC64 is lowered to the ground side, and the PRDY whose logic is LOW is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6. On the other hand, when + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC64 via the resistor PR77 and the logic of the PRDY signal from the payout control I / O port 4120b is HI, the photocoupler PIC64 In order to turn it off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC64 is raised to a predetermined voltage VL by the pull-up resistor PR77, and the PRDY whose logic is HI is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6. As described above, the logic of the PRDY output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC64 is the same as the logic of the PRDY signal from the payout control I / O port 4120b.

[9-3-6. Various input / output signals of the payout control I / O port]
Next, various input / output signals of the payout control I / O port 4120b will be described. The data input / output terminals D0 to D7 of the payout control I / O port 4120b exchange various information and various signals with the data input / output terminals D0 to D7 of the payout control MPU 4120a via the data bus.

As shown in FIG. 107, the RXD terminal, which is the serial data input terminal of the payout control I / O port 4120b, receives the serial data from the main control board 4100 as the main pay serial data reception signal. On the other hand, the serial data transmitted from the TXD terminal, which is the serial data output terminal of the payout control I / O port 4120b, to the main control board 4100 is output as the payer serial data transmission signal.

An error release detection signal from the error release switch 860a is input to each input pin of the input port PA of the payout control I / O port 4120b to the input pin PA0, and the ball is removed from the ball removal switch 860b to the input pin PA1. The detection signal is input, the main payment ACK signal from the main control board 4100 that notifies the completion of normal reception of the payer serial data reception signal is input to the input pin PA2, and the input pin PA3 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b. The power failure warning signal 1 is input. Further, each of the predetermined input pins of the input ports PA and PE of the payout control I / O port 4120b has a BRQ signal which is a single payout operation start request signal from the CR unit 6 and a ball lending request from the CR unit 6. Various signals from the CR unit 6 such as the BRDY signal, which is a signal, and the CR connection signal 1 that conveys whether or not the payout control board 4110 and the CR unit 6 are electrically connected, and the door from the door frame opening switch 618. In addition to the frame opening signal and the main body frame opening signal from the main body frame opening switch 619, a detection signal from the full tank switch 550 and the like are input.

On the other hand, from each output pin of the output port PB of the payout control I / O port 4120b, an EXE signal is output from the output pin PB0 to the effect that one payout operation has started or ended, and the output pin PB1 outputs an XS signal. , A PRDY signal indicating that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is possible or not is output, and the latch state of the D type flip-flop PIC22 of the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b is released from the output pin PB2. The power failure clear signal is output, the payer ACK signal is output from the output pin PB3 to the effect that the normal reception of the main pay serial data reception signal is completed, and the external WDT clear signal is output from the output pin PB4 to the external WDT4120c. Has been done. Further, a payout motor drive signal is output from the output pins PC0 to PC3 of the output port PC of the payout control I / O port 4120b, and an error LED is displayed from each output pin of the output port PD of the payout control I / O port 4120b. The drive signal of the device 860c is output.

[9-4. Launch control circuit]
Next, the launch control unit 4130 will be described. As shown in FIG. 98, the launch control unit 4130 includes a launch control input circuit 4130a, an oscillation circuit 4130b, a launch timing circuit 4130c, a launch solenoid drive circuit 4130d, and a ball feed solenoid drive circuit 4130e. Here, the launch control input circuit will be described with reference to FIG. 110, and a detailed description of the configuration of the launch timing circuit 4130c and the like will be described later.

[9-4-1. Launch control input circuit]
As shown in FIG. 110, the launch control input circuit 4130a of the payout control board 4110 has a handle relay of a detection signal from the touch switch 516 of the handle device 500 and a detection signal from the launch stop switch 518 of the handle device 500. Input is performed via the board 192 and the main door relay terminal board 880. The touch switch 516 detects whether or not the palm or finger is touching the rotary handle body front 506 of the handle device 500 shown in FIG. 47, and the launch stop switch 518 is a single-shot button of the handle device 500 shown in FIG. It is detected whether or not the launch of the game ball is forcibly stopped by the player's will by operating the 520. First, a circuit in which the detection signal from the touch switch 516 is input will be described, and then a circuit in which the detection signal from the launch stop switch 518 is input will be described.

[9-4-1a. Circuit where the detection signal from the touch switch is input]
As shown in FIG. 110, + 12V from the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. 102 is applied to one end of the touch switch 516 via the resistor PR80 of the payout control board 4110, the main door relay terminal board 880, and the handle relay board 192. The other end of the touch switch 516 is pulled up to the + 12V side by a pull-up resistor (not shown) provided on the handle relay board 192, and is input to the main door relay terminal board 880 and the payout control board 4110 to press the resistor PR81. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR80 via. The base terminal of the transistor PTR80 is electrically connected to the resistor PR81, and the resistor PR82 grounded to the ground and the capacitor PC80 grounded to the ground are electrically connected. The voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR80 is smoothed by removing noise by the capacitor C80. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR80 is grounded to ground, and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR80 is pulled up to the + 5.2V side by the pull-up resistor PR83 and electrically connected to the input terminal of the emission timing circuit 4130c. When the transistor PTR80 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR80 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal of the emission timing circuit 4130c as a touch detection signal.

The circuit composed of the resistors PR81, PR82, and the transistor PTR80 is a switch circuit that turns ON / OFF by the detection signal from the touch switch 516. When the palm or finger is not touching the rotary handle body front 506, the handle relay board When the voltage pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor provided in 192 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR80, the transistor PTR80 is turned on and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR80 is lowered to the ground side, and the touch detection signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal of the firing timing circuit 4130c. On the other hand, when the palm or finger touches the front 506 of the rotary handle body, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR80 is lowered to the ground side, the transistor PTR80 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR80 is pulled up to the +5.2V side by the pull-up resistor PR83, and the touch detection signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal of the firing timing circuit 4130c.

[9-4-1b. Circuit to which the detection signal from the launch stop switch is input]
As shown in FIG. 110, one end of the launch stop switch 518 receives + 12V from the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. 102 via the resistor PR84 of the payout control board 4110, the main door relay terminal board 880, and the handle relay board 192. The other end of the launch stop switch 518 is applied and is pulled up to the + 12V side by a pull-up resistor (not shown) provided on the handle relay board 192, and is input to the main door relay terminal board 880 and the payout control board 4110 to resist. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR81 via PR85. The base terminal of the transistor PTR81 is electrically connected to the resistor PR85, and the resistor PR86 grounded to the ground and the capacitor PC81 grounded to the ground are electrically connected. The voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR81 is smoothed by removing noise by the capacitor C81. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR81 is grounded to ground, and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR81 is pulled up to the + 5.2V side by the pull-up resistor PR87 and is electrically connected to the input terminal of the emission timing circuit 4130c. When the transistor PTR81 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR81 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal of the firing timing circuit 4130c as a firing stop detection signal.

The circuit composed of the resistors PR85 and PR86 and the transistor PTR81 is a switch circuit that turns ON / OFF by a detection signal from the firing stop switch 518, and is provided on the handle relay board 192 when the single-shot button 520 is not operated. When the voltage pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor is applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR81, the transistor PTR81 is turned on and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR81 is lowered to the ground side, and the launch stop detection signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal of the launch timing circuit 4130c. On the other hand, when the single-shot button 520 is operated, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR81 is lowered to the ground side, the transistor PTR81 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR81 is pulled up to the +5.2V side by the pull-up resistor PR87, and the launch stop detection signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal of the launch timing circuit 4130c.

The switch circuit composed of the resistors PR62 and PR66 and the transistor PTR61 shown in FIG. 109 is also a part of the input circuit of the emission control input circuit 4130a, and the CR connection signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR61. Is also input to the firing timing circuit 4130c in addition to the touch detection signal and the firing stop signal described above.

[9-5. Various input / output signals to and from the main control board, and various output signals to the external terminal board]
Next, various input / output signals between the payout control board 4110 and the main control board 4100 and various output signals from the payout control board 4110 to the external terminal board 784 will be described with reference to FIG. 111.

[9-5-1. Various input / output signals with the main control board]
The payout control board 4110 exchanges various input / output signals with the main control board 4100. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 111A, the payout control board 4110 transmits the payer serial data transmission signal, the payer ACK signal, the power failure warning signal, the frame opening information output information, and the like to the main control board 4100. Output. On the other hand, in the payout control board 4110, in addition to the main payment serial data reception signal, main payment ACK signal, and RAM clear signal, a 15-round jackpot information output signal, a jackpot information output signal such as a 2-round jackpot information output signal, and probability variation A game information signal related to the game, such as a medium information output signal, a special symbol display information output signal, a normal symbol display information output signal, a time saving medium information output signal, and a start opening winning information output signal, is input from the main control board 4100.

[9-5-2. Various output signals to the external terminal board]
The payout control board 4110 outputs various signals to the external terminal board 784. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 111B, in addition to the door frame opening signal and the main body frame opening signal, a prize ball indicating the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 744 shown in FIG. 70. In addition to the number information output signal, the jackpot information output signal such as the 15-round jackpot information output signal and the 2-round jackpot information output signal from the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4110, the information output signal during probability fluctuation, special A game information signal such as a symbol display information output signal, a normal symbol display information output signal, a time saving / medium information output signal, and a start opening winning information output signal is output to the external terminal board 784.

The external terminal plate 784 is electrically connected to a hall computer installed in a game hall (hall) (not shown), and monitors the player's game or the like. When the 15-round jackpot information output signal or the 2-round jackpot information output signal is output to the hall computer as one jackpot information output signal, the hall computer has the number of jackpots in which the round is 2 times (2 round jackpot). The number of big hits in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the sum of the number of big hits in which the number of rounds is 15 (the number of big hits in 15 rounds). For this reason, the hall computer cannot grasp the number of occurrences of 2-round jackpots and the number of occurrences of 15-land jackpots from the total number of jackpots, so that the number of jackpots actually generated by the pachinko gaming machine 1 is large. However, it is not possible to grasp whether it is a 2-round jackpot or a 15-round jackpot. Further, a data counter (not shown) is arranged above the pachinko gaming machine 1, and some players may or may not play the game by referring to the number of occurrences of the jackpot gaming state displayed on the data counter. Some people choose. However, the number of occurrences of the jackpot game state displayed on the data counter may actually be biased to the number of occurrences of the two-round jackpot, so even if the player starts the game, only two rounds of jackpots occur. In some cases, the 15-round jackpot does not occur easily. In this way, the number of occurrences of the jackpot gaming state displayed on the data counter can give the player a sense of expectation, but may unnecessarily arouse the player's gambling spirit. Therefore, in the present embodiment, as the jackpot information output signal, the 15-round jackpot information output signal and the 2-round jackpot information output signal are separately output to the hall computer, so that the hall computer can determine the number of occurrences of the 2-round jackpot and the number of occurrences of the 2-round jackpot. It is possible to accurately grasp the number of big hits in 15 rounds. Therefore, the hall computer can grasp whether the number of big hits actually generated in the pachinko game machine 1 is a 2-round big hit or a 15-round big hit, and the data counter has 15 Since the number of round jackpots and the number of 2-round jackpots can be displayed separately or only the number of 15-round jackpots can be displayed as the number of jackpot gaming states, the player's gambling spirit can be stimulated more than necessary. Nor.

In the present embodiment, the 2-round jackpot information output signal is in a state of being output to the hall computer during the period from the occurrence of the 2-round jackpot to the end, and the 15-round jackpot information output signal is also the 15-round jackpot. It is in the state of being output to the hall computer during the period from the occurrence to the end. In addition to the method of outputting the 2-round jackpot information output signal and the 15-round jackpot information output signal to the hall computer as in the present embodiment, for example, when a 2-round jackpot occurs, the 2-round jackpot information output signal is output only for a predetermined period. Such a 2-round jackpot information output signal and 15-round jackpot information are output to the hall computer, and when a 15-round jackpot occurs, the 15-round jackpot information output signal is output to the hall computer for a predetermined period. A method of outputting the output signal to the hall computer for the same predetermined period can also be mentioned.

[10. How to drive the firing solenoid]
Next, the driving method of the firing solenoid 654 shown in FIG. 63 will be described with reference to FIGS. 112 to 115. FIG. 112 is a block diagram showing a drive circuit of a firing solenoid, FIG. 113 is a circuit diagram showing a shunt regulator circuit, an amplifier circuit, and an operational amplifier circuit group, and FIG. 114 is a diagram showing characteristics of a DC / DC converter. 115 is a timing chart of a predetermined point in the drive circuit of the firing solenoid of FIG. 112. First, the drive system of the firing solenoid 654 will be described, and then the input / output current, the output voltage, the logic of the signal, the waveform, and the like at a predetermined point of the drive circuit will be described.

[10-1. Launch solenoid drive system]
As shown in FIG. 112, the drive system of the launch solenoid 654 mainly includes a launch control input circuit 4130a, a transmission circuit 4130b, a launch timing circuit 4130c, a launch solenoid drive circuit 4130d, and a ball of the launch control unit 4130 in the payout control board 4110. It is composed of a feed solenoid drive circuit 4130e, a DC / DC converter 831a of a firing power supply board 831, an electrolytic capacitor SC0, a power factor improving circuit 851b of the power supply board 851, and a smoothing circuit 851c.

In the launch control input circuit 4130a, as described above, when the CR unit 6 is electrically connected to the payout control board 4110 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869, the CR unit 6 is connected to the pachinko game machine 1. A touch switch 516 that inputs a signal indicating that power (AC24V) is being supplied and outputs it as a CR connection signal to the firing timing circuit 4130c to detect whether or not the palm or finger is touching the rotary handle main body front 506. When the detection signal from is input, it is output to the firing timing circuit 4130c as a touch detection signal, and detection from the firing stop switch 518 that detects whether or not the launch of the game ball is forcibly stopped by the player's will. When the signal is input, it is output to the firing timing circuit 4130c as a firing stop detection signal.

The launch timing circuit 4130c permits or prohibits the launch of the game ball by the launch solenoid 654 based on the CR connection signal, the touch detection signal, and the launch stop detection signal from the launch control input circuit 4130a. Specifically, in the launch timing circuit 4130c, the CR connection signal is not input because the CR unit 6 is not electrically connected to the payout control board 4110 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869. The first case, the second case that the touch detection signal tells the 506 in front of the rotating handle body that the palm or the finger is not touching, the second case that the launch stop detection signal forcibly stops the launch of the game ball. In the third case of telling, the launch of the game ball by the launch solenoid 654 is prohibited when at least one is applicable, while the launch of the game ball by the launch solenoid 654 is permitted when all of the cases are not applicable.

A clock signal from the transmission circuit 4130b is input to the launch timing circuit 4130c, and when the launch of the game ball by the launch solenoid 654 is permitted, 100 game balls per minute are generated in FIG. 95 based on this clock signal. A launch reference pulse is generated so as to be launched toward the game area 1100 shown in the above, and is output to the launch solenoid drive circuit 4130d, and the launch reference pulse is multiplied by a predetermined number (5 times in this embodiment). Is generated and output to the ball feed solenoid drive circuit 4130e. The firing solenoid drive circuit 4130d drives the firing solenoid 654 of the ball launching device 650 by a combined current obtained by merging the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current due to the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0. On the other hand, the ball feed solenoid drive circuit 4130e drives the ball feed solenoid 585 by + 24 V from the power supply board 851.

The firing solenoid drive circuit 4130d is mainly composed of a shunt regulator circuit 4130da, an amplifier circuit 4130db, a voltage comparison circuit 4130dc, and a switching circuit 4130dd. The shunt regulator circuit 4130da is supplied with + 5.2V created by the + 5.2V creation circuit 851d of the power supply board 851, and the regulated DC + 2.5V (DC + 2.5V, hereinafter, "" from this + 5.2V. It is described as "+ 2.5V") and supplied to the amplifier circuit 4130db.

As shown in FIG. 113 (a), the shunt regulator circuit 4130da mainly comprises the shunt type regulated power supply circuit PIC90. The shunt-type regulated power supply circuit PIC90 has reduced temperature drift due to ambient temperature, and can create and supply a regulated power supply that is maintained at a constant voltage with respect to a load. +5.2V is applied to the REF terminal, which is the reference voltage input terminal of the shunt-type regulated power supply circuit PIC90, and the K terminal, which is the cathode terminal, via the resistor PR90, and is input to the REF terminal by this resistor PR90. The current is limited. The K terminal outputs + 2.5V to the amplifier circuit 4130db. This + 2.5V is smoothed by removing ripples (AC components folded by the voltage) by the capacitor PC90 grounded to the ground (the capacitor PC90 also plays a role as a low-pass filter). The A terminal, which is the anode terminal of the shunt-type regulated power supply circuit PIC90, is grounded to ground (GND).

Returning to FIG. 112, the amplifier circuit 4130db doubles the +2.5 from the shunt regulator circuit 4130da to create a direct current + 5.0V (DC + 5.0V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 5.0V”). It is supplied to the potentiometer 512 in the handle device 500 via the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the handle relay board 192.

As shown in FIG. 113A, the amplifier circuit 4130db mainly includes the operational amplifier PIC91. The operational amplifier PIC91 is configured as a non-inverting amplifier circuit, and + 2.5V from the shunt type stabilized power supply circuit PIC90 of the shunt regulator circuit 4130da is applied to the non-inverting input terminal (+ terminal) of the operational amplifier PIC91, and the operational amplifier PIC91 The other end of the resistor PR92, one end of which is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR91 grounded to the ground, and the other end of the resistor PR92, one end of which is electrically connected to the output terminal of the operational amplifier PIC91. Is electrically connected to. The resistance values of the resistors PR91 and PR92 are set so that the amplification factor (flat loop gain) of the operational amplifier PIC91 is doubled. The output terminal of the operational amplifier PIC91 is + 5.0V, which is obtained by doubling the + 2.5V applied to the non-inverting input terminal (+ terminal) of the operational amplifier PIC91, as described above, the main door relay terminal board 880, and the handle. It is supplied to the potentiometer 512 in the handle device 500 via the relay board 192. This + 5.0V is smoothed by removing ripples (AC components folded by the voltage) by the capacitor PC91 grounded to the ground (the capacitor PC91 also plays a role as a low-pass filter). The + 24V input to the power supply terminal of the operational amplifier PIC91 is smoothed by removing ripples by the capacitor PC92 grounded and grounded.

Returning to FIG. 112, the potentiometer 512 is a three-terminal variable resistor, provided with a first fixed terminal, a second fixed terminal, and a variable terminal, and the first fixed terminal is + 5.0 V from the amplifier circuit 4130db described above. Is supplied, and the second fixed terminal is electrically connected to the resistor PR100 of the firing solenoid drive circuit 4130d in the payout control board 4110 via the handle relay board 192 and the main door relay terminal board 880. The other end of the resistor PR100 is grounded to the ground. When the rotary handle main body front 506 is rotated, the detection shaft portion 512a of the potentiometer 512 also rotates, and the voltage applied to the first fixed terminal and the second fixed terminal is applied to the rotary handle main body front 506. The voltage is divided according to the rotation operation of the potentiometer 512, that is, according to the rotation position of the detection shaft portion 512a of the potentiometer 512, and the divided voltage can be taken out from the variable terminal of the potentiometer 512. The voltage taken out from the variable terminal of the potentiometer 512 is passed through the handle relay board 192 and the main door relay terminal board 880, and the resistors PR93 and PR94 described later in the firing solenoid drive circuit 4130d of the payout control board 4110 (FIG. 113 (b)). The voltage is divided by (see), and the voltage taken over by the divided resistor PR94 is applied to the voltage comparison circuit 4130 dc as the emission intensity target voltage.

As described above, the voltage taken out from the variable terminal of the potentiometer 512 of the handle device 500 is grounded to the ground via the handle relay board 192 and the main door relay terminal plate 880 as shown in FIG. 113 (b). Ripple (AC component folded by voltage) is removed and smoothed by the capacitor PC93 (the capacitor PC93 also plays a role as a low-pass filter), and the firing solenoid drive circuit 4130d of the payout control board 4110 It is applied to a group of operational amplifier circuits configured as a voltage follower. As shown in FIG. 113 (b), this operational amplifier circuit group mainly includes an operational amplifier PIC92 in the first stage and an operational amplifier PIC93 in the latter stage. The voltage from the handle device 500 is a voltage on the order of bolts and is applied to the non-inverting input terminal (+ terminal) of the first-stage operational amplifier PIC 92. The inverting input terminal (− terminal) of the first-stage operational amplifier PIC92 is electrically connected to the output terminal of the first-stage operational amplifier PIC92. The output terminal of the operational amplifier PIC92 in the first stage doubling the voltage applied to the non-inverting input terminal (+ terminal) of the operational amplifier PIC92, that is, outputs the voltage as it is in bolt order. Although the first-stage operational amplifier PIC92 simply outputs the input voltage, which is a voltage on the order of bolts, the first-stage input side circuit for applying the voltage from the handle device 500 and the voltage are output to the subsequent-stage operational amplifier PIC93. The circuit is separated from the first stage output side circuit for this purpose. As a result, the voltage can be transmitted as a signal from the first-stage input side circuit to the first-stage output side circuit, and the influence of the first-stage output side circuit can be eliminated from the first-stage input side circuit. The + 24V input to the power supply terminal of the operational amplifier PIC92 is smoothed by removing ripples by the capacitor PC94 grounded to the ground.

The output terminal of the operational amplifier PIC92 in the first stage is electrically connected to one end of the resistor PR93 in addition to its own inverting input terminal (-terminal), and the other end of the resistor PR93 is the non-inverting input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier PIC93 in the subsequent stage. It is electrically connected to the + terminal). The non-inverting input terminal (+ terminal) of the operational amplifier PIC93 in the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR94 whose one end is grounded to the ground in addition to the other end of the resistor PR93. As a result, the voltage from the output end of the first-stage operational amplifier PIC92 is a voltage on the order of bolts because the input voltage, which is the voltage on the order of bolts, is simply output as it is, and is divided by the resistors PR93 and PR94. The voltage under pressure and the voltage divided by the divided resistor PR94 is applied to the non-inverting input terminal (+ terminal) of the operational amplifier PIC93 in the subsequent stage as a voltage on the order of millivolts. The inverting input terminal (− terminal) of the operational amplifier PIC93 in the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the output terminal of the operational amplifier PIC93 in the subsequent stage. The output terminal of the operational amplifier PIC93 in the subsequent stage is the voltage applied to the non-inverting input terminal (+ terminal) of the operational amplifier PIC92, that is, the voltage on the order of millivolts is output to the voltage comparison circuit 4130dc as the emission intensity target voltage. To do. The operational amplifier PIC93 in the subsequent stage simply outputs the input voltage, which is the voltage of the millivolt-order resistors PR94, divided by the resistors PR93 and PR94, but the millivolt-order resistors divided by the resistors PR93 and PR94. The circuit separation of the post-stage input side circuit for applying the voltage handled by the PR94 and the post-stage output side circuit for outputting the voltage to the voltage comparison circuit 4130dc is realized. As a result, the voltage can be transmitted as a signal from the rear-stage input side circuit to the rear-stage output side circuit, and the influence of the rear-stage output side circuit can be eliminated from the rear-stage input side circuit. The + 24V input to the power supply terminal of the operational amplifier PIC93 is smoothed by removing ripples by the capacitor PC95 grounded to the ground.

Returning to FIG. 112, the current flowing through the launch solenoid 654 of the ball launching device 650 flows through the resistor PR101 whose one end is grounded to the ground, and the voltage on the order of millivolts taken over by this resistor PR101 is used as the launch control voltage in the voltage comparison circuit. It is applied to 4130 dc. A firing intensity target voltage, which is a voltage on the order of millivolts described above, is also applied to the voltage comparison circuit 4130 dc. As described above, the emission control voltage and the emission intensity target voltage to be compared by the voltage comparison circuit 4130dc are resistances from the voltage on the order of bolts to the voltage on the order of millivolts on the payout control board 4110 (emission solenoid drive circuit 4130d) as described above. The voltage is stepped down by the voltage handled by PR101 and PR94, respectively. That is, since the wiring pattern is applied via the wiring pattern formed on the payout control board 4110, this wiring pattern is not easily affected by noise, and the voltage comparison circuit 4130dc has a voltage on the order of millivolts, and the emission control voltage and the emission intensity target voltage. The wiring (harness) is used between the payout control board 4110 and the ball launching device 650, and between the payout control board 4110 and the handle device 500. Since they are electrically connected to each other, the wiring (harness) is easily affected by noise, and the voltage on the order of bolts suppresses the influence of noise between the substrate devices.

The voltage comparison circuit 4130dc is an inverting circuit that compares the magnitude of the emission control voltage and the emission intensity target voltage, and outputs the comparison result to the switching circuit 4130dc. The comparison result by the voltage comparison circuit 4130dc is a logical output of HI or LOW, and when the firing control voltage is larger than the firing intensity target voltage, it becomes LOW (hereinafter, referred to as “L”), while the firing control voltage. When is smaller than the firing intensity target voltage, it becomes HI (hereinafter, referred to as "H"). As described above, since the output logic is H or L depending on the comparison result by the voltage comparison circuit 4130dc, the output signal is input to the switching circuit 4130dd as an ON / OFF signal.

The switching circuit 4130dd is provided with the current from the DC / DC converter 831a provided in the firing power supply board 831 according to the ON / OFF signal from the voltage comparison circuit 4130dc each time the firing reference pulse from the firing timing circuit 4130c is input. The combined current of the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 and the combined current is passed through the firing solenoid 654 of the ball launching device 650. Specifically, when the ON signal from the voltage comparison circuit 4130dc is input, the switching circuit 4130dd produces a merged current in which the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current due to the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 are merged. While flowing through the firing solenoid 654, when an OFF signal from the voltage comparison circuit 4130dc is input, the current flowing through the firing solenoid 654 is cut off. That is, in the switching circuit 4130dd, the ON signal from the voltage comparison circuit 4130dc is input, and the combined current obtained by merging the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current due to the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is sent to the firing solenoid 654. When the voltage divided by the resistor PR101 becomes larger than the firing intensity target voltage as the firing control voltage of the current flowing through the firing solenoid 654 while flowing, the output logic of the voltage comparison circuit 4130dc becomes L and is turned off. The signal is output to the switching circuit 4130dd, and the switching circuit 4130dd cuts off the constant current flowing through the firing solenoid 654. Due to this interruption, the current does not flow through the firing solenoid 654, so that the firing control voltage becomes smaller than the firing intensity target voltage, the output logic of the voltage comparison circuit 4130dc becomes H again, the ON signal is output to the switching circuit 4130dd, and the switching circuit. As described above, the 4130dd causes a merged current in which the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current due to the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 are merged to flow through the firing solenoid 654. In this way, according to the ON / OFF signal from the voltage comparison circuit 4130dc, the switching circuit 4130dd generates the combined current in which the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current due to the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 are combined to generate the firing solenoid 654. The switching circuit 4130dd controls the current to flow to the firing solenoid by self-exciting to the ON / OFF signal from the voltage comparison circuit 4130dc in order to flow the current to the circuit or cut off the constant current. That is, the switching circuit 4130dd functions as a "self-excited oscillation constant current circuit", and brings the emission control voltage closer to the emission intensity target voltage. As a result, the rotary handle main body front 506 is rotated and the firing solenoid 654 is driven with a firing intensity commensurate with the rotation position of the rotary handle main body front 506 to launch the game ball toward the game area 1100.

When the player touches the rotary handle body front 506 and is in the original rotation position where the rotary handle body front 506 is not rotated, the voltage taken out from the variable terminal of the potentiometer 512 is fixed to the second of the potentiometer 512. It is the voltage that the resistor PR100 applied to the terminal is in charge of. That is, the voltage handled by the resistor PR100 is applied as an offset voltage to the second fixed terminal of the potentiometer 512. This offset voltage is applied to the operational amplifier circuit group configured as the voltage follower described above, and is applied to the voltage comparison circuit 4130 dc as the emission intensity target voltage. In this case, when the ON signal from the voltage comparison circuit 4130dc is output to the switching circuit 4130dd, the switching circuit 4130dd merges the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current due to the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0. The combined current is passed through the firing solenoid 654. The current output from the DC / DC converter 831a is the minimum output current. The firing intensity of the firing solenoid 654 at this time is at least jumping over the firing rail 660 shown in FIG. That is, when the voltage applied to the resistor PR100 is the emission intensity target voltage, the current corresponding to the voltage (the minimum output current output from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current due to the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 are merged. When the combined current) flows through the firing solenoid 654, the game ball launched by the firing solenoid 654 can jump over the firing rail 660, but is along the outer rail 1111 of the game board 4 shown in FIG. Since the game area 1100 cannot be reached, the foul ball is received and collected at the foul ball entrance 542e of the foul cover unit 540 shown in FIG. 1 located at the lower part of the foul space 626. In other words, when the voltage applied to the resistor PR100 is applied to the operational amplifier circuit group configured as the voltage follower and applied to the voltage comparison circuit 4130dc as the emission intensity target voltage, the current flowing through the emission solenoid 654 is the minimum current. However, even if this minimum current flows through the firing solenoid 654, all the launched game balls are recovered as foul balls. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball feed solenoid 585 from overlapping with the game ball sent to the launch rail 660, thereby preventing the launch solenoid 654 from launching the overlapping game ball toward the game area 1100. At the same time, it is possible to prevent an applied load to the firing solenoid 654, and it is also possible to prevent a failure.

Further, as described above, the offset voltage is set to a voltage for obtaining the minimum firing intensity corresponding to the original rotation position when the rotation position of the rotary handle main body front 506 is in the original rotation position, so that the minimum firing strength is obtained. The game ball launched along the launch rail 660 and the outer rail 1111 by the hit ball launcher 650 is received as a foul ball at the foul ball entrance 542e of the foul cover unit 540 located at the lower part of the foul space 626 and all collected. It has become so. As a result, when the player starts the rotation operation of the rotary handle main body front 506, all the game balls even if the player cannot rotate the rotary handle main body front 506 to increase the firing intensity. Is capable of jumping over the launch rail 660, so that it is possible to prevent the game balls from colliding with each other on the launch rail 660. Therefore, before the next game ball is launched by the launch solenoid 654, the player rotates the rotary handle main body 506 to increase the launch strength, so that the game ball launched this time with the launch strength is placed on the outer rail. It is possible to collide with the previously launched game ball descending along 1111 and cause the game ball launched this time together with the previously launched game ball to jump out to the game area 1100, and temporarily to the game area 1100. Even if it cannot be popped out, it will be received as a foul ball at the foul ball entrance 542e of the foul cover unit 540, which is located at the lower part of the foul space 626, and all will be collected. In other words, even if the player cannot increase the firing strength by rotating the rotary handle body front 506, the launching strength is given to jump over the launch rail 660, so that the launched game ball is launched. Will not collide on the launch rail 660 and cause ball clogging. In addition, when the player rotates the rotary handle main body 506 to increase the firing strength, the game ball launched this time with the firing strength is moved down along the outer rail 1111 to the previously launched game ball. The foul ball of the foul cover unit 540, which is located at the lower part of the foul space 626 as a foul ball, even if the game ball launched this time cannot be ejected to the game area 1100 together with the game ball launched last time by colliding. Since it is received at the entrance 542e and all of it is collected, the player can rotate the rotary handle main body 506 to further increase the firing strength, so that the game ball can be ejected to the game area 1100 without causing ball clogging. .. That is, the game ball launched this time is made to collide with the previously launched game ball descending along the outer and inner rails 1111 and the game ball launched this time is jumped out into the game area 1100 together with the previously launched game ball. Even if it is not possible to make the player feel uncomfortable, the player can rotate the rotary handle body 506 to further increase the firing strength, so that the game ball can be played without clogging. Since it can be projected to the region 1100, the discomfort can be eliminated. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the discomfort of the player due to the ball clogging at the start of the rotation operation of the rotation handle main body front 506.

In the present embodiment, by adopting the shunt type stabilized power supply circuit PIC90 for the shunt regulator circuit 4130da, the emission intensity target voltage applied to the voltage comparison circuit 4130dc is + 2.5V, which is a constant voltage from the shunt regulator circuit 4130da. The + 5.0V amplified by the amplifier circuit 4130db is divided by the potentiometer 512 of the handle device 500, so that the divided voltage is also maintained at the same rotation position of the rotation handle body front 506. When it is set, the voltage is maintained at a constant voltage without fluctuation. As a result, the switching circuit 4130dd causes the launch control voltage to approach the launch intensity target voltage by passing a merged current through the launch solenoid 654 of the ball launching device 650, and rotates when the launch control voltage becomes the same as the launch intensity target voltage. When the rotation position of the front of the handle body 506 is held at the same rotation position, the merged current flowing through the firing solenoid 654 does not fluctuate and a constant current flows. Therefore, the firing solenoid 654 moves the game ball through the game area 1100. The firing intensity to launch toward is the same. Therefore, it is possible to prevent "flying unevenness" of the game ball due to the drive firing of the firing solenoid 654.

Further, in the pachinko island facility where the pachinko game machine 1 is installed, a game ball circulation system is constructed in which the game balls discharged from the plurality of pachinko game machines are polished and supplied to the pachinko game machines again. For this reason, the temperature inside the pachinko island facility is extremely high due to the heat generated by polishing the game balls, the heat generated by collisions and friction between the game balls, and the heat generated by the power supply board of the pachinko game machine and various lighting. .. In the present embodiment, as described above, by adopting the shunt type stabilized power supply circuit PIC90 for the shunt regulator circuit 4130da, + 2.5V is stabilized even in an environment where heat is trapped in the pachinko machine. It can be output. As a result, the voltage taken out from the variable terminal of the potentiometer 512, that is, the "fluctuation" of the firing intensity target voltage can be suppressed by suppressing the fluctuation of + 2.5V due to the temperature, so that the voltage corresponding to this "fluctuation" can be suppressed. The voltage comparison circuit 4130dc can output a control signal to the switching circuit 4130dd without including. That is, when the rotation position of the rotation handle main body front 506 is the same rotation position, "unevenness" can be suppressed in the firing intensity of launching the game ball toward the game area 1100, so that "flying unevenness" of the game ball is suppressed. be able to.

[10-2. DC / DC converter input / output current and output voltage]
Next, the input / output current and the output voltage of the DC / DC converter 831a will be described with reference to FIG. 114 with reference to the input current at the TA point and the output current and the output voltage at the TB point shown in FIG. 112. The TA point is a point for referring to the input current Iin of the DC / DC converter 831a, and the TB point is a point for referring to the output current Iout and the output voltage Vout of the DC / DC converter 831a. The output voltage Vout is a potential difference from the ground.

First, as shown in FIG. 114 (a), the relationship between the output voltage Vout at the TB point and the output current Iout is such that the output current Iout increases as the output voltage Vout decreases from + 35V. Specifically, in the section A where the output voltage Vout is from + 35V to + 30V, the output current Iout is constant at about 360mA, and in the section B where the output voltage Vout is from + 30V to + 20V, the output decreases as the output voltage Vout decreases. In section C where the current Iout increases by about 40mA from 360mA to 400mA and the output voltage Vout increases from + 20V to + 10V, the output current Iout increases by about 260mA from 400mA to 660mA and the output voltage Vout increases by about + 10V as the output voltage Vout decreases. In the section D from to + 5V, the output current Iout increases by about 350mA from 660mA to 1010mA as the output voltage Vout decreases. In the vicinity of + 5V to zero V, the output current Iout is approximately 1010mA.

As shown in FIG. 114 (b), the relationship between the input current Iin at the TA point and the output current Iout at the TB point is that the input current Iin decreases and the output current Iout increases as the output voltage Vout decreases from + 35V. It is a relationship. Specifically, in the section A where the output voltage Vout is from + 35V to + 30V, the output current Iout is constant at about 360mA, while the input current Iin is reduced by about 80mA from 400mA to 320mA. In this section A, when the current corresponding to the rotation position of the rotation handle main body 506 flows through the firing solenoid 654 and the input current Iin is larger than the output current Iout, the game ball launched toward the game area 1100 is still a game. While the firing intensity is difficult to reach the region 1100, the game is played when the current corresponding to the rotation position of 506 in front of the rotating handle body flows to the firing solenoid 654 and the input current Iin becomes smaller than the output current Iout. The launch intensity of the game ball launched toward the area 1100 reaches the game area 1100. In the section B where the output voltage Vout is from + 30V to + 20V, the output current Iout increases by about 40mA from 360mA to 400mA, while the input current Iin decreases by about 60mA from 320mA to 260mA, which is compared with the output current Iout. The input current Iin is completely reduced. In section C where the output voltage Vout is from + 20V to + 10V, the output current Iout increases by about 260mA from 400mA to 660mA, while the input current Iin decreases by about 50mA from 260mA to 210mA, which is the same as in section B. , The input current Iin is completely smaller than the output current Iout. In the section D where the output voltage Vout is from + 10V to + 5V, the output current Iout increases by about 350mA from 660mA to 1010mA, while the input current Iin decreases by about 35mA from 210mA to 175mA, and the section B and the section Similar to C, the input current Iin is completely smaller than the output current Iout.

When the value of the output current Iout of the DC / DC converter 831a is 360 mA, the combined current obtained by merging this 360 mA and the current due to the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is the minimum current, that is, the player is in front of the rotating handle body. The value of the output current Iout of the DC / DC converter 831a is 1010 mA, whereas the current flows through the firing solenoid 654 when the 506 is touched and the 506 in front of the rotating handle body is not rotated at the original rotation position. At one time, the combined current obtained by combining this 1010 mA and the current generated by the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is the maximum current, that is, the player touches the rotary handle main body front 506 and rotates the rotary handle main body front 506 clockwise. This is the current that flows through the firing solenoid 654 when it is in the limit rotation position. As described above, the output current Iout of the DC / DC converter 831a has a minimum output current value of 360 mA and a maximum output current value of 1010 mA. When the value of the output current Iout of the DC / DC converter 831a exceeds 1000 mA, the firing intensity of the firing solenoid 654 is such that the gaming ball that has already jumped out into the gaming region 1100 along the outer rail 1111 collides with the abutting portion 1114. Then, it rolls downstream along the inner peripheral rail 1113, and is strong enough to be collected at the out port 1151 without entering various winning openings. Therefore, the range in which the output current Iout of the DC / DC converter 831a can be taken when the player rotates the rotary handle main body 506 clockwise to play the game is larger than 360 mA and smaller than 1000 mA. (360 mA <output current Iout value <1000 mA), which is a current on the order of milliamperes.

[10-3. Relationship between the input / output current and output voltage of the DC / DC converter and the emission reference pulse from the emission timing circuit]
Next, at a constant rotation position of 506 in front of the rotation handle main body, the output current Iout and output voltage Vout of the DC / DC converter 831a at the TB point, and the emission reference pulse T0 from the emission timing circuit 4130c, as shown in FIG. Will be described with reference to FIG. 115. As described above, the TB point is a point for referring to the output current Iout and the output voltage Vout (potential difference from the ground) of the DC / DC converter 831a, and the TC point is the emission reference pulse from the emission timing circuit 4130c. This is a point for referring to T0.

As described above, the launch reference pulse T0 from the launch timing circuit 4130c allows 100 game balls per minute, that is, 100 game balls per 60,000 ms toward the game area 1100 when the launch of the game balls by the launch solenoid 654 is permitted. Since it is set to be launched, the pulse width is 30 ms and the period T is 600 ms, as shown in FIG. 115 (a).

Here, the DC / DC in the case where the player touches the rotary handle main body front 506 and rotates the rotary handle main body front 506 to reach the limit rotation position and the non-rotating original rotation position. The waveform of the output voltage Vout of the converter 831a will be described.

When the firing reference pulse T0 from the firing timing circuit 4130c is input to the switching circuit 4130dd of the firing solenoid drive circuit 4130d when the rotation handle main body front 506 is in the limit rotation position, it is shown in FIGS. 115 (b) and 115 (c). As described above, the combined current obtained by merging the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current due to the discharge of the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor SC0 becomes the above-mentioned maximum current and begins to flow to the firing solenoid 654 (timing t0). ). When this maximum current is flowing through the firing solenoid 654, the voltage of the DC / DC converter 831a (voltage of the electrolytic capacitor SC0) drops to + 5V according to the characteristics of the DC / DC converter 831a shown in FIG. 115, and the DC / DC converter The value of the output current Iout of 831a is 1010 mA, which is the maximum output current described above. Then, when the input of the emission reference pulse T0 is stopped 30 ms after the input, the discharge proceeds until the output voltage of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 reaches the vicinity of zero V (timing t1). By cutting off the maximum current to the firing solenoid 654, the output voltage Vout of the DC / DC converter 831a gradually recovers to + 35V. Along with this, charging of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is started according to the characteristics of the DC / DC converter 831a. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 114, the output current Iout of the DC / DC converter 831a has a characteristic that the output voltage Vout is small, while the output current Iout is large. Immediately after the maximum current is cut off, the output voltage Vout of the DC / DC converter 831a, that is, the output voltage of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is near zero V, and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is the output current Iout of the DC / DC converter 831a. Charging is started by a certain current of 1010 mA, and when the output voltage Vout of the DC / DC converter 831a recovers to around + 35 V, charging is continued by a current of 360 mA, and then charging is completed. This charging is already completed by the time the next emission reference pulse T0 is input (timing t2). That is, charging is completed within a period of 570 ms from the input of the current emission reference pulse T0 to the input of the next emission reference pulse T0 30 ms later.

On the other hand, when the rotation handle main body front 506 is in the original rotation position, when the emission reference pulse T0 from the emission timing circuit 4130c is input to the switching circuit 4130dd of the emission solenoid drive circuit 4130d, FIG. 115 (b), As shown in (d), the combined current obtained by merging the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current due to the discharge of the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor SC0 becomes the above-mentioned minimum current and becomes the firing solenoid 654. It starts to flow (timing t0). When this minimum current is flowing through the firing solenoid 654, the voltage of the DC / DC converter 831a (voltage of the electrolytic capacitor SC0) drops slightly according to the characteristics of the DC / DC converter 831a shown in FIG. 115, but is shown in FIG. 114. The value of the output current Iout of the DC / DC converter 831a is 360 mA, which is the above-mentioned minimum output current. Then, when the input is stopped 30 ms after the input of the emission reference pulse T0, the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is slightly advanced (timing t1). By cutting off the minimum current to the firing solenoid 654, the output voltage Vout of the DC / DC converter 831a gradually recovers to + 35V. Along with this, charging of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is started according to the characteristics of the DC / DC converter 831a. Specifically, the output current Iout of the DC / DC converter 831a has a characteristic that the output voltage Vout is small, but the output current Iout is large, as described above. Immediately after the minimum current is cut off, the output voltage Vout of the DC / DC converter 831a, that is, the output voltage of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 drops slightly, but belongs to section A, and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is the output of the DC / DC converter 831a. Charging is started by a current of 360 mA, which is a current Iout, and then charging is completed. This charging is already completed by the time the next emission reference pulse T0 is input (timing t2). That is, charging is completed within a period of 570 ms from the input of the current emission reference pulse T0 to the input of the next emission reference pulse T0 30 ms later.

In this way, even if the maximum current and the minimum current flow through the firing solenoid 654, due to the characteristics of the DC / DC converter 831a, the charge discharged by the electrolytic capacitor SC0 within the discharge time of 30 ms when the current launch reference pulse T0 is input Can be completed within the remaining charging time of 570 ms until the next emission reference pulse T0 is input.

Here, consider a case where the DC / DC converter 831a independently applies a current to the firing solenoid 654 in a state where the electrolytic capacitor SC0 does not exist within the period from the input of the firing reference pulse T0 to the elapse of 30 ms. As a result, in this control method, the current flowing through the firing solenoid 654 by the DC / DC converter 831a alone is about 2A to 3.5A, so that this current is supplied from the power supply board 851. When driving the firing solenoid 654, a large current larger than 2A to 3.5A flows instantaneously. Then, every time the emission reference pulse T0 of 30 ms is generated in the cycle T of 600 ms, the load on the power supply board also increases in each cycle T. That is, since the power supply board supplies a predetermined current to electronic parts, lighting used for decoration, etc. in addition to the momentary large current flowing when the firing solenoid 654 is driven, the total electric power of these is reduced. If the power supply upper limit is exceeded, the power supply will be cut off for safety. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the DC / DC converter 831a independently drives the firing solenoid 654 in the absence of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 in a period of 30 ms, which is the pulse width after the firing reference pulse T0 is input. The ampere-order current supplied from the + 37V DC power supply of the power supply board 851 to the DC / DC converter 831a is extended to a period of 600 ms from the input of the emission reference pulse T0 to the input of the next emission reference pulse T0. , A milliamper-order "first current" supplied to the DC / DC converter 831a from the + 37V DC power supply of the power supply board 851 when the firing solenoid 654 is driven by the combined current of the DC / DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0. And, when the electrolytic capacitor SC0 charges the power from the DC / DC converter 831a, it is distributed to the "second current" on the order of milliamps supplied from the DC power supply of + 37V of the power supply board 851 to the DC / DC converter 831a. can do. As a result, in the absence of the electrolytic capacitor SC0, after the emission reference pulse T0 is input, the ampere order supplied from the + 37V DC power supply of the power supply board 851 to the DC / DC converter 831a during the period of 30 ms, which is the pulse width. The current is transferred from the + 37V DC power supply of the power supply board 851 to the DC / DC converter 831a in the period of 600ms from the input of the emission reference pulse T0 to the input of the next emission reference pulse T0 in the presence of the electrolytic capacitor SC0. It can be averaged by the "first current" and "second current" of the milliampere order supplied. Therefore, the load for supplying a momentary large current by driving the firing solenoid 654 can be eliminated from the power supply board 851. In addition, it is possible to eliminate the time spent designing the operating conditions of the safety device when the power supply board 851 is overloaded.

[10-4. Relationship between launch reference pulse from launch timing circuit and ball feed reference pulse]
Next, the launch reference pulse T0 from the launch timing circuit 4130c and the ball feed reference pulse T1 will be described with reference to FIG. 115. As described above, the TC point is a point for referring to the launch reference pulse T0 from the launch timing circuit 4130c, and the TD point shown in FIG. 112 refers to the ball feed reference pulse T1 from the launch timing circuit 4130c. It is a point to do.

The ball feed reference pulse T1 is set to 150 ms (= T0 (30 ms) × 5), which is five times the launch reference pulse T0 of 30 ms. When the firing reference pulse T0 is input to the switching circuit 4130dd of the firing solenoid drive circuit 4130d, the ball feeding reference pulse T1 is driven by the ball feeding solenoid of the firing solenoid drive circuit 4130d as shown in FIGS. 115 (a) and 115 (e). It is input to the circuit 4130e (timing t0, 150 ms later, the input is stopped (timing t3). As a result, the ball feed solenoid 585 is driven to control the ball feed by the ball feed solenoid 585. As a result, the set of the game ball to be launched next can be completed before the next launch reference pulse T0 is input, and each time the launch reference pulse T0 is input, the game ball is moved to the game area 1100. Can be launched continuously toward.

[11. Frame decoration drive amplifier board circuit]
Next, the circuit and the like of the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 shown in FIG. 100 will be briefly described with reference to FIG. 116. FIG. 116 is a schematic circuit diagram showing a circuit of a frame decoration drive amplifier board.

In addition to the + 9V creation circuit 194a shown in FIG. 103 (b), the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 includes a full-wave rectifier circuit 194b, a charge / discharge switching circuit 194c, and an LED gradation drive control unit 194d, as shown in FIG. 116. , The electrolytic capacitor WAC0, the resistor WAR0, and the like are provided. As described above, the electromotive force generated in the piezoelectric element 425 of the operation unit 400 shown in FIG. 116 is generated by the operation of the button body 406 (pressing operation unit 405) and moving downward, so that the pressing detection piece 406c is transferred to the piezoelectric element 425. When the button body 406 (pressing operation unit 405) is no longer operated by bending, the deflection of the piezoelectric element 425 due to the pressing detection piece 406c is eliminated by being pushed upward, and the vibration of returning to the original load is applied. Since the power is alternating current, it is fully-wave rectified by the full-wave rectifier circuit 194b composed of a low-loss bridge diode, and then charged by the electrolytic capacitor WAC0. ing.

The charge / discharge switching circuit 194c mainly includes a relay drive circuit 194ca, a relay WAY0, and a Zener diode WAZD0. The relay drive circuit 194ca is a circuit that supplies a drive current to the coil of the relay WAY0 to turn on / off the relay WARY0, and supplies a drive current to the coil of the relay WAY0 as long as + 9V is continuously supplied from the + 9V creation circuit 194a. Then, the relay WAY0 is turned on. The relay WAY0 has two switching contacts (referred to as "C contacts").

+ 9V from the + 9V creation circuit 194a is supplied to the first C contact, and when the relay drive circuit 194ca does not supply the drive current to the coil of the relay WAY0, the relay WAY0 is turned off. While the circuit is connected so that + 9V is not supplied to the LED gradation drive control unit 194d, when the relay drive circuit 194ca supplies the drive current to the coil of the relay WAY0, the relay WAY0 is turned on to turn on the + 9V LED. The circuit is connected so as to supply the gradation drive control unit 194d. The LED gradation drive control unit 194d sends + 9V supplied from the relay WAY0 to the plurality of color LEDs 430b of the operation unit that emits light of the entire dial operation unit 401 and the color LED 432d of the operation unit 400 that emits light of the entire pressing operation unit 405. As the driving voltage of the color, based on various commands from the peripheral control board 4140 (for example, a gradation lighting command on the door frame side for lighting gradation, a lighting blinking command on the door frame side for emitting light in a predetermined color). The LEDs 430b and 432d can be gradation-lit, lit, and blinked.

The second C contact is supplied with electric power to be charged to the electrolytic capacitor WAC0, and the relay WAY0 is turned off when the relay drive circuit 194ca does not supply the drive current to the coil of the relay WAY0. As a result, the electric power charged in the electrolytic capacitor WAC0 is provided with the resistor WAR0 (this resistor WAR0 is provided for each of the plurality of color LEDs 430b and the color LED 432d) without passing through the LED gradation drive control unit 194d. While the circuit is connected so as to supply the color LEDs 430b and 432d of the operation unit 400 via the relay drive circuit 194ca, when the relay drive circuit 194ca supplies the drive current to the coil of the relay WARY0, the electrolytic capacitor WAC0 is turned on by turning on the relay WAY0. The circuit is connected so that the electric power charged in the operation unit 400 is not supplied to the color LEDs 430b and 432d of the operation unit 400. The second C contact to which the charged power is supplied to the electrolytic capacitor WAC0 is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the Zener diode WAZD0 whose anode terminal is grounded to the ground, and the electrolytic capacitor WAC0 is charged. By limiting the maximum voltage of the voltage, the electric power charged in the electrolytic capacitor WAC0 is discharged, and damage to the color LEDs 430b and 432d due to the discharge voltage is prevented.

As described above, since the + 9V creation circuit 194a can create + 9V after the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1, the created + 9V is supplied to the relay drive circuit 194ca, so that the relay drive circuit 194ca becomes the relay WAY0. The drive current is supplied to the coil of the above, and the relay WAY0 is turned on. In the state where the relay WAY0 is turned on, + 9V from the + 9V creation circuit 194a is used as a drive voltage via the LED gradation drive control unit 194d, and the color LED 430b , While being supplied to 432d, when the power to the pachinko game machine 1 is cut off or a power failure (power failure due to an electrical trouble in the pachinko hall where the pachinko game machine 1 is installed or an emergency due to a disaster) Since the + 9V creation circuit 194a cannot create + 9V in the state where When the relay WAY0 is turned off and the relay WAY0 is turned off, the electric current charged in the electrolytic capacitor WAC0 is discharged, and the discharge voltage is supplied to the color LEDs 430b and 432d as a driving voltage. Therefore, + 9V from the + 9V creation circuit 194a and the voltage due to the electric power charged in the electrolytic capacitor WAC0 are not supplied to the color LEDs 430b and 432d at the same time.

In a state where a power outage (a power outage due to an electrical trouble in the pachinko hall where the pachinko game machine 1 is installed or an emergency due to a disaster) occurs, the electric power charged in the electrolytic capacitor WAC0 is discharged. As a result, the discharge voltage is supplied to the color LEDs 430b and 432d as a driving voltage, so that the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can all emit light. As a result, even if a power outage (a power outage due to an electrical trouble in the pachinko hall where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed or a power outage due to an emergency when a disaster occurs) occurs and the pachinko hall is pitch black. Since the pachinko game machine 1 is installed adjacent to the pachinko island facility by emitting light from the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 by the electric power charged in the electrolytic capacitor WAC0, the dial operation unit 401 is installed in the event of a power failure. , And the light emission of the pressing operation unit 405 becomes an emergency light, which can be used as a mark for the player to evacuate to the outside of the concourse or the pachinko hall. In other words, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can function as a mark for evacuating the player to the outside of the concourse or the pachinko hall by emitting light as an emergency light in the event of a power failure. There is.

In addition, a power outage (a power outage due to an electrical trouble in the pachinko hall where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed or an emergency occurs) is caused by the player simply operating the pressing operation unit 405 while playing the game. When a power failure occurs and the pachinko hall becomes pitch black, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can generate electric power to emit light as an emergency light in the event of a power failure and charge the electrolytic capacitor WAC0. Therefore, although the player does not notice it, it contributes to evacuating other players to the outside of the concourse or pachinko hall.

The frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 supplies + 9V created by the + 9V creation circuit 194a to the detection switches 432a to 432c of the operation unit 400, while the detection signals from these detection switches 432a to 432c are input. Further, the ground of the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 and the ground of various boards of the operation unit 400 are electrically connected to form the same ground.

[12. Various commands related to transmission and reception of the main control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the payout control board 4110 and various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 will be described with reference to FIGS. 117 to 120. FIG. 117 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board, and FIG. 118 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board. Is a table showing the continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board of FIG. 118, and FIG. 120 is a table showing an example of various commands received by the main control board from the payout control board. First, the prize ball command, which is a command related to payout transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the payout control board 4110, will be described, and then various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 will be described, and the main control will be described. Various commands from the payout control board 4110 received by the board 4100 will be described.

[12-1. Various commands sent from the main control board to the payout control board]
The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 has detection signals from various winning switches such as the general winning opening switches 3020 and 3020, the upper starting opening switch 3022, the lower starting opening switch 2109, and the count switch 2110 shown in FIG. 97. When input, a prize ball command for paying out a predetermined number of game balls as a prize ball is transmitted to the payout control board based on these detection signals. This prize ball command is a command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits). In the present embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the CR unit 6 (communication with the pachinko gaming machine 1 and driving the payout motor 744 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (prize ball device 740) to drive the payout motor 744, which is a storage tray When the lower plate 302 is electrically connected to a device for paying out game balls as a rental ball (such a pachinko game machine is referred to as a "CR machine"), as shown in FIG. 117 (a). The prize ball commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the payout control board 4110 include commands 10H to 1EH (“H” represents a hexadecimal number), and in command 10H, one prize ball is provided. Two prize balls are specified by the command 11H, and 15 prize balls are specified by the command 1EH. The payout control board 4110 controls the payout motor 744 to pay out the game balls by the designated number of prize balls.

In addition, a pachinko game machine 1 and a ball lending machine (a device that directly pays out game balls as lending balls to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302, which are storage plates) are installed adjacent to the game hall (hall). When the game machine 1 and the ball lending machine are electrically connected (such a pachinko game machine is referred to as a "general machine"), as shown in FIG. 117 (b), it is paid out from the main control board 4100. Commands 20H to 2EH are prepared for the prize ball command to be transmitted to the control board 4110. One prize ball is specified by the command 20H, two prize balls are specified by the command 21H, and so on. In 2EH, 15 prize balls are designated. The payout control board 4110 controls the payout motor 744 to pay out the game balls by the designated number of prize balls.

As shown in FIG. 117 (c), a command 30H is prepared as a common command for the CR machine and the general machine, and a self-check is specified in this command 30H. After the command is transmitted, the transmitting side transmits the command 30H and checks whether or not the ACK signal is input when the ACK signal to be output as confirmation of receipt of the command is not input from the receiving side for a predetermined period. Check the connection status. In the case of the CR machine in the present embodiment, the payout control board 4110 confirms the connection state with the CR unit 6.

[12-2. Various commands sent from the main control board to the peripheral control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 will be described. The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 4140 based on the progress of the game. These various commands are commands having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits), and as shown in FIGS. 118 and 119, the status indicating the type of the command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) and It is composed of a mode showing a variation of an effect having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits).

As shown in FIGS. 118 and 119, the various commands are related to the special figure 1 synchronization effect, the special figure 2 synchronization effect, the jackpot, the power-on, the normal electric role effect, the notification display, and the state. It is divided into display and others.

[12-2-1. Special figure 1 Synchronized production related]
The special drawing 1 tuning effect-related is based on the detection signal from the upper start port switch 3022 shown in FIG. 97, and the classification is divided into the function display board 1191 shown in FIG. 97 as shown in FIG. The above special symbol display 1185 is composed of commands named special symbol 1 synchronization effect start, special symbol 1 designation, special diagram 1 synchronization effect end, and change state designation. These various commands are assigned "A * H" as the status and "** H" as the mode ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. This is determined in advance by the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

The special figure 1 synchronization effect start command instructs the start of the special figure synchronization effect with the effect pattern specified in the mode, and the special symbol 1 designation command specifies the loss, the specific jackpot, and the non-specific jackpot. The special figure 1 synchronization effect end command instructs the end of the special figure 1 synchronization effect, and the variable time state designation command indicates the probability and the time saving state.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special symbol 1 synchronization effect start command is transmitted at the start of the special symbol 1 fluctuation, and the special symbol 1 designation command is transmitted immediately after the start of the special diagram 1 synchronization effect. The effect end command is transmitted when the special symbol 1 variation time elapses (when the special symbol 1 is confirmed), and the variation state specification command is transmitted immediately after the special symbol winning information is specified. It should be noted that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt process described later.

[12-2-2. Special figure 2 synchronization production related]
The special drawing 2 tuning effect-related is based on the detection signal from the lower start port switch 2109 shown in FIG. 97, and the classification is divided into the function display board 1191 shown in FIG. 97 as shown in FIG. It consists of commands related to the lower special symbol display 1186, which are named special symbol 2 synchronization effect start, special symbol 2 designation, and special diagram 2 synchronization effect end. These various commands are assigned "B * H" as the status and "** H" as the mode ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. This is indicated in advance by the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

The special figure 2 synchronization effect start command instructs the start of the special figure synchronization effect with the effect pattern specified in the mode, and the special symbol 2 designation command specifies the loss, the specific jackpot, and the non-specific jackpot. , The end of the special figure 2 synchronization effect indicates the end of the special figure 2 synchronization effect.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special symbol 2 synchronization effect start command is transmitted at the start of the special symbol 2 fluctuation, and the special symbol 2 designation command is transmitted immediately after the start of the special diagram 2 synchronization effect. The effect end command is transmitted when the special symbol 2 variation time elapses (when the special symbol 2 is confirmed). It should be noted that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[12-2-3. Big hit related]
As shown in Fig. 118, the categories related to jackpots include jackpot opening, jackpot 1 open Nth display, jackpot 1 closed display, jackpot 1 count display, jackpot ending, jackpot symbol display, and jackpot opening. , Small hit open display, small hit count display, and small hit ending commands. These various commands are assigned "C * H" as the status and "** H" as the mode ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. This is indicated in advance by the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

The jackpot opening command indicates the start of the jackpot opening, and the Nth display command for opening the jackpot 1 is the start during the opening of the jackpot 1 in the 1st to 16th rounds (the attacker unit 2100 shown in FIG. 95). The opening of the Nth round of the large winning opening 2103 or the opening start) is instructed, and the large winning opening 1 closing display command starts during the closing of the large winning opening 1 between rounds (the large winning opening of the attacker unit 2100). (During closing or starting closing) between 2103 rounds is instructed, and the large winning opening 1 count display command has counted 0 to 10 counts (detected by the count switch 2110 shown in FIG. 97). The number of game balls that have entered the jackpot 2103) is transmitted, the jackpot ending command instructs the start of the jackpot ending, and the jackpot symbol display command instructs the jackpot symbol information display. is there.

In addition, the small hit opening command indicates the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit open display command starts during the small hit opening (at the time of the small hit, the large winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 is open or open. The small hit count display command indicates (start), and the small hit count display command is used when the small hit medium / large winning opening winning effect (during the small hit, the game ball that has entered the large winning opening 2103 is detected by the count switch 2110). (Direction) is instructed, and the small hit ending command is instructed to start the small hit ending.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the jackpot opening command is transmitted at the start of the jackpot opening, and the Nth display command for opening the jackpot 1 is when the jackpot 1 is opened in the 1st to 16th rounds (large attacker unit 2100). It is sent when the Nth round of the winning opening 2103 is opened), and the big winning opening 1 closing display command is sent when the big winning opening 1 is closed (when the large winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 starts closing), and the big winning opening 1 is closed. The mouth 1 count display command is a count switch when the large winning opening 1 is opened and when the count changes to the large winning opening 1 (when the large winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 is opened, and the game ball that has entered the large winning opening 2103 is a count switch. (When detected by 2110), the jackpot ending command is transmitted at the start of the jackpot ending, and the jackpot symbol display command is transmitted when the jackpot symbol is opened (when the jackpot 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 is opened). To.

Further, the small hit opening command is transmitted at the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit open display command is transmitted at the time of opening the small hit (at the time of opening the large winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 at the time of the small hit). The hit count display command is transmitted at the time of winning the small hit medium / large winning opening (when the game ball entered in the large winning opening 2103 is detected by the count switch 2110 during the small hit), and the small hit ending command is It is sent at the start of the small hit ending. It should be noted that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[12-2-4. Power on]
As shown in FIG. 118, the power-on category is composed of various commands named power-on. This power-on command is assigned a status of "D * H" and a mode of "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. (It is determined in advance by the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

The power-on command instructs the start of the RAM clear effect and the start of each state effect (for example, the start of the effect when the RAM clear switch 4100e shown in FIG. 97 is operated. ).

As the transmission timing of the power-on command, it is transmitted at a time other than RAM clear and RAM clear when the main control board is powered on. Specifically, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, when the pachinko game machine 1 recovers from a power failure or a momentary power failure, and when the RAM clear switch 4100e is operated, the main control side power-on processing described later is executed. The power-on command is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[12-2-5. Fuzu synchronization production related]
The normal figure tuning effect-related is based on the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 shown in FIG. 97, and the classification is divided into the normal symbol display of the function display board 1191 shown in FIG. 97 as shown in FIG. It is composed of commands related to the device 1189, which are named as the start of the normal figure synchronization effect, the designation of the normal symbol, the end of the normal figure synchronization effect, and the specification of the state at the time of fluctuation. These various commands are assigned "E * H" as the status and "** H" as the mode ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. (It is determined in advance by the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

The normal figure synchronization effect start command is for instructing the start of the normal figure synchronization effect with the effect pattern specified in the mode, and the normal symbol designation command is for designating the miss, the specific jackpot, and the non-specific jackpot. The figure synchronization effect end command instructs the end of the normal figure synchronization effect, and the variable time state specification command indicates the probability and the time saving state.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the normal symbol synchronization effect start command is transmitted at the start of the normal symbol 1 fluctuation, the normal symbol designation command is transmitted immediately after the start of the normal symbol synchronization effect, and the normal symbol synchronization effect end command is transmitted. , Ordinary symbol is transmitted when the fluctuation time elapses (when the normal symbol is confirmed), and the change state specification command is transmitted immediately after the normal symbol winning information is specified. It should be noted that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[12-2-6. Ordinary electric role production related]
The ordinary electric service effect is related to the pair of movable pieces 2106 shown in FIG. 95 which are opened and closed by the drive of the start port solenoid 2105 shown in FIG. 97, and the division is as shown in FIG. It consists of commands named opening per figure, open display of solenoid, and ending per figure. These various commands are assigned "F * H" as the status and "** H" as the mode ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. (It is determined in advance by the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

The opening command per normal figure indicates the start of the opening per normal figure, and the open normal power display command starts while the normal power is open (a pair of movable pieces 2106 expands in the left-right direction by driving the starting port solenoid 2105. The ending command per normal figure indicates the start of the ending per normal figure.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the opening command per normal figure is transmitted at the start of the opening per normal figure, and the open power display command is sent when the normal power is open (a pair of movable pieces 2106 are driven by the start port solenoid 2105). It is transmitted at (when expanding in the left-right direction), and the ending command per normal figure is transmitted at the start of the ending per normal figure. It should be noted that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[12-2-7. Notification display]
As shown in FIG. 119, the notification display is composed of commands named winning abnormality display, connection abnormality display, disconnection / short circuit abnormality display, magnetic detection switch abnormality display, door opening, and door closing. These various commands are assigned "6 * H" as the status and "** H" as the mode ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. (It is determined in advance by the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

The winning abnormality display command is used when a game ball enters the big winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 even though it is not a big hit (even though it is not a big hit) other than during the big hit (condition device is operating). When the count switch 2110 detects it), the start of the winning abnormality notification is instructed, and the connection abnormality display command is, for example, an electrical connection in the path between the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110. When there is an abnormality, it is instructed to start the connection abnormality notification, and the disconnection / short circuit abnormality display command is, for example, the main control board 4100, the upper start port switch 3022, the lower start port switch 2109, the count switch 2110, and the like. Instructs the start of the disconnection / short-circuit abnormality display when the electrical connection is broken / short-circuited, and the magnetic detection switch abnormality display command causes an abnormality in the magnetic detection switch 3024 shown in FIG. 97. In this case, the magnetic detection switch indicates the start of abnormality notification.

Further, the door opening command is issued by the main body frame 3 based on the detection signals (opening signals) from the door frame opening switch 618 and the main body frame opening switch 619, which are input via the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. When the door frame 2 is open to the outer frame 2 or the door frame 5 is open to the main body frame 3, the door opening notification is instructed, and the door closing command is the instruction. Based on the detection signals from the door frame opening switch 618 and the main body frame opening switch 619, the main body frame 3 is in a closed state with respect to the outer frame 2, and the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3. When it is in a state, it instructs the end of the door opening notification.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the winning abnormality display command is transmitted when a prize is won in the big winning opening other than during the big hit (condition device is operating), and the connection abnormality display command is sent from the main control board 4100 to the payout control board 4110. When there is no ACK reply (ACK signal) from the payout control board 4110 when the command is sent to, the disconnection / short circuit error display command is among the upper start port switch 3022, lower start port switch 2109, count switch 2110, etc. , Which is transmitted when the wire is broken or short-circuited, the magnetic detection switch abnormality display command is transmitted when an abnormality of the magnetic detection switch 3024 is detected, and the door opening command is transmitted when the door opening is detected (door frame opening). When the main body frame 3 is open to the outer frame 2 or when the door frame 5 is open to the main body frame 3 based on the detection signals from the switch 618 and the main body frame release switch 619. When the door closing command is detected (when there is), the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signals from the door frame opening switch 618 and the main body frame opening switch 619. It is transmitted to the state where the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3). It should be noted that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[12-2-8. Status display]
As shown in FIG. 119, the status display division includes commands named frame status 1, error release navigation, and frame status 2. These various commands are assigned "7 * H" as the status and "** H" as the mode ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. (It is determined in advance by the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

The frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command are commands having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) transmitted from the payout control board 4110, and detailed description thereof will be described later. When the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 receives the frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 4110, it outputs "7 * H" as shown in FIG. 119. While setting it as a status, set the received command as it is as a mode. That is, when the main control MPU4100a receives the frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 4110, the main control MPU4100a adds "7 * H" which is additional information to these received commands. Formats the command into a command having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits).

The formatted frame state 1 command is sent when the power is restored, when the frame state changes, and when the error release navigation is performed. , And when the frame state changes. The shaped frame state 1 command, error release navigation command, and frame state 2 command are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[12-2-9. Test related]
As shown in FIG. 119, the test-related division is composed of various commands named test. This test command is assigned a status of "8 * H" and a mode of "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. Is determined in advance according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

The test command instructs various inspections of the peripheral control board 4140 (for example, the sound source IC 4150c of the peripheral control unit 4150, the liquid crystal control unit 4160, the lamp drive board 4170, the motor drive board 4180, and the peripheral control board 4180 shown in FIG. 100). It inspects various substrates such as the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate 194).

The test command is transmitted at a time other than RAM clear and RAM clear when the main control board is turned on. Specifically, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, when the pachinko game machine 1 recovers from a power failure or a momentary power failure, and when the RAM clear switch 4100e is operated, the main control side power-on processing described later is executed. A test command is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[12-2-10. Others]
In other categories, as shown in FIG. 119, start opening winning, fluctuation shortening operation end designation, high probability end designation, special symbol 1 memory, special symbol 2 memory, normal symbol memory, special symbol 1 memory look-ahead effect, and Special symbol 2 Consists of a command named memory look-ahead effect. These various commands are assigned a status of "9 * H" and a mode of "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. (It is determined in advance by the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

The start opening winning command instructs to start the starting opening winning effect, and starts the effect when the game ball enters the upper starting port 2101 based on the detection signal from the upper starting port switch 3022, and lower. Based on the detection signal from the start port switch 2109, it is instructed to start the effect when the game ball enters the lower start port 2102, and the variation shortening operation end designation command is from the variation shortening operation state. The fluctuation shortening instructing the state transition to the non-operating state is instructed, the high probability end designation command is instructing the state transition from the high probability state to the low probability state, and the special symbol 1 storage command is a special symbol. 1 Hold 0 to 4 (The number of balls that have not yet been used for the variable display of the special symbol on the upper special symbol display 1185 of the function display board 1191 when the game ball enters the upper starting port 2101 shown in FIG. 95 ( The number of holdings)) is transmitted, and the special symbol 2 storage command is a special symbol 2 holding 0 to 4 (the lower special of the function display board 1191 when the game ball enters the lower starting port 2102 shown in FIG. 95). The symbol display 1186 conveys the number of balls (holding number) that have not yet been used for the variable display of the special symbol, and the normal symbol storage command is the normal symbol 1 hold 0 to 4 (gate shown in FIG. 95). The game ball passes through the unit 2350, and the normal symbol display 1189 of the function display board 1191 conveys the number of balls (holding number) that have not yet been used for the variable display of the normal symbol. The command is read ahead and displayed by the upper special symbol display 1185 based on the special symbol 1 hold before the special symbol 1 hold is used for the variable display of the special symbol on the upper special symbol display 1185 of the function display board 1191. The special symbol 2 storage look-ahead effect command is used to indicate the change of the special symbol on the special symbol display 1186 under the function display board 1191. Before this, the pre-reading effect is instructed to pre-read and notify the notice of the display result by the lower special symbol display 1186 based on the special symbol 2 hold.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the start port winning command is used when the start port is won (when a game ball enters the upper start port 2101 based on the detection signal from the upper start port switch 3022, or when the lower start port switch is used. When the game ball enters the lower starting port 2102 based on the detection signal from 2109), the side speakers 130 and 130 shown in FIG. 21, the upper right speaker 222 shown in FIG. 29, and the upper left shown in FIG. 32. It is transmitted from the part speaker 262 and the lower speaker 821 shown in FIG. 78 mainly to notify the effect by voice, and the fluctuation shortening operation end designation command ends the stop period after the fluctuation is confirmed after the specified number of fluctuation shortening is exhausted. The high-probability end specification command is sent at the time (after the out-of-order stop period has elapsed), and the high-probability end specification command is sent at the end of the stop period after the fluctuation is confirmed (after the out-of-order stop period has elapsed) after digesting the high-probability number of times in the case of "high probability N times". The special symbol 1 storage command is transmitted, and when the number of balls on hold for special symbol 1 operation changes (a game ball enters the upper start port 2101 and the upper special symbol display 1185 of the function display board 1191 displays the fluctuation of the special symbol. When there is a hold number that has not been used yet, when a game ball enters the upper start port 2101 and the hold number increases, or from that hold number, the upper special symbol display 1185 changes the display of the special symbol. When the number of reserved balls is reduced by using it), the special symbol 2 storage command is sent when the number of reserved balls for special symbol 2 operation changes (when a game ball enters the lower start port 2102 and the game ball enters the lower start port 2102 and is under the function display board 1191. When there is a hold number that has not yet been used for the variable display of the special symbol on the special symbol display 1186, and when a game ball enters the lower start port 2102 and the hold number increases, or below the hold number It is sent when the special symbol display 1186 is used to display the fluctuation of the special symbol and the number of reserved balls decreases), and the normal symbol storage command is sent when the number of reserved balls for normal symbol 1 operation changes (the game ball moves to the gate 2350). When there is a hold number that has not been used for the variable display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 1189 of the function display board 1191 after passing through, and when the game ball passes through the gate 2350 and the hold number increases. , When the number of reserved balls is reduced by using the normal symbol display 1189 for variable display of the normal symbol), the special symbol 1 storage look-ahead effect command is sent when the number of special symbol 1 operation reserved balls increases. (When a game ball enters the upper start port 2101 and the number of reserved balls increases), the special symbol 2 memory look-ahead effect command increases the number of special symbol 2 operation reserved balls. It is transmitted at the time of addition (when the game ball enters the lower start port 2102 and the number of holdings increases). It should be noted that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

By the way, as described above, the start opening winning command is issued when the starting opening is won (when a game ball enters the upper starting opening 2101 based on the detection signal from the upper starting opening switch 3022, or from the lower starting opening switch 2109. When the game ball enters the lower starting port 2102 based on the detection signal of (1), the side speakers 130, 130, the upper right speaker 222, the upper left speaker 262, and the lower speaker 821 mainly notify the fact by voice. However, how the peripheral control board 4140 shown in FIG. 100 uses the start opening winning command may differ depending on the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine. For example, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, in addition to being notified by voice from the side speakers 130 and 130, the upper right speaker 222, the upper left speaker 262 and the lower speaker 821, it is also used to monitor the presence or absence of fraudulent activity. It is a specification to do. On the other hand, in other pachinko gaming machines, the peripheral control board 4140 simply receives the start opening winning command, and the side speakers 130, 130, the upper right speaker 222, the upper left speaker 262, and the lower speaker 821 are heard by voice. Some specifications do not notify.

[12-3. Various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board]
Next, various commands from the payout control board 4110 received by the main control board 4100 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 120, the classification of various commands from the payout control board 4110 is composed of commands named frame state 1, error release navigation, and frame state 2, frame state 1, error release navigation, and The order of priority is set in the order of frame state 2.

The frame state 1 command includes out-of-ball, full tank, stock of 50 or more, connection abnormality, and CR not connected. When the ball is out, bit 0 (B0, "B" represents a bit) is set. The value 1 is set, the value 1 is set to bit 1 (B1) when the tank is full, the value 1 is set to bit 2 (B2) in stock of 50 or more, and the value is set to bit 3 (B3) when the connection is abnormal. 1 is set, and the value 1 is set to bit 4 (B4) when CR is not connected. Bits 5 (B5) to 7 (B7) of the frame state 1 command are set to have a value of 1 in B5, a value of 0 in B6, and a value of 0 in B7.

The error release navigation command has a ball, count switch error, and retry error. For ball, bit 2 (B2) is set to value 1, and for count switch error, bit 3 (B3) is set. 1 is set, and in the retry error, the value 1 is set in bit 4 (B4). Here, the "counting switch error" indicates whether or not the counting switch 751 shown in FIG. 98 has a defect. The "retry error" indicates that the inconsistent game ball is repeatedly paid out by the retry operation. Bits (B0), bits (B1), and bits 5 (B5) to 7 (B7) of the error release navigation command have a value of 0 for B0, a value of 0 for B1, a value of 0 for B5, and a value of 1 for B6. And the value 0 is set in B7.

The frame state 2 command is prepared during ball removal, and the value 1 is set to bit 0 (B0) during ball removal. Bits 1 (B1) to 7 (B7) of the frame state 2 command have a value of 0 for B1, a value of 0 for B2, a value of 0 for B3, a value of 0 for B4, a value of 1 for B5, a value of 1 for B6, and so on. The value 0 is set in B7.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the frame state 1 command is transmitted at the time of power restoration, the frame state change, and the error release navigation, and the error release navigation command is transmitted at the time of error release navigation, and the frame state 2 command is transmitted. Is transmitted when the power is restored and when the frame state changes. It should be noted that these various commands are actually transmitted in the command transmission process of step S360 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on processing described later.

[13. Various control processes on the main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. 97 according to the progress of the game of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 121 to 123. FIG. 121 is a flowchart showing an example of the main control side power-on processing, FIG. 122 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the main control-side power-on processing of FIG. 121, and FIG. 123 is an example of the main control side timer interrupt processing. FIG. 152 is an explanatory diagram (range closer to the maximum value side) showing the operation of the initial value update type counter, and FIG. 153 is an explanatory diagram (minimum) showing the operation of the initial value update type counter. The range closer to the value side). First, various random numbers used for game control will be described, and then the operation of the initial value update type counter, the main control side power-on processing, and the main control side timer interrupt processing will be described.

[13-1. Various random numbers]
As various random numbers used for game control, a big hit judgment random number to be used for determining whether or not to generate a big hit game state, and a big hit judgment initial value determination to be used for determining the initial value of this big hit judgment random number. Random numbers for, reach judgment random numbers for determining whether to generate reach (reach loss) when the jackpot game state is not generated, and the upper special symbol display 1185 and the lower special shown in FIG. A random number for the variable display pattern used to determine the variable display pattern of the special symbol that is variablely displayed on the symbol display 1186, and the upper special symbol display 1185 and the lower special symbol display 1186 when the big hit game state is generated. When generating a random number for the jackpot symbol to be used for determining the jackpot symbol to be derived and displayed, a random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol to be used for determining the initial value of the random number for the jackpot symbol, and a small hit game state. A small hit symbol random number to be used to determine the small hit symbol derived and displayed by the upper special symbol display 1185 and the lower special symbol display 1186, and a small hit to be used to determine the initial value of this small hit symbol random number. Random numbers for determining initial values for symbols are prepared. Further, in addition to these random numbers, a random number for determining a normal symbol hit to be used for determining whether or not to open / close the movable piece 2106 shown in FIG. 95 and an initial value of the random number for determining a normal symbol hit are determined. Random numbers for determining the initial value for determining the hit of the normal symbol for use, random numbers for the normal symbol variation display pattern used for determining the variation display pattern of the normal symbol that is variablely displayed by the normal symbol display 1189 shown in FIG. 97, etc. Is prepared.

For example, the counter that updates the random number for jackpot determination is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value (in this embodiment, the minimum value is 0 to the maximum value is 32767). The range from the minimum value to the maximum value is counted up by adding a value of 1 each time the main control side timer interrupt process described later is performed. This counter counts up from the random number for determining the initial value for jackpot determination toward the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value toward the random number for determining the initial value for jackpot determination. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the jackpot determination random number, the jackpot determination initial value determination random number is updated. Such a counter update method is called an "initial value update type counter". The random number for determining the initial value for jackpot determination can be obtained by executing the initial value lottery process for drawing one value from the fixed numerical value range of the counter that updates the random number for jackpot determination. Further, the above-mentioned random number for determining the normal symbol hit and the random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol hit are also the same as the above-described method for updating the large hit determination random number.

In the present embodiment, when the counter for updating the big hit judgment random number finishes counting up in the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the big hit judgment random number, as described above, for determining the initial value for big hit judgment. The random numbers are updated by executing the initial value lottery process, but when the RAM clear switch 4100e shown in FIG. 97 is operated when the power is turned on, or when the main control side power is turned on, which will be described later. The check sum value (sum value) obtained by regarding the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 4100a shown in FIG. 97 as a numerical value and calculating the total is the processing when the power is turned off on the main control side. When clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM, such as when the check sum value (sum value) stored in (when the power is turned off) does not match, the random number for determining the initial value for jackpot judgment is The main control MPU4100a shown in FIG. 97 extracts an ID code from its built-in non-volatile RAM, and always derives the same fixed value from a fixed numerical range of a counter that updates a random number for jackpot determination based on the extracted ID code. The initial value derivation process is executed, and the derived fixed value is set. That is, the random number for determining the initial value for jackpot determination is constantly overwritten and updated with the same fixed value derived based on the ID code by executing the initial value derivation process. In this way, the value set in the initial value determination random number for jackpot determination is derived using the ID code, and the ID is stored in the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU4100a by the manufacturer of the main control MPU4100a. Based on the ID code by the first security measure that the ID code cannot be rewritten even if an external device is used when the code is stored, and by executing the initial value derivation process when clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM. It is prevented from being analyzed by taking a second security measure of deriving the same fixed value and a two-step security measure by.

Here, an advantage of extracting an ID code from the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU4100a and using the extracted ID code as a random number for determining an initial value for jackpot determination will be described. For example, a person who illegally obtains a game ball to be paid out as a prize ball obtains the game board 4 by some method, disassembles it, and inputs an ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 4100a. Even if it is possible to grasp the timing at which the value of the counter that illegally acquires and updates the jackpot judgment random number and the jackpot judgment value match, the ID code is given a unique code for identifying the individual. Therefore, the ID code is completely different from the ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU4100a'provided in the other game board 4'. That is, in the other game board 4', the timing at which the value of the counter for updating the big hit determination random number and the big hit determination value match is also completely different from that of the obtained game board 4. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the obtained game board 4 is completely useless in another game board 4', that is, another pachinko game machine 1', so it is disassembled and analyzed. Even if you aim for a start-up prize in which a momentary power failure is generated at each predetermined interval obtained and a game ball is inserted into the upper start port 2101 and the lower start port 2102 shown in FIG. 95 at each predetermined interval, a big hit is achieved. The game state cannot be generated.

[13-2. Initial value update type counter operation]
As shown in FIG. 152, the initial value update type counter takes out the ID code from the built-in non-volatile RAM of the main control MPU4100a when clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM (when the RAM is cleared). The initial value derivation process for always deriving the same fixed value from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the jackpot determination random number based on the extracted ID code is executed, and the derived fixed value is set. In the first cycle, the initial value update type counter counts up from this fixed value toward the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value toward the fixed value. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the big hit judgment random number, one value is drawn from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the big hit judgment random number as the big hit judgment initial value determination random number. The initial value lottery process is executed, and the value obtained in this lottery is set. In the second cycle, the initial value update type counter counts up from the value obtained by the lottery toward the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value toward the value obtained by the lottery. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the big hit judgment random number, the initial value lottery process is executed again, the value obtained in this lottery is set, and the initial value update type counter In the third cycle, the value obtained by lottery will be counted up toward the maximum value. In the present embodiment, a value 32668 to a value 32767 is set as a range of the jackpot determination value (big hit determination range) with a low probability, and is read from the normal judgment table, whereas a value 31768 to a value with a high probability is set. 32767 is set, and it is read from the probability change determination table. In the present embodiment, the counter that updates the random number for jackpot determination updates a predetermined fixed numerical value range from a value as a minimum value to a value of 32767 as a maximum value. In other words, the range of the jackpot judgment value (big hit judgment range) is the range closer to the maximum value side from the intermediate value (value 16384) between the minimum value and the maximum value in both the low probability and the high probability. It is set.

Here, as a range of jackpot determination values (big hit determination range), a case where a value 10 to a value 209 is set with a low probability and a value 10 to a value 339 is set with a high probability is examined. As shown in, the range of the jackpot judgment value (big hit judgment range) is the range closer to the minimum value side from the intermediate value (value 16384) between the minimum value and the maximum value in both the low probability and the high probability. Will be set to. In such a case, the period from the timing when the value of the initial value update type counter becomes the value 0 to the time when the first value 10 in the jackpot judgment value range (big hit judgment range) becomes, and this value 10 Comparing the period from the next value 11 to the maximum value (value 32767), the probability that the former period is drawn by the above-mentioned initial value lottery process is extremely lower than that of the latter period. In other words, the range from the timing when the value of the initial value update type counter becomes value 0 to the last value (value 209 in low probability, value 339 in high probability) in the range of big hit judgment value (big hit judgment range). Comparing with the range from the value next to this last value (value 210 in low probability, value 340 in high probability) to the maximum value (value 32767), the former range is the latter. The probability of being drawn by the initial value lottery process is extremely low compared to the range. Then, for example, the game ball is started upward by illegally acquiring the timing when the value of the counter of the initial value update type becomes 0 by some method and irradiating the radio waves toward the upper start port 2101 and the lower start port 2102. When a fraudulent act pretending to have entered the mouth 2101 or the lower starting port 2102 is performed, the value of the initial value update type counter becomes one of the jackpot judgment value ranges (big hit judgment range). It can be said that the probability is high.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the range of the jackpot determination value (big hit determination range) is from the intermediate value (value 16384) between the minimum value and the maximum value in both the low probability and the high probability. If it is set to a range closer to the maximum value side, it is before the first value in the jackpot judgment value range (big hit judgment range) from the timing when the value of the initial value update type counter becomes the value 0. The period from the initial value (value 32668 in low probability, value 31768 in high probability) to the maximum value (value 32767) and the period until the value (value 32667 in low probability, value 31767 in high probability). In comparison with the above, the probability that the former period is drawn by the above-mentioned initial value lottery process is extremely higher than that of the latter period. In other words, the value before the first value in the range of the jackpot judgment value (big hit judgment range) from the timing when the value of the initial value update type counter becomes the value 0 (value 32667 in low probability, value 31767 in high probability). Comparing the range up to and the range from the first value (value 32668 with high probability, value 31768 with high probability) to the maximum value (value 32767), the former range is compared with the latter range. Therefore, the probability of being drawn by the initial value lottery process is extremely high. Then, the initial value update type counter has a range from the value 0 to the value before the first value (value 32667 in low probability, value 31767 in high probability) in the range of big hit judgment value (big hit judgment range). Of these, one of the values becomes the value drawn by the initial value lottery process and is set in the above-mentioned random number for determining the initial value for jackpot judgment. Therefore, the value obtained in this lottery is directed toward the maximum value. It counts up, and then counts up from the minimum value toward the value obtained by lottery. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the big hit judgment random number, the initial value lottery process is executed again, the value obtained in this lottery is set, and the initial value update type counter , The value obtained by lottery will be counted up toward the maximum value. That is, as in the present embodiment, the range of the jackpot determination value (big hit determination range) is from the intermediate value (value 16384) between the minimum value and the maximum value to the maximum value side in both the low probability and the high probability. When the value is set to a range closer to, the value (low) before the first value in the range of the jackpot judgment value (big hit judgment range) from the timing when the value of the initial value update type counter becomes the value 0 The period until the value reaches 32667 in probability and 31767 in high probability) is irregular, and is rich in randomness. As a result, for example, the game ball is raised by illegally acquiring the timing at which the value of the initial value update type counter becomes 0 by some method and irradiating the upper start port 2101 and the lower start port 2102 with radio waves. Even if a fraudulent act is performed that pretends to have entered the starting port 2101 or the lower starting port 2102, the value of the initial value update type counter is one of the jackpot judgment value ranges (big hit judgment range). It can be said that the probability of becoming a value is low.

As shown in FIGS. 152 and 153, the initial value update type counter is repeatedly updated in the range from the minimum value to the maximum value. From the minimum value (first value) in the range of the jackpot judgment value (big hit judgment range) from the initial value to the minimum value (first value) of the jackpot judgment value range (big hit judgment range) in the second cycle The time required is time T0. The time required for the counter to reach the minimum value (first value) of the jackpot judgment value range (big hit judgment range) in the third cycle from the time T0 is the time T1, and the time T1 is shorter than the time T0. .. In the 4th cycle from the time T1, the time required for the counter to reach the minimum value (first value) of the jackpot judgment value range (big hit judgment range) is the time T2, and the time T2 is shorter than the time T1. .. In this way, in the initial value update type counter, by giving a fluctuation to the time when the updated counter becomes the minimum value (first value) of the jackpot judgment value range (big hit judgment range) (periodicity). (By eliminating the), it is not detected by the player.

[13-3. Main control side power-on processing]
When the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 performs the main control side power-on processing as shown in FIGS. 121 and 122. When the main control side power-on processing is started, the main control MPU4100a sets the stack pointer (step S10). The stack pointer indicates, for example, the address loaded on the stack to temporarily store the contents of the storage element (register) in use, or temporarily returns the return address of this routine when the subroutine is terminated and returned to this routine. It indicates the address stacked on the stack for storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked. In step S10, the initial address is set in the stack pointer, and the contents of the register, the return address, and the like are pushed onto the stack from this initial address. Then, the stack pointer returns to the initial address by reading from the last stacked stack to the first stacked stack in order.

Following step S10, wait timer processing 1 is performed (step S12) to determine whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S14). The voltage does not rise immediately between the time the power is turned on and the voltage reaches the specified voltage. On the other hand, in the event of a power failure or momentary power failure (a phenomenon in which the power supply is temporarily stopped), the voltage drops, and when the voltage becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b of the payout control board 4110 as a power failure warning. To. Similarly, when the voltage becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage between the time when the power is turned on and the voltage rises to the predetermined voltage, the power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b of the payout control board 4110. Therefore, the wait timer process 1 in step S12 is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes larger than the power failure warning voltage and stabilizes after the power is turned on. In the present embodiment, the waiting time (wait timer) is 200 milliseconds (waiting timer). ms) is set. The determination in step S14 is performed based on the power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b of the payout control board 4110.

Following step S14, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear switch 4100e shown in FIG. 97 is being operated (step S16). This determination is made based on whether or not the RAM clear switch 4100e of the main control board 4100 is operated and the operation signal (detection signal) thereof is input to the main control MPU 4100a. When the detection signal is input, it is determined that the RAM clear switch 4100e is operated, while when the detection signal is not input, it is determined that the RAM clear switch 4100e is not operated.

When the RAM clear switch 4100e is operated in step S16, the value 1 is set in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S18), while when the RAM clear switch 4100e is not operated in step S16, the RAM is cleared. The value 0 is set in the notification flag RCL-FLG (step S20). The RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is a game related to a game such as a probability fluctuation or an unpaid prize ball stored in a RAM built in the main control MPU4100a (hereinafter, referred to as "main control built-in RAM"). It is a flag indicating whether or not to delete the information, and is set to a value 1 when the game information is deleted and a value 0 when the game information is not deleted. The values of the RAM clear notification flags RCL-FLG set in steps S18 and S20 are stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU4100a.

Following step S18 or step S20, the wait timer process 2 is performed (step S22). In this wait timer process 2, the system that controls the drawing of the liquid crystal display device 1900 by the liquid crystal control unit 4160 of the peripheral control board 4140, which is shown in FIG. 100, is waiting until it starts (boots). In the present embodiment, 2 seconds (s) is set as the time until booting (boot timer).

Following step S22, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0 (step S24). As described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the game information is erased and a value of 0 when the game information is not erased. When the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0 in step S24, that is, when the game information is not erased, the checksum is calculated (step S26). This checksum regards the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value and calculates the total.

Following step S26, whether or not the calculated checksum value (sum value) matches the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power off processing (power off) described later. (Step S28). If they match, it is determined whether or not the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 (step S30). The backup flag BK-FLG stores the game backup information such as the game information, the checksum value (sum value), and the backup flag BK-FLG value in the main control built-in RAM in the main control side power cutoff process described later. This flag indicates whether or not the operation has been performed, and is set to a value of 1 when the main control side power off processing is normally completed, and a value of 0 when the main control side power off processing is not normally completed.

When the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 in step S30, that is, when the main control side power off processing is normally completed, the work area of the main control built-in RAM is set as the time of power recovery (step S32). In this setting, in addition to setting the value 0 to the backup flag BK-FLG, the power recovery information is read from the ROM built in the main control MPU4100a (hereinafter, referred to as "main control built-in ROM"), and this power recovery is performed. The time information is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. In addition, "recovery" means that the power is turned on from the state where the power is cut off, the state where the power is restored after the power failure or momentary power failure, and the state where high frequency irradiation is detected and reset. The state of returning after that is also included.

Following step S32, a power-on command creation process is performed (step S34). In this power-on command creation process, the game information is read from the game backup information, and various commands corresponding to the game information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

On the other hand, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not a value 0 (value 1) in step S24, that is, when the game information is erased, or when the checksum values (sum values) do not match in step S28. Or, when the backup flag BK-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0) in step S30, that is, when the main control side power off processing is not normally completed, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared ( Step S36). Specifically, the value 0 is written to the main control built-in RAM (note that a predetermined value may be read from the main control built-in ROM as an initial value and set). Further, the above-mentioned random number for determining the initial value for determining the jackpot for use in determining the initial value of the random number for determining the jackpot is used when the RAM clear switch 4100e is operated to erase the game information and the sum values do not match. Or, when the main control side power off processing is not normally completed, a unique ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM of the main control MPU4100a is taken out, and a random number for jackpot determination is taken out based on the taken out ID code. The initial value derivation process for always deriving the same fixed value from the fixed value range of the counter that updates is executed, and this fixed value is set.

Following step S36, the work area of the main control built-in RAM is set as an initial setting (step S38). This setting reads the initial information from the main control built-in ROM and sets this initial information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S38, RAM clear notification and test command creation processing are performed (step S40). In this RAM clear notification and test command creation process, a power-on command classified into power-on as shown in FIG. 118 is created to notify that the main control built-in RAM is cleared and the initial setting is performed, and the peripherals Test commands classified in relation to the test shown in FIG. 119 for performing various inspections of the control board 4140 are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S34 or step S40, interrupt initial setting is performed (step S42). This setting sets the interrupt cycle when the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 ms.

Following step S42, interrupt enable setting is performed. (Step S44). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed every 4 ms, that is, the interrupt cycle set in step S42.

Following step S44, the value A is set in the watch dock timer clear register WCL (step S46). The watch dock timer is set to clear by setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in this order in the watch dock timer clear register WCL.

Following step S46, it is determined whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S48). As described above, when the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off, or a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, when the voltage falls below the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is issued as a power failure warning of the payout control board 4110. Entered from. The determination in step S48 is performed based on this power failure warning signal.

When there is no input of the power failure warning signal in step S48, the non-winning random number update process is performed (step S50). In this non-winning random number update process, the above-mentioned random number for reach determination, random number for variable display pattern, random number for determining initial value for big hit symbol, random number for determining initial value for small hit symbol, and the like are updated. In this way, in the non-winning random number update process, random numbers that are not related to the winning determination (big hit determination) are updated. In addition, the above-mentioned random number for determining normal symbol hit, random number for determining initial value for determining normal symbol hit, random number for normal symbol variation display pattern, and the like are also updated by this non-winning random number update process.

Following step S50, the process returns to step S46 again, the value A is set in the watch dock timer clear register WCL, it is determined in step S48 whether or not there is a power failure warning signal input, and this power failure warning signal must be input. For example, the non-winning random number update process is performed in step S50, and steps S46 to S50 are repeated. The processing of steps S46 to S50 is referred to as "main control side main processing".

On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is input in step S48, the interrupt prohibition setting is set (step S52). With this setting, the timer interrupt process on the main control side, which will be described later, is not performed, writing to the main control built-in RAM is prevented, and rewriting of game information is protected.

Following step S52, the starting port solenoid 2105, the attacker solenoid 2108, the upper special symbol display 1185, the lower special symbol display 1186, the upper special symbol storage display 1184, and the lower special symbol storage display 1187 shown in FIG. 97 are shown. , The drive signal output to the normal symbol display 1189, the normal symbol storage display 1188, the game status display 1183, the round display 1190, etc. is stopped (step S54).

Following step S54, the checksum is calculated and the calculated value is stored (step S56). This checksum calculates the total of the game information of the work area of the main control built-in RAM, excluding the storage area of the checksum value (sum value) and the backup flag BK-FLG value described above, as numerical values.

Following step S56, the backup flag BK-FLG is set to a value of 1 (step S58). As a result, the storage of the game backup information is completed.

Following step S58, the watch dock timer is cleared (step S60). As described above, this clear setting is performed by setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in order in the watch dock timer clear register WCL.

Following step S60, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, the value A, the value B, and the value C are not set in order in the watch dock timer clear register WCL, so that the watch dock timer is not set to clear. Therefore, the main control MPU 4100a is reset, and then the main control MPU 4100a performs the main control side power-on processing again. The processing of steps S52 to S60 and the infinite loop are referred to as "main control side power off processing".

The pachinko gaming machine 1 (main control MPU4100a) is reset when there is a power failure or when there is a momentary power failure, and the main control side power is turned on when the power is restored thereafter.

In step S28, it is inspected whether or not the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM is normal, and then in step S30, whether or not the main control side power off processing is normally completed. Is inspecting. In this way, by double-checking the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM, it is inspected whether or not the game backup information is stored by fraudulent activity.

[13-4. Main control side timer interrupt processing]
Next, the timer interrupt processing on the main control side will be described. This main control side timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed every interrupt cycle (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the main control side power-on time process shown in FIGS. 121 and 122.

When the main control side timer interrupt process is started, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 sets the value B in the watch dock timer clear register WCL as shown in FIG. 123 (step S70). At this time, the value B is set in the watch dock timer clear register WCL following the value A set in step S46 of the main control side power-on processing (main control side main processing).

Following step S70, the interrupt flag is cleared (step S72). When this interrupt flag is cleared, the interrupt cycle is initialized, and the next interrupt cycle is clocked from the initial value.

Following step S72, switch input processing is performed (step S74). In this switch input process, various signals input to the input terminal of the main control I / O port 4100b are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Specifically, the detection signals from the general winning opening switches 3020 and 3020 shown in FIG. 97 for detecting the game ball entered in the general winning opening 2104 and 2201 shown in FIG. 95, and the large winning opening shown in FIG. 95. The detection signal from the count switch 2110 shown in FIG. 97 for detecting the game ball entering 2103, and the upper start port switch shown in FIG. 97 for detecting the game ball entering the upper start opening 2101 shown in FIG. 95. It passed through the detection signal from 3022, the detection signal from the lower start port switch 2109 shown in FIG. 97 to detect the game ball entering the lower start port 2102 shown in FIG. 95, and the gate portion 2350 shown in FIG. 95. It was transmitted by the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 shown in FIG. 97 for detecting the game ball, the detection signal from the magnetic detection switch 3024 for detecting fraudulent activity using the magnet shown in FIG. 97, and the prize ball control process described later. The payer ACK signal from the payout control board 4110, which conveys that the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. 97 has normally received the prize ball command, is read and stored in the input information storage area as input information. Further, the detection signal from the upper start port switch 3022 that detects the game ball that has entered the upper start port 2101 and the detection signal from the lower start port switch 2109 that detects the game ball that has entered the lower start port 2102 are read. And the corresponding start opening winning command shown in FIG. 119, which is classified into other categories, is stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area as transmission information. That is, if there is a detection signal from the upper start port switch 3022, the corresponding start port winning command is stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and if there is a detection signal from the lower start port switch 2109, The corresponding start opening winning command is stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information.

In this embodiment, the detection signals from the general winning opening switches 3020 and 3020 for detecting the game balls entered in the general winning openings 2104 and 2201, and the count switch 2110 for detecting the game balls entered in the large winning openings 2103. Detection signal from, detection signal from the upper start port switch 3022 that detects the game ball that entered the upper start port 2101, detection signal from the lower start port switch 2109 that detects the game ball that entered the lower start port 2102 , And the detection signals from the gate switch 2352 that detects the game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2350 are first read as the first time when the switch input process is started, and after a predetermined time (for example, 10 μs) has elapsed. The second time, each is read again. Then, the result read for the second time and the result read for the first time are compared. It is determined whether or not any of the comparison results has the same result. If the result is not the same, it is read again as the third time, and the result read in the third time is compared with the result read in the second time. It is determined again whether or not any of the comparison results has the same result. If the result is not the same, it is read again as the fourth time, and the result read at the fourth time is compared with the result read at the third time. It is determined again whether or not any of the comparison results has the same result. If the result is the same, it is treated as if there is no game ball.

As described above, in the switch input process, the detection signals from the general winning port switches 3020 and 3020, the count switch 2110, the upper start port switch 3022, the lower start port switch 2109, and the gate switch 2352 are transmitted from the first to the third time. It is possible to avoid erroneous detection due to the influence of chattering, noise, etc. by performing a total of two readings, a double reading for comparison and a double reading for comparison over the second to fourth times. Therefore, the reliability of the detection signals from the general winning port switches 3020 and 3020, the count switch 2110, the upper start port switch 3022, the lower start port switch 2109, and the gate switch 2352 can be improved.

Following step S74, timer subtraction processing is performed (step S76). In this timer subtraction process, for example, the time during which the upper special symbol display 1185 and the lower special symbol display 1186 are lit according to the fluctuation display pattern determined by the special symbol and the special electric accessory control process described later, the normal symbol described later, and the normal symbol In addition to the time when the normal symbol display 1189 lights up according to the normal symbol variation display pattern determined by the normal electric accessory control process, the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) issues various commands, and the control board 4110 is normal. When determining whether or not a payer ACK signal for notifying that it has been received is input, time management such as the ACK signal input determination time set as the determination condition is performed. Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interrupt cycle is set to 4 ms, so that the fluctuation time is subtracted by 4 ms each time the timer subtraction process is performed. Then, when the subtraction result becomes a value of 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

In the present embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. Each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the ACK signal input determination time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the subtraction result becomes a value of 0, so that the ACK signal input determination time is accurately measured. These various times and the ACK signal input determination time are stored in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as time management information.

Following step S76, the winning random number update process is performed (step S78). In this winning random number update process, the above-mentioned big hit determination random number, big hit symbol random number, and small hit symbol random number are updated. Further, in addition to these random numbers, the random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol, which is updated by the non-winning random number update process in step S50 in the main control side power-on processing (main control side main process) shown in FIG. 122, And the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol is also updated. These random numbers for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random numbers for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol are updated in the main control side main process and the main control side timer interrupt process, respectively, to further enhance the randomness. .. On the other hand, the big hit judgment random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the small hit symbol random number are random numbers related to the winning judgment (big hit judgment), so each counter is used only each time the winning random number update process is performed. Counts up. For example, the counter that updates the random number for jackpot determination is an initial value update type counter as described above, and has a predetermined fixed numerical range from the minimum value to the maximum value (in the present embodiment, the value is set as the minimum value). It is updated within the value 32767) as 0 to the maximum value, and the range from the minimum value to the maximum value is counted up by adding a value of 1 each time the main control side timer interrupt process is performed. The random number for determining the initial value for jackpot determination is counted up toward the maximum value (value 32767), and then the random number for determining the initial value for jackpot determination is counted up from the minimum value (value 0). When the counter that updates the big hit judgment random number finishes counting up in the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the big hit judgment random number, the big hit judgment initial value determination random number is updated by this winning random number update process. The random number for determining the initial value for jackpot determination can be obtained by executing the initial value lottery process for drawing one value from the fixed numerical value range of the counter that updates the random number for jackpot determination. The above-mentioned random number for determining the normal symbol hit and the random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol hit are also updated by this winning random number update process. The random number for determining a normal symbol hit is the same as the method for updating the random number for determining a big hit described above, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the present embodiment, the random number for determining the initial value for jackpot determination, the random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol, and the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol are processed at power-on on the main control side shown in FIG. 122 (main control). The non-winning random number update process in step S50 in the side main process) and the hit random number update process in step S78 in the main control side timer interrupt process, which is this routine, are updated respectively, but this routine is performed every time an interrupt timer occurs. When the number of executions of the non-winning random number update process in step S50 becomes random by repeatedly executing the main control side main process within the remaining time until the next interrupt timer occurs due to unevenness in the process time of , The random number for determining the initial value for big hit determination, the random number for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol, and the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol may be updated only in the non-winning random number update process in step S50.

Following step S78, prize ball control processing is performed (step S80). In this prize ball control process, the prize ball command shown in FIG. 117 for reading the input information from the above-mentioned input information storage area and paying out the game ball based on the input information can be created, or with the main control board 4100. The self-check command shown in FIG. 117 for confirming the connection state between the payout control board 4110 and the board is created. Then, the created prize ball command and self-check command are transmitted to the payout control board 4110 as main payment serial data. For example, when one game ball enters the large winning opening 2103 shown in FIG. 95, a prize ball command for paying out 15 balls as a prize ball is created and transmitted to the payout control board 4110, or this prize ball command Create a self-check command to check the connection status between the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110 when the payer ACK signal indicating that the payout control board 4110 has successfully received is not input within a predetermined time. Then, it is transmitted to the payout control board 4110.

Following step S80, frame command reception processing is performed (step S82). The payout control board 4110 transmits various 1-byte (8-bit) commands (frame state 1 command, error release navigation command, and frame state 2 command) classified into the state display shown in FIG. 120. In the frame command reception process of step S82, when these various commands are normally received as payer serial data, the information to convey that fact to the payout control board 4110 is stored as output information in the output information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. .. In addition, the command normally received as the payer serial data is formatted into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (various commands classified into the status display in FIG. 119 (frame status 1 command, error release navigation command, and frame). State 2 command)), the transmission information is stored in the transmission information storage area described above.

Following step S82, fraud detection processing is performed (step S84). In this fraud detection process, an abnormal state related to the prize ball is confirmed. For example, when the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area and the detection signal from the count switch 2110 is input when the game is not in the big hit game state (when the game ball enters the big winning opening 2103). , A winning abnormality display command classified into the notification display shown in FIG. 119 as an abnormal state is created, and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

Following step S84, special symbol and special electric accessory control processing is performed (step S86). In this special symbol and special electric accessory control process, the value of the counter that updates the above-mentioned random number for jackpot determination is taken out, and it is determined whether or not it matches the jackpot determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM (big hit). It is determined whether or not to generate a game state (referred to as "special lottery")), and the value of the counter that updates the random number for the jackpot symbol is taken out and used as the probability variation hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM. It is determined whether or not they match (determination of whether or not a probability fluctuation is generated). Here, the "probability fluctuation" means that the probability of a big hit changes to a high probability (probability change) set higher than that in the normal time (low probability). In the present embodiment, the value 32668 to the value 32767 are set as the above-mentioned jackpot determination value range (big hit determination range) with a low probability, and are read from the normal judgment table, whereas the value 31768 with a high probability. ~ Value 32767 is set and is read from the probability change determination table. As described above, in the special symbol and the special electric accessory control process in step S86, whether or not the value of the counter for updating the random number for jackpot determination and the jackpot determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM match. When determining whether or not, the value of the counter that updates the jackpot determination random number is included in the jackpot determination range.

When these determination results are based on the upper start port switch 3022, various commands related to the special figure 1 synchronization effect shown in FIG. 118 are created, while the lottery result is based on the lower start port switch 2109. In, various commands related to the special figure 2 synchronization effect shown in FIG. 118 are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and the upper special symbol display 1185 or the upper special symbol display 1185 or according to the determined variation display pattern of the special symbol is created. The output of the lighting signal to the upper special symbol display 1185 or the lower special symbol display 1186 is set so as to light the lower special symbol display 1186, and the output information is stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area. In addition, depending on the game state to be generated, for example, when a big hit game state is reached, various commands classified in relation to the big hit shown in FIG. 118 (big hit opening command, big winning opening 1 opening Nth display command, big winning opening 1). A closing display command, a big winning opening 1 count display command, a big hit ending command, and a big hit symbol display command) are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, or the opening / closing member 2107 shown in FIG. 95 is opened / closed. When the output of the drive signal to the attacker solenoid 2108 is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area, or when the number of times (round) that the grand prize opening 2103 is opened from the closed state is two times, the figure is shown in the figure. The output of the lighting signal to the 2-round indicator lamp 1190a is set so as to light the 2-round indicator lamp 1190a of the round indicator 1190 shown in 91, and the lighting signal is stored in the output information storage area as output information, or 15 rounds are performed. At one time, the output of the lighting signal to the 15-round indicator lamp 1190b is set so as to light the 15-round indicator lamp 1190b of the round indicator 1190 shown in 89, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area or the probability fluctuates. The output of the lighting signal to the game status indicator 1183 is set so that the presence or absence of the occurrence of the above is lit in a predetermined color, and is stored in the output information storage area as output information.

Following step S86, a normal symbol and a normal electric accessory control process are performed (step S88). In this ordinary symbol and ordinary electric accessory control process, input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and gate winning processing is performed based on this input information. In this gate winning process, it is determined from the input information whether or not the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 has been input to the input terminal. Based on this determination result, when the detection signal is input to the input terminal, the value of the counter that updates the above-mentioned normal symbol hit determination random number is extracted and used as the gate information in the gate information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Remember in.

The gate information storage area is provided with 0th to 3rd sections (4 sections), and gate information is stored in the order of 0th section, 1st section, 2nd section, and 3rd section. It has become like. For example, when the gate information is stored in the 0th to 2nd sections of the gate information storage, the gate information is stored in the 3rd section of the gate information storage when the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 is input to the input terminal. To do.

The gate information stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. When this gate information is set, the gate information of the first section of the gate information storage is in the 0th section of the gate information storage, and the gate information of the second section of the gate information storage is in the first section of the gate information storage. The gate information of the third section of the information storage is shifted to the second section of the gate information storage, and the third section of the gate information storage becomes an empty area. For example, when the gate information is stored in the first to second sections of the gate information storage, the gate information of the first section of the gate information storage is stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage, and the gate information is stored in the 0th section. The gate information of the two sections is shifted to the first section of the gate information storage, and the second section of the gate information storage and the third section of the gate information storage become free areas. Here, when the gate information is stored in the first to third sections of the gate information storage, the above-mentioned gate information is set so that the normal symbol storage display 1188 is turned on with the total number of the stored gate information as the holding ball. The output of the lighting signal of the normal symbol storage display 1188 is set based on the above, and is stored in the output information storage area described above as output information.

Following the gate winning process, the gate information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM is read, and the value of the random number for normal symbol hit determination is taken out from the read gate information and stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM. It is judged whether or not it matches the judgment value per normal symbol (referred to as "normal lottery"). Whether or not to open and close the movable piece 2106 is determined based on this determination result (lottery result by ordinary lottery). When the opening / closing operation is performed by this determination, the pair of movable pieces 2106 are in a state of being expanded in the left-right direction, so that the game ball can be accepted into the lower starting port 2102, which is advantageous for the player. It becomes a game state. The variation display pattern of the normal symbol corresponding to this determination is determined based on the above-mentioned random number for the normal symbol variation display pattern, and various commands classified in relation to the normal symbol synchronization effect shown in FIG. 118 are created and used as transmission information. The output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display 1189 is set so as to be stored in the transmission information storage area described above and to light the normal symbol display 1189 according to the determined variation display pattern of the normal symbol, and the output information is described above. It is stored in the output information storage area. Further, for example, when the value of the extracted normal symbol hit judgment random number matches the normal symbol hit judgment value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, various commands related to the normal electric service effect shown in FIG. Is created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and the output of the drive signal to the start port solenoid 2105 is set so as to open and close the movable piece 2106, and is stored in the output information storage area described above as output information. On the other hand, when the value of the extracted normal symbol hit judgment random number does not match the normal symbol hit judgment value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, the normal symbol is based on the above-mentioned normal symbol variation display pattern random number. A variable display pattern is determined, various commands classified in relation to the normal symbol synchronization effect shown in FIG. 118 are created, stored as transmission information in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and according to the determined normal symbol variation display pattern. The output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display 1189 is set so as to light the normal symbol display 1189, and the output information is stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area.

Following step S88, port output processing is performed (step S90). In this port output process, output information is read from the output information storage area described above from the output terminal of the main control I / O port 4100b, and various signals are output based on this output information. For example, when various commands from the payout control board 4110 are normally received from the output terminal of the main control I / O port 4100b based on the output information, the main payout ACK signal is output to the payout control board 4110, or a big hit game. In addition to outputting a drive signal to the attacker solenoid 2108 that opens and closes the opening and closing member 2107 of the large winning opening 2103, and outputting a drive signal to the starting port solenoid 2105 that opens and closes the movable piece 2106 when in the state. , 15 round big hit information output signal, 2 round big hit information output signal, probability fluctuation information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, time saving medium information output information, start opening winning information output signal, etc. Various information (game information) signals related to the game are output to the payout control board 4110.

Following step S90, peripheral control board command transmission processing is performed (step S92). In this peripheral control board command transmission process, transmission information is read from the transmission information storage area described above, and this transmission information is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 as main peripheral serial data. This transmission information includes various commands classified in the special figure 1 synchronization effect-related and various types classified in the special figure 2 synchronization effect-related, as shown in FIG. 118, created by the main control side timer interrupt process of this routine. Commands, various commands classified as jackpot related, various commands classified as power-on, various commands classified as related to normal electric service production, various commands classified as related to ordinary electric service production, shown in FIG. 119. Various commands classified into the notification display, various commands classified into the status display, various commands classified into the test-related command, and various commands classified into others are stored. One packet of the main peripheral serial data is composed of 3 bytes. Specifically, the main peripheral serial data has a status indicating the type of command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating a variation of an effect having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status. It is composed of a sum value obtained by regarding the mode as a numerical value and a sum of the sum values, and this sum value is created at the time of transmission.

Following step S92, the value C is set in the watch dock timer clear register WCL (step S94). By setting the value C in the watch dock timer clear register WCL in step S94, the value C is set in the watch dock timer clear register WCL following the value B set in step S70. As a result, the value A, the value B, and the value C are set in order in the watch dock timer clear register WCL, and the watch dock timer is set to clear.

Following step S94, register switching (returning) is performed (step S96), and this routine is terminated. Here, when the main control side timer interrupt process, which is this routine, is started, the main control MPU4100a stacks the contents of the general-purpose register on the stack and saves them. This prevents the contents of the general-purpose register used in the main processing on the main control side from being destroyed. In step S96, the contents loaded on the stack and saved are read and written to the original register. The main control MPU4100a sets interrupt enable after returning in step S96.

[14. Various control processes for payout control boards]
Next, various control processes performed by the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. 98 will be described with reference to FIGS. 124 to 142. FIG. 124 is a flowchart showing an example of the power-on processing of the payout control unit, FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the power-on processing of the payout control unit of FIG. 124, and FIG. 126 shows the payout control unit following FIG. 125. FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the power-on processing, FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing an example of the payout control unit timer interrupt processing, FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing an example of the ball removal switch operation determination processing, and FIG. 129 is a rotation chart. FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing an example of the angle switch history creation process, FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing an example of the sprocket fixed position determination skip process, FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing an example of the ball bending determination process, and FIG. 132 is a prize. FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing an example of the ball prize ball stock number addition process, FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing an example of the ball rental prize ball stock number addition process, and FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing an example of the stock monitoring process. FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing an example of the payout ball removal determination setting process, FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing an example of the payout setting process, FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing an example of the ball removal setting process, and FIG. FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing an example of a retry operation monitoring process, FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing an example of an inconsistency counter reset determination process, and FIG. 141 is an error clearing flowchart. FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing an example of the switch operation determination process, and FIG. 142 is a timing chart showing the signal process (a) and the input signal confirmation process (a) from the CR unit during the payout operation by ball lending.

First, the payout control unit power-on processing will be described, followed by the payout control unit timer interrupt processing, ball removal switch operation judgment processing, rotation angle switch history creation processing, sprocket fixed position judgment skip processing, ball bending judgment processing, and prize. Ball prize ball stock number addition process, ball rental prize ball stock number addition process, stock monitoring process, payout ball removal judgment setting process, payout setting process, ball ball movement setting process, ball removal setting process, retry operation monitoring process , Inconsistency counter reset determination process, error release switch operation determination process will be described. In addition, ball removal switch operation judgment processing, rotation angle switch history creation processing, sprocket fixed position judgment skip processing, ball bending judgment processing, prize ball stock number addition processing for prize balls, prize ball stock number addition processing for rental balls, stock The monitoring process, payout ball removal determination setting process, retry operation monitoring process, inconsistency counter reset determination process, and error release switch operation determination process are one of the main operation setting processes of step S562 in the payout control unit power-on time process described later. Ball removal switch operation judgment processing, rotation angle switch history creation processing, sprocket fixed position judgment skip processing, ball bending judgment processing, retry operation monitoring processing, inconsistency counter reset judgment processing, error release switch operation judgment processing, The priority is set in the order of the prize ball stock number addition process for prize balls, the prize ball stock number addition process for rental balls, the stock monitoring process, and the payout ball exclusion determination setting process.

[14-1. Dispensing control unit power-on processing]
When the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 on the payout control board 4110 performs the payout control unit power-on time process as shown in FIGS. 124 to 126. When the payout control unit power-on processing is started, the payout control MPU4120a sets the interrupt mode (step S500). This interrupt mode sets the priority of the interrupt of the payout control MPU4120a. In the present embodiment, the payout control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is set to the highest priority, and when an interrupt of the payout control unit timer interrupt process occurs, the process is preferentially performed.

Following step S500, input / output settings (I / O input / output settings) are performed (step S502). In this I / O input / output setting, the I / O port input / output setting of the payout control MPU4120a is performed.

Following step S502, the output of the power failure clear signal to the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b shown in FIG. 106 is started (step S504). The power failure monitoring circuit 4110b is composed of a voltage comparison circuit and a D-type flip-flop IC. The voltage comparison circuit outputs the comparison result by comparing the voltage of + 24V and the reference voltage or comparing the voltage of + 12V and the reference voltage. This comparison result becomes HI when no power failure or momentary power failure occurs and is input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D type flip-flop PIC22, while when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs. The logic becomes LOW and is input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D type flip-flop PIC22. In step S504, the output of the power failure clear signal is started to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D type flip-flop PIC22. The power failure clear signal is input to the clear terminal with its logic set to LOW via the payout control I / O port 4120b of the payout control unit 4120. As a result, the payout control MPU4120a can release the latch state of the D-type flip-flop PIC22, and until the latch state is set, the logic input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop PIC22 is input. It can be inverted and output from the 1Q terminal, which is an output terminal, and the signal from the 1Q terminal can be monitored.

Following step S504, wait timer processing 1 is performed (step S506) to determine whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S508). The voltage does not rise immediately between the time the power is turned on and the voltage reaches the specified voltage. On the other hand, in the event of a power failure or momentary power failure (a phenomenon in which the power supply is temporarily stopped), the voltage drops, and when the voltage becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b as a power failure warning. Similarly, when the voltage becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage between the time when the power is turned on and the voltage rises to a predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b. Therefore, the wait timer process 1 in step S506 is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes larger than the power failure warning voltage and stabilizes after the power is turned on. In the present embodiment, the waiting time (wait timer) is 200 milliseconds (waiting timer). ms) is set. In the determination in step S508, it is determined whether or not the power failure warning signal is input. This determination is performed based on the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop PIC22 described above, as the power failure warning signal.

Following step S508, the output of the power failure clear signal is stopped at the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop PIC22 (step S510). By stopping the output of the power failure clear signal, the logic becomes HI via the payout control I / O port 4120b and is input to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal. As a result, the payout control MPU4120a can set the D-type flip-flop PIC22 in the latched state. The D-type flip-flop PIC 22 outputs a power failure warning signal from the 1Q terminal, which is an output terminal, when latching a state in which the logic is LOW and is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal.

Following step S510, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear switch 4100e is operated (step S512). This determination is made based on whether or not the RAM clear switch 4100e of the main control board 4100 is operated and the operation signal (detection signal) thereof is input to the payout control MPU 4120a. When the detection signal is input, it is determined that the RAM clear switch 4100e is operated, while when the detection signal is not input, it is determined that the RAM clear switch 4100e is not operated.

When the RAM clear switch 4100e is operated in step S512, the value 1 is set in the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG (step S514), while the payout RAM clear switch 4100e is not operated in step S512. The value 0 is set in the RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG (step S516). The payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is stored in the RAM built in the payout control MPU4120a (hereinafter, referred to as “payout control built-in RAM”), for example, various flags and various information storage areas. Various information and the like (for example, the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc. stored in the prize ball information storage area, and the CR communication information storage area. It is a flag indicating whether or not to delete the payout information related to the payout of the PRDY signal output setting information in which the logical state of the PRDY signal is set, and the value is 1 when the payout information is erased. Is set to a value of 0 when is not deleted. The payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG set in steps S514 and S516 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU4120a.

Following step S514 or step S516, a setting is made to allow access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S518). With this setting, the RAM with built-in payout control can be accessed, and for example, payout information can be written (stored) or read out.

Following step S518, the stack pointer is set (step S520). The stack pointer indicates, for example, the address loaded on the stack to temporarily store the contents of the storage element (register) in use, or temporarily returns the return address of this routine when the subroutine is terminated and returned to this routine. It indicates the address stacked on the stack for storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked. In step S520, the initial address is set in the stack pointer, and the contents of the register, the return address, and the like are pushed onto the stack from this initial address. Then, the stack pointer returns to the initial address by reading from the last stacked stack to the first stacked stack in order.

Following step S520, it is determined whether or not the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG has a value of 0 (step S522). As described above, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to a value 1 when the payout information is erased and a value 0 when the payout information is not erased.

When the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG has a value of 0 in step S522, that is, when the payout information is not erased, the checksum is calculated (step S524). In this checksum, the payout information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is regarded as a numerical value and the total is calculated.

Following step S524, it is determined whether or not the calculated checksum value matches the checksum value stored in the payout control unit power off processing (when the power is turned off), which will be described later (step S526). .. If they match, it is determined whether or not the payout backup flag HBK-FLG has a value of 1 (step S528). The payout backup flag HBK-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the payout backup information such as the payout information and the checksum value is stored and held in the payout control built-in RAM in the payout control unit power cutoff process described later, and is paid out. The value is set to 1 when the control unit power off processing is normally completed, and is set to 0 when the payout control unit power off processing is not normally completed.

When the payout backup flag HBK-FLG has a value of 1 in step S528, that is, when the payout control unit power off processing is normally completed, the work area of the payout control built-in RAM is set as the time of power recovery (step S530). In this setting, in addition to setting the value 0 to the payout backup flag HBK-FLG, the power recovery information is read from the ROM built in the payout control MPU4120a (hereinafter, referred to as “payout control built-in ROM”). Set the power recovery information in the work area of the output control built-in RAM. As a result, various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas, etc. (for example, prizes stored in the prize ball information storage area), which are the above-mentioned payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM. Ball stock number PBS, actual ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc., PRDY signal output setting information in which the logical state of the PRDY signal is set, stored in the CR communication information storage area, Information to be used for various processes is set based on the payout information related to the payout of the inconsistency counter reset judgment time stored in the time management information storage area. The term "recovery" includes not only the state in which the power is turned on from the state in which the power is cut off, but also the state in which the power is restored after the power failure or momentary power failure.

On the other hand, when the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is not a value 0 (value 1) in step S522, that is, when the payout information is deleted, or when the checksum values do not match in step S526, or step. When the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0) in S528, that is, when the payout control unit power off processing is not normally completed, the entire area of the payout control built-in RAM is cleared (step S532). ). As a result, the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is cleared.

Following step S532, the work area of the payout control built-in RAM is set as an initial setting (step S534). This setting reads the initial information from the payout control built-in ROM and sets this initial information in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S530 or step S534, interrupt initial setting is performed (step S536). This setting sets the interrupt cycle when the payout control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 1.75 ms.

Following step S536, interrupt enable setting is performed (step S538). With this setting, the payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed every 1.75 ms, that is, the interrupt cycle set in step S536.

Following step S538, it is determined whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S540). As described above, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off, a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, when the voltage becomes equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b as a power failure warning. The determination in step S540 is performed based on this power failure warning signal.

When there is no input of the power failure warning signal in step S540, it is determined whether or not the 1.75 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1 (step S542). This 1.75 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that measures 1.75 ms by the payout control unit timer interrupt process that is processed every 1.75 ms, which will be described later, and the values 1, 1. The value is set to 0 when 75 ms has not passed.

When the 1.75 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 0 in step S542, that is, when 1.75 ms has not elapsed, the process returns to step S540 to determine whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input.

On the other hand, when the 1.75 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1 in step S542, that is, when 1.75 ms has elapsed, the 1.75 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is set to a value of 0 (step S544), and the external watchdog is docked. The external WDT clear signal is output (ON, step S546) to the timer (external WDT) 4120c. The external WDT4120c monitors the operation (system) of the payout control MPU4120a, and outputs a reset signal to the payout control MPU4120a and the payout control I / O port 4120b when the external WDT clear signal is not stopped at the clear signal release time. And reset (the system of the payout control MPU4120a is regularly diagnosed for runaway).

Following step S546, port output processing is performed (step S548). In this port output process, various information is read from the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and various signals are output from the output terminal of the payout control I / O port 4120b based on the various information. In the output information storage area, for example, payer ACK information indicating that various commands related to payout from the main control board 4100 (prize ball command and self-check command shown in FIG. 117) have been normally received, payout motor 744 Various information such as drive information for controlling the drive to, prize ball number information for the number of balls actually paid out by the payout motor 744, and LED display information displayed on the error LED display 860c is stored. When various commands related to payout from the main control board 4100 are normally received from the output terminal of the payout control I / O port 4120b based on the output information, the payer ACK signal is output to the main control board 4100 or the payout motor 744. The drive signal is output to, or the number of balls actually paid out by the payout motor 744 is output to the external terminal board 784 as a prize ball number information signal (in the present embodiment, 10 payout motors 744 are actually used). Each time the game ball is paid out, the prize ball number information signal is output to the external terminal board 784), and the display signal is output to the error LED display 860c.

Following step S548, port input processing is performed (step S550). In this port input process, various signals input to the input terminal of the payout control I / O port 4120b are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. For example, the operation signal of the error release switch 860a, the detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752, the detection signal from the counting switch 751, the detection signal from the full tank switch 550, the BRQ signal from the CR unit 6, the BRDY signal, and the CR connection signal. , Read the main payment ACK signal from the main control board 4100 that conveys that the main control board 4100 has normally received various commands transmitted in the command transmission process described later, and store them in the input information storage area as input information. ..

Following step S550, timer update processing is performed (step S552). In this timer update process, when determining whether or not the ball squeezing state is generated by the payout rotating body 748 shown in FIG. 70, the ball squeezing determination time and the payout rotating body 748 set as the determination conditions are determined. The skip determination time set when the fixed position determination is not performed, and the ball removal determination set when discharging the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail 731 shown in FIG. 69. Time, full tank determination time set as a determination condition when determining whether or not the game ball in which the accommodation space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 shown in FIG. 48 is full is full, and the ball runs out. When determining whether or not the number of game balls taken into the supply passage 741a of the prize ball device 740 by the detection signal from the switch 750 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, the ball is out, which is set as a determination condition. In addition to managing the time such as the determination time, the number of game balls received and paid out by the recess 748a of the payout rotating body 748 and the number of balls actually detected by the counting switch 751 do not match. Inconsistency counter for monitoring whether or not the game balls that do not match are repeatedly paid out. Inconsistency counter reset determination time set as the determination condition when determining whether to reset the INCC. Time management. For example, when the ball squeeze judgment time is set to 5005 ms, the timer interrupt cycle is set to 1.75 ms, so that the sphere squeeze judgment time is subtracted by 1.75 ms each time the timer update process is performed. , When the subtraction result becomes a value of 0, the ball squeeze determination time is accurately measured.

In the present embodiment, the skip determination time is set to 22.75 ms, the ball removal determination time is set to 60060 ms, the full tank determination time is set to 504 ms, the ball out determination time is set to 119 ms, and the inconsistency counter reset determination time is set to 7000 s (about 2 hours). Each time this timer update process is performed, the ball removal judgment time, the full tank judgment time, the ball out judgment time, and the inconsistency counter reset judgment time are subtracted by 1.75 ms, and the subtraction result becomes a value of 0. The ball removal judgment time, the full tank judgment time, the ball out judgment time, and the inconsistency counter reset judgment time are accurately measured. It should be noted that these various determination times are stored in the time management information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM as time management information.

Following step S552, CR communication processing is performed (step S554). In this CR communication process, whether or not various signals (BRQ signal, BRDY signal and CR connection signal) from the CR unit 6 are input based on the input information read from the above-mentioned input information storage area. To judge. The payout control MPU4120a exchanges various signals with the CR unit 6 based on various signals from the CR unit 6. In the process of setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530, as described above, various flags and various information stored in the various information storage areas, which are payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM. Etc. (For example, the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc. stored in the prize ball information storage area, and the PRDY stored in the CR communication information storage area. Information to be used for various processes is set based on the payout information related to the payout of the PRDY signal output setting information in which the logical state of the signal is set. By this processing, for example, even if there is a momentary power failure or a power failure, the values such as the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, and the inconsistency counter INCC at the time of power recovery are stored as payout backup information. It can be restored to the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc. immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure. As a result, even if the payout operation of the game ball is being executed by the prize ball device 740 and the payout operation cannot be continued due to a momentary power failure or a power failure, the payout operation is continued at the time of power recovery. Therefore, the game ball can be paid out to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 without excess or deficiency. In other words, the payout control MPU4120a momentarily stops or loses power when paying out the game ball to the upper plate 301 or the lower plate 302 while exchanging various signals with the CR unit 6 in the CR communication process. Even if the exchange of various signals with the unit 6 is interrupted and it becomes impossible to continue paying out the game balls, the number of prize balls stock PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, and the inconsistency counter INCC at the time of power recovery. Etc. are restored to the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc., which are stored as the payout backup information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure. , The exchange of various signals between the pachinko gaming machine 1 (payout control MPU4120a) and the CR unit 6 immediately before a momentary power failure or power failure can be continued from the time of power recovery, and the game balls can be continuously paid out. You can do it. In this way, even if the exchange of various signals between the pachinko gaming machine 1 (pain control MPU4120a) and the CR unit 6 is momentarily stopped or stopped, it is restored to the state immediately before the momentary stop or stop at the time of power recovery. The various signals by the pachinko gaming machine 1 (payout control MPU4120a) and the CR unit 6 do not change due to the influence of the momentary power failure or stoppage. Therefore, the reliability of the exchange of various signals between the pachinko gaming machine 1 (payout control MPU4120a) and the CR unit 6 can be improved. Further, various information stored in the CR communication information storage area is included in the payout backup information as described above. In the CR communication process, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM, which is set in the process of setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530 at the time of power recovery. When the read PRDY signal output setting information is set to the logical state of the PRDY signal that conveys, for example, that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is impossible, the PRDY signal is paid out. Output to the CR unit 6 from the output terminal of the I / O port 4120b. Then, in the retry operation monitoring process performed as one of the main operation setting processes, for example, the value of the inconsistency counter INCC of the prize ball information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM included in the payout backup information. Based on, it is determined whether or not the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is smaller than the inconsistency threshold value INCTH, and when the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is not smaller than the inconsistency threshold value INCTH, the retry operation is abnormal. In other words, it is determined that the payout operation of the game ball by the prize ball device 740 is in an abnormal state, a value 1 is set in the retry error flag RTERR-FLG, and in the payout ball removal determination setting process, As a setting of the output of the error state to the CR unit 6, for example, the logical state (LOW) of the PRDY signal for notifying that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is impossible when not communicating with the CR unit 6 is set to PRDY. It is set in the signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area. As a result, in the CR communication processing, the logical state of this PRDY signal is read from the CR communication information storage area at the next timer interrupt from the time of power recovery, and the PRDY signal is read from the output terminal of the payout control I / O port 4120b. Output to CR unit 6. In this way, for example, if the payout operation of the game ball by the prize ball device 740 is in an abnormal state immediately before the momentary power failure, that state is restored when the power is restored. At an early stage, a PRDY signal indicating that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is impossible can be output from the output terminal of the payout control I / O port 4120b to the CR unit 6, and the CR unit 6 is awarded. It is possible to convey that the payout operation of the game ball by the ball device 740 is in an abnormal state. As a result, it is possible to prevent BRDY, which is a useless ball lending request signal, from being output from the CR unit 6 at an extremely early stage from the time of power recovery. Further, in the CR communication process, in the port input process of step S550, when the CR connection signal is read from the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM and the logic is HI based on the CR connection signal, that is, the pachinko gaming machine. When the power is turned on and the payout control board 4110 and the CR unit 6 are electrically connected via the game ball or the like lending device connection terminal board 869, the lending ball is to be paid out. In order to convey that the payout operation is possible, the logical state of the PRDY signal is output as HI from the output terminal of the payout control I / O port 4120b to the CR unit 6, while the logic is LOW, that is, pachinko. When the game machine 1 is turned on and the payout control board 4110 and the CR unit 6 are not electrically connected via the game ball or the like rental device connection terminal plate 869, the payout ball is paid out. In order to convey that the payout operation is not possible, the logical state of the PRDY signal is set to LOW and output from the output terminal of the payout control I / O port 4120b to the CR unit 6. The logical state of the EXE signal for notifying that one payout operation has started or ended is stored in the CR communication information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM as EXS signal output setting information, and is stored in the payout control board 4110. The CR connection signal that conveys whether or not the CR unit 6 is electrically connected is stored in the state information storage area as CR connection information.

Following step S554, a full tank and out-of-ball check process is performed (step S556). In this full tank and out-of-ball check process, the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and based on this input information, the accommodation space 546 of the above-mentioned foul cover unit 540 is stored by the detection signal from the full tank switch 550. It is determined whether or not the game balls are full, and the number of game balls taken into the supply passage 741a of the prize ball device 740 described above by the detection signal from the ball out switch 750 is equal to or more than a predetermined number. It is judged whether or not it is. For example, to determine whether or not the game ball in which the accommodation space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is stored is full, the timer interrupt cycle of 1.75 ms is used in the current full tank and out-of-ball check process. When the detection signal from the full tank switch 550 is ON and the detection signal from the full tank switch 550 is OFF in the previous (1.75 ms before) full tank and ball out check process, that is, detection from the full tank switch 550 When the signal changes from OFF to ON, the timer update process in step S552 starts counting the full tank determination time (504 ms) described above. Then, when the full tank determination time becomes 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the full tank determination time is reached, whether or not the detection signal from the full tank switch 550 is ON in this full tank and ball out check process Is determined. In this determination, when the detection signal from the full tank switch 550 is ON, the state information described above provides the full tank information indicating that the accommodation space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is full with the stored game ball. Store in the storage area. On the other hand, when the detection signal from the full tank switch 550 is OFF, the full tank information indicating that the game ball in which the accommodation space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is stored is not full is stored in the state information storage area. To do.

The timer interrupt cycle of 1.75 ms is also used to check whether the number of game balls taken into the supply passage 741a of the prize ball device 740 is equal to or greater than the predetermined number. When the detection signal from the ball-out switch is ON in the process, and the detection signal from the ball-out switch is OFF in the previous (1.75 ms ago) full tank and ball-out check process, that is, detection from the ball-out switch 750 When the signal changes from OFF to ON, the timer update process in step S552 starts counting the ball-out determination time (119 ms) described above. Then, when the ball-out determination time becomes 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the ball-out determination time is reached, whether or not the detection signal from the ball-out switch 750 is ON in this full tank and ball-out check process Is determined. In this determination, when the detection signal from the ball-out switch 750 is ON, the ball-out information indicating that the number of game balls taken into the supply passage 741a of the prize-ball device 740 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number is provided. While storing in the state information storage area, when the detection signal from the ball out switch 750 is OFF, it is notified that the number of game balls taken into the supply passage 741a of the prize ball device 740 is not equal to or more than a predetermined number. The ball out information is stored in the state information storage area.

Following step S556, command reception processing is performed (step S558). In this command reception process, various commands related to payout from the main control board 4100 (prize ball command and self-check command shown in FIG. 117) are received. When these various commands are normally received, the payer ACK information to that effect is stored in the output information storage area described above. On the other hand, when various commands cannot be received normally, a connection abnormality is transmitted to indicate that an abnormality has occurred in the connection between the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110 (an abnormality has occurred in various command signals). Information is stored in the state information storage area described above.

Following step S558, command analysis processing is performed (step S560). In this command analysis process, the command received in step S558 is analyzed, and the analyzed command is stored in the received command information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM as received command information.

Following step S560, the main operation setting process is performed (step S562). In this main motion setting process, motion settings such as prize balls, lending balls, ball pulling, and ball scooping are performed, retry operation is determined, and the number of unpaid balls (prize ball stock number) is monitored. To do.

Following step S562, LED display data creation processing is performed (step S564). In this LED display data creation process, various information is read from the state information storage area described above, display data to be displayed on the error LED display 860c of the payout control board 4110 is created, and the output information storage area described above is used as the LED display information. Remember. For example, when the above-mentioned ball-out information is read from the state information storage area and the number of game balls taken into the supply passage 741a of the prize ball device 740 is not more than a predetermined number based on the ball-out information, the corresponding display is displayed. Data (display value 1 (number "1") in this embodiment) is created and the LED display information is stored in the output information storage area.

Following step S564, a command transmission process is performed (step S566). In this command transmission process, various types of information are read from the above-mentioned state information storage area, and various commands (frame state 1 command, error release navigation command, and frame) classified into the state display shown in FIG. 119 based on the various information. A state 2 command) is created and transmitted to the main control board 4100. For example, when the ball-out information is read from the state information storage area, the frame state 1 command is used when the number of game balls taken into the supply passage 741a of the prize ball device 740 is not equal to or more than a predetermined number based on the ball-out information. Is created and transmitted to the main control board 4100.

Following step S566, the output of the external WDT clear signal to the external watchdog timer (external WDT) 4120c is stopped (OFF, step S568). As a result, the external WDT4120c is cleared so that the payout control MPU4120a and the payout control I / O port 4120b are not reset. Further, when the output of the external WDT clear signal is stopped, the external WDT4120c starts timing the clear signal release time.

Following step S568, the process returns to step S540 again to determine whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input. If this power failure warning signal is not input, the 1.75 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1 in step S542. When the 1.75 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1, that is, when 1.75 ms has elapsed, the 1.75 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is set to a value of 0 in step S544. , Step S546 outputs (ON) an external WDT clear signal to the external WDT4120c, step S548 performs port output processing, step S550 performs port input processing, step S552 performs timer update processing, and step S554 performs CR communication. Processing is performed, full tank and out-of-ball check processing is performed in step S556, command reception processing is performed in step S558, command analysis processing is performed in step S560, main operation setting processing is performed in step S562, and LED display is performed in step S564. The data creation process is performed, the command transmission process is performed in step S566, the output of the external WDT clear signal is stopped (OFF) to the external WDT4120c in step S568, and steps S540 to S568 are repeated. The process of steps S540 to S568 is referred to as "payout control unit main process".

The processing content of the payout control unit main processing differs according to the progress of the game by the main control board 4100. Therefore, the time required for the processing of the payout control MPU4120a varies. Therefore, in the port output process of step S548, the payout control MPU 4120a preferentially outputs a payer ACK signal indicating that various commands related to payout from the main control board 4100 have been normally received to the main control board 4100. There is. As a result, the payout control MPU4120a secures the processing time so that other fluctuating processing can be sufficiently performed.

On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is input in step S540, the interrupt prohibition setting is set (step S570). With this setting, the timer interrupt process of the payout control unit, which will be described later, is not performed, writing to the payout control built-in RAM is prevented, and the above-mentioned rewriting of the payout information is protected. Following step S570, the power failure clear signal is output to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal of the D type flip-flop PIC22 of the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b, via the payout control I / O port 4120b (step S572). As a result, the D-type flip-flop PIC 22 can release the latch state by outputting the power failure clear signal. Following step S572, the output of the drive signal to the payout motor 744 is stopped (step S574). As a result, the payout of the game ball is stopped. Following step S574, an external WDT clear signal is output to the external WDT4120c and the output is stopped (ON / OFF, step S576). This clears the external WDT4120c. Following step S576, the checksum is calculated and the calculated value is stored (step S578). For this checksum, the payout information of the work area of the payout control built-in RAM excluding the storage area of the checksum value and the value of the payout backup flag HBK-FLG calculated in step S524 is regarded as a numerical value, and the total is calculated. Following step S578, the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is set to a value of 1 (step S580). As a result, the storage of the payout backup information is completed. Following step S580, access prohibition setting to the payout control built-in RAM is set (step S582). By this setting, access to the payout control built-in RAM is prohibited, writing and reading become impossible, and the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is protected. Following step S582, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, the clear signal is not turned ON / OFF to the external WDT4120c. Therefore, the external WDT4120c outputs a reset signal to the payout control MPU4120a and the payout control I / O port 4120b to reset. After that, the payout control MPU4120a performs the payout control unit power-on processing again. The processing of steps S570 to S582 and the infinite loop are referred to as "payout control unit power off processing".

The pachinko gaming machine 1 (payout control MPU4120a) is reset when there is a power failure or when there is a momentary power failure, and when the power is restored thereafter, the payout control unit power-on processing is performed.

In step S526, it is inspected whether or not the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is normal, and then in step S528, whether or not the payout control unit power off processing is normally completed. Is inspecting. In this way, by double-checking the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, it is inspected whether or not the payout backup information is stored by fraudulent activity.

[14-2. Payout control unit timer interrupt processing]
Next, the payout control unit timer interrupt processing will be described. This payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed every interrupt cycle (1.75 ms in this embodiment) set in the payout control unit power-on processing shown in FIGS. 124 to 126.

When the payout control unit timer interrupt process is started, the payout control MPU4120a of the payout control unit 4120 on the payout control board 4110 sets the timer interrupt to disabled and switches (saves) the register as shown in FIG. 127. (Step S590). Here, the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) used in the above-mentioned payout control unit main processing is switched to the auxiliary register. By using this auxiliary register in the timer interrupt process of the payout control unit, the value of the general-purpose register is not overwritten. This prevents the contents of the general-purpose register used in the main processing of the payout control unit from being destroyed.

Following step S590, the value 1 is set in the 1.75 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG (step S592). The 1.75 elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that clocks 1.75 ms every time the payout control unit timer interrupt process is performed, that is, every 1.75 ms, and values 1, 1 when 1.75 ms have elapsed. The value is set to 0 when .75 ms has not passed. Following step S592, register switching (returning) is performed (step S594). This return switches from the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing to the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register). By using this general-purpose register in the payout control unit main processing, the value of the auxiliary register is not overwritten. This prevents the contents of the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing from being destroyed. Following step S594, interrupt enable setting is performed (step S596), and this routine is terminated.

[14-3. Ball removal switch operation judgment processing]
Next, the ball removal switch operation determination process will be described. In this ball removal switch operation determination process, it is determined whether or not the ball removal switch 860b shown in FIG. 98 is being operated.

When the ball removal switch operation determination process is started, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 on the payout control board 4110 determines whether or not the ball removal switch 860b is operated as shown in FIG. 128 (step). S600). This determination is performed based on the detection signal from the ball removal switch 860b in the port input process of step S550 in the payout control unit power-on processing (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. 126. Specifically, the detection signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S600, the input information is read from the input information storage area, and it is determined whether or not there is a detection signal from the ball removal switch 860b. When there is a detection signal from the ball removal switch 860b in the input information, it is determined that the ball removal switch 860b is operated. On the other hand, when there is no detection signal from the ball removal switch 860b in the input information, it is determined that the ball removal switch 860b is not operated.

When the ball removal switch 860b is operated in step S600, the value 1 is set in the ball removal flag RMV-FLG (step S602). The ball removal flag RMV-FLG is a flag shown in FIG. 69 indicating whether or not to discharge the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail 731, and has a value of 1 when the game balls are discharged. , The value is set to 0 when the game ball is not discharged.

Following step S602, the above-mentioned ball removal determination time is effectively set (step S604), and this routine is terminated. When the ball removal determination time becomes effective, the ball removal determination time is subtracted in the timer update process of step S552 in the payout control unit power-on processing (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. 126.

On the other hand, when the ball removal switch 860b is not operated in step S600, this routine is terminated as it is. The ball removal flag RMV-FLG set in step S602 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU4120a.

[14-4. Rotation angle switch history creation process]
Next, the rotation angle switch history creation process will be described. In this rotation angle switch history creation process, the history of the detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 shown in FIG. 98 is created.

When the rotation angle switch history creation process is started, the payout control MPU4120a of the payout control unit 4120 on the payout control board 4110 reads the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST from the payout control built-in RAM as shown in FIG. 129. (Step S610). This rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is 1 byte (8 bits: most significant bit B7, B6, B5, B4, B3, B2, B1, least significant bit B0, "B" represents a bit). It has a storage capacity, and the history of the detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 is stored in the rotation angle switch history information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM as the rotation angle switch detection history information LSB-HIST. In step S610, the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is read from the rotation angle switch history information storage area.

Following step S610, it is determined whether or not there is a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 (step S612). This determination is performed based on the detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 in the port input process of step S550 in the power-on processing of the payout control unit (main process of the payout control unit) shown in FIG. 126. Specifically, the detection signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S612, the input information is read from the input information storage area, and it is determined whether or not there is a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752. When there is a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 in the input information, the detection slit 749a for grasping the rotation position of the payout rotating body 748, which is shown in FIG. 70, changes the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752 from the cutoff state to the non-cutoff state. Judged as a transitional state. On the other hand, when there is no detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 in the input information, the detection slit 749a determines that the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752 has transitioned from the non-blocking state to the blocking state.

When the detection slit 749a has changed the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752 from the cutoff state to the non-cutoff state in step S612, the rotation angle switch detection history information is shifted (step S614). In this shift process of the rotation angle switch detection history information, the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S610 is converted to the most significant bit B7 ← B6, B6 ← B5, B5 ← B4, B4 ← B3, B3 ← B2. , B2 ← B1, B1 ← least significant bit B0, and so on, shifting from the least significant bit B0 to the most significant bit B7 one bit at a time.

Following step S614, the value 1 is set in the least significant bit B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST (step S616), and this routine ends.

On the other hand, when the detection slit 749a has changed the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752 from the non-blocking state to the blocking state in step S612, the rotation angle switch detection history information is shifted (step S618). In the shift processing of the rotation angle switch detection history information, the same processing as the shift processing of the rotation angle switch detection history information in step S614 is performed, and the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S610 is set to the most significant bit. B7 ← B6, B6 ← B5, B5 ← B4, B4 ← B3, B3 ← B2, B2 ← B1, B1 ← least significant bit B0, and so on, shifting one bit at a time from the least significant bit B0 to the most significant bit B7. To do.

Following step S618, the value 0 is set in the least significant bit B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST (step S620), and this routine ends.

In this way, each time the rotation angle switch history creation process is performed, the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is shifted by one bit from the lowest bit B0 to the most significant bit B7, and then the detection slit 749a The value is set to the lowest bit B0 according to the state in which the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752 is transitioned from the cutoff state to the non-blocking state or the detection slit 749a is in the state in which the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752 is transitioned from the non-blocking state to the blocking state. Since 1 or the value 0 is set, the history of the detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 can be created.

[14-5. Sprocket fixed position judgment skip processing]
Next, the sprocket fixed position determination skip process will be described. This sprocket fixed position determination skip process skips the determination of whether or not the payout rotating body 748 shown in FIG. 70 is in the fixed position when a predetermined condition is satisfied. It should be noted that the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body 748 is also performed when the payout of the game ball by the prize ball device 740 is completed. As a result, the rotation of the rotation shaft 744a of the payout motor 744 can be reliably started in a state where the ball is not squeezed.

When the sprocket fixed position determination skip process is started, the payout control MPU4120a of the payout control unit 4120 on the payout control board 4110 determines whether or not the fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG has a value of 0, as shown in FIG. Is determined (step S630). The fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body 748 is performed, and the value 1 when the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body 748 is not performed (when skipping), When the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body 748 is performed (when not skipped), the value is set to 0, respectively.

When the fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG has a value of 0 (not skipped) in step S630, that is, when the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body 748 is performed, the rotation angle switch of the payout control built-in RAM is rotated from the history information storage area. The angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is read out (step S632), and it is determined whether or not it matches the fixed position determination value (step S634). This fixed position determination value is stored in the payout built-in ROM, and in the present embodiment, it is "000011111B (" B "represents a bit)", and the upper 4 bits B7 to B4 have a value of 0 and a lower 4 bits. Bits B3 to B0 have a value of 1. In the determination in step S634, it is determined whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value match.

Here, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST have a value of 1, the detection slit 749a described above is the light of the rotation angle switch 752 continuously in four timer interrupt cycles. It means that the axis has transitioned from the interrupted state to the non-interrupted state. In the generation of the four timer interrupt cycles, the payout motor 744 shown in FIG. 98 is rotated by four steps. The rotation of the payout motor 744 is the rotation of the payout rotating body 748 of the rotation detection board 794 via the first gear 745, the second gear 746, and the third gear 747 shown in FIG. 70. Since the first gear 745, the second gear 746, and the third gear 747 have play (backlash), the payout rotating body 748 rotates clockwise or counterclockwise, but due to this backlash. Since the rotation of the payout rotating body 748 is designed to correspond to the rotation of about two steps of the payout motor 744, in the present embodiment, when the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body 748 is performed, the rotation of the payout rotating body 748 is determined. The history of the detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752, the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is created by the rotation angle switch history creation process shown in FIG. 129, and the lower 4 of the created rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST. This is performed based on the detection signals from bits B3 to B0, that is, the rotation angle switch 752 due to the occurrence of the latest four timer interrupt cycles. As a result, in the four timer interrupt cycles, the payout motor 744 rotates four steps, so that the payout motor 744 rotates more than the payout rotating body 748 due to backlash, and absorbs the rotation of the payout rotating body 748 due to backlash. can do. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of the fixed position of the payout rotating body 748 due to backlash, the rotation position of the payout rotating body 748 can be correctly managed by the rotation position of the payout motor 744. In the present embodiment, the four timer interrupt cycles are 7 ms (= 1.75 ms × 4 times), which is set as the backlash absorption time.

In step S634, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S632 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value match, the fixed position determination skip flag A value of 1 is set in SKP-FLG (step S636). As a result, it is possible to set the payout rotating body 748 not to perform (skip) the fixed position determination. The payout control MPU4120a sets the rotational position of the payout rotating body 748 in step S636 to a fixed position of the payout rotating body 748.

Following step S636, the skip determination time is set to valid (step S638), and this routine ends. Here, as shown in FIG. 71, the number of detection slits 794a is three, which is the same as the number of recesses 748a of the payout rotating body 748, and is formed in equal parts (every 120 degrees) on the outer circumference of the rotation detecting board 749. There is. Further, as described above, the rotation of the payout motor 744 is the rotation of the payout rotating body 748 of the rotation detection board 794 via the first gear 745, the second gear 746, and the third gear 747. In the present embodiment, the rotation of the rotation detection board 749 (payout rotating body 748) between the detection slits 749a (120 degrees) is designed to correspond to the rotation of the payout motor 744 in 18 steps.

The payout control MPU4120a manages the rotation position of the payout rotating body 748 based on the number of steps of the payout motor 744. Specifically, (1) a transient state in which the detection slit 749a transitions the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752 from a cutoff state to a non-blocking state (referred to as “edge detection state”), and (2) the detection slit 749a A state in which the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752 is transitioned from a cutoff state to a non-cutoff state (referred to as a “fixed position fixed state”), and (3) the detection slit 749a blocks the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752 from the non-blocking state. It is managed in three states: a state that has transitioned to a state (“fixed position determination skip state”). The edge detection state of (1) corresponds to the rotation of one step of the payout motor 744, the fixed position determination state of (2) corresponds to the rotation of four steps of the payout motor 744, and the fixed position determination skip state of (3). Then, it corresponds to the rotation of 13 steps of the payout motor 744, and the rotation position between each detection slit 749a (120 degrees) of the rotation detection board 749, that is, the rotation position of the payout rotating body 748 is managed by the rotation of 18 steps in total. ..

In the fixed position determination skip state of (3), since the detection slit 749a is in a state in which the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752 is changed from the non-blocking state to the blocking state, the skip determination time is 13 steps of rotation of the payout motor 744. The time is set. As described above, since the timer interrupt cycle is set to 1.75 ms, the skip determination time is 22.75 ms (= 1.75 ms × 13 steps).

When the skip determination time becomes effective in step S638, the skip determination time is subtracted in the timer update process of step S552 in the payout control unit power-on processing (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. 126. The payout control MPU4120a subtracts the skip determination time, and when the subtraction result reaches a value of 0, the fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG is set to an initial value of 0.

On the other hand, when the fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG is not a value 0 (value 1) (when skipping) in step S630, that is, when the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body 748 is not performed, or in step S634, step. If the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in S632 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value do not match, this routine is terminated as it is. The fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG set in step S636 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU4120a.

The game balls supplied from the pachinko island facility are stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail 731 shown in FIG. 69, and are taken into the supply passage 741a of the prize ball device 740 shown in FIG. 70 to be taken into the prize ball device 740. Guided to. When the game balls rub against each other and become charged, they are electrostatically discharged to generate noise. Therefore, the prize ball device 740 is easily affected by noise and is in an environment. The rotation angle switch board 753 of the prize ball device 740 shown in FIG. 70 is provided with a rotation angle switch 752, and the detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 is affected by noise due to electrostatic discharge of the game ball. Cheap. Further, the wiring (harness) connecting the payout control board 4110 and the board 754 in the prize ball case in the prize ball device 740 shown in FIG. 70 is also affected by noise due to electrostatic discharge of the game ball. Cheap.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, in order to suppress erroneous detection due to the influence of noise, the above-mentioned fixed position determination skip state (3), that is, the detection slit 749a shuts off the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752 from the non-blocking state. In the state of transition to, the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body 748 is not performed. As a result, the accuracy of the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body 748 is improved. As described above, the period and period required to detect the fixed position of the payout rotating body 748 can be calculated in advance, so that the skip determination time can be easily set and adjusted.

[14-6. Ball shaving judgment processing]
Next, the ball bending determination process will be described. This ball squeeze determination process determines whether or not the ball squeeze state caused by the payout rotating body 748 shown in FIG. 70 has occurred.

When the ball squeeze determination process is started, the payout control MPU4120a of the payout control unit 4120 on the payout control board 4110 has a rotation angle from the rotation angle switch history information storage area of the above-mentioned payout control built-in RAM, as shown in FIG. 131. The switch detection history information RSW-HIST is read (step S640).

Following step S640, it is determined whether or not there is a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 described above (step S642). This determination determines whether or not the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S640 matches the fixed position determination value. As described above, this fixed position determination value is stored in the payout built-in ROM, and in the present embodiment, it is "00001111B (" B "represents a bit)", and the upper 4 bits B7 to B4 are The value 0 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 are the values 1. In the determination in step S642, it is determined whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value match.

In step S642, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S640 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value match, the detection slit 749a rotates. This routine is terminated as it is, assuming that the optical axis of the square switch 752 has changed from the non-blocking state to the blocking state, that is, the payout rotating body 748 is rotating and the ball is not in a squeezing state.

On the other hand, in step S642, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S640 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value do not match, the ball is flagged. The value 1 is set in the middle flag PBE-FLG (step S644). The ball-squeezing flag PBE-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the ball-squashing state is generated by the payout rotating body 748, and the value is 1 when the payout motor 744 is performing the ball-sucking operation. The value is set to 0 when no operation is performed.

Following step S644, the ball squeeze determination time is effectively set (step S646), and this routine is terminated. When the ball squeeze determination time becomes effective, the sphere squeeze determination time is subtracted in the timer update process of step S552 in the payout control unit power-on processing (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. 126. ..

[14-7. Various prize ball stock number addition processing]
Next, various prize ball stock number addition processes will be described. The various prize ball stock number addition processes include a prize ball stock number addition process for prize balls and a prize ball stock number addition process for rental balls, and the prize ball stock number addition process for prize balls is performed from the main control board 4100. It is a process of adding the number of balls to be paid out based on the prize ball command described later, and the process of adding the number of prize balls for lending is a process of adding the number of balls to be paid out based on the ball lending request signal from the CR unit 6. is there. First, the prize ball stock number addition process for prize balls will be described, and then the prize ball stock number addition process for rental balls will be described. In this embodiment, the prize ball stock number addition process for prize balls is set to be preferentially performed, and the number of prize ball stocks added in this prize ball stock number addition process is adjusted. After the game balls are paid out by the prize ball device 740 shown in FIG. 70, it is set to perform the prize ball stock number addition processing for rental balls.

[14-7-1. Prize ball stock number addition processing for prize balls]
When the prize ball stock number addition process for the prize ball is started, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 on the payout control board 4110 determines whether or not there is a prize ball command as shown in FIG. 132 (step). S650). This determination is performed based on the command analyzed in the command analysis process of step S560 in the power-on processing of the payout control unit (main process of the payout control unit) shown in FIG. 126. Specifically, the analyzed command is stored as the received command information in the received command information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S650, the received command information is read from the received command information storage area, and it is determined whether or not the command is a prize ball command.

When the received command information is not a prize ball command in step S650, this routine is terminated as it is, while when the received command information is a prize ball command in step S650, the number of prize balls PBV corresponding to this prize ball command is set. Read from the number information table (step S652). The prize ball number information table is an information table that is stored in advance in the payout built-in ROM in association with the prize ball command and the prize ball number PBV, although a detailed description thereof will be described later.

Following step S652, the prize ball stock number PBS is read from the payout control built-in RAM (step S654). The prize ball stock number PBS represents the number of game balls that have not yet been paid out by the prize ball device 740, that is, the number of unpaid balls, and in the present embodiment, it has a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits). ing. As a result, the prize ball stock number PBS can store the number of unpaid balls from 0 to 32767. The prize ball stock number PBS is stored in the prize ball information storage area of the RAM with built-in payout control. In step S652, the prize ball stock number PBS is read from the prize ball information storage area.

The prize ball stock number PBS read in step S654 is added to the prize ball number PBV read out in step S652 (step S656), and this routine is terminated. After the addition in step S656, the prize ball command read in step S650 is deleted from the received command information storage area.

[14-7-2. Prize ball stock number addition processing for ball rental]
Next, the process of adding the number of prize balls stock for lending will be described. When the process of adding the number of prize balls for ball rental is started, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 on the payout control board 4110 determines whether or not there is a ball rental request signal, as shown in FIG. 133. (Step S660). This determination is performed based on the ball lending request signal from the CR unit 6 in the port input process of step S550 in the payout control unit power-on processing (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. 126. Specifically, the ball rental request signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S660, the input information is read from the input information storage area and it is determined whether or not there is a ball lending request signal.

When there is no ball lending request signal in step S660, this routine is terminated as it is, while when there is a ball lending request signal in step S660, the prize ball stock number PBS is read from the prize ball information storage area of the above-mentioned payout control built-in RAM. (Step S662), the number of rented balls RBV is added to the number of prize ball stocks PBS (step S664), and this routine ends. The number of rented balls RBV is a fixed value and is stored in advance in the payout built-in ROM. In this embodiment, a value of 25 is set as the number of rented balls RBV. After adding in step S664, the ball lending request signal read in step S660 is deleted from the input information storage area. Further, in the present embodiment, since the prize ball is prioritized (the prize ball and the ball lending are managed separately), the ball lending request signal is held even when there is a ball lending request signal. , The loan ball will be paid out when the prize ball is paid out. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the ball lending is paid out after the prize ball stock number PBS reaches a value of 0.

[14-8. Stock monitoring process]
Next, the stock monitoring process will be described. In this stock monitoring process, is the player continuing the game in a state (stocked state) in which the accommodation space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 shown in FIG. 48 is filled with the stored game balls during the game? This is the process to monitor.

When the stock monitoring process is started, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 on the payout control board 4110 obtains the prize ball stock number PBS from the prize ball information storage area of the above-mentioned payout control built-in RAM, as shown in FIG. 134. Reading (step S670), determining whether or not the read prize ball stock number PBS is equal to or greater than the caution threshold TH (step S672). The caution threshold TH is a fixed value and is stored in advance in the payout built-in ROM. In this embodiment, a value of 50 is set as the caution threshold TH.

When the prize ball stock number PBS is equal to or higher than the caution threshold value TH in step S672, the caution flag CA-FLG is set to a value of 1 (step S674), and this routine is terminated. With this caution flag CA-FLG, the player starts stocking the game balls in the accommodation space 546 of the foul cover unit 540, and the number of unpaid game balls (the number of prize balls stock described above) is equal to or higher than the caution threshold TH. It is a flag indicating that the value has been reached, and is set to a value 1 when the caution threshold value TH or higher is reached, and a value 0 when the caution threshold value TH or higher is not reached.

On the other hand, when the prize ball stock number PBS is less than the caution threshold TH in step S672, the caution flag CA-FLG is set to a value 0 (step S676), and this routine is terminated.

When the game state becomes a big hit and the player relaxes and watches the production unfolded on the liquid crystal display device 1900 shown in FIG. 100, the player inadvertently pays out as a prize ball for one round. The game ball may not be pulled out from the lower plate 302 by operating the lower plate ball removal button 354 shown in FIG. If the game is continued in this state, the lower plate 302 is filled with the game balls, and the game balls start to accumulate in the accommodation space 546 of the foul cover unit 540. When the accommodation space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is filled with the game balls, as described above, the value of the prize ball stock number PBS increases and becomes equal to or higher than the caution threshold TH, which is shown in FIG. 53 as a caution effect. A plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 5 blink. By this blinking, for example, it is possible to inform the clerk of the hall that the player is careful about the game. As a result, the clerk in the hall can inform the player that the game ball is to be pulled out from the lower plate 302, and the player is in a state where the lower plate 302 (accommodation space 546 of the foul cover unit 540) is filled with the game ball. It is possible to prevent the game from being continued.

In the present embodiment, the caution threshold TH is set to a value 50 corresponding to about one-fifth of the upper limit value 255 that can be represented by 1 byte (8 bits). As a result, it is possible to inform the clerk of the hall to call attention to the player's game at the earliest possible stage.

[14-9. Payout ball removal judgment setting process]
Next, the payout ball removal determination setting process will be described. In this payout ball removal determination setting process, the payout motor 744 shown in FIG. 70 pays out the game ball to the upper plate 301 or the lower plate 302 shown in FIG. 19, or the prize ball tank 720 shown in FIG. 69. And, it is a process of setting whether to discharge the game ball stored in the tank rail 731 from the pachinko game machine 1, perform the ball-sucking operation, or do not perform such payout or discharge. ..

When the payout ball withdrawal determination setting process is started, the payout control MPU4120a of the payout control unit 4120 on the payout control board 4110 rotates from the rotation angle switch history information storage area of the above-mentioned payout control built-in RAM, as shown in FIG. 135. The angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is read (step S680).

Following step S680, it is determined whether or not there is a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 shown in FIG. 70 (step S682). This determination determines whether or not the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S680 matches the fixed position determination value. As described above, this fixed position determination value is stored in the payout built-in ROM, and in the present embodiment, it is "00001111B (" B "represents a bit)", and the upper 4 bits B7 to B4 are The value 0 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 are the values 1. In the determination in step S682, it is determined whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value match.

In step S682, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S680 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value match, the retry error flag RTERR- It is determined whether or not the FLG has a value of 1 (step S684). This retry error flag RTERR-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the retry operation described later is abnormally operating. The value is 1 when the retry operation is abnormally operating, and when the retrying operation is not abnormally operating (retry). The value is set to 0 when the operation is normal).

When the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S682 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value do not match in step S682, or in step S684. , When the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0), that is, when the retry operation is not abnormally operating, it is determined whether or not the ball-filled flag PBE-FLG is a value 1 (value 1). Step S686). The ball-squeezing flag PBE-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the ball-squashing state is generated by the payout rotating body 748, and the value is 1 when the payout motor 744 is performing the ball-sucking operation. The value is set to 0 when no operation is performed.

When the ball-squeezing flag PEB-FLG is not a value 1 (value is 0) in step S686, that is, when the ball-squeezing operation is not performed, the prize ball stock from the prize ball information storage area of the above-mentioned payout control built-in RAM. The number PBS is read (step S688), and it is determined whether or not the read prize ball stock number PBS is greater than the value 0 (step S690). This determination determines whether or not there is an unpaid number of balls in the payout of the game balls by the payout motor 744.

When the prize ball stock number PBS is greater than 0 in step S690, that is, when there is an unpaid number of balls, is the accommodation space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 shown in FIG. 48 full with the stored game balls? Whether or not it is determined (step S692). This determination is performed based on the full tank information stored in the full tank and out-of-ball check processing in step S556 in the power-on processing of the payout control unit (main process of the payout control unit) shown in FIG. 126. Specifically, the full tank information is stored in the state information storage area of the above-mentioned payout control built-in RAM. In step S692, the full tank information is read from the state information storage area, and it is determined whether or not the accommodation space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is full with the stored game ball.

When the accommodation space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is not full in the stored game ball in step S692, the payout setting process described later is performed (step S694), and this routine is terminated. In this payout setting process, a payout operation is performed in which the game ball is paid out to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302.

On the other hand, when the accommodation space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is full with the stored game balls in step S692, this routine is terminated as it is. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the accommodation space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is filled with the stored game balls, the payout motor 744 is forcibly stopped. When a prize ball is generated while the payout motor 744 is forcibly stopped, the number of unpaid balls by the payout motor 744 increases, and the prize ball stock number PBS is added by the prize ball stock number addition process for prize balls shown in FIG. 132. Will increase.

On the other hand, when the prize ball stock number PBS is not larger than the value 0 (value 0) in step S690, that is, when there is no unpaid number of balls, it is determined whether or not the ball removal flag RMV-FLG has a value 1. (Step S696). This ball removal flag RMV-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not to discharge the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail 731, and has a value of 1 when the game balls are discharged, and does not discharge the game balls. When the value is set to 0, respectively. The determination in step S696 is performed based on the determination result in step S600 in the ball removal switch operation determination process shown in FIG. 128. That is, when the operation signal (detection signal) from the ball removal switch 860b shown in FIG. 98 is input, the value 1 is set in the ball removal flag RMV-FLG in step S602 in the ball removal switch operation determination process.

When the ball removal flag RMV-FLG has a value of 1 in step S696, that is, when the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail 731 are discharged, the ball removal setting process described later is performed (step S698). Exit this routine. In this ball removal setting process, a ball removal operation is performed to discharge the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail 731.

In this way, when the ball removal switch 860b is operated after the power is turned on, the ball removal setting process is performed in step S698 of the payout ball removal determination setting process, and the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail 731 are performed. Can be discharged. When this discharge is completed, the value 0 is set in the ball removal flag RMV-FLG.

On the other hand, when the ball removal flag RMV-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0) in step S696, that is, when the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail 731 are not discharged, this routine is terminated as it is. .. As a result, the game balls are not paid out or discharged.

On the other hand, when the ball-grinding flag PBE-FLG has a value of 1, that is, the ball-grinding motion is being performed in step S686, the ball-grinding motion setting process described later is performed (step S700), and this routine is terminated. In this ball squeezing motion setting process, a ball squeezing motion is performed to eliminate the ball squeezing state by the payout rotating body 748 of the prize ball device 740.

On the other hand, in step S684, when the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is a value 1, that is, when the retry operation is abnormally operating, the output stop (stop) of the drive signal to the payout motor 744 is set (step S702). .. In this setting, the drive information for stopping the drive signal is set in the payout motor 744 and stored in the output information storage area of the above-mentioned payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S702, the error state output to the CR unit 6 is set (step S704), and this routine ends. In step S704, in order to inform the CR unit 6 that the ball cannot be lent at present, the payout control MPU4120a is not communicating with the CR unit 6 (the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is LOW, That is, when it is held down), the logic of the PRDY signal is LOW, that is, the state of being down is held, and the logic state of the PRDY signal is set in the PRDY signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area. Remember. As a result, in the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control section main process of the payout control section power-on process of FIG. 126, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM. The read PRDY signal output setting information, that is, the PRDY signal whose logic is LOW is output from the payout control I / O port 4120b of the payout control unit 4120 to the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869. To do. On the other hand, when communicating with the CR unit 6 (when the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, that is, when it stands up and is held), the logic state of the EXS signal is maintained, and the logic state of the EXS signal is maintained. Is set in the EXS signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area. As a result, the EXS signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM in the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control section main process of the payout control section power-on process of FIG. 126. The read out EXS signal output setting information, that is, the EXS signal whose logic is maintained is output from the payout control I / O port 4120b to the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869. In addition, "maintaining the logical state of the EXS signal" means that when the logic of the EXS signal is LOW (the EXS signal is held down), the logical LOW is maintained, and the logic of the EXS signal is HI. At some point (holding the XS signal up) is to maintain its logical HI.

[14-9-1. Payout setting process]
Next, the payout setting process will be described. In this payout setting process, the payout motor 744 shown in FIG. 70 is driven to set the game ball to be paid out.

When the payout setting process is started, the payout control MPU4120a of the payout control unit 4120 on the payout control board 4110 reads out the drive command number DRV from the payout control built-in RAM as shown in FIG. 136 (step S710). This drive command number DRV commands the number of game balls to be paid out by the payout motor 744, and is equivalent to the prize ball stock number PBS. The drive command number DRV is stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S710, the drive command number DRV is read from the prize ball information storage area.

Following step S710, it is determined whether or not the drive command number DRV has a value of 0 (step S712). In this determination, whether or not the number of game balls to be paid out by the payout motor 744 remains is determined based on the drive command number DRV.

When the drive command number DRV is 0 in step S712, that is, when the number of game balls to be paid out by the payout motor 744 is zero, the output stop (stop) of the drive signal to the payout motor 744 is set (stop). Step S714). In this setting, the drive information for stopping the drive signal is set in the payout motor 744 and stored in the output information storage area of the above-mentioned payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S714, the prize ball stock number PBS is read from the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM (step S716), and the actual ball count PB is read out (step S718). This actual ball count PB is a count of the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 744. Although a detailed description thereof will be described later, this count is obtained from the counting switch 751 shown in FIG. 70 in the port input process of step S550 in the payout control unit power-on processing (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. 126. Perform based on the detection signal. The actual ball count PB is stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S718, the actual ball count PB is read from the prize ball information storage area.

Following step S718, the value obtained by subtracting the actual ball count PB read in step S718 from the prize ball stock number PBS read in step S716 is set in the prize ball stock number PBS and the drive command number DRV (step S720). The value 0 is set in the real ball count PB (step S722), and this routine ends. When the drive command number DRV and the actual ball count PB are values 0, in step S722, the value of the prize ball stock number PBS read in step S716 is set to the drive command number DRV as it is.

On the other hand, when the drive command number DRV is not a value 0 in step S712, that is, when there is a number of game balls to be paid out by the payout motor 744, the output of the drive signal to the payout motor 744 is set. (Step S724). In this setting, the drive information for stopping the drive signal is set in the payout motor 744 and stored in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S724, the number of drive commands DRV is subtracted by a value of 1 (decrement, step S726), and it is determined whether or not there is a detection signal from the counting switch 751 (step S728). This determination is performed based on the detection signal from the counting switch 751 in the port input process of step S550 in the power-on processing of the payout control unit (main process of the payout control unit) shown in FIG. 126. Specifically, the detection signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S728, the input information is read from the input information storage area, and it is determined whether or not there is a detection signal from the counting switch 751.

When there is a detection signal from the counting switch 751 in step S728, a value 1 is added (incremented to the actual ball counting PB, step S730) to end this routine. By incrementing the actual ball count PB in step S730, the actual ball count PB is counted up.

On the other hand, when there is no detection signal from the counting switch 751 in step S728, this routine is terminated as it is. As described above, when the payout control MPU4120a decrements the drive command number DRV in step S726 and there is no detection signal from the counting switch 751 in the determination of step S728, that is, when the actual ball counting PB is not incremented. Determines that one ball could not be paid out because the game ball was not received in the recess 748a of the payout rotating body 748 shown in FIG. 71. Therefore, the payout control MPU4120a sets the value obtained by subtracting the actual ball count PB from the prize ball stock number PBS in the above-mentioned step S720 to the drive command number DRV in order to pay out the one ball to be paid out again. As a result, when there is no detection signal from the counting switch 751 in the determination of step S728, that is, when the actual ball counting PB is not incremented, the value 1 which is one ball to be paid out can be included in the prize ball stock number PBS. In other words, since the value 1 which is one ball to be paid out can be rounded into the prize ball stock number PBS, the retry operation to pay out the one ball to be paid out can be performed again. By performing this retry operation, the possibility that the game ball is not paid out to the player can be extremely reduced, and the disadvantage of the player due to the unpaid game ball can be prevented.

[14-9-2. Ball removal setting process]
Next, the ball removal setting process will be described. In this ball removal setting process, the payout motor 744 shown in FIG. 70 is driven to perform the ball removal operation of discharging the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail 731 shown in FIG. 69. Is.

When the ball removal setting process is started, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 on the payout control board 4110 determines whether or not the ball removal determination time has elapsed (step S740). This determination is performed based on the ball removal determination time updated in the timer update process of step S552 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. 126. Specifically, the ball removal determination time is stored in the time management information storage area of the above-mentioned payout control built-in RAM as time management information. In step S740, the time management information is read from the time management information storage area, and it is determined whether or not the ball removal determination time has elapsed. During the ball removal determination time, the payout motor 744 performs a ball removal operation. This ball pulling operation discharges the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail 731.

When the ball removal determination time has not elapsed in step S740, the output of the drive signal to the payout motor 744 is set so as to perform the ball removal operation (step S742), and this routine is terminated. In this setting, the drive information for outputting the drive signal is set in the payout motor 744 and stored in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM described above.

On the other hand, when the ball removal determination time elapses in step S740, the stop of the drive signal to the payout motor 744 is set so as to end the ball removal operation (step S744). In this setting, the drive information for stopping the drive signal is set in the payout motor 744 and stored in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S744, the ball removal flag RMV-FLG is set to a value 0 (step S746), and this routine ends. As described above, the ball removal flag RMV-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not to eject the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail 731, and has a value of 1 when ejecting the game balls. The value is set to 0 when the game ball is not discharged.

[14-9-3. Ball motion setting process]
Next, the ball-shaped motion setting process will be described. This ball squeezing motion setting process is a process of setting to eliminate the ball squeezing state by the payout rotating body 748 of the prize ball device 740 shown in FIG. 70.

When the ball squeeze operation setting process is started, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 on the payout control board 4110 determines whether or not the ball squeeze determination time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 138 (step). S750). This determination is performed based on the ball squeeze determination time subtracted in the timer update process of step S552 in the power-on processing of the payout control unit (main process of the payout control unit) shown in FIG. 126. Specifically, the ball bending determination time is stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the above-mentioned payout control built-in RAM. In step S750, the time management information is read from the time management information storage area, and it is determined whether or not the ball squeezing determination time has elapsed.

When the ball squeeze determination time has not elapsed in step S750, the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is read from the rotation angle switch history information storage area of the above-mentioned payout control built-in RAM (step S752).

Following step S752, it is determined whether or not there is a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 described above (step S754). This determination determines whether or not the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S752 matches the fixed position determination value. As described above, this fixed position determination value is stored in the payout built-in ROM, and in the present embodiment, it is "00001111B (" B "represents a bit)", and the upper 4 bits B7 to B4 are The value 0 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 are the values 1. In the determination in step S754, it is determined whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value match.

In step S754, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S752 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value do not match, the ball scooping operation is performed. The output of the drive signal to the payout motor 744 is set to be performed (step S756), and this routine is terminated. In this setting, the drive information for outputting the drive signal is set in the payout motor 744 and stored in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM described above.

On the other hand, in step S754, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S752 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value match, the payout motor 744 The stop of the drive signal to is set (step S758). In this setting, the drive information for stopping the drive signal is set in the payout motor 744 and stored in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S758, the value 0 is set in the ball-grinding flag PBE-FLG as the end of the ball-grinding operation (step S760), and this routine is terminated. The ball-squeezing flag PBE-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the ball-squashing state is generated by the payout rotating body 748. The value is set to 0 when the only movement is not performed (end of the ball-shaped movement).

On the other hand, when the ball squeeze determination time has elapsed in step S750, the stop of the drive signal to the payout motor 744 is set (step S762). In this setting, the drive information for stopping the drive signal is set in the payout motor 744 and stored in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S762, the output of the error state to the CR unit 6 is set (step S764). Here, in order to inform the CR unit 6 that the ball cannot be rented at present, the payout control MPU4120a is not communicating with the CR unit 6 (the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is LOW, that is, (When it is down and held), the logic of the PRDY signal is LOW, that is, the down state is held, and the logic state of the PRDY signal is set in the PRDY signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area. To do. As a result, in the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control section main process of the payout control section power-on process of FIG. 126, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM. The read PRDY signal output setting information, that is, the PRDY signal whose logic is LOW is output from the payout control I / O port 4120b of the payout control unit 4120 to the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869. To do. On the other hand, when communicating with the CR unit 6 (when the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, that is, when it stands up and is held), the logic state of the EXS signal is maintained, and the logic state of the EXS signal is maintained. Is set in the EXS signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area. As a result, the EXS signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM in the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control section main process of the payout control section power-on process of FIG. 126. The read out EXS signal output setting information, that is, the EXS signal whose logic is maintained is output from the payout control I / O port 4120b to the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869. As described above, "maintaining the logical state of the EXS signal" means that when the logic of the EXS signal is LOW (the EXS signal is held down), the logical LOW is maintained and the EXS signal is maintained. When the logic of is HI (the XS signal is held up), that logic HI is maintained.

Following step S764, the value 0 is set in the ball-grinding flag PBE-FLG as the end of the ball-grinding operation (step S766), and this routine is terminated.

[14-10. Retry operation monitoring process]
Next, the retry operation monitoring process will be described. In this retry operation monitoring process, it is a process of monitoring whether or not the retry operation of paying out the game ball to be paid out again is normally performed.

When the retry operation monitoring process is started, the payout control MPU4120a of the payout control unit 4120 on the payout control board 4110 changes the rotation angle switch from the rotation angle switch history information storage area of the above-mentioned payout control built-in RAM, as shown in FIG. 139. The detection history information RSW-HIST is read (step S770).

Following step S770, it is determined whether or not there is a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 described above (step S772). This determination determines whether or not the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S770 matches the fixed position determination value. As described above, this fixed position determination value is stored in the ROM with built-in payout control, and in the present embodiment, it is "00001111B (" B "represents a bit)", and the upper 4 bits B7 to B4. Is a value 0, and B3 to B0 of the lower 4 bits are a value 1. In the determination in step S772, it is determined whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value match.

In step S772, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S770 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value match, the mismatch counter INCC is set. Add only the value 1 (increment, step S774). This mismatch counter INCC calculates the difference between the number of game balls received and paid out by the recess 748a of the payout rotating body 748 and the number of balls detected by the counting switch 751 shown in FIG. 71. It is a counter for this, and usually, the number of balls of the game ball received and paid out in the recess 748a of the payout rotating body 748 and the number of balls detected by the counting switch 751 match, so that the value is It becomes 0. Since the payout control MPU4120a performs a retry operation in the payout installation process shown in FIG. 136, the number of game balls received and paid out by the recess 748a of the payout rotating body 748 by this retry operation and the actual number of game balls actually paid out. The inconsistency counter INCC monitors and determines whether or not the number of balls detected by the counting switch 751 and the inconsistent payout of game balls due to the inconsistency are repeated. The inconsistency counter INCC is stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S774, the inconsistency counter INCC stored in the prize ball information storage area is incremented.

Following step S774 or in step S772, the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S770 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value do not match. Occasionally, it is determined whether or not there is a detection signal from the counting switch 751 (step S776). This determination is performed based on the detection signal from the counting switch 751 in the port input process of step S780 in the power-on processing of the payout control unit (main process of the payout control unit) shown in FIG. 126. Specifically, as described above, the detection signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the above-mentioned payout control built-in RAM. In step S776, the input information is read from the input information storage area, and it is determined whether or not there is a detection signal from the counting switch 751.

When there is a detection signal from the counting switch 751 in step S776, the value 1 is subtracted from the inconsistency counter INCC stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM (decrement, step S778).

Following step S778, or when there is no detection signal from the counting switch 751 in step S776, it is determined whether or not the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is smaller than the inconsistency threshold value INCTH (step S780). In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present invention, it has been experimentally obtained that the probability that one inconsistent gaming ball is paid out due to the retry operation is about 1 in millions, and in the present embodiment, there is an inconsistency. A value of 5 is set as the threshold value INCTH. As described above, in the process of setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530 in the payout control unit power-on process of FIG. 126, the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is stored at the time of power recovery. , Information to be used for this retry operation monitoring process is set based on the inconsistency counter INCC stored in the prize ball information storage area. By this processing, for example, even if there is a momentary power failure or a power failure, the value of the inconsistent counter INCC or the like at the time of power recovery is restored to the value of the mismatch counter INCC or the like immediately before the momentary power failure or the power failure stored as the payout backup information. You can do it. As a result, in the determination of step S780, the monitoring of the game ball payout operation (retry operation) by the prize ball device 740, which was performed until immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure, can be continued from the time of power recovery. ing. Therefore, for example, when the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is smaller than the inconsistency threshold value INCTH in the determination in step S780 immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure, it is determined that the retry operation is operating normally, that is, the prize ball. It can be determined that the game ball payout operation by the device 740 is in the normal state, and even at the time of power recovery, it can be determined that the game ball payout operation by the prize ball device 740 is in the normal state by the determination in step S780. On the other hand, when the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is not smaller than the inconsistency threshold value INCTH in the determination in step S780, it is determined that the retry operation is abnormal, that is, the game ball payout operation by the prize ball device 740 is abnormal. It can be determined that the state is in the state, and even at the time of power recovery, it can be determined in the determination in step S780 that the payout operation of the game ball by the prize ball device 740 is in an abnormal state.

When the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is smaller than the inconsistency threshold value INCTH in step S780, this routine is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is not smaller than the inconsistency threshold value INCTH in step S780, that is, when the value of the inconsistency counter INCH is equal to or more than the inconsistency threshold value INCTH, it is determined that a "retry error" occurs. In order to notify, the error LED display 860c, which is a segment display mounted on the payout control board 4110, is set with retry error information for displaying the number "5", and the state information storage area of the above-mentioned payout control built-in RAM is set. (Remember) to (step S782).

Following step S782, a value 0 (initial value 0) is set in the mismatch counter INCC stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM (step S784). In step S784, the inconsistent counter INCC is determined in step S780 when the value of the inconsistent counter INCC is not smaller than the inconsistent threshold value INCTH, that is, when the value of the inconsistent counter INCC is equal to or greater than the inconsistent threshold value INCTH. It is initialized when this internal factor occurs. The inconsistency counter INCC is initialized when the RAM clear switch 4100e mounted on the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. 97 is operated, triggered by the occurrence of this external factor. There is. When the RAM clear switch 4100e is operated, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. 97 erases all the various information stored in the main control built-in RAM and the RAM clear notification command. Is output to the peripheral control board 4140 shown in FIG. 97. As a result, the RAM clear notification sound flows from the side speakers 130 and 130 shown in FIG. 21, the upper right speaker 222 shown in FIG. 29, the upper left speaker 262 shown in FIG. 32, and the lower speaker 821 shown in FIG. 78. It has become.

Following step S784, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set to a value of 1 (step S786), and this routine ends. This retry error flag RTERR-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the retry operation is abnormally operating. The value is 1 when the retry operation is abnormally operating, and when the retrying operation is not abnormally operating (retrying operation is). It is set to 0 when it is operating normally).

The payout control MPU4120a sets (stores) the retry error information set (stored) in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S782 in the payout control unit power-on processing (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. 126. A retry error status command is created in the command transmission process of step S566 and transmitted to the main control board 4100, and display data to be displayed on the error LED display 860c is created in the LED display data creation process of step S564 in the same process. It is stored in the output information storage area as LED display information, and a drive signal is output to the error LED display 860c based on the LED display information stored in the output information storage area in the port output process of step S548 in the same process, and this error occurs. The number "5" is displayed on the LED display 860c. The main control board 4100 that has received the status command transmits the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 123 to the peripheral control board 4140, and the peripheral control board 4140 is the door frame 5. A door frame side lighting / blinking command for outputting a lighting signal, which causes a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided in the above to emit light in a predetermined color (red in this embodiment), is given to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 shown in FIG. It outputs and causes a plurality of LEDs to emit light in a predetermined color. As described above, the clerk in the hall who noticed the light emission of the plurality of LEDs displayed the number "" on the error LED display 860c mounted on the payout control board 4110 by opening the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2. It can be confirmed that the "retry error" has occurred by visually observing that "5" is displayed. As a result, the clerk in the hall, etc., in order to investigate the cause of the occurrence, confirms the malfunction of the counting switch 751, the disconnection of various harnesses extending from the counting switch 751 to the payout control board 4110, and the poor contact of various connectors. This can be performed extremely quickly as compared with the case where the light emission of a plurality of LEDs and the display contents of the error LED display 860c are not notified.

Further, by intentionally deactivating the counting switch 751, the above-mentioned retry operation is forcibly generated because it is difficult to detect the game ball that is received and paid out by the recess 748a of the payout rotating body 748. Even if a fraudulent act of illegally acquiring the game ball paid out by this retry operation is performed, when the value of the inconsistency counter INCC described above becomes equal to or higher than the inconsistency threshold value INCTH, various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 5 are used. Since the plurality of LEDs in the hall emit light, a clerk in the hall or the like rushes to check the state of the pachinko game machine 1. Then, the player who commits the fraudulent act has no choice but to interrupt the act so that the act is not discovered, and cannot continuously acquire the fraudulent game ball due to the fraudulent act. Even if the value of the inconsistency counter INCC matches the inconsistency threshold value INCTH, the number of game balls that can be acquired by the cheating player is the same as the inconsistency threshold value INCTH, that is, 5 balls. Therefore, the damage to the hall due to the act of intentionally deactivating the counting switch 751 can be suppressed to an extremely small value.

Further, as described above, when the value of the inconsistent counter INCC is not smaller than the inconsistent threshold value INCTH in step S780, that is, the value of the inconsistent counter INCC is equal to or more than the inconsistent threshold value INCTH. It is initialized when an internal factor such as the fact that it has become is generated. As a result, the inconsistency counter INCC is not initialized when an external factor such as the operation of the error release switch 860a shown in FIG. 98 occurs, for example. Therefore, even if the error release switch 860a or the like is illegally modified so that the operation signal is input to the payout control MPU4120a, the inconsistency counter INCC is forcibly initialized by such an illegal act. There is no.

[14-11. Inconsistency counter reset judgment process]
Next, the inconsistency counter reset process will be described. In this inconsistency counter reset process, the difference between the number of game balls received and paid out by the recess 748a of the payout rotating body 748 and the number of balls detected by the counting switch 751 shown in FIG. 71 is obtained. This is a process of determining whether or not to reset the inconsistency counter INCC to be calculated.

When the inconsistency counter reset determination process is started, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 on the payout control board 4110 determines whether or not the inconsistency counter reset determination time has elapsed (as shown in FIG. 140). Step S790). This determination is performed based on the inconsistency counter reset determination time updated in the timer update process of step S552 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. 126. Specifically, the inconsistency counter reset determination time is stored in the time management information storage area of the above-mentioned payout control built-in RAM as time management information. In step S790, the time management information is read from the time management information storage area, and it is determined whether or not the inconsistency counter reset determination time has elapsed.

If the inconsistency counter reset determination time has not elapsed in step S790, this routine is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the inconsistency counter reset determination time has elapsed in step S790, the inconsistency counter reset determination time is initialized (step S792). By this initialization, the inconsistency counter reset determination time is set to an initial value of 7000s (about 2 hours).

Following step S792, the inconsistency counter INCC stored in the prize ball information storage area of the above-mentioned payout control built-in RAM is set to a value 0 (initial value 0) (step S794), and this routine is terminated. As described above, the inconsistency counter INCC calculates the difference between the number of game balls received and paid out by the recess 748a of the payout rotating body 748 and the number of balls detected by the counting switch 751. The value is 0 because the number of game balls that are normally received and paid out in the recess 748a of the payout rotating body 748 and the number of balls detected by the counting switch 751 are the same. Become. Since the payout control MPU4120a performs a retry operation in the payout installation process shown in FIG. 136, the number of game balls received and paid out by the recess 748a of the payout rotating body 748 by this retry operation and the actual number of game balls actually paid out. The inconsistency counter INCC monitors and determines whether or not the number of balls detected by the counting switch 751 and the inconsistent payout of game balls due to the inconsistency are repeated. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present invention, it has been experimentally obtained that the probability that one inconsistent gaming ball is paid out due to a retry operation is about 1 in millions. Here, as described above, the pachinko game machine 1 is composed of a game board 4 and a frame body such as a main body frame 3 on which the game board 4 is mounted, and by exchanging the game board 4 (replacement of a new machine). Since it is configured so that the game specifications can be changed, the payout control board 4110 for controlling the prize ball device 740 shown in FIG. 70, the drive power source for the prize ball device 740, and the control power supply for the payout control board 4110 are generated. The power supply board 851 shown in the above is equipped on the frame side as a common function. As described above, the payout control MPU4120a of the payout control unit 4120 on the payout control board 4110 can determine an abnormal operation as to whether or not the retry operation is repeatedly performed by monitoring the inconsistency counter INCC. In the payout control unit power-off process in the payout control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 126, the mismatch counter INCC immediately before the power-off is stored when the power is turned off, while the payout control unit power-on is shown in FIG. In the process of step S530 in the time process (setting at the time of power recovery of the RAM work area), the process is restarted from the stored inconsistency counter INCC when the power is turned on. Then, when the power is cut off and the game board 4 mounted on the pachinko game machine 1 is replaced with a game board 4'of another game specification different from the game board 4, the payout control is performed. The payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 on the board 4110 starts processing again from the inconsistency counter INCC stored when the game board 4 is mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1. That is, when the player plays the pachinko game machine 1 on which the game board 4'is mounted, the inconsistency counter INCC in the pachinko game machine 1 on which the game board 4 before replacement is mounted is inherited as it is. For this reason, the player plays the pachinko game machine 1 equipped with the game board 4', and there is a probability of 1 in millions that the number of inconsistent game balls is generated, and the inconsistency counter INCC. When the inconsistency counter INCC becomes equal to or higher than the above-mentioned inconsistency value INCTH, the game board 4 is replaced with the game board 4', and the payout control MPU4120a determines that the retry operation is abnormal in a short period of time. There is a risk of That is, in the short period after the game board 4 is replaced with the game board 4', the counting switch 751 is defective, the various harnesses extending from the counting switch 751 to the payout control board 4110 are broken, and the various connectors are poorly contacted. May be suddenly determined as an abnormal operation of the retry operation even though the above has not occurred. In this way, when the game board 4 is replaced with the game board 4'and judged as an abnormal operation of the retry operation in a short period of time, the replaced game board 4'is new, but the impression is that it is easy to break down. It may be given to the player. The probability that one inconsistent game ball will be paid out due to the retry operation is 1 in millions, the pachinko game machine 1 of the present invention is installed in the hall and continuously operated for one week during the business hours of the hall. In such a case, since it is the same as the probability that one inconsistent game ball due to the retry operation is paid out, the process of step S778 in the retry operation monitoring process shown in FIG. 139 is performed from the mismatch counter INCC to several million minutes. There is a probability of 1 that the value 1 is not subtracted. Then, in one week, the value 1 is incremented to the inconsistent counter INCC and the inconsistent counter INCC becomes the value 1, and in two weeks, the value 1 is further incremented to the inconsistent counter INCC and the inconsistent counter INCC becomes the value 2. In the week, the value 1 is further incremented to the inconsistency counter INCC and the inconsistency counter INCC becomes the value 3, and in the 4th week the value 1 is further incremented to the inconsistency counter INCC and the inconsistency counter INCC becomes the value 4. The value 1 is further incremented by the inconsistency counter INCC, and the inconsistency counter INCC becomes a value of 5, which matches the above-mentioned inconsistency threshold INCTH. That is, after 5 weeks have passed, since the inconsistency counter INCC matches the inconsistency threshold value INCTH, the payout control MPU4120a determines from step S776 in the retry operation monitoring process shown in FIG. 139 from the counting switch 751. It is determined that there is no detection signal, and it is determined that a malfunction of the counting switch 751, disconnection of various harnesses extending from the counting switch 751 to the payout control board 4110, poor contact of various connectors, etc. have occurred. In the process of step S782 in the retry operation monitoring process shown in 139, in order to notify that a “retry error” has occurred, a number “” is displayed on the error LED display 860c, which is a segment display mounted on the payout control board 4110. The retry error information for displaying "5" is set and set (stored) in the state information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Therefore, when the payout control MPU4120a determines that the inconsistency counter reset determination time has elapsed in the determination in step S790 in this inconsistency counter reset determination process, that is, every 7000s (about 2 hours), the inconsistency counter reset is repeated. By forcibly setting the value 0 to the inconsistency counter INCC in the process of step S794 in the determination process, that is, forcibly resetting it, the increment of the inconsistency counter INCC that occurs with a probability of 1 in millions described above is incremented. It has been disabled. As a result, although there is no malfunction of the counting switch 751, disconnection of various harnesses extending from the counting switch 751 to the payout control board 4110, poor contact of various connectors, etc., an error has occurred in the retry operation. It is possible to prevent the retry error information that conveys the above from being set (stored) in the state information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

By intentionally deactivating the counting switch 751, the above-mentioned retry operation is forcibly generated because it is difficult to detect the game ball that is received and paid out by the recess 748a of the payout rotating body 748. Even if a fraudulent act of illegally acquiring the game ball paid out by the retry operation is performed, if the counting switch 751 is intentionally repeatedly inactive for a short time, the value of the inconsistency counter INCC will be as described above. When the inconsistency threshold value INCTH or higher is reached, a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 5 emit light, so that a clerk in the hall or the like rushes to check the state of the pachinko game machine 1. Then, the player who commits the fraudulent act has no choice but to interrupt the act so that the act is not discovered, and cannot continuously acquire the fraudulent game ball due to the fraudulent act. On the other hand, when the counting switch 751 is intentionally repeatedly inactive for a long time so that the value of the inconsistency counter INCC does not exceed the inconsistency threshold INCTH, the inconsistency counter INCC is set every 7000s (about 2 hours). Although it is reset, the number of game balls that can be acquired by the cheating player during this period is, as described above, the inconsistency counter INCC up to the inconsistency threshold INCTH, and the counting switch 751 is intentionally set. Even if the player is repeatedly inactive for a long time, the number of game balls that can be acquired by a player who commits cheating can be extremely reduced.

[14-12. Error release switch operation judgment processing]
Next, the error release switch operation determination process will be described. In this error release switch operation determination process, it is determined whether or not the error release switch 860a shown in FIG. 98 is operated.

When the error release switch operation determination process is started, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 on the payout control board 4110 determines whether or not the error release switch 860a is operated as shown in FIG. 141 (step). S800). This determination is performed based on the detection signal from the error release switch 860a in the port input process of step S550 in the power-on processing of the payout control unit (main process of the payout control unit) shown in FIG. 126. Specifically, the detection signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the above-mentioned payout control built-in RAM. In step S800, the input information is read from the input information storage area, and it is determined whether or not there is a detection signal from the error release switch 860a. When the input information includes the detection signal from the error release switch 860a, it is determined that the error release switch 860a is being operated. On the other hand, when there is no detection signal from the error release switch 860a in the input information, it is determined that the error release switch 860a is not operated.

When the error release switch 860a is not operated in step S800, this routine is terminated as it is, while when the error release switch 860a is operated in step S800, the error flag state confirmation process is performed (step S802). In this error flag state determination process, the state of the error flag corresponding to various error information related to the prize ball device 740 shown in FIG. 70 is confirmed. For example, the state of the retry error flag RTERR-FLG indicating whether or not the retry operation is abnormal is confirmed. As described above, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG has a value of 1 when the retry operation is abnormally operating and a value of 0 when the retry operation is not abnormally operating (the retry operation is operating normally). Since it is set, the payout control MPU4120a confirms whether the value of the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is a value 0 or a value 1.

Following step S802, the state information setting process is performed (step S804). In this state information setting process, if the state of the error flag indicates that an error has occurred based on the error flag confirmed in step S802, the state information corresponding to the error flag is described above. Set (store) in the status information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. As a result, various information (state information) is read from the state information storage area in the command transmission process of step S566 in the power-on processing of the payout control unit (main process of the payout control unit) shown in FIG. 126, and the read state information is read out. A state command is created based on the above and transmitted to the main control board 4100. For example, when the retry error flag RTERR-FLG indicating whether or not the above-mentioned retry operation is abnormally operating has a value of 1, that is, when the retrying operation is abnormally operating, an error has occurred in the retrying operation. When the retry error information to be transmitted is set (stored) in the state information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, the command transmission process in step S566 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. 126 A retry error status command is created and sent to the main control board 4100.

The main control board 4100 that has received the retry error information transmits the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 123, and the peripheral control board 4140 transmits the peripheral control board 4140. A retry operation error notification process is performed to notify that an error has occurred in the retry operation. In this retry operation error notification process, the error notification announcement of the retry operation of "Please check the prize ball unit" and "Check the harness of the payout control board" is made a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment). 2 times.) Repeatedly by flowing from the side speakers 130 and 130 shown in FIG. 21, the upper right speaker 222 shown in FIG. 29, the upper left speaker 262 shown in FIG. 32, and the lower speaker 821 shown in FIG. 78. It is designed to notify the clerk of the hall. The clerk in the hall who heard the error notification announcement of this retry operation found a malfunction of the counting switch 751 shown in FIG. 70, disconnection of various harnesses extending from the counting switch 751 to the payout control board 4110, poor contact of various connectors, etc. This can be confirmed extremely quickly as compared with the case where the retry operation error notification announcement does not flow from the side speakers 130 and 130, the upper right speaker 222, the upper left speaker 262, and the lower speaker 821. Further, in the retry operation error notification process, a plurality of LEDs of various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 5 are made to emit light in a predetermined color (red in the present embodiment).

Following step S804, the release setting process is performed (step S806). In this release setting process, based on the error flags corresponding to the various error information confirmed in step S802, if the state of the error flag indicates that an error has occurred, it corresponds to the error flag. The CR unit 6 indicates that the content displayed by the error LED display 860c, which is a segment display already mounted on the payout control board 4110, is forcibly stopped or the ball can be rented. In order to convey the above-mentioned logic of the PRDY signal to HI, that is, the state in which it is started up is maintained, and the payout control I / O port 4120b of the payout control unit 4120 shown in FIG. It is output to the CR unit 6 via 869. For example, when the retry error flag RTERR-FLG indicating whether or not the above-mentioned retry operation is abnormally operating has a value of 1, that is, when the retrying operation is abnormally operating, the error LED display 860c has already displayed it. The retry error information stored in the state information storage area of the above-mentioned payout control built-in RAM is "normal" in order to forcibly stop the number "5" that notifies that the "retry error" is present. Forcibly overwrite the information in which the figure "-" that notifies the effect is displayed. Further, in order to inform the CR unit 6 that the ball can be rented, the logic of the PRDY signal is HI, that is, the standing state is maintained, and the game ball renting device is connected from the payout control I / O port 4120b. Output to the CR unit 6 via the terminal plate 869.

Following step S806, an error flag initialization process is performed (step S808), and this routine is terminated. In this error flag initialization process, if the state of the error flag indicates that an error has occurred based on the error flag corresponding to the various error information confirmed in step S802, the error flag is set. initialize. For example, when the retry error flag RTERR-FLG indicating whether or not the above-mentioned retry operation is abnormally operating has a value of 1, that is, when the retry operation is abnormally operating, a value 0 is set to the retry error flag RTERR-FLG. Set and initialize. At this time, the logic of the PRDY signal described above is held in the HI, that is, the rising state, and the logic state of the PRDY signal is set in the PRDY signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area. As a result, in the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control section main process of the payout control section power-on process of FIG. 126, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM. The read PRDY signal output setting information, that is, the PRDY signal whose logic is LOW is output from the payout control I / O port 4120b to the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869. As described above, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is an internal factor when the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is equal to or more than the inconsistency threshold value INCTH in the determination of step S780 in the retry operation monitoring process shown in FIG. 139. Is set to the retry error flag RTERR-FLG in the process of step S786 of the same process, and when the error release switch 860a is operated, this is the trigger, that is, this external factor. The retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set to a value of 0 and initialized when the occurrence of The retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set when the RAM clear switch 4100e mounted on the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. 97 is operated, that is, when the error release switch 860a is operated. Similarly, it is initialized when this external factor occurs.

[14-13. Exchange of various signals with the CR unit]
Next, the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control section main process of the payout control section power-on process of FIG. 126 will be described with reference to the timing chart. In this CR communication process, various signals are exchanged between the payout control board 4110 and the CR unit 6 shown in FIG. 98. First, the signal processing at the time of payout operation by ball lending will be described, and then the input signal confirmation processing from the CR unit 6 will be described. Here, the number of game balls for 200 yen as the amount of money (in this embodiment, 50 balls, and the payout operation of 25 balls for 100 yen as the amount of money is performed twice) is used as the number of balls to be rented. The case of paying out to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 shown in FIG. 19 will be described. The BRQ signal, BRDY signal, and CR connection signal from the CR unit 6 are those that read the input information from the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM and store it in the read input information, and perform CR communication processing. Checks the logical state of the BRQ signal, BRDY signal, and CR connection signal from the input information every 1.75 ms, which is the interrupt timer cycle.

[14-13-1. Signal processing during payout operation by lending a ball]
The payout control MPU4120a of the payout control unit 4120 on the payout control board 4110 reads out the PRDY signal output setting information from the CR communication information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and the read out PRDY signal output setting information pays out the rental ball. When the logic state of the PRDY signal that conveys that the payout operation is possible is set, the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is possible as shown in FIG. 142 (d). The logic of the PRDY signal is output as HI, that is, started up and held, output from the payout control I / O port 4120b of the payout control unit 4120, and is output as PRDY via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869. Then, it is output to the CR unit 6 (timing H0). In this state, for example, when the player presses the ball lending button 361 of the ball lending unit 360 shown in FIG. 17, the ball lending switch 365b is switched on (turned on). The operation signal is input to the CR unit 6 from the frequency display board 365 as the TDS shown in FIG. 99 via the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869. The CR unit 6 into which the TDS is input pays out the number of game balls worth 200 yen as the number of balls to be rented to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302, as shown in FIG. 142 (a). BRDY, which is a ball request signal, is output from the CR unit 6 to the payout control board 4110 (payout control MPU4120a) via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869, and the signal is started up and held (timing H1). .. This BRDY is input to the payout control I / O port 4120b as a BRDY signal.

As shown in FIG. 142 (b), the payout control MPU 4120a to which the BRDY signal is input is set from the timing H1 to the loan request monitoring time HA (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds (ms) to 58 ms). ) Elapses from the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869, and a predetermined number of balls can be rented in one payout operation (25 balls in this embodiment, and the amount is 100 yen). It is monitored whether or not BRQ, which is a one-time payout operation start request signal for paying out, is started.

Of the number of game balls worth 200 yen, the CR unit 6 first pays out the number of game balls worth 100 yen to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 as the number of rented balls, so FIG. 142 (b) ), The BRQ is output from the CR unit 6 to the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 from the timing H1 until the rental request monitoring time HA elapses, and the signal is output. Start up and hold (timing H2). This BRQ is input to the payout control I / O port 4120b as a BRQ signal.

As shown in FIG. 142 (c), when the BRQ signal rises from the timing H1 until the lending request monitoring time HA elapses, the payout control MPU4120a starts from the timing H2 to the BRQ request approval ACK monitoring time HB (in the present embodiment, (It is set to 20 ms ± 1 ms.) In order to convey that one payout operation has started by the time elapses, the logic of the EXS signal is set as HI, that is, the payout control I while holding the started state is maintained. It is output from the / O port 4120b and is output as an EXS to the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 (timing H3).

As shown in FIG. 142 (b), the CR unit 6 to which the XS is input is set to 20 ms to 58 ms from the timing H3 to the loan instruction monitoring time HC (in this embodiment, it is set to 20 ms to 58 ms). The BRQ that has been started up and held from the timing H2 is output from the CR unit 6 to the payout control board 4110 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869, and the signal is lowered and held (timing H4).

As shown in FIG. 142 (c), the payout control MPU4120a performs one payout operation from the timing H4 until the payout monitoring time HD (in the present embodiment, the ball payout time is set) elapses. Go and pay out the predetermined number of balls to be rented, that is, the number of game balls for 100 yen to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 as the number of rented balls. Then, when the payout monitoring time HD elapses, the EXS signal that is started up and held from the timing H3 is held as LOW, that is, held in the downed state, and output from the payout control I / O port 4120b, and is output as EXS. It is output to the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 (timing H5).

The CR unit 6 pays out the remaining 100 yen worth of game balls out of the 200 yen worth of game balls to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 as the number of rented balls, so FIG. ), The BRQ is transferred from the CR unit 6 to the terminal plate for connecting the rental device such as a game ball by the time when the next request confirmation timing HE (in this embodiment, the maximum is set to 268 ms) elapses from the timing H5. It is output to the payout control board 4110 (payout control MPU4120a) via the 869, and the signal is started up and held (timing H6).

Similarly, when the payout control MPU4120a pays out the remaining 100 yen worth of game balls to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 as the number of rented balls by using the above method, as shown in FIG. The EXS signal that has been started up and held is output from the payout control I / O port 4120b while holding its logic as LOW, that is, in the lowered state, and is output as EXS via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869. Then, it is output to the CR unit 6 (timing H7).

The CR unit 6 stands up from the timing H1 as shown in FIG. 142 (a) by the time when the CR unit lending completion monitoring time HF (in the present embodiment, the maximum is set to 268 ms) elapses from the timing H7. The raised and held BRDY is output from the CR unit 6 to the payout control board 4110 (payout control MPU4120a) via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869, and the signal is lowered and held (timing H8).

The above-mentioned lending request monitoring time HA, BRQ request approval ACK monitoring time HB, lending instruction monitoring time HC, payout monitoring time HD, next request confirmation timing HE, and CR unit lending completion monitoring time HF are the payout control shown in FIG. 126. The time is measured in the timer update process of step S552 in the process when the power is turned on (main process of the payout control unit).

The payout control MPU4120a is not communicating with the CR unit 6 when the ball is out, the ball is squeezed, a counting switch error, a retry error, a full tank, or the like occurs (the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6). Is LOW, that is, when it is held down), as shown in FIG. 142 (d), the PRDY signal that is started up and held from the timing H1 is set to LOW, that is, in a state of being held down. It is held and output from the payout control I / O port 4120b, and is output as a PRDY to the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 (timing H9). On the other hand, when communicating with the CR unit 6 (when the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, that is, when it stands up and is held), although not shown, the logic state of the EXS signal is maintained and dispensed. It is output from the control I / O port 4120b, and is output to the CR unit 6 as an EXS via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869. "Maintaining the logical state of the EXS signal" means that when the logic of the EXS signal is LOW (the EXS signal is held down), the logic LOW is maintained, and the logic of the EXS signal is HI (maintaining the logical state of the EXS signal). It is to maintain its logical HI when the EXS signal is up and held).

In this way, the CR unit 6 exchanges various signals with the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 on the payout control board 4110, and the payout control MPU 4120a uses the number of game balls for 200 yen as the amount of money and 100 as the amount of money. By performing the payout operation of 25 balls for the yen twice, the game balls with a loan number of 50 balls are paid out to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302. A clerk in the hall or the like operates a setting unit (not shown) provided on the front side of the CR unit 6, for example, the upper plate 301 or the number of balls rented for 100 yen as the amount of money. When it is set to pay out to the lower plate 302, the payout control MPU4120a performs a payout operation of 25 balls for 100 yen as the amount of money once, and the number of game balls for 500 yen as the amount of money is used as the number of rented balls. When it is set to pay out to the upper plate 301 or the lower plate 302, the payout control MPU4120a performs the payout operation of 25 balls for 100 yen as the amount of money five times, and the number of game balls for 1000 yen as the amount of money is calculated. When the number of balls to be rented is set to be paid out to the upper plate 301 or the lower plate 302, the payout control MPU4120a will perform the payout operation of 25 balls for 100 yen as the amount of money 10 times.

[14-13-2. Input signal confirmation processing from CR unit]
In the payout control MPU4120a of the payout control unit 4120 on the payout control board 4110, the CR unit 6 passes the BRQ from the CR unit 6 via the game ball or the like lending device connection terminal plate 869 even after the above-mentioned lending request monitoring time HA has elapsed. Therefore, even if the signal is output to the payout control board 4110 and the signal is not started, or even if the above-mentioned lending instruction monitoring time HC has elapsed, the CR unit 6 connects the BRDY to the lending device such as a game ball from the CR unit 6. The CR unit 6 plays the BRQ from the CR unit 6 even when the signal is output to the payout control board 4110 via the terminal plate 869 and the signal is not shut down or the above-mentioned next request confirmation timing HE has passed. The CR unit 6 is BRDY even if the signal is output to the payout control board 4110 via the ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and the signal is not started, or even if the above-mentioned CR unit rental completion monitoring time HF has elapsed. Is output from the CR unit 6 to the payout control board 4110 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869, and when the signal is not shut down, the BRQ and the BRQ and the XS described above are used. Check whether the BRDY is normal or not. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 142 (e) and 142 (f), the payout control MPU4120a determines that the BRQ and BRDY are not normal (timing J0), and from this timing J0 to a predetermined period JA (in the present embodiment). , 200 ms ± 1 ms.), The logic of the PRDY signal is set to LOW, that is, it is held in the down state and output from the payout control I / O port 4120b of the payout control unit 4120, and is set as PRDY. , The game ball, etc. is output to the CR unit 6 via the rental device connection terminal plate 869, and the logic of the EXS signal is set to LOW, that is, the output is held from the down state and output from the payout control I / O port 4120b, and is output from the EXE. As a result, it is output to the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 (timing J1).

Subsequently, the payout control MPU4120a uses the logic of the PRDY signal, which is held down from the timing J1 after the lapse of a predetermined period JB (set to 200 ms ± 1 ms in the present embodiment) from the timing J1, as HI. That is, it is held in the started-up state and output from the payout control I / O port 4120b, and is output as a PRDY to the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 (timing J2).

Subsequently, the payout control MPU4120a uses the PRDY signal that is started and held from the timing J2 after the lapse of a predetermined period JC (set to 100 ms ± 1 ms in this embodiment) from the timing J2, and its logic is set to LOW. That is, it is held in the lowered state and output from the payout control I / O port 4120b, and is output as a PRDY to the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 (timing J3).

Subsequently, the payout control MPU4120a uses the logic of the PRDY signal that is stopped and held from the timing J3 as HI after the lapse of the predetermined period JD (in this embodiment, 100 ms ± 1 ms) from the timing J3. That is, it is held in the raised state and output from the payout control I / O port 4120b, and is output as a PRDY to the CR unit 6 via the game ball or the like rental device connection terminal plate 869 (timing J4).

Subsequently, the payout control MPU4120a sets the logic of the PRDY signal that is started and held from the timing J4 as LOW after the lapse of a predetermined period JE (set to 100 ms ± 1 ms in this embodiment) from the timing J4. That is, it is held in the lowered state and output from the payout control I / O port 4120b, and is output as a PRDY to the CR unit 6 via the game ball or the like rental device connection terminal plate 869 (timing J5).

Subsequently, the payout control MPU4120a uses the logic of the PRDY signal that is stopped and held from the timing J5 as HI after the elapse of the predetermined period JF (in this embodiment, 10000 ms ± 1 ms) from the timing J5. That is, it is held in the started-up state and output from the payout control I / O port 4120b, and is output as a PRDY to the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 (timing J6).

The predetermined period JA to the predetermined period JF described above are timed by the timer update process in step S552 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. 126.

[15. Various control processes for peripheral control boards]
Next, various processes of the peripheral control board 4140 for receiving various commands from the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) shown in FIG. 97 will be described with reference to FIGS. 143 to 148. FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit power-on processing, FIG. 144 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, and FIG. 145 shows an example of peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing. FIG. 146 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, FIG. 147 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing, and FIG. 148 is a rotation detection switch history creation process. It is a flowchart which shows an example.

As shown in FIG. 100, the peripheral control board 4140 is composed of a peripheral control unit 4150, a liquid crystal display, and a sound control unit 4160. Here, various control processes of the peripheral control unit 4150 will be described. First, the peripheral control unit power-on processing will be described, followed by peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing, and rotation detection. The switch history creation process will be described. The rotation detection switch history creation process is executed as one process of the operation unit information acquisition process in step S1108 in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later. In the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing is set to the highest priority as the interrupt processing, followed by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and the peripheral control unit. It is set in the order of V blank interrupt processing.

[15-1. Various control processes of the peripheral control unit]
[15-1-1. Peripheral control unit power-on processing]
When the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. 100 performs the peripheral control unit power-on processing as shown in FIG. 143. When the peripheral control unit power-on processing is started, the peripheral control MPU4150a performs the initial setting processing (step S1000). This initial setting process includes a process of initializing the peripheral control MPU4150a itself, a process of determining a hot start / cold start, a process of setting a wait timer after reset, and the like. The peripheral control MPU4150a first performs a process of initializing itself, and the time required for the process of initializing the peripheral control MPU4150a is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control MPU4150a is initialized in an extremely short time. be able to. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 4150a is output from the main control board 4100 in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described later, for example, by setting the interrupt enable, as shown in FIGS. 118 and 119. , It becomes possible to receive various commands such as a command related to the control of the game effect and a command related to the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

In the hot start / cold start determination process, the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. 101 has the effect backup information (1fr) that is backed up in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) in the backup first area 4150cc. ), And the production backup information (1 ms), which is the content backed up in Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (1 ms), are compared, and Bank 3 (1 fr) and Bank 4 (1 fr) in the backup second area 4150 cc. The production backup information (1fr), which is the content backed up in, is compared, and the production backup information (1ms), which is the content backed up in Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms), is compared. When they match, the effect backup information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank1 (1fr) with respect to Bank0 (1fr), which is the normally used storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. When the production backup information (1 ms), which is the content stored in Bank 1 (1 ms), is copied back to Bank 0 (1 ms) to make a hot start, but the compared contents do not match (that is,). , When there is a discrepancy), the value 0 is forcibly written to each of the normally used storage areas of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1ms), to make a cold start.

Further, in the hot start / cold start determination process, the peripheral control SRAM 4150d shown in FIG. 101 is also backed up in Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) in the backup first area 4150db. (SRAM) are compared, and the effect backup information (SRAM), which is the content backed up in Bank 3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM), in the backup second area 4150 dc is compared. When the compared contents match, the effect backup information (SRAM) which is the contents stored in the Bank0 (SRAM) with respect to the normally used storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 4150d shown in FIG. 101 (SRAM). ) Is copied back to make a hot start, while when the compared contents do not match (that is, when they do not match), the value is set with respect to Bank0 (SRAM), which is a normally used storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 4150d. Forcibly write 0 to make it a cold start. Following such a hot start or cold start, a value 0 is forcibly written to the backup unmanaged work area 4150cf of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. 101 to clear zero. After performing this initialization setting process, the peripheral control MPU4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT4150af shown in FIG. 101 and the peripheral control external WDT4150e shown in FIG. 100 and resets to the peripheral control MPU4150a. I try not to take it.

Following step S1000, the current time information acquisition process is performed (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition process, the calendar information for specifying the date and the time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second are acquired from the RTC built-in RAM4165aa of the RTC41654a of the RTC control unit 4165 shown in FIG. In the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in the above, the current calendar information is set in the calendar information storage unit, and the current time information is set in the time information storage unit. Further, in the current time information acquisition process, the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device is also performed. In the brightness setting process of this liquid crystal display device, the peripheral control MPU4150a acquires the brightness setting information from the RTC built-in RAM4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, and displays the liquid crystal so that the brightness of the LED is included in the acquired brightness setting information. A process of adjusting the brightness of the backlight of the device 1900 to turn it on is performed. As described above, the brightness setting information is currently set as brightness adjustment information for adjusting the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900, in 5% increments in the range from 100% to 70%. The brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900, is included. In the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, specifically, the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on when the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information stored in the RTC built-in RAM4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 is 75%. Occasionally, the brightness of the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is adjusted and turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information, and the LED included in the brightness setting information stored in the RTC built-in RAM4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165. When the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on at a brightness of 80%, the brightness of the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is adjusted and turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information. In the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, the same correction as the brightness correction program for correcting the brightness of the liquid crystal display device 1900 according to the usage time of the liquid crystal display device 1900 described above is not performed at all. It has become. This is because a correction program similar to the brightness correction program is incorporated in the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, so that the brightness of the LED is corrected toward 100% each time the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device is executed. This is to prevent it from being done. In the present embodiment, the peripheral control MPU4150a acquires the calendar information and the time information from the RTC built-in RAM4165aa of the RTC4165a only once when the power is turned on. Further, the peripheral control MPU4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT4150af and the peripheral control external WDT4150e after performing the current time information acquisition process so that the peripheral control MPU4150a is not reset.

Following step S1002, the value 0 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1006). This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing described later, and has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, and the peripheral control unit steady processing. Is set to a value of 0 when is not executed. The V-blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is executed when a V-blank signal indicating that screen data from the peripheral control MPU4150a can be accepted is input from the sound source built-in VDP4160a, which will be described later. The value 1 is set in the part V blank signal interrupt processing. In this step S1006, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized once by setting the value 0 in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. Further, the peripheral control MPU4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT4150af and the peripheral control external WDT4150e after setting the value 0 in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG so that the peripheral control MPU4150a is not reset. There is.

Following step S1006, it is determined whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 (step S1008). When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0), the process returns to step S1008 again to repeatedly determine whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value 1. By repeating such a determination, the state waits until the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. Further, the peripheral control MPU4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT4150af and the peripheral control external WDT4150e after determining whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, and resets to the peripheral control MPU4150a. I try not to take it.

When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 in step S1008, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, the value 1 is first set in the steady processing flag SP-FLG (step S1009). The steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed, and to a value of 0 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is completed.

Following step S1009, the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process is performed (step S1010). In this 1 ms interrupt timer activation process, the 1 ms interrupt timer for executing the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is activated, and the number of times the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is set to a value of 1 to initialize the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN. The 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing.

Following step S1010, lamp data output processing is performed (step S1012). In this lamp data output process, DMA serial continuous transmission to the lamp drive board 4170 shown in FIG. 100 is performed. Here, the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. 101 is used to continuously transmit the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board. When the continuous transmission of the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board is started, the transmission data storage area 4150caa on the lamp drive board side of the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. 101 is shown in FIG. 95. The game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the game board 4 is created by the lamp data creation process described later. It is in the set state. The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. 101 specifies the transmission of the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board as a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and the transmission data storage area 4150caa on the lamp drive board side. The first byte of the game board side light emission data SL-DAT stored at the start address is sent to the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board via the external bus 4150h, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai. Transfer to the transmit buffer register of and write. As a result, the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the game board side emission clock signal SL-CLK to 1 byte of the transmission shift register. Data is started to be transmitted bit by bit. The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac triggers each time a transmission interrupt request for the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board is generated (in the present embodiment, the transmission buffer register for the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board is used). The written 1-byte data is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register runs out of 1-byte data and becomes empty.) The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa is using the bus. If not, the remaining game board side light emission data SL-DAT stored in the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150ca is sent byte by byte via the external bus 4150h, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai. By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board, the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board transfers the data of the written transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register and plays a game. In synchronization with the board-side emission clock signal SL-CLK, 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started to be transmitted bit by bit, and continuous transmission is performed by the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board.

Further, in the lamp data output processing, the DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 shown in FIG. 100 is performed. Here, too, the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac of the peripheral control MPU 4150a is used to continuously transmit the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED. When the continuous transmission of the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED is started, the transmission data storage area for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED of the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. Door-side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 5 shown in FIG. 53 on the 4150cab. Lamp data described later by STL-DAT. It is in the state of being created and set by the creation process. The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a specifies the transmission of the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED as a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and the transmission data storage area for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED. The first byte of the door-side emission data STL-DAT stored at the start address of the 4150cab is serialized for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED via the external bus 4150h, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai. Transfer to the transmit buffer register of the I / O port and write. As a result, the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED transfers the written transmission buffer register data to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the door-side emission clock signal STL-CLK of the transmission shift register. Transmission of 1 byte of data is started bit by bit. The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac triggers each time a transmission interrupt request for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O port is generated (in this embodiment, the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O). The 1-byte data written in the transmission buffer register of the port is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register is empty when the 1-byte data is exhausted.), Peripheral control CPU core 4150aa When the bus is not used, the remaining door-side emission data STL-DAT stored in the transmission data storage area 4150cab for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED is stored in 1 byte at a time, external bus 4150h, peripheral control bus controller 4150ad. Then, the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED is written by transferring the data to the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED via the peripheral bus 4150ai. The data in the transmission buffer register is transferred to the transmission shift register, and 1-byte data in the transmission shift register is started to be transmitted bit by bit in synchronization with the door-side emission clock signal STL-CLK, for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED. Continuous transmission is performed by the serial I / O port.

Following step S1012, the operation unit monitoring process is performed (step S1014). In this operation unit monitoring process, in the operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, the dial operation unit 401 is based on the detection signals from various detection switches provided in the operation unit 400 shown in FIG. 43. Rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 created based on various information acquired from the rotation (rotation direction) and the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 (for example, detection signals from various detection switches provided in the operation unit 400). ) History information, operation history information of the pressing operation unit 405, etc.) Based on the operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150kai of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. 101, the rotation direction and pressing operation of the dial operation unit 401. The presence or absence of operation of the unit 405 is monitored, and it is appropriately determined whether or not the rotation direction of the dial operation unit 401 and the operation state of the pressing operation unit 405 are reflected in the game effect.

Following step S1014, display data output processing is performed (step S1016). In this display data output process, drawing data for one screen (one frame) generated on the built-in VRAM of the sound source built-in VDP4160a in the display data creation process described later is output to the liquid crystal display device 1900. As a result, various screens are drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900. In the display data output process, when drawing exceeding the drawing capacity of the VDP4160a with a built-in sound source is performed, the output of the generated drawing data for one screen (one frame) to the liquid crystal display device 1900 is canceled. It has become. As a result, it is possible to prevent a delay in the processing time, but so-called frame dropping occurs, but the various decorative substrates provided on the game board 4 shown in FIG. 95 by the lamp data output processing in step S1012. The speakers 821 and the door frame 5 provided in the main body frame 3 are provided by the effect of the plurality of LEDs and the plurality of LEDs of the various decorative substrates provided in the door frame 5 shown in FIG. 53 and the sound data output processing described later. It is a mechanism that can give priority to the synchronization of the speakers 130, 222, 262 with the production by music, sound effects, etc. according to various productions.

Following step S1016, sound data output processing is performed (step S1018). In this sound data output process, sound data such as music and sound effects set in the sound source built-in VDP4160a in the sound data creation process described later is output to the audio data transmission IC4160c as serialized audio data, or music and sound effects. In addition, the sound data of the notification sound and the notification sound are output to the audio data transmission IC 4160c as serialized audio data. When the serialized audio data from the VDP4160a with a built-in sound source is input, the audio data transmission IC 4160c is directed toward the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as differential serial data in which the right audio data is a positive signal and a negative signal. At the same time, the left side audio data is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as differential serial data having a positive signal and a negative signal. As a result, the speakers 821 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, 262 provided in the door frame 5 play back music and sound effects according to various effects in stereo, and the notification sound and notification sound are also stereo. It will be played.

Following step S1018, the scheduler update process is performed (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. 101 are updated. For example, in the scheduler update process, among the screen data arranged in the time series constituting the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150 cage, the number of screen data from the first screen data is sent to the sound source built-in VDP4160a. Update the pointer to indicate whether to output.

Further, in the scheduler update process, among the light emission data arranged in the time series constituting the light emission mode generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150 cage, the light emission data at which number from the first light emission data is emitted from various LEDs. Update the pointer to indicate which aspect to use.

Further, in the scheduler update process, sound data such as music and sound effects, and sound data of notification sound and notification sound arranged in a time series constituting the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150 cage are instructed. The pointer is updated in order to indicate which sound command data from the first sound command data is to be output to the sound source built-in VDP4160a among the sound command data.

Further, in the scheduler update process, the first drive data among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as the motor and the solenoid arranged in the time series constituting the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150 cage is started. Update the pointer to indicate which drive data is to be output. Electrical drive source The drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series that compose the schedule data is the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt that is repeatedly executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs, which will be described later. Updated with motor and solenoid drive processing in processing. In the motor and solenoid drive processing that is repeatedly executed each time this 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the electric drive source such as the motor or solenoid is driven according to the drive data indicated by the pointer, and the next drive specified in time series is performed. It updates the pointer to the data and updates the pointer each time it executes its own processing. That is, since the drive data indicated by the pointer updated in the motor and solenoid drive processing is forcibly updated in the scheduler update processing, the pointer is originally instructed in the motor and solenoid drive processing for some reason. Even if another drive data is instructed from the drive data that should be used, the drive data that should be originally instructed is forcibly updated in the scheduler update process.

Following step S1020, the received command analysis process is performed (step S1022). In this received command analysis process, various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process described later, and the received various commands are analyzed. Various commands from the main control board 4100 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the reception command storage area 4150cc of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. 101, and are stored in the reception command storage area 4150cc in the reception command analysis processing. , Received command storage area 4150cc is analyzed for various commands stored in the storage area. The various commands are classified into the various commands shown in FIG. 118, which are classified as related to the special figure 1 synchronization effect, the various commands classified as related to the special figure 2 synchronization effect, the various commands classified as related to the jackpot, and the power on. Various commands to be executed, various commands classified to be related to the normal electric service production, various commands classified to be related to the normal electric service production, various commands classified into the notification display shown in FIG. 119, and classified into the status display. There are various commands, various commands classified as test-related, and various commands classified as others.

Following step S1022, warning processing is performed (step S1024). In this warning process, when the command analyzed in the received command analysis process in step S1022 includes various commands classified into the notification display shown in FIG. 119, the abnormality display mode for executing various abnormality notification is set. The set schedule data for screen generation, schedule data for generating light emission mode, schedule data for sound generation, schedule data for electrical drive source, etc. are displayed as various control data of peripheral control ROM 4150b or peripheral control RAM 4150c of peripheral control unit 4150. It is extracted from the copy area 4150ce and set to 4150cae in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. In the warning process, when a plurality of abnormalities occur at the same time, the abnormality notification is performed in descending order of priority registered in advance, and the abnormality is automatically resolved and the remaining abnormality notification is automatically transitioned to. It is designed to do. This allows multiple anomalies to be monitored simultaneously without losing information that another anomaly has occurred and one anomaly has occurred after one anomaly has occurred but before the anomaly has been resolved. Can be done.

Following step S1024, RCT acquisition information update processing is performed (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update process, the calendar information acquired in the current time information acquisition process of step S1002 and set in the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. 101 and the calendar information stored in the calendar information storage unit. Updates the time information stored in the time information storage unit. By this RCT acquisition information update process, the hour, minute, and second, which is the time information stored in the time information storage unit, is updated, and the year and month, which is the calendar information stored in the calendar information storage unit based on the updated time information. The day is updated.

Following step S1026, lamp data creation processing is performed (step S1028). In this lamp data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and among the light emission data arranged in time series constituting the schedule data for generating the light emission mode, based on the light emission data instructed by the pointer. , The peripheral control unit provides the game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting the lighting signal, blinking signal, or gradation lighting signal to the plurality of LEDs of the various decorative boards provided on the game board 4 shown in FIG. It is created by extracting from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the 4150 or various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and is set in the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. The door-side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 5 shown is the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or It is created by extracting from various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and set in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. 101.

Following step S1028, display data creation processing is performed (step S1030). In this display data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and among the screen data arranged in the time series constituting the screen generation schedule data, the screen data indicated by the pointer is referred to by the peripheral control unit. It is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the 4150 or various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c and output to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a. When screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU4150a, the sound source built-in VDP4160a extracts character data from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b based on the input screen data, creates sprite data, and displays it on the liquid crystal display device 1900. The drawing data for one screen (one frame) is generated on the built-in VRAM.

Following step S1030, sound data creation processing is performed (step S1032). In this sound data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and among the sound command data arranged in time series constituting the sound generation schedule data, the sound command data instructed by the pointer is displayed. It is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c and output to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a. When sound command data is input from the peripheral control MPU4150a, the sound source built-in VDP4160a extracts sound data such as music and sound effects stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b and controls the built-in sound source to control the sound command. Sound data such as music and sound effects are incorporated according to the track number specified in the data, and the output channel to be used is set according to the output channel number. In the sound data creation process, each time the sound data creation process is performed (that is, each time the peripheral control unit routine process is performed), the peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak shown in FIG. 101 is started to adjust the volume. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the knob portion of 4140a is converted into a value of 1024 steps from the value 0 to the value 1023. In the present embodiment, the value of 1024 steps is divided into seven and managed as the board volumes 0 to 6, the board volume 0 is set to mute, the board volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the board volume 0 to the board. The volume is set so as to increase toward the volume 6. The liquid crystal and the sound source built-in VDP4160a of the sound control unit 4160 are controlled so that the volume is set to the board volumes 0 to 6, and the sound data is serialized in the sound data output process of step S1018 described above. By outputting to the transmission IC 4160c, music and sound effects can be played from the speakers 821 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, 262 provided in the door frame 5. In addition, the notification sound and the notification sound flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the knob part, and the sound source of the liquid crystal and the sound control unit 4160 is programmed to set the volume from mute to the maximum volume. The built-in VDP4160a can be controlled and adjusted. The volume adjusted by this program is different from the substrate volume divided into the above-mentioned seven stages, and can smoothly change from mute to maximum volume. For example, even when a hall clerk or the like rotates the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a to set the volume low, the speakers 821 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130 and 222 provided in the door frame 5 Although the production sounds such as music and sound effects played from 262 are reduced, the volume is loud when the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a problem or when the player is cheating (in the present embodiment, the maximum volume). ) Can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk and the like from becoming less likely to notice the occurrence of a problem or the cheating of the player due to the notification sound. In addition, based on the current board volume set by adjusting the volume based on the rotation operation of the knob, the volume at which the advertisement sound is played is reduced so as not to interfere with music and sound effects, while the advertisement sound is played. Announcement that there is a high possibility that the screen unfolded by the liquid crystal display device 1900 will be produced as more powerful in addition to music and sound effects by increasing the volume of the sound, or that the game state will be favorable to the player. You can also do it. When the jackpot game state is generated by operating the dial operation unit 401 of the operation unit 400 (for example, when a total of 15 rounds from 1 round to 15 rounds are set as the jackpot game state, a total of 15 rounds is set. It is possible to adjust the sub-volume value of the production sound within the period during which each round from 1 round to 15 rounds is digested. In the present embodiment, music is played from the speakers 821 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, 262 provided in the door frame 5 while the jackpot game state is being executed. For example, the drum sound reverberates. A player who feels uncomfortable can adjust the volume to a small value to comfortably digest the big hit game state, and a player who wants to digest the big hit game state with a powerful volume can adjust the volume to a large value to comfortably digest the big hit game state. You can do it. The sub-volume value of the effect sound adjusted in the jackpot game state is such that the sub-volume value is maintained and the effect proceeds after the jackpot game state is digested. In this program, the peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak converts the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the knob of the volume control volume 4140a from an analog value to a digital value, and for this converted value. By adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation of the dial operation unit 401 of the operation unit 400, the value of the board volume can be increased or decreased. Further, when the state in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not playing is continued for a predetermined time, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a waiting state, and the demonstration by the liquid crystal display device 1900 is continuously performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times), the previous time, The volume adjusted by the player who is sitting in front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and playing the game is canceled, and the volume is initialized. In this volume initialization, the volume is adjusted by the hall clerk, that is, the volume adjusted by the hall clerk by directly rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 4140a (that is, the production sound). The sub-volume value is set as the default value (initial value), and the substrate volume adjusted by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjusting volume 4140a described above is set). In the present embodiment, when the customer is waiting and the demonstration by the liquid crystal display device 1900 is continuously performed a predetermined number of times, the volume adjusted by the player who is sitting on the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and playing the game. Is canceled and the volume is initialized, but even if the game is not progressing for a period of time when the player enters various winning openings during the game, the game is played. In order to prevent the volume adjusted by the player from being initialized, the volume adjusted by the player is initialized when a predetermined number of demonstrations are performed in succession.

Following step S1032, a backup process is performed (step S1034). In this backup process, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the external peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. 101 are copied to the backup first area 4150 cc and the backup second area 4150 cc, respectively, and backed up. At the same time, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the external peripheral control SRAM 4150d are copied and backed up in the backup first area 4150db and the backup second area 4150dc, respectively.

Specifically, in the backup process, the peripheral control RAM 4150c is backed up for each frame (1 frame) in the backup target work area 4150ca shown in FIG. 101, that is, every time the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed. The lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab, the reception command storage area 4150cac, the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad, and the following Bank0 (1fr). Peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac is set in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 4150cc by using the effect information (1fr) stored in the schedule data storage area 4150cae as the effect backup information (1fr). Copy at high speed, and the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies at high speed to Bank 3 (1fr) and Bank 4 (1fr) in the backup second area 4150cc.

To briefly explain the high-speed copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. 101 is a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac. Specify a copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) to Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 4150cc, and change the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (1fr) to the end address of Bank0 (1fr). Up to the stored contents are continuously copied by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte) in order from the start address of Bank1 (1fr) in the first area 4150 kb, and the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa is the peripheral control DMA controller. Specify the copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) as the request factor of 4150ac to Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 4150cc, and from the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (1fr), Bank0 (1fr). ) Is continuously copied by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) from the start address of Bank 2 (1fr) in the backup first area 4150 kb up to the contents stored in the terminal address. Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa specifies a copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) as a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac to Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150cc, and specifies Bank0 (1fr). ) From the content stored in the start address of Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored in the end address of Bank0 (1fr), the start address of Bank3 (1fr) in the second area 4150cc is continuously backed up by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte). Copy everything in order from, and specify that the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa copies the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) as the requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac to Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150cc. Then, from the content stored in the start address of Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored in the end address of Bank0 (1fr), a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) is continuously backed up in Bank4 (4150cc of the second area). Copy everything in order from the start address of 1fr).

Further, in the backup process, the peripheral control SRAM 4150d is backed up for each frame (1 frame) in the backup target work area 4150da shown in FIG. 101, that is, every time the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed. Peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac is high speed in Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) of backup first area 4150db using the effect information (RAM) stored in Bank0 (SRAM) as the effect backup information (SRAM). And the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies to Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) in the backup second area 4150dc at high speed.

To briefly explain the high-speed copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. 101 is a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac. Specify the copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) to Bank1 (SRAM) of the backup first area 4150db, and change the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (RAM) to the end address of Bank0 (SRAM). Up to the stored contents are continuously copied by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte) in order from the start address of Bank1 (SRAM) in the first area 4150db, and the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa is the peripheral control DMA controller. Specify the copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) as the request factor of 4150ac to Bank2 (SRAM) of the backup first area 4150db, and from the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (SRAM), Bank0 (SRAM). ) Is continuously copied by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) up to the contents stored in the terminal address of the backup first area 4150db in order from the start address of Bank 2 (SRAM). Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa specifies a copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) as a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac to Bank3 (SRAM) of the backup second area 4150dc, and specifies Bank0 (SRAM). ) Is continuously backed up from the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (SRAM) to the contents stored in the end address of Bank0 (RAM) by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte). The start address of Bank3 (SRAM) in the second area 4150dc All are copied in order from, and the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa specifies the copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) as the requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac to Bank4 (SRAM) of the backup second area 4150dc. Then, from the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (SRAM) to the contents stored in the end address of Bank0 (SRAM), predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte) are continuously backed up in Bank4 of the second area 4150dc (Bunk4). Copy everything in order from the start address of SRAM).

Following step S1034, the WDT clear process is performed (step S1036). In this WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the peripheral control built-in WDT4150af and the peripheral control external WDT4150e so that the peripheral control MPU4150a is not reset.

Following step S1036, the value 0 is set in the steady processing flag SP-FLG as the execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed (step S1038), the process returns to step S1006 again, and the value 0 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. Is set and initialized, and the determination in step S1008 is repeated until the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. That is, in step S1008, it waits until the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, and when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value 1, steps S1009 to step S1009. The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1006 again. As described above, when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, the processes of steps S1009 to S1038 are performed. The processing of steps S1009 to S1038 is referred to as "peripheral control unit steady processing". This peripheral control unit steady processing starts by first setting a value 1 in the steady processing flag SP-FLG assuming that the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed in step S1009, and in step S1010, the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process is performed. Then, each process of step S1012, step S1014, ..., And step S1036 is performed, and finally, in step S1038, when the value 0 is set in the steady processing flag SP-FLG as the execution completion of the peripheral control unit steady processing, the process is completed. Will be done. The peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 in step S1008. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is executed when a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU4150a can be accepted is input from the sound source built-in VDP4160a. The value 1 is set in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. In the present embodiment, as the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is set to approximately 30 fps per second as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is input is approximately 33. It is .3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed approximately every 33.3 ms.

[15-1-2. Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. 100 can be accepted was input from the liquid crystal and the sound source built-in VDP 4160a of the sound control unit 4160. Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing executed with this as an opportunity will be described. When the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 determines whether the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0, as shown in FIG. 144 (step). S1045). As described above, the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing in steps S1009 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 143 is being executed. The value is set to 0 when the processing is completed.

When the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is not a value 0 (value 1) in step S1045, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed, this routine is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0 in step S1045, that is, when the execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed, the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1050). Exit this routine. As described above, this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing, and has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, and peripheral control. The value is set to 0 when the steady processing is not executed.

In the present embodiment, in step S1045, it is determined whether or not the constant processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0, that is, whether or not the peripheral control unit steady processing has been executed, and the peripheral control unit steady processing has been executed. Occasionally, in step S1050, the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, but this is because the V blank signal is input and the V blank is input while the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed. When the value 1 is set in the signal detection flag VB-FLG, the peripheral control unit steady processing currently being executed is assumed to be executed in the determination of step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 143. Since it is forcibly canceled in the middle and the peripheral control unit steady processing is started from the beginning, in order to prevent this, the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady processing) in FIG. 143 is steady in step S1009. By setting the value 1 to the processing flag SP-FLG, it is notified to the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, that the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, and the peripheral control unit power supply in FIG. 143. Peripheral control unit V blank, which is this routine, indicates that the peripheral control unit steady processing has been executed by setting the value 0 to the flag SP-FLG during steady processing in step S1038 in the on-time processing (peripheral control unit steady processing). By transmitting to the signal interrupt processing, whether or not the constant processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0 in the determination of step S1045 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, that is, the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. It is designed to determine whether it has been completed. In other words, it is a measure when the peripheral control unit steady processing cannot be completed by the time the V blank signal is input and the next V blank signal is input, so-called processing failure.

As a result, in the peripheral control unit steady processing this time, if the processing cannot be completed in about 33.3 ms and the processing fails, the next time is determined in step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 143. It is in a state of waiting until the V blank signal of is input. That is, the time for executing the current peripheral control unit steady processing that has failed the processing is about 66.6 ms. Normally, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is repeatedly executed every time the 1ms interrupt timer is activated by starting the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady processing) in FIG. 143. Is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit steady processing, but if the above-mentioned processing failure this time peripheral control unit steady processing exists, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is 64 times. It is designed to be executed only 32 times. That is, even if the peripheral control unit steady processing fails, the consistency between the production progress state by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the production progress state by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which is the timer interrupt control, is consistent. It is designed not to collapse. Therefore, even if the peripheral control unit steady processing fails, the progress state of the effect can be reliably matched.

[15-1-3. Peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing that is repeatedly executed every time the 1ms interrupt timer is generated by the activation of the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 143 will be described. .. When the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. 100 has whether or not the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 times, as shown in FIG. 145. Is determined (step S1100). As described above, the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is determined by the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. It is a counter that counts the number of times that a certain peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed. In the present embodiment, as the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is set to approximately 30 fps per second as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is input is approximately 33. It is .3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, since the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the next peripheral control unit steady process is executed. Is executed, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed only 32 times. Specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing, the first 1 ms timer interrupt is generated first, the second, ..., And the 32nd 1 ms timer interrupt is sequentially performed. It will occur.

When the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than 33 times in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started, this routine is terminated as it is. When the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the generation of the next V blank signal, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing has the peripheral control unit V as the priority of the interrupt processing. Although it is set higher than the blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in the present embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 4140, when the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the generation of the next V blank signal, , The start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled in order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing. Then, after the 1ms interrupt timer is restarted in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing due to the generation of the first 1ms timer interrupt is newly started. ing.

On the other hand, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 in step S1100, a value 1 is added (incremented, step S1102) to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN. By adding the value 1 to the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1ms interrupt timer is activated in the 1ms interrupt timer activation processing of step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 143. The number of times the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, is executed is increased by one time.

Following step S1102, a motor and solenoid drive process is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive process, they are arranged in a time series constituting the electrical drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae of the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the external peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. Among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as the motor and the solenoid, the electric drive sources such as the motor and the solenoid of the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 and the motor drive board 4180 shown in FIG. 100 according to the drive data indicated by the pointer. The pointer is updated to the next drive data specified in time series, and the pointer is updated each time the motor and solenoid drive process is executed.

Specifically, in the motor and solenoid drive processing, the DMA serial continuous transmission process to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 is performed. Here, the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. 101 is used to continuously transmit the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor. When continuous transmission of the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor is started, first, the electrical drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae of the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the external peripheral control RAM 4150c is input. Of the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in the time series, the drive signal to the dial drive motor 414 of the operation unit 400 shown in FIG. 43 is based on the drive data indicated by the pointer. The door-side motor drive data STM-DAT for outputting is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and is created, and the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. The frame is set in the transmission data storage area 4150 caf for the motor on the board side of the decorative drive amplifier. The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a specifies the transmission of the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor as a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and stores the transmission data for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor. The first byte of the door-side motor drive data STM-DAT stored at the start address of the region 4150 caf is sent to the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor via the external bus 4150h, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai. Transfer to the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port for writing. As a result, the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor transfers the written transmission buffer register data to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the door side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK to transmit the transmission shift register. 1 byte of data is started to be transmitted bit by bit. The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac triggers each time a transmission interrupt request for the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor is generated (in this embodiment, the serial I / O for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor). The 1-byte data written in the transmission buffer register of the port is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register is empty when the 1-byte data is exhausted.), Peripheral control CPU core 4150aa When the bus is not used, the remaining door-side motor drive data STM-DAT stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side motor transmission data storage area 4150 buffer is stored byte by byte, external bus 4150h, peripheral control bus controller. The serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor is written by transferring to the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor via the 4150ad and the peripheral bus 4150ai. The data of the transmitted buffer register is transferred to the transmission shift register, and 1 byte of data of the transmission shift register is started to be transmitted bit by bit in synchronization with the door side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK, and the frame decoration drive amplifier board is used. Continuous transmission is performed by the serial I / O port for the motor.

Further, in the motor and solenoid drive processing, the DMA serial continuous transmission process to the motor drive board 4180 is performed. Here, too, the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. 101 is used to continuously transmit the serial I / O ports for the motor drive board. When the continuous transmission of the serial I / O port for the motor drive board is started, first, when configuring the electrical drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae of the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the external peripheral control RAM 4150c. Motors for moving various movable bodies provided on the game board 4 shown in FIG. 95 based on the drive data instructed by the pointer among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in series. The game board side motor drive data SM-DAT for outputting the drive signal to the or solenoid is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and is also shown in the figure. The peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in 101 is set in the transmission data storage area 4150 cg on the motor drive board side. Then, the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a specifies the transmission of the serial I / O port for the motor drive board as the requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and stores it in the start address of the transmission data storage area 4150 cg on the motor drive board side. The first byte of the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is sent to the transmission buffer of the serial I / O port for the motor drive board via the external bus 4150h, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai. Transfer to register and write. As a result, the serial I / O port for the motor drive board transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the game board side motor drive clock signal SM-CLK to be one of the transmission shift registers. Transmission of byte data is started bit by bit. The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac triggers each time a transmission interrupt request for the serial I / O port for the motor drive board is generated (in the present embodiment, the transmission buffer register for the serial I / O port for the motor drive board is used). The written 1-byte data is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register runs out of 1-byte data and becomes empty.) The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa is using the bus. If not, the remaining game board side motor drive data SM-DAT stored in the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150 cag is sent byte by byte via the external bus 4150h, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai. By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port for the motor drive board, the serial I / O port for the motor drive board transfers the data of the written transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register. In synchronization with the game board side motor drive clock signal SM-CLK, 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started to be transmitted bit by bit, and continuous transmission is performed by the serial I / O port for the motor drive board.

Following step S1104, the movable body information acquisition process is performed (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition process, history information of detection signals from various detection switches (for example, in-situ history information) is determined by determining whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided on the game board 4 are input. , Movable position history information, etc.) is created and set in the movable body information acquisition storage area 4150cah of the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the external peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. 101. From the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches set in the movable body information acquisition storage area 4150cah, the original position, the movable position, and the like of the various movable bodies provided on the game board 4 can be acquired.

Following step S1106, the operation unit information acquisition process is performed (step S1108). In this operation unit information acquisition process, the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches is determined by determining whether or not the detection signals from the various detection switches provided in the operation unit 400 shown in FIG. 43 are input. For example, the rotation (rotation direction) history information of the dial operation unit 401, the operation history information of the pressing operation unit 405, etc.) are created, and the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the external peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. Set in the unit information acquisition storage area 4150 kai. From the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches set in the operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150 kai, the rotation direction of the dial operation unit 401 and the operation presence / absence of the pressing operation unit 405 can be acquired.

Following step S1108, a backup process is performed (step S1110), and this routine is terminated. In this backup process, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the external peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. 101 are copied to the backup first area 4150 cc and the backup second area 4150 cc, respectively, and backed up. At the same time, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the external peripheral control SRAM 4150d are copied and backed up in the backup first area 4150db and the backup second area 4150dc, respectively.

Specifically, in the backup process, for the peripheral control RAM 4150c, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which is the present routine, is executed every time the 1 ms interrupt timer is generated in the backup target work area 4150ca shown in FIG. Each time it is backed up, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150 caf, motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150 cag, and movable body information acquisition storage area 4150 cah included in the backup target Bank0 (1 ms). , And the effect information (1 ms) stored in the operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150 kai is used as the effect backup information (1 ms), and peripheral control is performed on Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (1 ms) of the backup first area 4150 cc. The DMA controller 4150ac copies at high speed, and the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies at high speed to Bank 3 (1 ms) and Bank 4 (1 ms) in the backup second area 4150 cc.

To briefly explain the high-speed copy of the contents stored in Bank 0 (1 ms) by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. 101 is a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac. Specify a copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) to Bank1 (1ms) of the backup first area 4150cc, and change the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (1ms) to the end address of Bank0 (1ms). All the stored contents are continuously copied in order from the start address of Bank 1 (1 ms) of the backup first area 4150 kb by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte), and the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa is the peripheral control DMA controller. Specify a copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) as the request factor of 4150ac to Bank2 (1ms) of the backup first area 4150cc, and Bank0 (1ms) from the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (1ms). ), The contents stored in the terminal address of) are continuously copied in order from the start address of Bank 2 (1 ms) in the backup first area 4150 kb by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte). Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa specifies a copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) as a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac to Bank3 (1ms) of the backup second area 4150cc, and specifies Bank0 (1ms). ) From the content stored in the start address to the content stored in the end address of Bank0 (1ms), the start address of Bank3 (1ms) in the second area 4150cc is continuously backed up by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte). Copy everything in order from, and specify that the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa copies the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) as a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac to Bank4 (1ms) of the backup second area 4150cc. Then, from the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (1 ms) to the contents stored in the end address of Bank0 (1 ms), a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) is continuously backed up in Bank 4 of the second area 4150 cc. Copy everything in order from the start address of 1ms).

As described above, in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, various processes related to the effect of steps S1104 to S1108 described above are executed as the progress of the effect within the period of 1 ms. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady processing in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 143, various processes related to the production of steps S1012 to S1032 described above are executed as the progress of the production within a period of about 33.3 ms. doing. In the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, when the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started. Since this routine is terminated as it is, even if the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the generation of the next V blank signal, the peripheral control unit due to this 33rd 1ms timer interrupt Peripheral control by forcibly canceling the start of the 1 ms timer interrupt process, restarting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process due to the generation of the V blank signal, and then newly generating the 1 ms timer interrupt. Part 1ms timer interrupt processing is started. That is, the consistency between the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which is the timer interrupt control, is not broken. Therefore, the progress state of the production can be surely matched. Further, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies slightly depending on the liquid crystal size of the liquid crystal display device 1900, and in the manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 4140 on which the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the sound source built-in VDP 4160a are mounted. However, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may change slightly. In the present embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 4140, if the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the generation of the next V blank signal, peripheral control is performed. In order to execute the part V blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. That is, in the present embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes slightly, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. It is possible to absorb the time lag due to a slight change in the interval at which the V blank signal is output.

[15-1-4. Peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing]
Next, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing for receiving various commands from the main control board 4100 will be described. When various commands from the main control board 4100 are started to be transmitted as serial data, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. 100 triggers the main control to incorporate the main peripheral serial data into the peripheral control MPU 4150a. 1 byte (8 bits) of information is fetched into the reception buffer by the serial I / O port for the board, and when this fetching is completed, an interrupt is generated with this as a trigger, and peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is performed. In the main peripheral serial data, one packet is composed of 3 bytes, the status is assigned as the 1st byte, the mode is assigned as the 2nd byte, and the status and mode are regarded as numerical values as the 3rd byte, and the total is The calculated sum value is assigned.

When the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 determines whether or not the 1-byte reception period timer has timed out, as shown in FIG. 146 (step S1200). This 1-byte reception period timer sets a period during which 1-byte (8-bit) information of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 4100 can be received.

When the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, when 1 byte (8 bits) of information of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 4100 can be received, the periphery The 1-byte information received from the receive buffer of the serial I / O port for the main control board built in the control MPU4150a is taken in (step S1202), and a value 1 is added to the reception counter SRXC (increment, step S1204). This reception counter SRXC is a counter indicating the number of times the data is taken out from the receive buffer, and when the status which is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data is taken out from the receive buffer, the value is 1, and the mode which is the second byte of the main circumference serial data is set. When it is taken out from the receive buffer, it becomes a value 2, and when the sum value which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data is taken out from the receive buffer, it becomes a value 3. The initial value 0 of the reception counter SRXC is set when the power is turned on or the like.

Following step S1204, it is determined whether or not the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3, that is, whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data, has been fetched from the reception buffer (step S1206). In this determination, following the status that is the first byte of the main circumference serial data, the mode that is the second byte of the main circumference serial data, and the sum value that is the third byte of the main circumference serial data are sequentially input from the receive buffer. It is determined whether or not it has been taken out.

In step S1206, when the reception counter SRXC is not a value 3, that is, following the status which is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, the mode which is still the second byte of the main peripheral serial data, and the third byte of the main peripheral serial data. When the sum values are not sequentially fetched from the receive buffer, the 1-byte reception period timer is set (step S1208), and this routine is terminated. By setting the 1-byte reception period timer in step S1208, the mode in which the second byte of the main cycle serial data or the sum value which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data can be received is set.

On the other hand, when the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3 in step S1206, that is, the status which is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, the mode which is the second byte of the main peripheral serial data, and 3 of the main peripheral serial data When the sum value, which is the byte th, is sequentially taken out from the reception buffer, the initial value 0 is set in the reception counter SRXC (step S1210), and the sum value is calculated (step S1212). In this calculation, the status which is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data and the mode which is the second byte of the main peripheral serial data already taken out from the receive buffer in step S1202 are regarded as numerical values, and the total (sum value). ) Is calculated.

Following step S1212, it is determined whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already fetched from the receive buffer in step S1202, and the sum value calculated in step S1212 match (step). S1214). The thumb value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already taken out from the receive buffer in step S1202, is the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main peripheral serial data among the main peripheral serial data from the main control board 4100. Therefore, it should match the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, in the pachinko game machine 1, game balls are supplied from the pachinko island equipment, and when the game balls rub against each other and become charged, they are electrostatically discharged to generate noise. Therefore, the pachinko game machine 1 is affected by noise. It is in a vulnerable environment. Therefore, in the present embodiment, on the peripheral control unit 4150 side, the status allocated as the first byte of the received main peripheral serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main peripheral serial data are regarded as numerical values. The total (sum value) is calculated, and whether the calculated sum value matches the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main circumference serial data in the main circumference serial data from the main control board 4100. It is judged whether or not. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines whether or not the main peripheral serial data has changed to the main peripheral serial data different from the normal due to the influence of noise between the substrates of the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4140. be able to.

In step S1214, when the sum value which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already taken out from the receive buffer in step S1202 and the sum value calculated in step S1212 match, the received main peripheral serial data is received. The status allocated as the first byte of the above and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main peripheral serial data are shown in FIG. 101, and the reception command storage area 4150cc of the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the external peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. (Step S1216), and the routine ends. This reception command storage area 4150cc is used as a ring buffer, and the status allocated as the first byte of the main circumference serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main circumference serial data are the reception command storage area. It is stored in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer of 4150 cc. This "peripheral control unit receive ring buffer" is a buffer used so that the end and the beginning of the buffer are connected. Data is stored sequentially from the beginning of the buffer, and when the end of the buffer is reached, it returns to the beginning. Remember. The peripheral control MPU4150a is allocated as the status allocated as the first byte of the main peripheral serial data received when stored in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer in step S1216 and as the second byte of the main peripheral serial data. The mode is stored in association with the above mode, and the sum value allocated as the third byte is discarded.

On the other hand, when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, the period during which 1 byte (8 bits) of information of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 4100 can be received has been exceeded. Occasionally, or in step S1214, if the sum value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already fetched from the receive buffer in step S1202, and the sum value calculated in step S1212 do not match, this routine is used as it is. finish.

[15-1-5. Peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process, which is executed when the power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b of the payout control board 4110 is input via the main control board 4100, as shown in FIG. 102, will be described. To do. When the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. 100 first activates a 2-microsecond timer (step S1300), and a power failure warning signal is input. Whether or not it is determined (step S1302). If no power failure warning signal is input in this determination, this routine is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is input in step S1302, it is determined whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed (step S1304). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the timer started in step S1300 has elapsed 2 microseconds. When 2 macro seconds have not elapsed in step S1304, the process returns to step S1302 to determine whether or not the power failure warning signal has been input, and when the power failure warning signal has not been input, this routine is terminated as it is, while the power failure warning is terminated. When the signal is input, it is determined again in step S1304 whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed. That is, in the determination in step S1304, it is determined whether or not the power failure warning signal is continuously input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing, which is the routine, is started.

When the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process, which is the routine, is started in step S1304 and the power failure warning signal is continuously input for 2 microseconds, power saving processing is performed (step S1306). In this power saving process, the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned off, the motor and solenoid provided on the game board 4 are turned off, the various LEDs are turned off, and the like, so that the power consumption of the entire system of the pachinko game machine 1 is consumed. By suppressing the above, stable operation is ensured for a period of 20 milliseconds, which is the time during which the peripheral control MPU 4150a can operate even if the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off.

Following step S1306, command reception standby processing is performed (step S1308). In this command reception standby process, assuming that there are various commands being transmitted by the main control board 4100, the peripheral control MPU4150a can receive the commands being transmitted for a period of at least 17 milliseconds. It is supposed to wait. When the command is received, the above-mentioned peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is started, and the reception command storage area 4150cc (peripheral control unit reception ring buffer) of the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the external peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. 101 is started. The received command is stored in).

Following step S1308, command backup processing is performed (step S1310). In the backup process of this command, the contents stored in the reception command storage area 4150ca included in the Bank0 (1fr) in the backup target work area 4150ca shown in FIG. The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies to Bank2 (1fr) at high speed, and the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies to Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150cc at high speed.

The high-speed copy of the contents stored in the received command storage area 4150cc included in Bank0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control MPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. As a requirement factor of the control DMA controller 4150ac, specify a copy of the contents stored in the reception command storage area 4150cc included in Bank0 (1fr) to the reception command storage area included in Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 4150cc. Then, a predetermined byte (for example,) from the content stored in the start address of the reception command storage area 4150cc included in Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored in the end address of the reception command storage area 4150cc included in Bank0 (1fr). 1 byte) in succession Copy all in order from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank 1 (1fr) of the first area 4150 kb, and the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa is a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac. Specify a copy of the contents stored in the reception command storage area 4150cc included in Bank0 (1fr) to the reception command storage area included in Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 4150cc, and set it to Bank0 (1fr). From the content stored in the start address of the received command storage area 4150cc included to the content stored in the end address of the received command storage area 4150cc included in Bank0 (1fr), a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) is consecutive. Then, all copies are made in order from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank 2 (1fr) of the backup first area 4150 kb. Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa includes the contents stored in the reception command storage area 4150cc included in the Bank0 (1fr) as a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac in the Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150cc. Specify the copy to the received command storage area to be stored, and store the contents stored in the start address of the received command storage area 4150cc included in Bank0 (1fr) in the terminal address of the received command storage area 4150cc included in Bank0 (1fr). The contents are copied continuously by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) in order from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank 3 (1fr) of the second area 4150 cc, and the peripheral control MPU core. The contents stored in the receive command storage area 4150 cc included in Bank 0 (1fr) as a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150 a are transferred to the receive command storage area included in Bank 4 (1 fr) of the backup second area 4150 cc. Specify a copy and specify the contents stored in the start address of the receive command storage area 4150cc included in Bank0 (1fr) to the contents stored in the end address of the receive command storage area 4150cc included in Bank0 (1fr). All the bytes (for example, 1 byte) are continuously copied from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank 4 (1fr) of the second area 4150 cc.

Following step S1310, it is determined whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S1312). When the power failure warning signal is input in this determination, the WDT clear process is performed (step S1314). In this WDT clear process, the peripheral control MPU4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT4150af shown in FIG. 101 and the peripheral control external WDT4150e shown in FIG. 100 so that the peripheral control MPU4150a is not reset. ..

On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is not input in step S1312, or after step S1314, the process returns to step S1312 again to determine whether or not the power failure warning signal is input. That is, it is infinitely determined whether or not the power failure warning signal is input. By continuing the determination infinitely in this way, when the power failure warning signal is not input in step S1312, the peripheral control MPU4150a can output a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT4150af and the peripheral control external WDT4150e. The peripheral control MPU4150a is reset, while the peripheral control MPU4150a is not reset when the power failure warning signal is input in step S1312 by performing the WDT clear process in step S1314. When the peripheral control MPU4150a is reset, the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 143 is restarted.

In this way, when the input of the power failure warning signal continues in the infinite loop according to the determination in step S1312, the peripheral control MPU4150a is not reset immediately before the power failure state due to the WDT clear processing being executed in step S1314. It has become. On the other hand, if the input of the power failure warning signal is not continued and canceled in the infinite loop in the determination in step S1312, the WDT clear process is not executed, so that the peripheral control built-in WDT4150af and the peripheral control external WDT4150e are displayed. The output of the clear signal is interrupted. As a result, even if the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process, which is this routine, is erroneously started due to noise or the like, and the noise occurs beyond the period of 2 microseconds, the determination in step S1302 is passed. If the input of the power failure warning signal is not continued and is canceled in the infinite loop by the determination in S1312, the peripheral control MPU4150a is reset because the WDT clear process in step S1314 is not executed. It is possible to deal with such noise by automatically resetting and returning.

[15-1-6. Rotation detection switch history creation process]
Next, the rotation detection switch history creation process executed as one of the operation unit information acquisition processes in step S1108 in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 145 will be described. This rotation detection switch history creation process creates a history of detection signals from the pair of rotation detection switches 432a and 432b that detect the rotation of the dial operation unit 401, respectively, as shown in FIG. 43.

When the rotation detection switch history creation process is started, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. 100 is externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. 101 as shown in FIG. The rotation detection switch detection history information DSW0-HIST and DSW1-HIST are read from the operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150 kai of the RAM 4150c (step S1400). The rotation detection switch detection history information DSW0-HIST and DSW1-HIST are each 1 byte (8 bits: most significant bit B7, B6, B5, B4, B3, B2, B1, least significant bit B0, "B" is a bit. The history of the detection signal from the rotation detection switch 432a is stored in the operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150kai as the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW0-HIST, and the rotation detection switch 432b has a storage capacity of (1). The history of the detection signal of is stored in the operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150 kai as the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW1-HIST.

Following step S1400, it is determined whether or not there is a detection signal from the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b (step S1402). In this determination, when there is a detection signal from the rotation detection switch 432a, among the plurality of rotation detection pieces 410c shown in FIG. 44, which are arranged in a row at the driven gear 410 connected to the dial operation unit 401 at regular intervals. One rotation detection piece determines that the optical axis of the rotation detection switch 432a has transitioned from the non-blocking state to the blocking state, while when there is no detection signal from the rotation detection switch 432a, one rotation detection piece rotates. It is determined that the optical axis of the detection switch 432a has transitioned from the blocked state to the non-blocked state. Further, when there is a detection signal from the rotation detection switch 432b, one rotation detection piece determines that the optical axis of the rotation detection switch 432b has transitioned from the non-blocking state to the blocking state, while the rotation detection switch 432b When there is no detection signal of, one rotation detection piece determines that the optical axis of the rotation detection switch 432b has changed from the cutoff state to the non-cutoff state.

When there is a detection signal from the rotation detection switch 432a in step S1402, or when there is a detection signal from the rotation detection switch 432b, the rotation detection switch detection history information is shifted (step S1404). In this shift process of the rotation detection switch detection history information, when there is a detection signal from the rotation detection switch 432a, the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW0-HIST read in step S1400 is used as the most significant bit B7 ← B6, B6 ← B5. , B5 ← B4, B4 ← B3, B3 ← B2, B2 ← B1, B1 ← least significant bit B0, and so on, shifting from the least significant bit B0 to the most significant bit B7 by one bit, while the rotation detection switch 432b When there is a detection signal from, the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW1-HIST read in step S1400 is converted to the most significant bit B7 ← B6, B6 ← B5, B5 ← B4, B4 ← B3, B3 ← B2, B2 ← B1. , B1 ← least significant bit B0, and so on, shifting from the least significant bit B0 to the most significant bit B7 one bit at a time.

When the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW0-HIST is shifted in step S1404, the value 1 is set in the least significant bit B0 of the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW0-HIST, while the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW1-HIST is set. When shifting is performed, the value 1 is set in the least significant bit B0 of the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW1-HIST (step S1406), and this routine is terminated.

On the other hand, when there is no detection signal from the rotation detection switch 432a in step S1402, or when there is no detection signal from the rotation detection switch 432b, the rotation detection switch detection history information is shifted (step S1408). In the shift processing of the rotation detection switch detection history information, the same processing as the shift processing of the rotation detection switch detection history information in step S1404 is performed, and when there is no detection signal from the rotation detection switch 432a, the rotation detection read in step S1400 is performed. Switch detection history information DSW0-HIST is the most significant bit B7 ← B6, B6 ← B5, B5 ← B4, B4 ← B3, B3 ← B2, B2 ← B1, B1 ← least significant bit B0, and so on. When there is no detection signal from the rotation detection switch 432b while shifting from the most significant bit B7 to the most significant bit B7, the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW1-HIST read in step S1400 is used as the most significant bit B7 ← B6. B6 ← B5, B5 ← B4, B4 ← B3, B3 ← B2, B2 ← B1, B1 ← least significant bit B0, and so on, shifting from the least significant bit B0 to the most significant bit B7 one bit at a time.

When the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW0-HIST is shifted in step S1408, the value 0 is set in the least significant bit B0 of the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW0-HIST, while the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW1-HIST is set. When shifting is performed, the value 0 is set in the least significant bit B0 of the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW1-HIST (step S1410), and this routine is terminated.

In this way, each time the rotation detection switch history creation process is executed, the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW0-HIST and DSW1-HIST are shifted one bit at a time from the least significant bit B0 to the most significant bit B7. Since the value 1 or the value 0 is set in the least significant bit B0, the history of the detection signals from the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b can be created.

Next, from the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW0-HIST and DSW1-HIST described above, is the dial operation unit 401 stopped (in other words, the dial drive motor 414 is out of step). A method for determining whether the device is rotating clockwise or counterclockwise will be described with reference to FIGS. 149 to 151. FIG. 149 is an explanatory diagram showing the positional relationship between the rotation detection piece of the driven gear and the pair of rotation detection switches due to the clockwise rotation of the dial operation unit in the rotation operation unit, and FIG. 150 is the dial operation unit in the rotation operation unit. FIG. 151 (A) is an explanatory view showing the positional relationship between the rotation detection piece of the driven gear and the pair of rotation detection switches due to the counterclockwise rotation of the above, and FIG. 151 (A) shows the clockwise rotation of the dial operation unit in the rotation operation unit. FIG. 151 (B) is a list diagram showing ON / OFF of the pair of rotation detection switches accompanying, and FIG. 151 (B) is a list diagram showing ON / OFF of the pair of rotation detection switches accompanying the rotation of the dial operation unit in the counterclockwise direction. is there.

As described above, the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW0-HIST and DSW1-HIST are 1 byte (8 bits: most significant bit B7, B6, B5, B4, B3, B2, B1, least significant bit B0, respectively. "B" represents a bit.), And the history of the detection signal from the rotation detection switch 432a is externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. 101 as the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW0-HIST. The operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150kai of the peripheral control RAM 4150c is stored, and the history of the detection signal from the rotation detection switch 432b is stored in the operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150kai of the peripheral control RAM 4150c as the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW1-HIST. It is remembered. Therefore, whether the dial operation unit 401 is stopped (in other words, the dial drive motor 414 is out of step), is rotating clockwise, or is counterclockwise. When determining whether or not the vehicle is rotating in the direction, the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW0-HIST and DSW1-HIST are read from the operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150 kai, and whether they match the detection determination value. It depends on whether or not. This detection determination value is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 4150b shown in FIG. 100, and is copied to various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. 101 when the power is turned on. Is read and used. The data preset as the detection determination value is "000011111B (" B "represents a bit)", the upper 4 bits B7 to B4 have a value of 0, and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 have a value of 1. ing. That is, this determination is performed depending on whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW0-HIST and DSW1-HIST and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the detection determination value match.

Specifically, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW0-HIST have a value of 1, the rotation detection switch 432a is set to the dial operation unit 401 by generating four 1 ms timer interrupts. It means that the rotation detection piece 410c of the driven gear 410 that rotates integrally with is detected, and when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW1-HIST have a value of 1, 4 times 1 ms. This means that the rotation detection switch 432b has detected the rotation detection piece 410c of the driven gear 410 that rotates integrally with the dial operation unit 401 following the occurrence of the timer interrupt.

Next, the detection of the rotation direction of the dial operation unit 401 will be described. As described above, the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b detect the rotation direction of the dial operation unit 401 by detecting the rotation detection piece 410c of the driven gear 410 that rotates integrally with the dial operation unit 401. ing. In addition, in FIGS. 149 to 151, the rotation detection switch 432a is described as "A", and the rotation detection switch 432b is described as "B". Further, steps 1 to 4 shown below refer to four types of rotation positions of the dial operation unit 401 with reference to the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b, respectively, and when the dial operation unit 401 rotates, step 1 , Step 2, step 3, and step 4, the rotation position shifts in sequence, and after shifting to step 4, the process returns to step 1.

When the dial operation unit 401 rotates clockwise, as shown in FIG. 149, as step 1, the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b detect the rotation detection piece 410c of the driven gear 410, and then the dial operation unit 401 of the dial operation unit 401. Due to the transition to step 2 accompanying the rotation in the clockwise direction, the rotation detection switch 432a detects the rotation detection piece 410c, while the slit 410d of the driven gear 410 moves to the rotation detection switch 432b and the rotation detection switch 432b detects the rotation. The process proceeds to the step where the piece 410c is not detected. After that, due to the transition to step 3 accompanying the clockwise rotation of the dial operation unit 401, the slit 410d of the driven gear 410 moves to the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b, and the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b both rotate detection pieces. The step proceeds to the step where 410c is not detected. Then, due to the transition to step 4 accompanying the clockwise rotation of the dial operation unit 401, the slit 410d of the driven gear 410 moves to the rotation detection switch 432a, and the rotation detection switch 432a does not detect the rotation detection piece 410c. The rotation detection switch 432b shifts to the step of detecting the rotation detection piece 410c.

On the other hand, when the dial operation unit 401 rotates counterclockwise, as shown in FIG. 150, as step 1, both rotation detection switches 432a and 432b detect the rotation detection piece 410c of the driven gear 410, and then, as shown in FIG. Due to the transition to step 2 accompanying the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 in the counterclockwise direction, the slit 410d of the driven gear 410 moves to the rotation detection switch 432a, and the rotation detection switch 432a does not detect the rotation detection piece 410c, while rotating. The detection switch 432b shifts to the step of detecting the rotation detection piece 410c. After that, due to the transition to step 3 accompanying the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 in the counterclockwise direction, the slit 410d of the driven gear 410 moves to the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b, and the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b both detect rotation. The step proceeds to the step where the piece 410c is not detected. Then, due to the transition to step 4 accompanying the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 in the counterclockwise direction, the rotation detection switch 432a detects the rotation detection piece 410c, while the slit 410d of the driven gear 410 moves to the rotation detection switch 432b. The rotation detection switch 432b shifts to the step of not detecting the rotation detection piece 410c.

That is, the ON (with detection of rotation detection piece 410c) / OFF (without detection of rotation detection piece 410c) operation of the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b when the dial operation unit 401 rotates clockwise is shown in FIG. 151 (A). As shown in the above, the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b are both “ON” in step 1, and the rotation detection switch 432a continues to be “ON” in step 2, while the rotation detection switch 432b is “OFF”. After that, after the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b are both turned “OFF” in step 3, the rotation detection switch 432a continues to be “OFF” in step 4, while the rotation detection switch 432b is turned “ON”. After that, the process returns to step 1 again, and the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b are both turned “ON”.

On the other hand, the ON / OFF operation of the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b when the dial operation unit 401 rotates counterclockwise is such that the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b are both set in step 1 as shown in FIG. 151 (B). It is "ON", and the rotation detection switch 432b continues to be "ON" in step 2, while the rotation detection switch 432a is "OFF". Then, after the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b are both turned “OFF” in step 3, the rotation detection switch 432b continues to be “OFF” in step 4, while the rotation detection switch 432a is turned “ON”. After that, the process returns to step 1 again, and the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b are both turned “ON”.

When the dial operation unit 401 does not rotate clockwise or counterclockwise and stops, the detection from the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b does not change. Therefore, the rotation detection switch in steps 1 to 4. There is no switching of ON / OFF operation by 432a and 432b.

As described above, the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b can detect the rotation direction of the dial operation unit 401 based on ON / OFF in each of the above-mentioned steps 1 to 4. When the dial operation unit 401 is operated by the player's operation, it is detected that the dial operation unit 401 has been rotated by detecting the ON / OFF state switching of the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b. It is possible to grasp the rotation direction, and it is possible to grasp that the dial operation unit 401 is in the stopped state by detecting that the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b are not switched in the ON / OFF state at all. Can be done.

Further, in the peripheral control MPU4150a, when the dial operation unit 401 is being rotated clockwise or counterclockwise, the player presses the dial operation unit 401 with a finger or the palm of the hand to hold the dial operation unit 401. When the rotation of the 401 is forcibly stopped, the dial operation unit 401 is rotated clockwise or counterclockwise by detecting that the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b are not switched in the ON / OFF state at all. It is possible to grasp that the dial drive motor 414, which is a stepping motor, is out of step.

[16. Direction]
Next, the effect displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 will be briefly described. The effect displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is executed by the peripheral control unit steady processing in steps S1009 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 143. FIG. 154 is a diagram showing an example of the effect, and FIG. 155 is a diagram showing an example of a continuation of the effect of FIG. 154. The result of the first special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball to the upper starting port 2101 shown in FIG. 95, or the result of the second special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball to the lower starting port 2102 shown in FIG. 95. When is a "big hit", in the present embodiment, a big hit gaming state occurs in which the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening and closing operation of the big winning opening 2103 shown in FIG. 95 is a total of 15 rounds from 1 round to 15 rounds. It has become like. In each round, when a game ball enters the large winning opening 2103 within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) and the number of balls reaches a predetermined number (for example, 7 balls), the round is digested. As a result, a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of game balls are paid out every time one game ball enters the large winning opening 2103.

The result of the first special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball to the upper starting port 2101 or the result of the second special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball to the lower starting port 2102 shown in FIG. 95 is the main control board. By controlling the liquid crystal and the sound control unit 4160 by the peripheral control unit 4150 of the peripheral control board 4140 based on the command from the 4100, as shown in FIG. 154 (a), on the left side of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900. The decorative symbol 1900a, the decorative symbol 1900b in the center, and the decorative symbol 1900c on the right side are started, and after a predetermined time has passed, the variable display of the decorative symbols 1900a to 1900c is stopped and the first special lottery result or the first special lottery result or the first. (Ii) The player can recognize the result of the special lottery (the first special symbol displayed on the upper special symbol display 1185 or the lower special symbol display 1186 of the function display unit 1180 shown in FIG. 95). Alternatively, the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery can be confirmed also in the second special symbol). The decorative symbols 1900a to 1900c are translucent to the extent that the background image can be visually recognized, the decorative symbols 1900a are from the upper left side to the lower left side of the display area, and the decorative symbols 1900b are from the upper center side to the lower center side of the display area. The decorative symbol 1900c is varied and displayed as if the reels are rotating from the upper right side to the lower right side of the display area.

When the variable display of the decorative symbols 1900a to 1900c is started, the variable display of the decorative symbols 1900a and 1900c is stopped at the same decorative symbol after a predetermined time has elapsed, and a reach is formed, as shown in FIG. 154 (b). A message MGA stating "Strike the pressing operation unit repeatedly to draw a big hit!" Is displayed in the center of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900, and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 shown in FIG. 41. The button switch BTN imitating the above is displayed at the lower center of the display area. Upon seeing this message MGA, the player repeatedly hits the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400. Then, as shown in FIG. 154 (c), a message MGB is displayed in the center of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 to convey that "press the pressing operation unit a little more repeatedly until the big hit!", And is shown in FIG. 41. A button switch BTN that imitates the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is displayed on the lower center side of the display area. Upon seeing this message MGB, the player performs an operation of repeatedly hitting the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400.

When the variable display of the decorative symbols 1900a to 1900c is stopped and the combination of the stopped and displayed decorative symbols 1900a to 1900c becomes a big hit, as shown in FIG. 155 (d), the "big hit" is used. A message MGC indicating that there is a message is displayed on the upper center of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900, and the probability that the result of this jackpot combination will be a jackpot is set higher than the normal time (low probability). When it is not changed at the time of probability change), a message MGD indicating "Operate the pressing operation unit to aim for probability change promotion!" Is displayed in the center of the display area, and the pressing operation unit of the operation unit 400 shown in FIG. 41 is displayed. The button switch BTN imitating 405 is displayed at the lower center of the display area. When the player sees this message MGD, he / she performs an operation of pressing the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400. In this effect, by having the player operate the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400, the probability of a big hit can be changed to a high probability (probability change) set higher than the normal time (low probability). This is done to give the player an opportunity.

Subsequently, when the jackpot game state is started, a message MGE indicating the number of rounds is displayed on the upper left side of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900. It has become. Then, when the digestion of the round progresses and the ninth round is started, as shown in FIG. 155 (e), a message MGE telling that it is the ninth round is displayed on the upper left side of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900. Displayed, in FIG. 155 (d), if the player is unable to promote the probabilistic change even if the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is pressed, the message MGF telling that the effect of "promotion chance" is executed. Is displayed slightly above the center of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900, and the message MGD that once again conveys the message "Operate the pressing operation unit to aim for probabilistic promotion!" Is displayed in the center of the display area and is shown in FIG. A button switch BTN that imitates the pressing operation unit 405 of the operating unit 400 is displayed on the lower center side of the display area. This promotion chance effect changes the probability of a big hit to a high probability (probability change) set higher than the normal time (low probability) by letting the player operate the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400. Do to give the player another opportunity to be able to.

The main control board 4100 is the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball to the upper starting port 2101 or the second special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball to the lower starting port 2102 shown in FIG. 95. Since it has already been decided whether or not to generate the probability fluctuation based on the special lottery result and the result is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4150 of the peripheral control board 4140, the player actually presses the operation unit 400 of the operation unit 400. The operation of 405 does not cause a probability fluctuation. Further, even if the peripheral control unit 4150 of the peripheral control board 4140 knows that the probability variation is generated by the command from the main control board 4100, it is intentionally used as a combination of decorative symbols 1900a to 1900b to be stopped and displayed. By displaying the combination that does not cause the probability fluctuation and executing the promotion chances shown in FIGS. 155 (d) and 155 (e), the probability fluctuation is triggered by the player pressing the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400. It is designed to control as if it is activating.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the piezoelectric element 425 shown in FIG. 43 is generated to generate electric power by making the player positively press the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400, and the electrolysis shown in FIG. 116 is performed. The capacitor WAC0 is charged. As a result, even if a power outage (a power outage due to an electrical trouble in the pachinko hall where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed or a power outage due to an emergency when a disaster occurs) occurs and the pachinko hall is pitch black. Since the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed adjacent to the pachinko island facility by emitting light from the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 by the voltage charged in the electrolytic capacitor WAC0, the dial operation unit 401 is installed in the event of a power failure. , And the light emission of the pressing operation unit 405 becomes an emergency light, which can be used as a mark for the player to evacuate to the outside of the concourse or the pachinko hall. In other words, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can function as a mark for evacuating the player to the outside of the concourse or the pachinko hall by emitting light as an emergency light in the event of a power failure. There is.

In addition, a power outage (a power outage due to an electrical trouble in the pachinko hall where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed or an emergency occurs) is caused by the player simply operating the pressing operation unit 405 while playing the game. When a power failure occurs and the pachinko hall becomes pitch black, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can generate electric power to emit light as an emergency light in the event of a power failure and charge the electrolytic capacitor WAC0. Therefore, although the player does not notice it, it contributes to evacuating other players to the outside of the concourse or pachinko hall.

According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the main control board 4100 of FIG. 97, the peripheral control board 4140 of FIG. 100, and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 of FIG. 43 are provided. The main control board 4100 controls the progress of the game. The peripheral control board 4140 causes the color LEDs 430b and 432d of the operation unit 400 of FIG. 43, which is a light emitter, to emit light, and the liquid crystal display device 1900 of FIG. 95, based on various commands of FIGS. 118 and 119 from the main control board 4100. Various images are displayed in the display area of the above to control the progress of the effect. The pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 of FIG. 43 can be operated by the player.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment further includes a piezoelectric element 425 of the operation unit 400 of FIG. 43 and an electrolytic capacitor WAC0 of the frame decoration drive amplifier 194 of FIG. 116. The piezoelectric element 425 of the operation unit 400, which is a power generation means, can generate electric power from the impact of the operation when the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated. The electrolytic capacitor WAC0 of the frame decoration drive amplifier 194, which is a power storage means, can charge and discharge the electric power generated by the piezoelectric element 425 of the operation unit 400, which is a power generation means.

The peripheral control board 4140 is a screen that informs the player to operate the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400. The message MGA of FIG. 154 (b), the message MGB of FIG. 154 (c), and the liquid crystal display device. The message MGDs of FIGS. 155 (d) and 155 (e) are displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the 1900 to proceed with the specific effect, and the player proceeds with the specific effect, and the player has the operation unit 400 for the purpose of advancing the specific effect. When the pressing operation unit 405 is operated, the electrolytic capacitor WAC0 of the frame decoration drive amplifier 194, which is a power storage means, can charge the electric power generated by the piezoelectric element 425 of the operation unit 400, which is a power generation means. There is.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a power failure occurs, the electric power charged by the electrolytic capacitor WAC0 of the frame decoration drive amplifier 194, which is a power storage means, is discharged to discharge the electric power charged, and the color LEDs 430b, 432d of the operation unit 400, which is a light emitter. The color LEDs 430b and 432d of the operation unit 400, which is a light emitting body, can be made to emit light by supplying the light.

In this way, an image informing that the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 of the operating unit 400 is urged is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900, and the pressing of the operating unit 400 is intended for the player to proceed with the specific effect. When the operation unit 405 is operated, the electrolytic capacitor WAC0 of the frame decoration drive amplifier 194, which is a power storage means, can charge the electric power generated by the piezoelectric element 425 of the operation unit 400, which is a power generation means. .. As a result, if the pachinko hall in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed loses power due to an electrical trouble, or if a power failure occurs due to an emergency in which a disaster occurs, the pachinko hall becomes pitch black. The electric capacitor WAC0 of the frame decoration drive amplifier 194, which is a means, discharges the charged electric power and supplies it to the color LEDs 430b, 432d of the operation unit 400, which is a light emitter, thereby causing the color LEDs 430b, 432d of the operation unit 400, which is a light emitter. Since it is possible to emit light, when the color LEDs 430b and 432d of the operation unit 400, which is the light emitting body, are turned off and the pachinko hall becomes pitch black, the player is moved out of the concourse or the pachinko hall. It can function as an emergency light as a mark for evacuation. Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present invention can be used as a mark for evacuating the player to the outside of the concourse or the pachinko hall when the pachinko hall becomes pitch black due to a power failure.

[17. Another example]
It goes without saying that the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and can be implemented in various aspects as long as it belongs to the technical scope of the present invention.

For example, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been described as an example, but the gaming machine to which the present invention can be applied is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine, and a gaming machine other than the pachinko gaming machine, for example, a slot machine or It can also be applied to a fusion game machine (a machine that plays a slot game using a game ball) in which a pachinko game machine and a slot machine are fused.

1 ... Pachinko game machine (game machine), 2 ... Outer frame, 3 ... Main body frame, 4 ... Game board, 5 ... Door frame, 130 ... Side speaker, 222 ... Upper right speaker, 262 ... Upper left speaker, 821 ... Lower Speaker, 400 ... Operation unit, 401 ... Dial operation unit, 405 ... Press operation unit, 1100 ... Game area, 1900 ... Liquid crystal display device (effect display means), 2101 ... Upper start port, 2102 ... Lower start port, 4100 ... Main Control board (main control means), 4100a ... Main control MPU, 4110 ... Payout control board, 4110b ... Power failure monitoring circuit, 4140 ... Peripheral control board (effect control means), 4140a ... Volume adjustment volume, 4150 ... Peripheral control unit, 4150c ... Peripheral control RAM, 4160 ... Liquid crystal and sound control unit, 4160a ... Sound source built-in VDP, 4170 ... Lamp drive board, 4180 ... Motor drive board.

Claims (1)

The main control means that controls the progress of the game,
A sound output means for outputting a notification sound for notifying an abnormal state of the game machine and a production sound according to the progress of the game.
A sound control means that controls the sound output from the sound output means based on a command received from the main control means.
A first volume adjusting means capable of adjusting the volume output from the sound output means, and
A second volume adjusting means different from the first volume adjusting means, which can adjust the volume output from the sound output means,
In a game machine equipped with
Of the first volume adjusting means and the second volume adjusting means, the first volume adjusting means is an adjusting means that cannot be operated by the player.
The sound control means has a plurality of sound setting units, and has a plurality of sound setting units.
In the plurality of sound setting units, effect sound data whose volume can be changed according to the operation of the second volume adjusting means and notification sound data whose volume cannot be changed according to the operation of the second volume adjusting means. And are set individually,
A predetermined first volume value corresponding to the operation of the first volume adjusting means is set in the sound setting unit in which the effect sound data is set among the plurality of sound setting units.
A synthesis means for synthesizing sound data set in the plurality of sound setting units and a synthesis volume value setting means for setting a second volume value after being synthesized by the synthesis means are provided.
The first volume value in the sound setting unit can be updated according to the operation of the second volume adjusting means.
When the predetermined initialization condition is satisfied, the updated volume value of the sound setting unit is set as the first volume value corresponding to the operation of the first volume adjusting means.
Output from the sound output means based on the volume set by the synthetic volume value setting means
A game machine characterized by that.